DP c262 SM

Order Number: MGCS050101C0
H21
Digital Imaging Systems

DP-C262/C322
[ Version 1.1 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
© 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is
a violation of law.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit
Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder:
Distinction of PbF PCB:

PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following
the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.
Caution:
Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically
the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron
with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care
while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long
to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB.
Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C).
ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.:
URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.
The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in
the product design without reservation and without notice.
Published in Japan.
2
3
4
5
Unpacking Caution
Do not lift the Paper Transport Unit by the PC Board, as
damage to the PC Board will occur.
Make sure to lift the Paper Transport Unit as shown in the
illustrations below.
Note:
Refer to the Installation Instructions when installing the Unit.
6
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic
machine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine.
Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.
This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must not be performed.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
WARNING
Power and Ground Connection Cautions
Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated
connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually
cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.
Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is
required, always use a properly rated cord.
120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A
If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke or
become hot to the touch.
Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not
place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized
Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric
shocks.
Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or
abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.
Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic
.
dealer.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.
Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and
cause fire.
When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord
forcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.
When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.
If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation
can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.
Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine
for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can cause
electric shock.
7
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual
condition, contact the authorized Panasonic
. dealer
The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.
The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.
The plug and receptacle are free of dust.
The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause
severe burns.
Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or
shock hazard.
Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the
machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.
If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.
Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause
smoke or fire.
Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the
cartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.
Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally,
get medical treatment immediately.
CAUTION
Installation and Relocation Cautions
Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that
may catch fire.
Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to
these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.
Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can with stand.
If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine with proper
packing materials for shipping.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the
power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.
8
CAUTION
Operating Safeguards
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the
machine accidentally, resulting in injuries.
Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.
When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning
glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.
Never touch a labelled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of
paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or
burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When a
paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.
Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or the
heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.
Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize
the ozone density in the air.
When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.
Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury.
Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine.
A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped
around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see,
do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the
machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Consumable Safeguards
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be
hazardous to your health.
Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing a fire or
injuries. Be sure to use the specified type of batteries
. only.
Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can
burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
Others
When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual.
The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning
strikes in your neighborhood, switch Off the machine. Disconnect the power cord from the machine
and reconnect only when the lightning has stopped.
If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may
be causing radio interference. Switch it Off and if the interference disappears, the machine is the
cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.
Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.
Reposition or reorient the machine and the TV and/or radio.
Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits.
Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor
antenna, ask your local electrician for support.
Use a coaxial cable antenna.
9
Table of Contents
Specifications Table .............................. 12 Service Modes ..................................... 241

1.1. Copy Function.........................................12 5.1. Service Modes (For Copier) ................. 241
1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax 5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 302
Functions ................................................21
1.3. System Combination:..............................32 System Description ............................. 334
1.4. Options List.............................................33 6.1. Mechanical Operation .......................... 334
1.5. External View..........................................36 6.2. Inverting Automatic Document
1.6. Control Panel ..........................................40 Feeder (i-ADF) ..................................... 336
1.7. Fans........................................................41 6.3. Printer Mechanism ............................... 338
1.8. Motors.....................................................41 6.4. Printing Process ................................... 344
1.9. Sensors...................................................42 6.5. Glossary of Electrical

Abbreviations ....................................... 352
1.10. Clutches and Switches ...........................43
1.11. PC Board ................................................43 Installation............................................ 373
7.1. Set Up Precautions .............................. 373
Disassembly Instructions ..................... 44
7.2. Unpacking ............................................ 375
2.1. General Disassembly..............................44
7.3. Installation Procedure .......................... 377
2.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................45
7.4. Adjustment ........................................... 386
2.3. Hardware Identification
Template...............................................150
Options and Supplies.......................... 388
Maintenance, Adjustments and 8.1. Installing the Network Scanner/Email
Module (DA-NS320) ............................. 388
Check Points ........................................ 154
8.2. Installing the Network Scanner Module/
3.1. Preventive Maintenance .......................154
Email Module for Document
3.2. Required Tools .....................................155 Distribution System (DA-NS321).......... 390
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points ............156 8.3. Installing the Internet Fax Module
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List .....157 (DA-NF320) ......................................... 392
3.5. Resetting the P/M 8.4. Installing the Fax Communication
(Preventive Maintenance) Counter .......160 Board (DA-FG320) ............................... 395
3.6. Lubrication Point ...................................161 8.5. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit
(DA-HD32) ........................................... 405
3.7. Updating the Firmware .........................162
8.6. Installing the Main Memory 256MB
3.8. Adjusting Copy Quality .........................171
(DA-EMN56)......................................... 410
3.9. Adjusting the Printer Registration,
8.7. Installing the Page Memory 256MB
LSU Image Side to Side,
(DA-PMN56)......................................... 412
Color Registration .................................174
8.8. Installing the Accounting Software
3.10. Calibrating the LCD ..............................175
(DA-WA10) ........................................... 414
3.11. LEDs on the EC PCB............................175
8.9. Installing the Printer Controller
3.12. Adjusting Scanner Skew ......................176 Module (DA-MC320) ........................... 415
8.10. Installing the SD Memory Card
Troubleshooting .................................. 177 (64 MB up to 1 GB) .............................. 422
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........177 8.11. Installing the System Console 1
4.2. Improper LCD Display ..........................178 (DA-DS320) and
System Console 2 (DA-DS321) ........... 424
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems.............179
8.12. Installing the Paper Transport Unit
4.4. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......200
(DA-FK320) .......................................... 429
4.5. Error Codes (For Copier) ......................208
8.13. Installing the Exit Tray (Outer)
4.6. Information Codes Table (DA-XT320) .......................................... 432
(For Facsimile)......................................226
8.14. Installing the 1 Bin Finisher
4.7. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........232 (DA-FS320) .......................................... 434
4.8. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................239
10
Table of Contents
8.15. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Options .................................. 515

Finisher (DA-FS325).............................439
11.1. DA-FS325, DA-SP41 ........................... 515
8.16. Installing the Punch Unit
11.2. DA-FS320 ............................................ 627
(DA-SP41) ............................................446
8.17. Installing the ADF Handle
for Accessibility (DA-UD321) ................453
8.18. Installing the Mechanical Counter
(PJWEF2170PU) ..................................454
8.19. Replacing the OPC Drum .....................456
8.20. Replacing the Toner Waste
Container ..............................................456
General Network Information ............. 457

9.1. Network Protocol ..................................457
9.2. Layer Functions and
Technology ...........................................459
9.3. Network Layer.......................................463
9.4. Transport Layer ....................................467
9.5. Upper Layer ..........................................469
9.6. SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) ............474
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305
(New RFC3965)....................................475
9.8. Communication Protocols.....................481
9.9. POP
(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ...........484
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC...................487
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and
Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) ......488
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) - Extended Feature .................489
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications
(MDN) - Extended Feature ...................492
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................496
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response
Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature ...............................496
9.16. SMTP Service Extension
for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT
9.18. Remote Entry........................................501
9.19. Error Messages Generated during
Remote Entry........................................510
Schematic Diagram ............................. 513

10.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................513
11
DP-C262/C322
1 Specifications Table
1.1. Copy Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Multi Function
1 Copy Function Yes
Std : PCL6
2 Printer Function
Option : PS3
3 Scanner Function Option : Mono / Color Network only
4 Facsimile Function Option : Mono
5 Internet Fax Function Option : Mono
Basic Specifications
1 Type Semi Console
Paper Transport Vertical Paper Path
Paper Feed Position Center
Paper Output Face Down
2 Platen Fixed
Original Platen Left / Rear / Face Down
Position ADF/i-ADF Left / Center / Face Up
3 Copy Process Dry Electrostatic System
4 Copy Resolution 600 dpi
5 Color Mode
Auto Yes
Full Color Yes
2 Color Yes
1 Color Yes
Black Yes
6 Copy Mode
Printed Text Yes
Text
Pencil Text Yes
Photo Paper
Text /
Laser Printed Error Diffusion
Photo
Commercial
Photo Paper Error Diffusion Screen : Service setting
Photo Laser Printed
Error Diffusion
Commercial
Map Yes
Other
Tracing Paper Yes
Types
Newspaper Yes
7 Developing System Dry Dual Component, Trickle
Drum Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
Toner Recycling No
8 Scanning Method 3 Line Color CCD
9 Fusing System Induction Heating (IH) System
Ledger (11 x 17 in) /
10 Max Original Size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
12
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
11 ADF
USA and Canada
LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Paper Capacity (Original) 70 sheets (LTR / A4)
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
Original Exchange Speed
Mono 32 cpm (LTR / A4)
Color 29 cpm (LTR / A4)
Collation Stack Yes
12 Paper Size
LTR For USA and Canada
Paper Tray 1 A4 For EU
A4, B5 For Other Destinations
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
For EU
Paper Tray (2/3/4) A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, FLS
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
12 x 18 in, LDR, LGL, LTR,
For USA and Canada
LTR-R, INV-R
Sheet Bypass For EU
A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5 For Other Destinations
Bypass Envelope Yes
13 Warm-up Time 68 °F (20 °C)
Mono From Platen / Letter / A4
Approx. 15 sec. Portrait / 1st Paper Tray.
Color
Period between Start Key is
14 First Copy Time
pressed and Paper exits to
Mono Approx. 7.3 sec. Approx. 6.2 sec. the Inner tray.
Color Approx. 12 sec. When LSU is ready.
15 Copy Speed
Mono Continuous Copy
Ledger / A3 13 cpm 16 cpm
From Paper Tray (2/3/4), exit
Legal / B4 18 / 17 cpm 22 / 21 cpm
to Tray (Inner/Outer).
Letter-R / A4-R 21 / 20 cpm 26 / 25 cpm
From Paper Tray (1/2/3/4),
Letter / A4 26 cpm 32 cpm
exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).
From Sheet Bypass, exit to
OHP (Letter / A4) 10 cpm 10 cpm
Tray (Inner/Outer).
Color Continuous Copy
Ledger / A3 10 cpm
From Paper Tray (2/3/4), exit
Legal / B4 14 cpm
to Tray (Inner/Outer).
Letter-R / A4-R 17 / 16 cpm
From Paper Tray (1/2/3/4),
Letter / A4 21 cpm
exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).
From Sheet Bypass, exit to
OHP (Letter / A4) 10 cpm
Tray (Inner/Outer).
13
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
16 Tone Scale
Mono 256 steps
Color 256 steps (Each Color)
Auto / Black / Full Color
17 Color Mode Selection
2 Color / 1 Color
18 Color Balance Low / Mid / High
19 Color Tone Adjustment
Lively Yes
Bright Yes
Warmer Yes
Cooler Yes
20 Background Removal Yes
21 Bleed Through Prevention Yes
22 Sharpness
Yes
(Lower <-> Higher)
23 Zoom
Enlargement Selected Original size / Copy size
Reduction Selected Original size / Copy size
Zoom 25 - 400% 1% Step
24 Maximum Tray Capacities
Paper Tray Front Loading USA and Canada
Capacity 550 sheets x 2 LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
4 steps (0% and Less than Other Destinations
Low Level Warning
10%,50%,100%) A4 : 80 g/m2
Sheet Bypass
Capacity 50 sheets LTR : 24 lb / A4 : 90 g/m2
Auto Size Setting Yes
Paper Capacity
(Std. Configuration 1,150 sheets USA and Canada
= Tray 1 + 2 + Sheet Bypass) LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Paper Capacity Other Destinations
(Max. Configuration 2,250 sheets A4 : 80 g/m2
= Std. + Tray 3 + 4)
25 Acceptable Paper Weight
Paper Tray 18-28 lb / 64-105 g/m2
15-40 lb (Glossy)
Sheet Bypass
90-121 lb (Index) / 55-220 g/m2
Duplex 18-28 lb / 64-105 g/m2
26 Multi Copy Range 999 sheets
27 Memory
Main Memory
Std. 256 MB
Max. 512 MB
Page Memory
Std. 256 MB
Max. 640 MB
14
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Sort Memory
Std. 128 MB
Max. 12 GB (HDD Option) DA-HD32
Fax Memory
Std. 3 MB
Max. 64 MB - 1 GB (SD Card)
Hard Disk Unit
Capacity 40 GB (Option) DA-HD32
28 Paper Stack Capacity
Inner Tray LTR : 24 lb / A4 : 90 g/m2
Std. 250 sheets These numbers may vary with
the kind of paper used and/or
With Paper Transport (Opt.) 150 sheets ambient conditions by
detecting Paper Full Sensor.
Outer Tray 250 sheets LTR : 24 lb / A4 : 90 g/m2
Over Flow Sensor Detection Yes
29 Dimensions
25.8 x 32.5 x 36.7 in
(W x D x H) Includes projections
(656 x 825 x 933 mm)
30 Operating Space
83.8 x 32.5 in Includes Sheet Bypass Paper
(W x D)
(946 x 825 mm) Tray
31 Weight
Scanner & i-ADF 85.8 lb (39 kg)
Printer Unit 275 lb (125 kg)
Options
1 Paper Feed System
System Console 1 (Tray 3) Yes
Paper Size Detection Manual (Control Panel) DA-DS320
4 steps (0% and Less than (550 sheets x 1)
Low Level Paper Warning
10%, 50%, 100%)
System Console 2 (Tray 3/4) Yes
Paper Size Detection Manual (Control Panel) DA-DS321
4 steps (0% and Less than (550 sheets x 2)
Low Level Paper Warning
10%, 50%, 100%)
2 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Yes DA-FS325
3 Punch Unit for DA-FS325 Yes DA-SP41
4 1-Bin Finisher Yes DA-FS320
5 Exit Tray (Outer) Yes Not available with Finisher.
Number of Bins 1
Face Up / Face Down Face Down
Bin Capacity 250 sheets LTR / A4
Multi Tray Function Yes 2 way
To be used for Exit Tray
6 Paper Transport Unit Yes
(Outer) and Finisher.
7 Counter
15
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Key Counter Capability No
Supplied as a Service Part for
Mechanical Total Counter Yes
USA and Canada.
8 Memory
Main Memory 256 MB 256 MB x 1
Page Memory 256 MB 128 MB x 2
For 1000 Address, additional
Hard Disk Drive Unit (HDD) 40 GB
Sorting Memory, etc.
Sort Memory
Std. 128 MB
Max. 12 GB (with HDD Option) DA-HD32
For Fax/Internet Fax Memory
& PS3.
SD Memory Card 64 MB - 1 GB
Use Genuine SD Memory
Cards only.
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification Selection Yes
Auto Paper Selection Yes
Auto Paper Tray Selection Yes
Reservation while Power On
Auto Start No
Initializing
Energy Saver
Standby Mode
Power Saving Mode Yes (65 W)
Sleep Mode Yes (25 W) Turns Off the Heater Power
Off Mode Copying No
Requires the Fax
Communication Board
Remote Diagnostic Yes (DA-FG320) option, or the
Internet Fax / E-MAIL Module
(DA-NF320) option.
2 Additional Features
Photo Mode Yes 256 steps
Manually overridden when
Original Detection Release Yes
using the Original Size keys.
Edit / Effects
Book Mode Yes
Edge Mode Yes
Margin Mode Yes
X-Y Zoom Yes 25 - 400%
Stamping
Available only when using the
Page, Date, Issue Yes
ADF.
2-Sided Copy Yes
Inverse Mode (Negative / No
Positive)
Centering Mode Yes With Digital Sky Shot
16
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Mirror Mode No
Max 12 Images with HDD
Image Overlay Yes (1 Image)
Option
Image Repeat Yes
Others (Inverting ADF & ADU)
LDR → LTR x 2
2-Page Copy Mode Yes
(A3 → A4 x 2, B4 → B5 x 2)
2 in 1 Yes
4 in 1 Yes
6 in 1 Yes For USA and Canada
For EU and
8 in 1 Yes
Other Destinations
Copy from four 1-Sided
Booklet Mode Yes pages to 1 Booklet Mode
sheet.
Duplex Copy
1→2 Yes
2→1 Yes
2→2 Yes
Book→2 Yes
1st Page BLANK Yes 1 → 2/2 → 1/2 → 2
1st Page IMAGE Yes Book → 2
Image Rotation (90 or 270 °) Yes
Electronic Sorting Yes
Rotation Sorting Yes
Insertion Job
Cover Mode Yes
Available when using
Page Insertion Mode Yes
the i-ADF.
OHP Interleave Mode Yes
Presentation Mode No
Department Counter Yes 1,000 Departments
ADF
Same Paper Width;
LDR and LTR, LGL and
Multi Size Feed Yes
LTR-R, A3 and A4, B4 and
B5, A4-R and A5
JOB Build and SADF Mode Yes
Original Counter No
Job Memory Yes 10 Jobs in Memory
Job Time Display Yes
Concurrent Copy Yes 12 Concurrent Copy Jobs
Tandem Copy Mode No
Remote Copy Mode No
Scan Once Print Many Mode Yes
Job Completion Notice Yes
Proof Copy Mode Yes
Weekly Timer Yes
17
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Function Mode Yes
Interrupt Yes
Electronic Counter Yes
Digital Sky Shot Mode Yes
Check / Slip Mode Yes
3 Control Panel
Display Color VGA Wide Touch Panel LCD
GREEN : Data & Active
Status Lamp Yes RED/Yellow : Caution &
Warning
Key
Energy Saver Yes
Copy Yes
Fax Yes
Scan / Email Yes
Print Yes
Interrupt Yes
Function Mode Yes
Reset Yes
Keypad Yes
Start Yes
Stop Yes
Clear Yes
Copier / Printer / NW Scanner
Mode Change Yes
/ Fax and Internet Fax Mode
LCD Main Indication
English (American) For USA and Canada
Message Language
(Default) For EU and Other
Specified Language
Destinations
Original Size / Image Yes
Indication (without Image)
Paper Size / Image Yes
Indication (without Image)
Paper Tray Selection Yes
Selected Paper Tray /
Yes
Tray Status
Original Mode Selection Yes Text / Text-Photo / Photo
Copy Density Selection Yes
Setting Confirmation Yes
Function Classification Yes
Zoom Magnification Yes
Number of Copies Yes
JOB Build and SADF / Multi
Yes
Size Feed Mode
Error Code Yes
Finishing Yes
Warning Indicators Yes
18
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Add Toner Yes
Toner Waste Container
Yes
Full
Yes 0% and less than 10%, 50%,
Paper Indicator
100%
Add Paper
No
(Under 50 sheets)
Paper Jam Indication Yes
Paper Jam Location Yes
Service Alert Call Yes
User Error Yes
Machine Error Yes
History of Jam Errors Yes
4 Main Unit
Mechanical Counter:
Total Counter Yes (Electronic) Supplied as a Service Part for
USA and Canada.
Max. Weight of Documents on
11.02 lb (5 kg)
the Platen Glass
ADF with Document Guide Yes
Clip Pocket No
Operating Instructions Pocket No
Warning / Caution Label Specified Language
5 Optical System
Original Detection Method Reflective Photo Sensor Type
Scanning Method 600 dpi CCD
Mechanical Multi Copy Mode No
6 Process System
Toner
Black 28 k Image Coverage 5%, Letter/
Color: C, M, Y 20 k A4, Continuous Print
Drum Life
Black 39 k Color : Black = 8 : 2,
Color: C, M, Y 36 k Letter/A4, 4 pages/job.
Color : Black = 8 : 2,
Toner Waste Container 28 k Image Coverage 5%, Letter/
A4, 4 pages/job.
Developer Life 480 k Change as Developer Unit
Efficiency
1 Productivity
ADF Productivity (LTR / A4)
ADF 100%
i-ADF 100%
19
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
ADU Copy Productivity
(LTR / A4) Throughput
Transport Method Stack less
1→2 (Mono / Color) When exiting to lower Inner
1 copy 50% / 60% Tray; paper supplied from 1st
5 copies 85% / 85% 80% / 85% Tray, and LSU is ready.
10 copies 90% / 90%
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM 120 k
Minor PM (Cleaning) N/A
Packing Configuration
1 Packing Dimension
(W x D x H)
30.7 x 35.4 x 20.9 in
Scanner & i-ADF Unit
(780 x 900 x 532 mm)
32.9 x 35.0 x 34.4 in Including the Shipping Pallet
Printer Unit
(835 x 890 x 875 mm)
2 Packing Weight
Scanner & i-ADF Unit 123.2 lb (56 kg)
Printer Unit 321.2 lb (146 kg)
3 Accessories
Process Unit Yes
Developer Yes
Toner No
Toner Waste Container Yes
Outer Tray No Option
Operating Instructions Yes
Power Supply
110V, 120V, 60 Hz
100 VAC Power Supply
Single phase
1 Power Requirement
220 - 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz
220 VAC Power Supply
Single phase
2 Power Consumption Less than 1500 W
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature 50 - 86 °F (10 - 30 °C)
2 Relative Humidity 30 - 80%
UL1950-1 / CSA C22.2 No. 950-1 For USA and Canada
3 Safety For EU and
EN60950-1
Other Destinations
4 Energy Saver Energy Star Compliant
Class A computing device in FCC
5 EMI For USA and Canada
Rules Part 15 and 18
This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) Refer to the Parts Manual for
6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)
PCBs details
20
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions
1.2.1. Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility G3 ITU-T Std & Non-Std
2 PSTN Line Port Yes 1-Line only
3 Leased Line Port No
4 V.24 Line Port No
5 Modem Speed 33.6 - 2.4kbps T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter
6 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
7 ECM Yes Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30 ECM
8 Short Protocol Yes (B, D)
ITU-T Image No. 1
9 Transmission Speed Approx. 2 sec
(A4, Std Resolution)
Transmission
Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
Communication Resolution 600 dpi communication is only
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
10 dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/ available between T.30 compliant
Reception
mm) machines.
Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen)
2 Scanning Speed (ADF)
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/
mm)
1.0 sec 0.7 sec
Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/ A4, Scanned in Vertical or Horizontal
mm) Direction.
S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x Excluding Initializing Time and ADF
15.4) dpi x lpi (dot/mm x slipping factor.
lines/mm) 2.0 sec 1.4 sec
600dpi: 600 x 600
3 Scanning Speed (Platen)
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
600dpi: 600 x 600 2.0 sec 1.4 sec
Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Scanning Resolution Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
4 dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/ S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
mm) 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
5 Document Size (Max.) ADF: Ledger / A3
21
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
6 Effective Scanning Width LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)
7 A3 Size TX/RX Yes Conforms to ITU-T A3
8 Reduction XMT Yes A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4
Face-Up, feed from top page
USA and Canada
9 ADF Capacity 70 sheets LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
10 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method LP
26 ppm 32 ppm Recording Speed attained after the 1st
2 Recording Speed
(A4 Horizontal) (A4 Horizontal) copy.
3 Recording Resolution Fax 600 x 600 dpi
Invoice : Not supported.
Ledger size is transmitted as A3 size
Ledger / Legal / Letter / for N. American models. If A3 is
4 Recording Paper Size
A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 received, approx. 1" of image on both
edges are not printed on the Ledger
size paper.
5 Effective Printing Width 11.4 in (289 mm) Conforms to ITU-T A3
6 Recording Paper Capacity 1,150 sheets Optional max. 2,250 sheets
7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Fax Memory
Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1
1 Standard Memory 3 MB
(A4, Std Resolution)
2 Optional Memory 64 MB-1 GB SD Memory Card
Dual Operation
1 Multi Task Operation Yes
2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes
3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes
Number of Memory Job
4 Yes Max. 70 files
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
Plus an additional 800 stations
available to select from, when the
1 Auto Dialers 200 Stations
optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD32) is
installed.
Phone Book Directory
2 Yes
Search Dialing
200 Address Book + 70 Full Number
3 Total Auto Dialers 270 Stations
Dialing
4 Program Dials 12
5 Max. Tel Number Digits 36
Max. Station Name
6 15
Characters
Full Number Dialing
7 Yes Max. 70 stations
(Buffered Dialing)
22
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Direct Dialing
8 Yes Voice mode
(Monitor Dialing)
Default setting is up to 5 times at 3
min. intervals, however, if a busy line is
9 Automatic Redialing Yes not detected, it will redial only 1 time.
(See Fax Service Mode 1, Parameter
No. 043 & 044)
10 Manual Redialing Yes Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button
11 Line Monitor Speaker Yes
12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only
13 Pulse / Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps / DTMF
14 Pulse to Tone Change Yes
15 Flash Key Yes
16 Handset No
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission Yes
2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission
Quick Memory
3 Yes
Transmission
Multi-Station Transmission
4 Yes Max. 270 stations
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
5 No ADF Deferred Transmission
Transmission
6 Deferred Transmission Yes
Deferred Multi-Station
7 Yes
Transmission
8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes 1 File
Priority Memory
9 No
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time (up to 5 Files)
90 Degree Rotation
11 Yes
Transmission
12 Cover Sheet Yes
13 Confidential Mail Box No
14 Multi-Copy Transmission No
FAX : Back-up with Flash Memory
15 Memory Back-Up Yes Copy / Printer : No Back-up with
D-RAM
16 Duplex Scanning Yes With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
23
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception Yes
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
2 Fixed Reduction Yes
(in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
3 Auto Reduction Yes
(in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment
4 Overlap Printing Yes Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)
5 Receive to Memory Yes
Distinctive Ring Detector
6 No
(DRD)
90 Degree Rotation
7 Yes
Reception
8 Duplex Printing Yes
Polling
1 Polling Yes
2 Turnaround Polling No
3 Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 270 stations
4 Deferred Polling Yes Max. 50 timers
Deferred Multi-Station
5 Yes Max. 50 timers / 270 stations
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx No
7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File
8 Preset Polling Password Yes
Temporary Polling
9 Yes
Password
10 Continuous Polling Yes
Convenience
1 Panel Display Wide Touch Panel Display
2 Voice Contact No
3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode
4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode
5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp Yes
2 Header / Total Page Print Yes
3 Transaction Journal Yes 200 Transactions / with View Mode
4 Comm. Journal Yes With Image Data
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Yes
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List -
2 ABBR. No. List -
3 Program List Yes
4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List
5 Fax Parameter List Yes
6 File List Yes With View Mode
7 Ind. XMT Journal Yes
8 Directory Sheet No
24
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Identifications
1 Logo Yes 25 Characters
2 Multiple Logo No
3 Character ID Yes 16 Characters
4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV No
2 Selective Reception No TSI Check
3 Relay XMT Request No
4 Relay XMT Center No
5 Confidential XMT / Polling No
6 Confidential Center No
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling No
8 Mailbox Center No
9 File XMT No
10 Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer
11 Sub-Address XMT Yes T. Routing
12 Sub-Address RCV No
13 OMR-XMT No
Standards
FCC Part 68: 1997 /
1 PSTN Industry Canada
No. CS-03: Issue 8 1996
Others
1 Fax Access Code Yes
2 PIN Code Access Yes
3 Intelligent Redial (AI) Yes 5 Files
4 Department Code Yes 1000 Departmental Codes
5 Power Saver Mode Yes
6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes
Remote Diagnostic
7 Yes
Function
8 Check & Call Function Yes
9 V.24 / Encryption Interface No
25
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.2.2. Printer Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port Yes USB 2.0 High/Full Speed Support
4 IEEE-1394 No Firewire
Printer Function
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
1 Printing Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS For EU
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
2 Sheet Bypass Yes
3 Stapling Yes Requires Optional Finisher
4 Printing Resolution (dpi)
Black & White 600 x 600 / 1200 x 1200 1200 x 1200: Requires Optional Page
Color 600 x 600 / 1200 x 1200 Memory
Monochrome Printing
5 Yes
without Color Tone
Direct Print from SD
6
Memory Card
TIFF Yes Black & White only
JPEG Yes
PDF Yes Requires PS Option
Word, Power Point No For USA and Canada
(From Sept. 2005)
7 Direct Print from PCMCIA/
PC Card Adapter
TIFF Yes Black & White only
JPEG Yes
PDF Yes Requires PS Option
Word, Power Point No For USA and Canada
(From Sept. 2005)
Win 98 / Win Me /
8 OS Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / MAC 8.6-10.3 is PS only.
Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.3
9 GDI No
10 PCL6 Yes
Requires optional Printer Controller
11 PS3 Yes
Module.
Custom Size/Postcard Size is not
12 Duplex Printing Yes
available.
13 Collation Stack Yes
14 Status Monitor No
15 Network Printing Yes
16 Network Status Monitor Yes
17 Smoothing Yes
26
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
IBM PC, AT or Compatible,
18 Applicable PC MAC is PS only.
MAC
19 Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
Yes
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV
Yes
into Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
Yes
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory
Yes
while Printing
Output to a separate tray
20 Yes
for Printing, Fax, Copy
21 Font Yes
22 Mailbox Requires Optional HDD Unit.
Check then Print Yes Max. 100 Users.
Mailbox Yes Max. 100 Jobs (mailboxes) for each
Secure Mailbox Yes User ID.
Note:
1. PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
2. PS/PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
27
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.2.3. Network Scanner Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port No Port is used for Printing only.
4 IEEE-1394 No Firewire
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device Color CCD Using the i-ADF / Platen
2 Coding Scheme MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
Multi-page TIFF / JPEG / PDF TIFF file can be converted to a PDF
3 File Format
High compression PDF file with the PDMS Software
4 Tone Scale
Black & White 256 steps
Color 256 steps / each Color
5 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
Scanning Resolution
6 200 / 300 / 400 / 600 Selectable, 600 dpi Optical Scanner
(dpi)
Win 98 / Me /
7 OS
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
8 2-Sided Scanning Yes
9 PC Scan (TWAIN) No
Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen
10 Completion Notice Yes (requires Network Status Monitor -
installed with PDMS Software)
11 Protocol TCP/IP, Non-Std
Network Scanner Address Features
1 Network Registration Independent additional 180 addresses
(Using Panasonic-DMS 120 for Network Scanner.
Communication Utility) Plus Fax/Internet Fax 200, an
additional 800 addresses available to
2 Touch Panel Registration 60 select from, when the optional Hard
Disk Drive (DA-HD32) is installed.
28
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.2.4. Internet Fax Function
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
Main Specifications
1 Communication Protocols SMTP / POP3
2 Max. Modem Speed N/A
3 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
4 File Format TIFF
Ethernet 10Base-T/
5 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
2 Effective Scanning Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 (dot/mm x
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
Scanning Resolution lines/mm) Scanning Resolution
3 S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm) is available with Parameter
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
setting
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi
2 Effective Recording Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Transmission Features
Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax
1 Multi-Task Operation Yes
and LAN is available.
2 Memory Transmission Yes
Sequential Multi-Station
3 Yes
Transmission
Simultaneous Multi-Station Max. 270 stations
4 Yes
Transmission (200 Address Book + 70)
5 Sender Selection Yes
G3 / Email Mixed
6 Yes
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission Yes
8 Fax Forward Yes
9 Sub-Address RCV Yes
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print Selection Yes “All” or “From / To / Subject” only
Subject Line Random Entry
29
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Description
Items Remarks
DP-C262 DP-C322
LAN Features
A3 Communication is available with
1 Internet Fax Communication Yes
Parameter setting.
2 Internet Mail Reception Yes
3 Internet Fax Server Features
Yes Internet Fax → Internet Fax →
Internet Fax Relay XMT
G3 Fax
Email Relay XMT Yes PC → Internet Fax → G3 Fax
Received Fax / Email Yes
Local print available
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission No
Using Sub-Address
Inbound Routing Yes
Local print available
Phone Book Registration from
Yes Via Email
PC
Internet Fax Parameters
4 Yes
Registration via Email
5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Yes With MDN
6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi
7 Network Printing
LPR / LPD Yes
GDI No
PCL6 Yes
Requires optional PostScript 3
PS3 Yes
Controller Module.
8 DHCP Client Yes
Yes Lightweight Directory Access
9 LDAP
Protocol
10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer
Certainty
Email from RCV side to Panasonic
1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) Yes
Internet Fax's only
ID
1 Email Address Yes
30
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.2.5. SD Memory Card on the SC PCB (Not the Front Slot)
Q SD Memory Card Formatting Structure and Partitioning by Function
SD Memory Card Formatting Structure

SD Memory Size 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB
Max. Number of Pages 2,300 6,900
Memory Partition Usage by Function
Function 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB
G3 Fax / Internet Fax Yes
PS (PostScript) Yes
Note:
1. This function is available only when an SD Memory Card is installed on the PCB (Not in the Front Slot),
and is used only for G3 Fax / Internet Fax and for storing PS (PostScript) Fonts.
2. The SD Memory Card is formatted automatically for the Fax/Internet Fax memory when the Power
Switch is turned ON. This format is not compatible with the PC's memory.
3. Max. Number of Pages is based on ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Standard Resolution).
4. G3 Fax / Internet Fax XMT memory storage = Max. 255 pages/file, Max. 50 Files.
5. G3 Fax / Internet Fax RCV memory storage = Max. 999 pages.
6. Max. page number may differ depending on the manufacturer of the SD Memory Card.
(Recommended Card Size is 64 MB or 128 MB).
7. The Color Image is stored into the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32).
8. When the SD Memory Card is formatted by the machine, it can not be used for the PC's memory. If the
Card need to be used on the PC again, it must be reformatted by using a PC tool which is available
from the Web site below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/audio/sd/download/sd_formatter_e.html
31
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.3. System Combination:
Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
ADF PC Board
Scanner Unit
SCN PC Board
Color Panel
Main PC Board <On the SC PCB>
(PNL PC Board)
(SC PC Board)
Fax Communication
Card Reader Board Option
SD
(SDI PC Board) Card
Internet Fax Module Option
<Front Slot>
Network Scanner/Email Used for Fax,
- USB Interface
SD PCMCIA/ Module Option Internet Fax
Card PC Card - 10/100 Ethernet Interface and PS3 Fonts
Adapter Network Scanner/Email
Used for SD Print, - PCL 6 Controller Module for Document
Scan Data, and Used for Distribution System Option
Firmware Update Print and
Scan Data Printer Controller
Module (PS3) Option
Scan Memory
128 MB x1
Paper Transport Main Memory Page Memory Hard Disk Drive

Unit 256 MB x1 128 MB x 2 Unit Option
1-Bin Finisher,
EC PC Board Automatic Duplex Unit

1-Bin
Saddle-Stitch
Finisher
or
Tray 1 (550 Sheet Paper)
Exit Tray (Outer) TRU PC Board
Tray 2 (550 Sheet Paper)
System Console 1 (550 Sheet Paper x 1)
or
System Console 2 (550 Sheet Paper x 2)

CST PC Board
Standard Configuration
Option
32
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.4. Options List
Q Options
Option Name Option Number Remarks
System Console 1 (Tray x 1) DA-DS320
System Console 2 (Tray x 2) DA-DS321
Stand for 2-Tray Configuration DA-DA322 Available for Specified Destinations
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher DA-FS325
Punch Unit for DA-FS325 DA-SP41
1-Bin Finisher DA-FS320
Exit Tray (Outer) DA-XT320
Paper Transport Unit DA-FK320
Fax Communication Board DA-FG320 G3 Fax Communication
Internet Fax Module DA-NF320 Internet Fax Communication
Printer Controller Module DA-MC320 Print Controller for PS3
Network Scanner/Email Module DA-NS320
Network Scanner/Email Module for
DA-NS321
Document Distribution System
Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD32
Page Memory 256MB DA-PMN56 128 MB x 2 pcs
Main Memory 256MB DA-EMN56 256 MB x 1 pcs
Document Distribution System DA-WR10
Accounting Software DA-WA10 Accounting Function
Remote Operation Panel Software DA-UD320 For USA only
ADF Handle for Accessibility DA-UD321
Up to 1 GB
SD Memory Card ----
Use Genuine SD Memory Cards only
Note:
1. PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
2. PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
3. The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales
company for details.
4. Genuine SD Memory Cards depict an SD Logo on their label.
(Panasonic's 512 MB Sample is shown below).
33
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Q Supplies
Part Name Part Number Remarks
Toner Cartridge (Black) DQ-TUN28K
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) DQ-TUN20C
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) DQ-TUN20M
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) DQ-TUN20Y
Drum Unit (Black) DQ-UHN36K Drum used for Black
Drum Unit (Color) DQ-UHN30 Drum used for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow
Toner Waste Container DQ-BFN45
FQ-SS32 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS320
Staple Cartridge
DQ-SS35 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS325
Supplied as a Service Part, refer to the
Verification Stamp ----
Parts Manual
Note:
The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales
company for details.
34
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
Network Scanner/Email Module
Ver. 1.1
Option
OptionConfiguration
Configuration DA-NS320
Image Network
Memory Scanner
Sort Memory 128MB (Hardware Key)
Internet Fax Fax Communication Board (Additional)
Module DA-FG320 DDS Software
DA-NF320 Accounting DA-WR10
Q Option Configuration
Software Network
1000 Address Book DA-WA10 Scanner/Email
Module for DDS
DA-NS321
Image Network
i-ADF
Exit Tray (Outer) Memory Scanner
DA-XT320 128MB +DDS
Scanner
Paper HDD
35
Unit Direct print of PDF
Transport A Main Font Expansion
Unit D DA- Memory
DA-FK320 U SD Printer
Printer HD32 256MB
1-Bin Finisher Memory Controller
DA-FS320 Card
DA- Module
EMN56 DA-MC320
(64MB-
1GB)
Fax / Internet Fax
Punch Unit
DA-SP41 Memory (Additional)
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Page Memory

Finisher 256MB
DA-FS325 (128MB 2 pcs
DA-DS321 DA-DS320 DA-DA322 DA-PMN56
Stand for 2-Tray
System Console 2 System Console Configuration For 1200dpi / Long
Cabinet Size Doc. Printing
550 x 2 550 + Cabinet
APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DP-C262/C322
1.5. External View
1. Standard Configuration
(For USA Only)

Complies with FDA radiation
performance standards, 21 CFR
Subchapter J
Manufacturer's Name and Address Factory ID

Top View 36.22 in (920 mm)
32.52 in (826 mm)

23.62 in (600 mm)
Left View Front View Right View Rear View
For USA, Canada and Europe For Other Destinations
! CAUTION
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
* THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.
IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN
INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL
SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.
36
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. With Optional System Console and Finisher Configuration
1-Bin Finisher (DA-FS320)
Top View
14.84 in
(377 mm)
10.51 in (267 mm)

46.73 in (1187 mm)
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325)
Top View
26.38 in (670 mm)

10.51 in (267 mm)
46.73 in (1187 mm)
37
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3. Space Requirements With Options
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
25.83 in 11.45 in
(656 mm) (291 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
45.14 in (1147mm)
Main Unit + Exit Tray (Outer)

3.46 in 3.94 in (100 mm)
(88 mm)
10.83 in 25.83 in 11.45 in
(275 mm) (656 mm) (291 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
59.44 in (1510 mm)
Main Unit + 1 Bin Finisher

9.88 in 14.84 in 3.94 in (100 mm)
(251 mm) (377 mm)
25.83 in 11.45 in
3.94 in (100 mm)
(656 mm) (291 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)
55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
69.86 in (1776 mm)
Main Unit + 1 Bin Saddle Finisher

3.94 in (100 mm)
11.81 in 29.53 in 25.83 in 11.45 in

(300 mm) (750 mm) (656 mm) (291 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
86.48 in (2197 mm)
38
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.5.1. Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Sequential Production Number

5-Digit Sequential Production Number
00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units
(Letters "I" and "O" are skipped)
Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation
(Except Letters "I" and "O")
For Example:
(For USA and Canada) (For UK)
44H = DP-C262-PU 451 = DP-C262-PB
44L = DP-C322-PU 452 = DP-C322-PB
Production Facility
Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T
A : 01 (2001) K : 11 (2011)
B : 02 L : 12
C : 03 M : 13
D : 04 N : 14
E : 05 O : 15
F : 06 P : 16
G : 07 Q : 17
H : 08 R : 18
I : 09 S : 19
J : 10 (2010) T : 20 (2020)
Production Month
A : January G : July
B : February H : August
C : March I : September
D : April J : October
E : May K : November
F : June L : December
39
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.6. Control Panel
DP-C262/C322
40
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.7. Fans
Toner Bottle Fan
IH Driver Fan
Pressure Roller Fan
IH Fan
LVPS Fan
Right Cover Fan
LSU Fan
1.8. Motors
ADF Paper Feed Motor
ADF Feed Motor
Scanning Motor
Drum Motor 1
FTR and LSU Shutter Motor
Paper Transport Unit Fuser Motor

Motor
Belt Motor Drum Motor 2
Developer Motor 1
Paper Feed Motor
Developer Motor 2
IH Core Motor
Bottle Motor
STR Motor
Lift Motor (Tray 1)
Lift Motor (Tray 2)

Lift Motor
(Tray 3)
Optional Paper Feed
Motor
Lift Motor
(Tray 4)
41
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.9. Sensors
ADF Exit Sensor ADF Original Width Sensor 1
ADF Original Sensor
ADF Original Width Sensor 2
ADF Cover Open Sensor
ADF Original Length Sensor 1
ADF Registration Sensor 1 ADF Original Length Sensor 2
ADF Registration Sensor 3 Platen Cover (ADF) Angle
Sensor
ADF Registration Sensor 2 Platen Cover (ADF) Open
Sensor
Fuser Unit Sensors
Home Position Sensor
(See Figure A)
ADF Paper Pass Sensor Paper Path Sensor (ADU 0)
Inner Exit Sensor
Paper Size Sensor Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor
Paper Full Sensor
Paper Path Sensor Paper Path Sensor (ADU 1)
Outer Exit Sensor Fuser Enter Sensor
Paper Transport Cover Right Cover Open Sensor
Open Sensor Registration Sensor
Intermediate Transfer Belt OHP Film Sensor
Initial Point Sensor Paper Path Sensor (ADU 2)
Sheet Bypass Size Sensor
FTR Cam Sensor
Temperature & Humidity Sheet Bypass NP Sensor
Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 1)
Density & Color Deviation NP Sensor (Tray 1)
Sensor Intermediate Roller Sensor
Drum Unit Detection Paper Path Sensor (Tray 1)
Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 2)
Color Deviation Sensor NP Sensor (Tray 2)
Toner Waste Container Paper Path Sensor (Tray 2)
Full Detection Sensor
Optional Intermediate Roller
Toner Waste Container Sensor
Detection Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 3)
STR Cam Sensor
NP Sensor (Tray 3)
Paper Tray Sensor (Tray 1)
Paper Path Sensor (Tray 3)
Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 4)
NP Sensor (Tray 4)
Right 4th Cover Open Sensor
Right 3rd Cover Open Sensor
< Figure A >
Fuser Pressure Release Sensor 2

IH Core Sensor 2 IH Core Sensor 1 Fuser Pressure Release Sensor 1
Thermistor (HR1)
Fuser Entrance Sensor
Thermistor (HR3)
Thermistor (HR2) Thermistor (PR)

Fuser Roller Rotating Encoder 1
Fuser Roller Rotating Encoder 2
42
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1.10. Clutches and Switches
ADF Inverting Roller Clutch 2
ADF Inverting Roller Clutch 1
ADF Pinch Solenoid
ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch Control Panel Power Switch
ADF Registration Roller Clutch 1 Right Upper Cover Interlock Switch 1
ADF Registration Roller Clutch 2 Right Upper Cover Interlock Switch 2
ADF Exit Roller Clutch Right Upper Cover Detection Switch
ADF Inverting Roller Solenoid 2 WAY Ordinary Roller Clutch
Paper Exit Guide Solenoid 2 WAY Inverting Roller Clutch
Paper Transport Unit Roller Clutch
Right Lower Cover ADU Paper Guide Solenoid
Interlock Switch 2 Right Lower Cover Interlock Switch 2
ADU Roller Clutch 1
Right Cover Detection Switch 2
ADU Roller Clutch 2
Front Cover Detection Switch Paper Feed Roller Clutch
Main Power Switch (Sheet Bypass)
ADF Pinch Solenoid
Pickup Roller Solenoid
Intermediate Roller Clutch (Sheet Bypass)
Registration Roller Clutch Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 1)
Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray 1)
Front Cover Right Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 2)
Detection Switch Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray2)
Front Cover Interlock Switch
(Tray 3)
Intermediate Roller Clutch Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(Tray 3)
(Tray 4)
Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(Tray 4)
Optional Intermediate Roller Clutch
1.11. PC Board
SCN PCB
ADF PCB CCD PCB
AFE PCB
SC PCB PNL3 PCB
SDI PCB
TRU PCB LCD Inverter PCB
Inverter PCB PNL2 PCB
IH PCB
MOTDRV PCB PNL4 PCB

PNL1 PCB
EC PCB
DX PCB
HVPS2 PCB
SDI PCB
Connect PCB ADU PCB
HVPS1 PCB DC PCB
NFL PCB PCL PCB

DC PCB
RLB PCB HDD
Optional LVPS PCB FCB PCB
LVPS PCB CST PCB
HVPS1 PCB
43
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1. General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
44
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2. Disassembly Instructions
2.2.1. Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit
(1) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.
(2) Clean the Exit Roller (814).
(3) Open the ADF Cover.
(4) Clean the Pickup Roller (511), Paper Feed

Roller (508), Separation Roller (610) and
Registration Roller 1 (817) with a soft cloth,
saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(5) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).
45
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(6) Remove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft (505)

Assembly by pulling towards the arrow direction.
(7) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (508).
(8) Move the Pickup Bracket.

(9) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H7).
(10) Remove the Pickup Roller Shaft (510).

(11) Remove the Pickup Roller (511).
46
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(12) Remove 3 Screws (X8).

(13) Remove the Lower Opening and Shutting
Guide 1 (601).
(14) Remove the Separation Roller Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Snap Ring is
installed properly as illustrated.
47
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(16) Remove the Separation Roller Shaft (607).

(17) Remove the Separation Roller (610).
Note:
When reassembling the Separation Roller, make
sure that the Yellow Tooler's Die on the side of the
roller is positioned as illustrated (facing the Front
Frame).
(18) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2

Assembly.
(19) Clean the Inverting Roller (809) with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(20) Open the ADF Unit.

(21) Remove 2 Screws (H5).
(22) Remove the ADF Front Cover (418).
(23) Close the ADF Unit.
Note:
Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front
Cover.
48
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(24) Remove 1 Screw (J2).

(25) Loosen 3 Screws (S6).
(26) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly.
(27) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (627).
(28) Remove 3 Screws (5M).

(29) Remove the Front ADF Gear Bracket (632)
Assembly.
(30) Remove the 16T Gear (825).
(31) Remove 1 Screw (X5).

(32) Remove the Shaft Mounting Bracket (622).
49
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(33) Release the ADF Cover Arm (624).

(34) Remove the ADF Cover (502) Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make
sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 are
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
Note:
When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make
sure that the lever is positioned on the inside of the
ADF Cover.
The illustration on the left shows the incorrect lever
position.

(36) Remove the Registration Guide 2 (721).
50
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(37) Clean the Registration Roller 2 (818).
(38) Remove the Snap Ring (G6).

(40) Loosen 1 Screw.
(41) Remove the Registration Limiter Bracket (829)
as illustrated.
(42) Remove the Limiter Joint (828).

(43) Remove the Registration Roller Torque
Limiter (827).
(44) Remove the Registration Joint (825).
51
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(45) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G6).

(46) Remove the Clutch 1 (801).
(47) Remove 2 D8 Bearings (822).
(48) Remove the Registration Roller 2 (818).
(49) Remove 2 Registration Guide Sheets 1 (1119)

and 2 Registration Guide Sheets 2 (1120).
Caution:
Do not remove the illustrated 3 Screws.
52
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Note:
When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1
and 2, make sure that the Sheets are placed on
the marks as illustrated.
Mark
Adhesive Double Registration

Coated Tape Guide Sheet
(50) Open the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide

Assembly.
(51) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.
(52) Lower the Inverting Guide Assembly.

(54) Remove the Inverting Guide Assembly.
53
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(56) Remove the Lower Exit Guide (716).
(57) Clean the Transport Roller (816).
54
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.2. Scanner Unit
(1) Open the ADF.
<Cleaning the Scanner>
(2) Clean the White Reference Sheet and

Scanning Pad with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol.
(3) Clean the Scanning (S) Glass and Platen (L)

Glass with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.
<Scanning Lamp>
(4) Remove 2 Screws (S6).

(5) Remove the Right Platen Cover (104).
55
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(6) Remove the Glass Assembly.

(9) Remove the Heat Sink Plate (1608).
(10) Move the Scanning Lamp to a position where it

can be easily replaced.
(12) Release the Harness from the Clamp.
(13) Remove the Scanning Lamp.
56
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(14) Turn the Inverter PC Board Case upside down.

(15) Disconnect the Flat Harness on the Inverter PC
Board.
(16) Remove the Inverter PC Board Assembly.
(17) Disconnect the Lamp Harness.

(18) Remove the Scanning Lamp (1615).

(20) Remove the Inverter PC Board (1612).
Note:
Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
57
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<CCD Unit>

(22) Remove the CCD Cover (1627).
(23) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the CCD PC Board.
(24) Remove 2 Screws (Y23).

(25) Remove the CCD Unit (1631).
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the CCD is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.
58
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(26) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the AFE PC

Board.

(28) Remove the AFE PC Board (1630).
<Paper Size Sensor>

(30) Disconnect 2 Harnesses from the Sensors.
(31) Remove 2 Multi Beam Sensors 1 (1722).

(33) Disconnect the Harness from the Sensor.
(34) Remove the Multi Beam Sensor 2 (1723).
59
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning Mirrors>
(35) Clean the Mirror 2 (1621) with a soft cloth,

(36) Clean the Mirror 1 (1602) with a soft cloth,

60
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<SCN PC Board>

(2) Remove the Center Scanner Cover (102).
(3) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SCN PC

Board.

(5) Remove the SCN PC Board (6502).
<Scanning Motor>

(7) Remove the ADF Harness Holder (1517).
61
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(8) Disconnect the ADF Harness.

(10) Remove 2 Screws (N6).
(11) Loosen 2 Screws.
(12) Remove the ADF Unit.

(14) Remove the Rear Platen Cover (101).
(15) Unhook and remove the Motor Spring (1708).
62
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(16) Disconnect the Harness.

(18) Remove the Motor Bracket Assembly.
(19) Remove the E-Ring (J7).

(20) Remove the Reduction Gear (1711).

(22) Remove the Scanning Motor (1713).
<Home Position Sensor>

(24) Remove the Photo Sensor (401).
63
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Platen Cover (ADF) Angle Sensor, Platen Cover

(ADF) Open Sensor>
(25) Disconnect the 2 Harnesses.

(26) Remove the Photo Sensors (401).
Note:
Ensure that the Sensor Harnesses are reinstalled
properly as illustrated.
64
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.3. Control Panel Unit
<Replacing the Battery>
(2) Remove the Battery Holder (1306).
(3) Replace the Battery (1330).

(4) Reinstall the Battery Holder and
fasten it with 1 Screw.
! CAUTION
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
* THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.
IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN
INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL
SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.
65
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Control Panel Unit>
(5) Remove 4 Black Screws (1218).
Note:
This allows the removal of the Control Panel Unit
in the following steps.
(6) Adjust the Control Panel to the 4th position.

(7) Loosen 1 Screw (Y47).
(8) Loosen 1 Screw (Y47).

(9) Remove the Back Panel Cover (1206).
(This step is for Euro only)
66
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(11) Adjust the Control Panel to the 2nd position.

(12) Unhook and remove the Damper Spring (1208).
(13) Remove the Control Panel Unit by pulling the

Release Lever as illustrated.
(14) Remove the Control Panel Unit by pulling the

Release Lever as illustrated.
(15) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the INV PC

Board.
67
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(16) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.

(18) Remove the Battery Holder (1306).
(20) Remove the Release Lever (1305).
(22) Remove the Lower Panel Cover (1304).
(23) Release the Harnesses from the 2 Harness

Clamps.
(24) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the PNL 1 PC
Board.

(26) Remove the INV PC Board (1327).
(28) Remove the PNL 1 PC Board (6505).

(30) Remove the Panel Base and Guide Assembly
(1303).
68
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322


(38) Remove the LCD Module (1326).
(39) Remove the Touch Panel (1325).
(40) Remove the Scanner Front Cover Assembly

(1201).
69
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(41) Disconnect the Harness on the SDI PC Board.

(43) Remove the SDI Cover (1203) and SDI PC
Board (1217).
70
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.4. Fuser Unit
(1) Open the Right Side Upper Cover.

(3) Remove the Harness Cover 2 (4813).

(6) Remove the Fuser Unit (4815).
71
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(7) Unhook 2 Pressure Springs (5006).
(8) Remove 1 Black Screw (Y41).

(9) Remove the Harness Cover 3 (4921).
(10) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.
(11) Remove 3 Black Screws (Y41).

(12) Remove the Shaft Plate (4916).
72
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(14) Remove the Shaft Plate (4916).
(16) Remove the used up Fuser Belt Unit (4926).
<Replacing the Fuser Belt Unit (4926) >
(17) Remove all the tapes and shipping material from

the new Belt Unit.
(18) Remove the 2 Bands.
73
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(19) Remove the Protective Paper and Shipping

materials.
(20) Remove 2 Pins.
(21) Install the New Fuser Belt Unit on the Fuser

Main Unit.
(22) Hook 2 Pressure Springs.
(23) Reinstall 2 Black Screws.

(24) ReInstall the Shaft Plate.
(25) Reinstall 1 Black Screw.
74
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(26) Reinstall 2 Black Screws.

(27) Reinstall the Shaft Plate.
(29) Connect 2 Harnesses.
Note:
Ensure that the Sensor Harnesses are reinstalled
Red Harness : “R” Carved Sensor
Black Harness : “BK” Carved Sensor.
(30) Remove the Shipping Cover.
(31) Connect the 3 Harnesses.
75
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Note:
When connecting, exercise care not to touch the
Fuser Belt.
Note:
Ensure that the Harnesses are reinstalled properly
as illustrated.
(32) Reinstall the Connector Cover.

<Install the Fuser Unit>
(34) Install the Fuser Unit.

(35) Secure 2 Screws.
(36) Connect the Harness.
(37) Reinstall the Connector Cover.
(38) Reinstall 1 Screw.
(39) Close the Upper Right Side Cover.
Note:
When reinstall the Fuser Belt Unit, resetting the
PM Counter.
Perform “F8-26” Fuser Belt Counter Reset. (F7-
02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count is also initialized
by this operation)
76
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Replacing the Complete Fuser Unit>
(40) Remove all tapes and cushioning materials.

(41) Remove the Shipping Cover.
(42) Remove the Protective Paper and Shipping

materials.
<Installing the Complete Fuser Unit>
See the installation steps in this section.
Note:
When reinstall the Complete Fuser Unit, resetting
the PM Counter.
Perform “F8-26” Fuser Belt Counter Reset, and
“F8-27” Fuser Main Counter Reset. (F7-02-65
Fuser Belt Remain Count, and F7-02-66 Fuser
Main Remain Count are also initialized by this
operation)
77
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.5. Auto Duplex Unit (ADU)
(1) Open the Jam Cover.
(2) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray.

(4) Remove the Right Side Front Cover (206).
(6) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (205).
(7) Open the Upper Right Side Cover.
<Cleaning the ADU 2nd Roller, Feed Roller and

Exit Roller>
Clean the ADU 2nd Roller, Feed Roller and Exit

Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.
78
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(8) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the ADU PC Board

(CN403, CN404, CN405)
(9) Release 3 Harnesses from the Edge Saddle.
(10) Remove the Lower Dumper Bracket (2114).
(11) Remove the Dumper (2116).
(12) Open the Lower Right Side Cover.

(13) Remove 1 Snap Ring (G6).
(14) Remove the Hinge Pin (2103).
Note:
When reinstalling or installing the Hinge Pin, take
care not to hold it by its side.
79
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(15) Remove the ADU.
Note:
When reinstalling the ADU, make sure that the
Harnesses are reinstalled properly as illustrated.

(17) Remove the Exit Guide Bracket (2308).
80
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(19) Remove the Exit Guide Bracket (2308).

(21) Remove the Guide Cover (2307).
<Paper Path Sensor (ADU0)>

(23) Remove the Photo Sensor (1809) Assembly.

(25) Remove the ADU Upper Guide (2207).
81
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning the ADU 1st Roller>
Clean the ADU 1st Roller with a soft cloth,

(27) Remove the Cover Knob (2202).

(29) Remove the Coating Clip (2219).
82
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(30) Remove the Harness Clamp (2218).
Note:
When reinstalling the Harness Clamp, make sure
to reinstall the harness Clamp properly as
illustrated.
(31) Remove the ADU Cover (2201).

(33) Remove the Cover Plate (2203).
83
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(34) Remove 1 E-Ring (J7).

(35) Remove the Latch (2210).
(36) Remove the Left Latch Spring (2211).
(37) Remove the Bushing (2213).
(38) Remove the Latch Lever Shaft (2209)
Assembly.
(39) Release the Harness from the Clamps.

(41) Remove the Right Cover Fan (2214).

Note:
When reinstalling the ADU Plate Assembly to the
ADU Cover, pull up the notch as illustrated.
Caution:
When reinstalling the Cover, do not pinch the
Harness with the Steel Plate.
84
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Note:
When reinstalling the Cover, make sure that the
harness band is reinstalled properly as illustrated.
85
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.6. Paper Exit Transportation
(1) Open the Right Side Upper Cover.
(See sect. 2.2.4.)
(2) Remove the Fuser Unit. (See sect. 2.2.4.)
(4) Remove the Top Cover (207).
(5) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the ADU PC Board

(CN401, CN402), and the intermediate
connector.

(7) Remove the Paper Exit Unit.
Note:
If the Paper Transport Unit Option is installed,
remove the Paper Exit Unit by following the steps
below.
(8) Remove 1 Screw (X5) by pushing the Flap

downward as illustrated.
(9) Remove the Front Cover (7112).
86
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(10) Move the Paper Transport Unit slightly to the left

by pulling the lock lever as illustrated.
(11) Remove the Paper Exit Unit (see the previous

step).
<Paper Full Sensor>


(16) Remove the Harness Guide (3216).
(17) Disconnect the Harnesses.

(19) Remove the Clutch Bracket Assembly.
87
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(20) Remove the Arm Spring (3227).

(23) Remove the Clutch Bracket (3226).
(24) Remove the D Z27M1 Gear (3224).

(25) Remove the Clutch Shaft (3225).
<Inner Exit Sensor>

(27) Remove the Sensor Cover Assembly.

88
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning the Exit Roller>
(30) Remove 1 Screw (Y1).

(31) Remove the Exit Guide (227).
(32) Clean the Exit Roller with a soft cloth, saturated

with isopropyl alcohol.
89
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.7. Lower Right Side Cover Unit
(1) Remove the Right Front Cover.
(See sect. 2.2.5.)
(2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(See sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray Cover.
(See sect. 2.2.8.)
(See sect. 2.2.9.)
(5) Remove the Snap Ring. (See sect. 2.2.9.)
(6) Remove the Cover Stay. (See sect. 2.2.9.)
(7) Disconnect the Harness on the ADU PC Board
(CN406).
(8) Release the lock lever by pushing it in the
direction shown by the arrow.
(9) Remove the Lower Right Side Cover Unit by

pushing the lock lever in the direction shown by
the arrow.
Note:
When disassembling, exercise care not to damage
the Second Transfer Roller (STR).
90
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning the OHP Detection Reflector>
Clean the OHP Detection Reflector with a soft

Note:
When reinstalling the Lower Right Side Cover Unit,
pull the lock lever to the locked position in the
direction illustrated by the arrow.

(12) Remove the Gear Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling the Gear Assembly, make sure
that the convex part of the gear bracket and clutch
are properly positioned as illustrated.
91
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(15) Remove the Sensor Bracket (2825) Assembly.
<Right Cover Open Sensor>

(18) Remove Guide Bracket Assembly.
(19) Remove the STR Unit (2535) as illustrated.
92
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(21) Remove the Plate Cover Bracket (2734).
(22) Turn the Lower Right Side Cover Unit upside

down.
Note:
Before turning the Unit upside down, make sure to
remove the STR Unit, or the STR may get
damaged.
(23) Open the Lower ADU Door.

(25) Remove the ADU Cover Arm (2746).
(26) Remove the ADU Door Assembly as illustrated.
<Cleaning the ADU 4th Roller>
Clean the ADU 4th Roller with a soft cloth,

93
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(28) Remove the ADU Guide 2 (2824).

(30) Release the Harness from 2 latches.

(32) Remove the ADU Sensor Base (2821)
Assembly.
94
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(CN407).

(36) Remove the Registration Unit.

(39) Remove the ROHP PC Board (2110).
<Cleaning the ADU 3rd Roller>

(2) Open the Lower ADU Door.
(3) Clean the ADU 3rd Roller with a soft cloth,
95
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning the Registration Roller>

(3) Clean the Registration Roller with a soft cloth,
96
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.8. Sheet Bypass Unit
(1) Open the Jam Cover. (See sect. 2.2.5.)
(2) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray. (See sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Remove the Right Front Cover.
(See sect. 2.2.5.)
(4) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(See sect. 2.2.5.)
(5) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray Cover (2918)
as illustrated.
(6) Release the Harness from the 8 Clamps.
(7) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (CN408, CN410).

(9) Remove the Sheet Bypass Assembly.
97
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(10) Lift the Sheet Bypass Tray as illustrated.

(11) Remove the Tray Spring (2916).

(13) Remove the Tray Plate Shaft (2917).
(14) Remove the Tray Assembly.
Note:
When removing the Tray Assembly, carefully
separate as illustrated.
(15) Turn the Sheet Bypass Assembly upside down

as illustrated.
(17) Remove the Ground Plate (3023) and Sheet
Bypass Tray Base (3120).
98
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(19) Remove the Arm Bracket Assembly.
(20) Remove the DFP Roller (3111).
<Cleaning DFP Roller>

Clean the DFP Roller with a soft cloth, saturated
with water.

(22) Remove the Upper Plate (3008).

(24) Remove the Upper Guide (3034).
99
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(26) Remove 2 Stoppers (3007).
(27) Remove 2 Spacers (3006).
(28) Remove the Front Pickup Roller (3005).
(29) Remove the Rear Pickup Roller (3012).
<Cleaning Pickup Roller>

Clean the Pickup Roller with a soft cloth, saturated
with isopropyl alcohol.
Caution:
When reinstalling the Pickup Rollers, position the
bushing so that the Black color is facing the Front
side and the White color is facing the Rear side.
(30) Remove 1 Snap Ring (H6).

(31) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (3003), and the
Timing Belt (3004).
<Cleaning Paper Feed Roller>

Clean the Paper Feed Roller with a soft cloth,
saturated with water.
100
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.9. STR Unit and Intermediate Transfer (IT) Unit
(4) Remove the Guide Bracket Assembly.
(5) Remove the STR Unit (2535).
(6) Remove the Snap Ring (2714).
(7) Remove the Support Arm Assembly.
101
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(8) Push on the STR Guide to lock it in the down

position.
<Pulling out the Intermediate Transfer (IT) Unit>
(10) Push down the white latches on both sides and

pull on them to release the IT Unit from the
locked position.
(11) While holding the IT Unit by the center as

illustrated, slide it out until it stops.
102
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(12) While holding the IT Unit on both sides, release

the lock by pushing the lever to the right.
(13) Carefully pull the IT Unit (3420) out of the

machine while holding it by both sides.
<Cleaning the Initial Point Sensor>
(14) Clean the Initial Point Sensor with a dry cotton

swab.
Note:
When cleaning, wipe the surface of the sensor
with a dry cotton swab a few times as illustrated.
<Cleaning the Color Registration and Toner

Density Sensor>
(15) Slide the Sensor Cover toward the front as

illustrated.
(16) While holding it in the open position, wipe the
surface of the Color Registration and Toner
Density Sensors through the frame holes.
Note:
When cleaning, wipe the surface of the sensors
with a dry cotton swab a few times as illustrated.
103
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Caution:
Pull the IT Unit out straight and leveled
(horizontal), or the IT Belt may get damaged and
the printing quality will be affected.
<Replacing the Cleaner Unit, IT Belt, FTR and

Brush Assembly >
(17) Place a clean sheet of paper (i.e. Ledger or A3)

under the IT Unit to catch any spilled toner.
(19) Remove the Cleaning Unit (3418).

(21) Remove the Lower Paper Guide (3412).

(23) Remove the Upper Paper Guide (3411).
104
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(24) Unhook 4 Link Arm Springs (3408).
(25) Set 4 Link Arms to the locked position as

illustrated.
(26) Remove 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the right

side.
105
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(27) Remove 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the left

side.
(28) Remove the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly.
Caution:
When Removing and Installing the Handle Plate
Bracket Assembly, hold both side of the Bracket as
illustrated and don’t touch the IT Belt.

(30) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, remove the
Right Position Plate (3417).

(32) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, remove the
Left Position Plate (3416).
106
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(33) Place the IT Unit on its side with the side that has
the belt position mark facing upward.
(34) Bend the IT Unit at the bending point up to
maximum bending position.
Caution:
Confirm that the IT Unit is at the maximum bending
position for removing the IT Belt.
(35) Remove the IT Belt (3419).
Caution:
When Removing and installing the IT Belt, hold the
side band of the belt as illustrated. Don’t touch the
center of the belt, or the printing quality will be
affected.
Note:
While removing the IT Belt, exercise care not to
snag the belt projections onto the frame of the IT
Unit.
(36) Straighten the IT Unit.
107
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(37) Remove 4 Snap Rings (3545) securing the FTR

by turning over the Protect Sheet as illustrated.
Note:
When removing snap rings, exercise care not to
remove the Snap Ring holding the Backup Roller.
(38) Remove 4 FTR (3546) by turning over the

Protective Sheet as illustrated.
<Cleaning the Tension Roller, Tension Shaft and

Backup Roller>
(39) Clean the Tension Roller, Tension Shaft and

Backup Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol, then clean them with a soft dry
cloth.
(40) Turn the IT Unit upside down.
Note:
When turning it upside down, hold properly by both
sides as illustrated.
108
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(42) Remove the Drive Roller Brush Assembly
(3635).
<Cleaning the Bias Roller, Initial Point Sensor

Roller, Adjustment Roller, and Drive Roller>
(43) Clean the Bias Roller, Initial Point Sensor Roller,

Adjustment Roller, and Drive Roller with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol, and then
wipe them with a soft dry cloth.
Note:
Before cleaning the Drive Roller, make sure to
remove the Drive Roller Brush Bracket (see the
previous step).
Note:
When replacing the IT Belt, make sure to clean
these Rollers, especially the Bias Roller at the
same time.
(44) Remove the Snap Ring (3613).
(45) Remove the Adjustment Roller (3612).
109
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(46) Remove 2 Adjust Bushings (3419).
Note:
The Ball Bearings and the Adjustment Bushings
are attached to the Adjustment Roller.
Use the Adjustment Bushings enclosed with the

new IT Belt to accommodate for the belt length
variations.
(47) Install 1 (new) Adjustment Bushing (3419) to

the Right Side.
(48) Install 1 (new) Adjustment Bushing (3419) to

the Left Side.
(49) Reinstall the Adjustment Roller and the Snap

Ring as illustrated.
Note:
When reinstalling the Snap Ring, ensure the Ball
Bearings are installed into the Adjustment
Bushings.
110
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Note:
When reinstalling the Snap Ring, use a pair of
pliers as illustrated.
(50) Reinstall the 4 FTR.
Note:
Reinstall the FTR by turning over the Protective
Sheet.
Note:
When reinstalling the FTR, the direction is not
critical, and it can be installed in either direction as
illustrated.
(51) Bend the IT Unit at the bending point up to the

maximum bending position.
(52) Carefully install the new IT Belt.
Caution:
When installing the new IT Belt, follow the
description of the label on the Unit’s frame.
111
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Caution:
When Removing and installing the IT Belt, hold the
side band of the IT Belt as illustrated. Don’t touch
the center of the belt, or the printing quality will be
affected.
Caution:
When installing the IT Belt, align the position of
roller steps and belt projections as illustrated.
112
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(53) Straighten the IT Unit to its original shape as

illustrated.
Note:
Take your time during the installation, and proceed
cautiously.
(54) Reinstall the Left Position Plate.

(55) Reinstall the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly.
(56) Hook 4 Springs.
(57) Reinstall the Upper Paper Guide.
(58) Reinstall the Lower Paper GUide.
(59) Reinstall the Cleaning Unit.
(60) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, reinstall the

Right Position Plate (3417).
(61) Reinstall 1 Black Screw (Y29).
113
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(62) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, reinstall the

Left Position Plate (3416).
(63) Reinstall 1 Black Screw (Y29).
(64) Reinstall the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly.

(65) Reinstall 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the left
side.
Caution:
When Removing and Installing the Handle Plate
Bracket Assembly, hold both sides of the Bracket
as illustrated and don’t touch the IT Belt.
(66) Reinstall 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the right

side.
114
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(67) Release 4 Link Arms from the locked position as

illustrated.
(68) Hook 4 Link Arm Springs (3408).
(69) Reinstall the Upper Paper Guide (3411).

(70) Reinstall 2 Black Screws (Y29).
(71) Reinstall the Lower Paper Guide (3412).

115
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(73) Reinstall the Cleaning Unit (3418).

<Reinstalling the IT Unit>
(75) Maintain the IT Unit leveled by holding it on both

sides while installing it into the machine.
Note:
When installing, ensure that the STR Bracket locks
in place.
Note:
Slide the IT Unit along the guide rails on both
sides.
(76) Push on both sides until the 2 white levers lock

the IT Unit into place.
116
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(77) Unlock the STR Guide.
Caution:
When unlocking, exercise care not to pinch your
fingers with the STR Guide.
(78) Install the STR Unit.
Note:
During the installation ensure that the hook is
properly attached.
(79) Reinstall the Guide Bracket.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the convex is in
the hole as illustrated.
(80) Reinstall the Support Arm Assembly.
(81) Reinstall the Snap Ring.
(82) Close the Lower Right Side Cover.
(83) Close the Sheet Bypass Tray.
<Resetting the PM Counters>

(84) Perform "F8-29 Transfer Belt Life Count Down".
(F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life CountDown is also
initialized by this operation)
(85) Perform “F8-32 STR Life Count”. (F7-02-52 STR
Life Count is also initialized by this operation)
(86) Perform “F8-30 Color Registration”.
117
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.10. Process Unit <Replacing the Developer Unit >
<Replacing the Developer Unit>
Note:
The procedure below describes how to replace the
Developer Unit for the Cyan Color.
(1) Open the Front Cover.
(2) Remove the Toner Waste Container.
Note:
Exercise care not to incline the container, or Toner
may spill out.
(3) Turn the Toner Cartridge (Cyan)

counterclockwise.
(4) Pull out the Toner Cartridge (Cyan).
(5) Unlock the Drum Units (Cyan and Magenta) by

turning the Drum Release Knob
counterclockwise.
Note:
To remove the Hopper Unit in Step 16, the Drum
Unit(s) relevant to the Developer Unit being
replaced must be unlocked, and removed first.
(See the Table below)
Developer Unit Drum Unit(s)

-----------------------------------------------------------------
Cyan Cyan and Magenta
Black Black and Cyan
Magenta Magenta and Yellow
Yellow Yellow only
118
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(6) Pull out the Drum Units (Cyan and Magenta).
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
Drum Unit (Brown), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
Caution:
The Drum is very sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
Drum to direct sunlight or bright light.
Even if it is a fluorescent lamp of approximately
1000 lm/m2 (1000 lx).
(7) Cover the Drum with 4 sheets of white paper

and a sheet of Black paper as illustrated, or use
a Black Plastic Bag.
Note:
Copied Black paper can also be used, and
inserted in any position.

(9) Remove the Inner Stack Cover (203).
119
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning the Toner Supply Cylinder>
(10) Clean the Toner Supply Cylinder with a

Vacuum cleaner.

(12) Remove the Pipe Cover (4421).
(13) Place a clean sheet of paper (i.e. Ledger or

A3) on top of the Front Cover to catch any toner
spill.
(14) Lock the Drum Unit by turning the Drum Release

Knob clockwise.
Note:
This step eases the removal of the Hopper Unit in
the next step.
120
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(15) Remove 1 Screw (S6).

(16) Remove the Hopper Unit as illustrated.
Note:
Pull out the bottom portion by clasping with the left
forefinger.
<Cleaning the Supply Cylinder>
(17) Clean the Supply Cylinder with a Vacuum

cleaner.
(18) Clean the Toner Entrance with a Vacuum

cleaner.
121
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(19) Release the Lever Arm.

(21) Remove the WTB Lower Cover (4401).
(22) Release 2 Harness Clamps.

(23) Disconnect the Developer Harness.

(25) Remove the Developer Front Bracket (4422).
122
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
<Cleaning the Developer Cover>
(26) Clean the Developer Front Bracket (4422) with

a Vacuum cleaner.
(27) Pull out the Developer Unit (Cyan) (5443).
Note:
Do not open the shutter, or Toner will spill out.
Note:
Ensure the Lever Arm is at the maximum down
position, or Drum may get damaged.
<Installing the new Developer Unit>

(28) Remove the new Developer Unit out of the box.
(29) Remove all the Shipping materials.
(30) Gently peel the Tape off in the direction of the

arrow.
123
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(32) Remove the Developer Cover (5401) by
releasing 4 latches.
<Replacing the Developer>

Note:
Only if a problem occurs, perform the step below.
If there is no problem, skip to the step (34).
(33) Turn the Developer Unit upside down over a

suitable waste container or a sheet of paper, and
dump the used Developer and Toner by rotating
the gear counterclockwise.
<Pouring the Developer>
(34) Shake the Developer Bottle a few times to

loosen its contents.
(35) Carefully pour the developer evenly into the
developer unit while turning the Gear as
illustrated. Make sure to empty the bottle.
(36) Reinstall the Developer Cover.
(37) Install the new Developer Unit.
(38) Connect the Developer Harness.
(39) Hook 2 Harness Clamps.
(40) Reinstall the Developer Front Bracket.
Note:
When reinstalling the Developer Cover, exercise
care not to pinch the Harness with the Cover.
124
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(41) Reinstall the Hopper Unit.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the 2 projections
on the Hopper Unit are seated in the 2 holes firmly,
and at the same time, the supply cylinder is
properly positioned as illustrated.
(42) Reinstall the WTB Lower Cover.

(43) Reinstall the Pipe Cover.
(44) Reinstall the Inner Cover.
(45) Remove the papers covering the Drum.
(46) Hook the Lever Arm.
(47) Reinstall the Drum Unit.
(48) Lock all the Drum Units by turning the Drum
Release Knob clockwise.
(49) Remove the sheet of paper.
125
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(50) Turn the Toner Cartridge upside down as

illustrated, then reinstall the Toner Cartridge.
(51) Reinstall the Toner Waste Container.
<Resetting the PM Counters>

Note:
1. Do not close the Front Cover.
2. If replacing the Developer Unit, follow step (52).
3. If replacing only the Developer, skip to step (53).
(52) Perform "F8-09 Deve. Unit Count".

(F7-02-40, 41, 42, 43 Deve. Unit Count, and F7-
02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also initialized by this
operation)
(53) Perform "F8-11 Developer Count".
(F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also initialized by this
operation)
(54) Plug the AC Power Cord.
(55) Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
(56) Close the Front Cover.
126
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.11. LSU
(2) Pull out the 2nd Paper Tray.

(4) Remove the Left Cover.

(6) Remove the Ground Harness.
(8) Remove the LSU Fan (4302).
(9) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the LSU PC Board.
127
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the alignment
pointer position. If the LSU is not reinstalled at the
same position, the scanning quality will be
affected.
Note:
LSU and Serial Numbers are printed as illustrated.

(11) Remove the LSU (4303).
<Cleaning the LSU Aperture Glass>
Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Basic

Operations, Maintenance Section).
128
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.12. Paper Feed Module
(1) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray.
(See sect. 2.2.8.)
(2) Remove the Lower Right Side Cover Unit.
(See sect. 2.2.7.)
(CN408, CN409).
(4) Release the Harness from 2 Clamps.
(5) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray.

(7) Remove the 1st Paper Feed Module.
129
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(8) Remove the Snap Ring (H7) and Pickup Roller

(1926) while pushing the solenoid as illustrated
to lift the shaft of the Pickup Roller, for easy
removal.
<Cleaning the Pickup Roller>

Clean the Pickup Roller surface with a soft cloth,
saturated with water.

(10) Remove the DFP Roller (1911).
<Cleaning the DFP Roller>

Clean the DFP Roller with a soft cloth, saturated
with water.
Note:
During reinstallation ensure that the Gears are
aligned, and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled

(12) Remove the Guide Cover.
130
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(14) Remove the One Way Clutch (1923).
(15) Remove the Feed Roller (1922).
<Cleaning the Feed Roller>

Clean the Feed Roller with a soft cloth, saturated
with water.
(16) Disconnect the Harnesses.

(17) Remove 2 Sensors (401).
(18) Remove the Jam Cover.
(19) Pull out the 2nd Paper Tray.
131
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(22) Remove the 2nd Paper Feed Module.
Note:
Follow the instructions of steps (8)~(17) for the 1st
Paper Feed Module.
<Cleaning the Intermediate Roller>
(23) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray.

(See sect. 2.2.8.)
(24) Remove the Lower Right Side Cover Unit.
(See sect. 2.2.7.)
(25) Clean the Upper Intermediate Roller with a soft

(27) Clean the Lower Intermediate Roller with a soft
132
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.13. System Console
(2) Pull out the 3rd Paper Tray.

(4) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (6704).

(6) Remove the Cover Belt (6715).
(7) Remove the Jam Cover while pushing the

release button.
133
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(9) Release the Harness from the clamp.

(11) Remove the 3rd Paper Feed Module.
Note:
Follow the instructions for steps (8)~(17) of the 1st
Paper Feed Module. (See sect. 2.2.12.)
(12) Pull out the 4th paper tray.

(14) Release the Harness from the clamp.
134
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(16) Remove the 4th Paper Feed Module.
Note:
Follow the instructions for steps (8)~(17) for the
1st Paper Feed Module. (See sect. 2.2.12.)
<Cleaning the Intermediate Roller>

(18) Clean the 3rd/4th Intermediate Roller with a
soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
135
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.14. PC Boards
(2) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly.

(4) Remove the CONE PC Board (3922).
(5) Disconnect all Harnesses on the SC PC Board.

(7) Remove the SC PC Board (6401).
(8) Disconnect all Harnesses on the EC PC Board.

(10) Remove the EC PC Board (6402).
136
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(12) Remove the Left EC PCB Bracket (3909).

(14) Remove the SC PCB Bracket (3901).

(16) Remove the DC25 PC Board (6506).
(17) Release the Harnesses from 4 Clamps and 3

Edge Saddles.
(18) Remove Harnesses on the EC PC Board
Bracket.
137
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(20) Remove the Center Bracket (3906).

(22) Remove the EC PCB Bracket (3908).
(23) Disconnect all Harnesses on the HVPS2 PC

Board.

(25) Remove the HVPS2 PC Board (4015).
138
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(27) Pull out the HVPS1 PC Board Assembly.

(29) Remove 2 HVPS1 PC Boards (4014).
(A) : For Yellow / Magenta

(B) : For Cyan / Black

(31) Pull out the HVPS2 PCB Bracket (4003).
<Removing the Motor Assemblies>

(34) Turn the Levers counterclockwise.
(35) Pull out all the Drum Units approximately
20mm.
Note:
When pulling out the Drum Unit, exercise care not
to expose the Drum.
139
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(36) Remove 6 Motor Assemblies According to the

following steps.
Note:
The Motor Assemblies are keyed for their
respective locations; do not force them into an
incorrect position as damage to the Motor
Assembly or machine may occur.
(37) Disconnect the Harness on the Motor PC Board

Assembly.
(39) Remove the Motor Assembly.
Note:
These procedures are for Motor Assemblies of No.
1 (5901), No. 3 (5903), No. 4 (5905), No. 6 (6126)
in the illustration of step (34).
(40) Disconnect the Harness on the Motor PC Board

Assembly.
(42) Remove the Motor Assembly.
Note:
These procedures are for Motor Assemblies of No.
2 (5902) and No. 5 (5904) in the illustration of step
(31).
Caution:
When removing the motor of No. 3, set the Drum
Units for Yellow, Magenta and Cyan color and turn
the levers clockwise.
140
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Caution:
When removing motor assemblies, don’t touch nor
rotate the drive gears shown in the illustration, or
the printing quality will be affected.
(43) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the MOTDRV

PC Board.
(44) Release 3 PCB Spacers (4006).
(45) Remove the MOTDRV PC Board (6504).

(48) Remove the Fan Assembly.

(50) Remove the IH PCB Bracket (4004).
141
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(51) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the IH PC

Board.

(53) Release 2 PCB Spacers (4016).
(54) Remove the IH PC Board (4020).
142
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.15. Drive Unit
(1) Open the Front Cover
(3) Pull out all the Drum Units approximately 20 mm
(0.79 in).
(4) Remove the 2 Screws (X5).

(5) Remove the SC Support Bracket (3903).
(7) Remove the Main Drive Unit (5811).

143
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(11) Remove the Gear Box Cover (5912).

(13) Remove the E-Ring (J6).
(14) Remove 6 FTR Coupling Gears (5906).
Caution:
When reinstalling, align the Gear holes and frame
holes as illustrated.

(16) Remove the 20T Pulley (6131).
(17) Remove the Timing Belt (6130).
(18) Remove the Clutch (6129).
144
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
(19) Disconnect the Clutch Harness.
(20) Release the Harness from Harness Clamp.

(21) Disconnect the Motor Harness.
(22) Release the Spacer on the Motor Assembly.
(24) Remove the Motor Assembly (6126).
(25) Release the Harness from 2 Harness Clamps.

(26) Disconnect the Clutch Harness.
(28) Remove the Clutch (6129).
(29) Disconnect the Lift Up Motor Harness on the

SC PCB.
(30) Release the Harness from 2 Harness Clamps.
145
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(32) Remove the Lift Up Motor Assembly.

(34) Remove the Lift Up Motor Bracket (2013)
Assembly.

(37) Remove the Lift Up Motor (2001).
146
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.2.16. LVPS Unit
(See sect. 2.2.14)
(2) Disconnect 5 Harnesses on the SC PCB (CN52,
CN53) and the EC PCB (CN519, CN520) and
the intermediate connector.
(3) Release the Harnesses from 14 Harness
Clamps.
(4) Release the Harnesses from 3 Harness

Clamps.

(6) Remove the NFL 2 Bracket (4107).
(7) Disconnect 1 Harness on the NFL PCB

(CN132).
(9) Remove the LVPS Unit.
147
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(12) Remove the NFL PCB Assembly (4116).
(13) Release the Harnesses from the Edge Saddle.

(15) Remove the LVPS Duct Cover (4106).
(16) Release the Harnesses from Harness 5

Clamps.
148
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322

(19) Remove the LVPS Bracket (4102).
(20) Disconnect the Fan Harness.
(21) Release the Harness from Harness Clamp.

(22) Remove 2 Screws (4104).
(23) Remove the LVPS Fan (4103).
(24) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the LVPS.

(27) Remove the LVPS (4117).
Caution:
When reinstalling the LVPS, secure the side
Screws first.
149
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
2.3. Hardware Identification Template
Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark
G6 FFPFJ0039B Snap Ring
H5 XTB4+10GFN Silver Screw
H6 FFPFJ0033B Snap Ring
H7 FFPFJ0041B Snap Ring
J2 XTT4+8HFN Silver Screw
J6 XUC3VM E-Ring
J7 XUC4VM E-Ring
J8 XUC7VM E-Ring
K5 XUC5VM E-Ring
K6 XUC6VM E-Ring
K7 FFPFA0176 Shoulder Screw
K9 FFPFJ0043B Snap Ring
N6 FFPFA0161 Shoulder Screw
P4 PF2217P319 Screw
S6 DZPA000086 Screw
X1 XTB3+10GFJ Screw
X3 XYN3+F8FJ Screw
X4 XTB3+20GFJ Screw
150
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
X5 XTB3+6FFJ Screw
X8 XTB3+8GFJ Screw
X9 XTB3+8FFJ Screw
Y1 XTW3+8PFJ Screw
Y2 XTB3+6FFJ-RP Screw
Y3 XTW3+6LFJ Screw
Y10 XYN4+F6FJ Screw
Y16 XYN3+F6FJ Screw
Y19 XTB4+8FFJ Screw
Y21 XTB4+6FFJ Screw
Y22 XYA3+FF6FJ Screw
Y23 XYN4+F8FJ Screw
Y24 XTB4+10GFJ Screw
Y25 XYN26+F6FJ Screw
Y26 XYN3+F4FJ Screw
Y27 XUC8VM E-Ring
Y28 XTW4+10PFJ Screw
Y29 XSB3+8FJK Screw
151
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Y30 XSB3+6FJ Screw
Y31 XYA3+FF8FJ Screw
Y32 XSB23+10FJ Screw
Y33 XTB4+10FFJ Screw
Y34 XTB2+6GFJ Screw
Y35 XTW3+8PFJR Screw
Y36 XTW3+12QFJ Screw
Y37 XTB3+6GFJ Screw
Y38 XYC3+FG10FJ Screw
Y39 XTB4+8HFJ Screw
Y40 XTN5+10FFJ Screw
Y41 XYN3+F8FJK Screw
Y42 XTB3+12GFJ Screw
Y43 DZPA000098 Shoulder Screw
Y44 XYN3+J6FJ Screw
Y45 XYN4+F10FJ Screw
Y46 XTB3+12FFJ Screw
Y47 XST3+4FJ Screw
152
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/322
Y48 XTB3+4FFJ Screw
153
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points

3.1. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine cleaning and parts
replacement. It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals for
customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.
1. You should prepare the replacement parts, and cleaning tools beforehand.
2. After completing the preventive maintenance, discard the used parts and packaging in accordance with
local regulations and clean the surrounding area.
3. Before servicing the equipment, turn the power switches Off and disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.
4. Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), wear rubber gloves and eye protection.
3.1.1. Timing
1. Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive Maintenance Check List (refer
to 3.4) in the service manual.
3.1.2. Cleaning the Rollers
1. Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
2. Use the IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) sparingly.
3.1.3. Disassembly and Adjustment Precautions
Caution:
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning servicing or installation.
(When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of electrocution when servicing
the unit during a Lightning Storm. To protect yourself, disconnect the Telephone Line Cable
before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
1. After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.
2. When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful and avoid clothing from being caught by
moving components.
3. While the electricity is applied to the unit, do not connect nor disconnect the connectors on any PC
Board.
4. When handling the drum, follow the precautions listed in section 3.3.
5. Ensure to use correct screws.
6. Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical continuity.
7. To reassemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
8. Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.
3.1.4. Laser Handling Precautions
The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing and an
external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not stray or leak during photocopying operation.
However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:
1. Do not insert any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflective properties into the laser's path.
2. Before servicing the machine, remove watches, rings, or other metallic objects that you may be
wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser striking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects
being worn.) Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximum safety, please
follow the above precautions.
154
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.2. Required Tools
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Personal Notebook Computer 10 Pliers
2 Cables (USB Cable, Crossover LAN
11 Nipper
Cable, etc.)
3 SD Memory Card (128 MB - 1GB) 12 Cutter
4 Soft Cloth 13 Vacuum Cleaner
5 Isopropyl Alcohol 14 Cotton Swab
6 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 15 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
7 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 16 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
8 Molykote EM-50L Grease
Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) 17 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
Color Test Chart
9 Tweezer 18
(P/N PJQRC0119Z : LDR, PJQRC0120Z : A3)
3.2.1. Preventive Maintenance Method
Important
No. Part Description Comments
Action
1 Memory Data Check 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a precaution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
2 Auto Document Check & 1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with a soft cloth
Feeder (ADF) Clean saturated with water.
Note:
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with
a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. Clean the White Reference Sheet with a soft cloth saturated
with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
3 Scanner Unit Check & 1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Reference Sheet with
Clean Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
4 Transmitter Unit Check & 1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
Clean 2. Clean the Rollers with a soft cloth saturated with water.
5 Mirrors Check & 1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your bare
Clean hands. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth,
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol.
6 Inspection Items Check 1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & 1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
Grease
8 Timing Belts Check & 1. Check for belt looseness or abrasion.
Clean 2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.
155
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points
3 2 1 7 8
4
5
6
33
31
21, 22, 23 30
29
19 9
10
11
32
18
13 16
15
14
25
24 26
17 20
12 38
49 28
27
39
46, 48
34, 35, 36, 37
45
43
47
41
42 40
43 44
41
41
42 42
44
43
41
42
43
156
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List
The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance.
Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment
Ref.
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle Cycle Ref. Counter
No. Method Procedure
(Sheets) (Sheets)
i-ADF Unit
1 Pickup Roller 511 120K Alcohol 240K
2 Paper Feed Roller 508 120K Alcohol 240K
3 Separation Roller 610 120K Alcohol 240K
4 Registration Roller 1 817 120K Alcohol - Refer to F7-02-12
5 Registration Roller 2 818 120K Alcohol - Sect 2.2.1. ADF Count
6 Transport Roller 816 120K Alcohol -
7 Inverting Roller 809 120K Alcohol -
8 Exit Roller 814 120K Alcohol -
Fuser Unit
F7-02-65
Fuser Belt
9 Fuser Belt Unit 4926 - - 120K
Remain Count
(Count Down)
F7-02-66
Fuser Main
10 Fuser Main Unit 4927 - - 240K
Refer to Remain Count
Sect 2.2.4. (Count Down)
F7-02-65
Fuser Belt
Complete Fuser Unit
Remain Count
- (Fuser Belt Unit and 4815 - - -
F7-02-66
Fuser Main Unit)
Fuser Main
Remain Count
Intermediate Transfer Unit
Intermediate Refer to
11 3419 - - 240K
Transfer (IT) Belt Sect 2.2.9.
F7-02-51
First Transfer Roller (Replace
12 3546 - - 240K Transfer Belt
(FTR) together with
Life Count Down
Drive Roller Brush STR Unit and
13 3635 - - 240K Cleaning Unit)
Assembly
157
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Ref.
(Sheets) (Sheets)
14 Drive Roller 3604 240K Alcohol -
15 Tension Roller 3506 240K Alcohol -
16 Bias Roller 3501 240K Alcohol -
17 Backup Roller 3624 240K Alcohol -
18 Adjustment Roller 3612 240K Alcohol -
Initial Point Sensor
19 3507 240K Alcohol - F7-02-51
Roller Refer to
20 Tension Shaft 3507 240K Alcohol - Transfer Belt
Sect 2.2.9.
Life Count Down
Dry Cotton
21 Initial Point Sensor 3709 120K -
Swab
Color Registration
Dry Cotton
22 and Image Density 3820 120K -
Swab
Sensor
Color Registration Dry Cotton
23 3821 120K -
Sensor Swab
Refer to
Sect 2.2.9.
F7-02-52
24 Cleaning Unit 3418 - - 120K (Replace
STR Life Count
together with
STR Unit)
Automatic Duplex Unit (Lower)
Refer to
Sect 2.2.5.
Second Transfer F7-02-52
25 2535 - - 120K (Replace
Roller (STR) Unit STR Life Count
together with
Cleaning Unit)
26 ADU 3rd Roller 2723 120K Alcohol -
27 ADU 4th Roller 2722 120K Alcohol - Refer to
OHP Detection Sect 2.2.5.
28 2721 120K Alcohol -
Reflector
Automatic Duplex Unit (Upper)
30 Feed Roller 2402 120K Alcohol - Refer to
31 ADU 1st Roller 2408 120K Alcohol - Sect 2.2.5.
32 ADU 2nd Roller 2304 120K Alcohol -
Paper Exit Transportation Unit
Refer to
Sect 2.2.6.
Developer Unit
34 Y (Yellow) - - 480K
35 M (Magenta) - - 480K F7-02-40-44
Refer to
5443. Deve. Unit
36 C (Cyan) - - 480K Sect 2.2.10.
Count
37 BK (Black) - - 480K
158
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Ref.
(Sheets) (Sheets)
Developer
- Y (Yellow) - - 480K
- M (Magenta) - - 480K F7-02-40-44
Refer to
5445 Deve. Unit
- C (Cyan) - - 480K Sect 2.2.10.
Count
- BK (Black) - - 480K
Main Paper Feed Module
38 Registration Roller 2112 120K Alcohol -
Upper Intermediate
39 1834 120K Alcohol - Refer to
Roller
Sect 2.2.12.
Lower Intermediate
40 1835 120K Alcohol -
Roller
Paper Feed Module
Paper Feed Roller
41 1922 120K Alcohol 240K
(1st/2nd/3rd/4th)
DFP Roller F7-03
42 1911 120K Alcohol 240K
(1st/2nd/3rd/4th) Refer to 1st/2nd/3rd/4th
Pickup Roller Sect 2.2.13. Paper Tray
43 1926 120K Alcohol 240K Count
(1st/2nd/3rd/4th)
Intermediate Roller
44 6801 120K Alcohol -
(3rd/4th)
Sheet Bypass
45 Paper Feed Roller 3003 120K Alcohol 240K
F7-03
46 Pickup Roller F 3005 120K Alcohol 240K Refer to
Sheet Bypass
47 DFP Roller 3111 120K Alcohol 240K Sect 2.2.8.
Count
48 Pickup Roller R 3012 120K Alcohol 240K
LSU
When
Toner
Aperture
Waste
49 LSU Aperture Glass - Cleaning - - -
Container
Tool
is
Replaced
Note:
1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
Counter - 00 (List Print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size,
orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print and/or ambient conditions.
159
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.5. Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter
When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show "Call for P/M" on the LCD Display. The PM
Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.
1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance), refer to section 3.3. and 3.4.
2. Press the "Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously.
3. Press “8” to enter the F8 Mode.
4. Reset the desired Counter on the list below.
5. Press "Stop" key first, and then press "Function" + "Clear" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
Replace
Ref. Ref. Replace Reset
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle
No. Counter Alarm Counter
(Sheets)
i-ADF Unit
1 Pickup Roller 511 240K PM Display Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87
F7-02-12
2 Paper Feed Roller 508 240K (Machine (ADF PM Cycle) and change to the
ADF Count
3 Separation Roller 610 240K Continues) desired value.
Fuser Unit
F7-02-65 119K:
Fuser Belt Alarm Perform “F8-26 Fuser Belt Counter
Remain Reset”.
9 Fuser Belt Unit 4926 120K
Count 121k: (F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count
(Count Machine is also initialized by this operation)
Down) Stop
F7-02-66 239K:
Perform “F8-27 Fuser Main Counter
Fuser Main Alarm
Reset”.
Remain
10 Fuser Main Unit 4927 240K (F7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain
Count 241K:
Count is also initialized by this
(Count Machine
operation)
Down) Stop
Perform “F8-26 Fuser Belt Counter
Reset”, and “F8-27 Fuser Main
Complete Fuser Unit Counter Reset”.
- (Fuser Belt Unit and 4815 - - - (F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain
Fuser Main Unit) Count, and F7-02-66 Fuser Main
Remain Count are also initialized by
this operation)
Intermediate Transfer Unit
Intermediate 239K: Perform “F8-29 Transfer Belt Life
11 3419 240K F7-02-51
Transfer (IT) Belt Alarm Count Down”.
Transfer
First Transfer Roller (F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life Count
12 3546 240K Belt Life
(FTR) 241K: Down is also initialized by this
Count
Drive Roller Brush Machine operation)
13 3635 240K Down
Assembly Stop Perform “F8-30 Color Registration”.
F7-02-52
24 Cleaning Unit 3418 120K STR Life 120K:
Count Alarm Perform “F8-32 STR Life Count”.
Automatic Duplex Unit (Lower) (F7-02-52 STR Life Count is also
F7-02-52 (Machine initialized by this operation)
Second Transfer Continues)
25 2535 120K STR Life
Roller (STR) Unit
Count
160
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Replace
Ref. Ref. Replace Reset
No. Mechanical Parts Cycle
No. Counter Alarm Counter
(Sheets)
Perform “F8-29 Transfer Belt Life
Count Down”.
(F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life Count
Down is also initialized by this
IT Unit, STR Unit and
- - - - - operation)
Cleaning Unit
Perform “F8-32 STR Life Count”.
(F7-02-52 STR Life Count is also
initialized by this operation)
Perform “F8-30 Color Registration”.
Developer Unit
34 Y (Yellow) 480K F7-02-40- 480K:
Perform “F8-09 Deve. Unit Count”.
35 M (Magenta) 480K 43 Alarm
(F7-02-40, 41, 42, 43 Deve. Unit
36 C (Cyan) 5443. 480K Deve. Unit
Count, and F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are
Count (Machine
37 BK (Black) 480K also initialized by this operation)
Continues)
Developer
- Y (Yellow) - F7-02-45- <Only in case of Problem>
- M (Magenta) - 48 - Perform “F8-11 Developer Count”.
5445 Deve. Unit (F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also
- C (Cyan) -
Count initialized by this operation)
- BK (Black) -
Paper Feed Module
Paper Feed Roller
41 1922 240K F7-03
(1st/2nd/3rd/4th)
1st/2nd/
DFP Roller
42 1911 240K 3rd/4th
(1st/2nd/3rd/4th)
Paper Tray PM Display
Pickup Roller Enter the Copy Service Mode
43 1926 240K Count only
(1st/2nd/3rd/4th) F5-70 (PM Cycle) and change to
Sheet Bypass the desired value.
(Machine
45 Paper Feed Roller 3003 240K F7-03 Continues)
46 Pickup Roller F 3005 240K Sheet
47 DFP Roller 3111 240K Bypass
48 Pickup Roller R 3012 240K Count
Note:
When replacing the IT Unit, the STR Unit and Cleaning Unit are also replaced at the same time, and then
perform F8-29, F8-32 and F8-30 Service Mode operations.
3.6. Lubrication Point
Please refer to the Preventive Maintenance (PM) list to ensure the highest degree of reliability. The
inspection interval is usually 120K copies or more, however this interval may be reduced due to
environmental conditions.
161
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.7. Updating the Firmware
3.7.1. Firmware Configuration
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by a Main CPU which is located on the System Control (SC) PC Board and
other sub CPUs on the other PCBs. The Firmware of SC PCB, Engine Control (EC) PCB, Scanner
Control (SCN) PCB and Fax Control (FCB) PCB can be updated using a PC or an SD Memory Card.
SC PC Board
Ethernet Port On Board
PC F-ROM
CPU 64 MB
USB Port
PC
F-ROM
NIP SD Memory Card Port on the SC PC Board
SD Memory Card Port 2 MB
for G3 Fax / Internet Fax Image Memory
in Front & PS Fonts
SD Memory Card
(64 MB up to 1 GB)
SD Memory Card
(64 MB up to 1 GB)
Engine Control PC Board
PCMCIA/ F-ROM
Printer Engine Control Program
PC Card CPU
1 MB
Adapter
PCMCIA/PC Card Slot Scanner Control PC Board

in Front
F-ROM
CPU Scanner Control Program
512 KB
Fax Control PC Board
F-ROM
CPU Fax Communication Control Program
4 MB
Panel PC Board
CPU Panel Control Program
B. SC PC Board Firmware
A total of 66 MB of Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB.
C. Firmware Updating Ports
Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port
The machine's Firmware can be updated using a PC via Local Area Network (LAN) Port. This
method is convenient when the PC and the machine are already connected to LAN.
Even if the machine is not connected to a LAN, it can be updated by connecting Ethernet LAN Port
and a Crossover Cable.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operating Instructions and 3.7.2. for additional details.
162
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(2) USB Port
The machine's Firmware can be updated using your Notebook PC via an USB Port. This method is
convenient when you brought a Notebook PC into the customer's site for the purpose of updating
the firmware.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operating Instructions and 3.7.3. for additional details.
(3) SD Memory Card (New Method: Convenient Method without a PC)
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master SD Memory Card in the SD Card Slot in
Front of the machine (not the SD Card Slot on the SC PCB). This method is convenient when you
are visiting the customer's site for the purpose of updating the firmware without a PC.
The Master SD Memory Card can be created by copying the Firmware from the Web site using the
SD Memory Firmware Writing Tool Software and a PC with SD Memory Card Slot or with an SD
Memory Card Reader & Writer.
Just a single Master SD Memory Card is sufficient to update the SC PCB with the Standard, or with
all Optional configurations (PS and Fax options included), as long as all the necessary firmware
codes are stored onto the card. The easiest way is to use “Auto Mode” for updating all necessary
firmware at once.
Caution:
Before updating the Firmware using the SD Memory Card, remove the PCMCIA/PC Card
Adapter from the PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front of the machine.
163
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.7.2. Updating through a LAN Port
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a Crossover
Cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
Caution:
Before proceeding with the Firmware Update, clear all Fax or Internet Fax jobs first or the Firmware will
not update properly. Follow the steps below to perform All Job Clear.
1. Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
2. Press "9", and then “Start” keys to enter the F9 Service Mode (Unit Maintenance).
3. Select "00 FAX Service Mode".
4. Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM Initialize“.
5. Select "09 All Job Clear", and then “Yes”.
After clearing the jobs, the machine reboots automatically and returns to the standby mode.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code, or
access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access the Service Web site to download the
latest Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the
designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). Make sure the unit's
Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in the
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder. The Firmware Type window appears and proper Firmware
Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.
Then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
164
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder

\ DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx \ Sc_Std \ CMFP1_SCAAVxxxxx_xx
\ Sc_Ps \ CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x
\ Fcb \ CMFP1FCBAAVxxxxx_xx
\ Ec \ CMFP1_ECAAVxxxxx
\ Scn \ CMFP1SCNAAVxxxxx_xx
When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
5) Confirmation
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
Confirm the F5 & F6 parameters according to the printed lists in Step 3 above if the settings are
different.
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, refer to Section 3.7.7. “Firmware
Emergency Recovery”.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
3.7.3. Updating through USB Port

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.
Caution:
1. Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code, or
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
165
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access onto the Service Web site to download the
latest Tool and Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the
Example:
From:
To:
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 (Update From USB) to enable the unit to accept the programming code
from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in the

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware

Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected
automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.
166
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5) Confirmation
different.
Note:
location.
3.7.4. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory Card
If the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a package.
(Only one SD Memory Card is required (minimum 128 MB size) to update the SC PCB with the Standard, or
with all Optional firmware configurations.)
Caution:
Caution:
1. Remove the PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter from the PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front of the machine.
2. Install the Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.
Do not install it into the Card Slot on the SC PCB, or the machine will automatically format the SD Card
for the Fax Image Memory.
3. Do not remove the SD Memory Card from the SD Card Slot in Front of the machine or turn the power
OFF during Formatting or while Updating the Firmware.
<Procedure>
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
2. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.
4. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the ON position.
5. Press the "Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
If selecting the "Auto Mode", copies all the necessary firmware at once, and after the update is
completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
8. Turn the Power Switch on the back side of the machine to the OFF position.
9. Remove the Master Firmware SD Memory Card from the machine.
11. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in Step 7, refer to Section 3.7.7. “Firmware Emergency
Recovery”.
167
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.7.5. Creating a Master Firmware SD Memory Card using a PC
1) Install the “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” to your PC.
The “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” can be downloaded from your sales company’s Web
Site or the PCC DIC Service Web site. Please refer to the Readme file for additional details.

Example:
From:
To:
3) Preparing the Master Firmware SD Memory Card

1. Insert the SD Memory Card (128 MB to 1 GB) into the SD Memory Card Slot.
2. Perform the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool.
3. After all firmware codes are copied, remove the SD Memory Card from the Slot.
The SD Memory Card is now ready to use for firmware update.

(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD and the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing
Tool OI.)
3.7.6. Notice after installing the HDD option

After the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar
to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below
when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive
Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.
3.7.7. Firmware Emergency Recovery

The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to use the Master SD
Memory Card method. (Even the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a
package, only SC PCB Firmware can be recovered.)
If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power OFF.
Before proceeding to the next step, you must create the Master SD Memory Card (read the
appropriate sections first 3.5.5).
2. Turn the power On while holding the [Energy Saver] key.
3. When the message “Selected Emergency Firmware Update” is on the LCD display, release the
[Energy Saver] key.
During the recovery mode, the LCD displays “Reading SC Firmware”, “Writing SC Firmware” and
“SC Firmware updated has been completed”. Then the machine reboots itself and returns to
standby.
After the SC Firmware recovering, if other firmware for EC, FCB, SCN PCBs and PS option are required,
168
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
use the Master SD Memory Card to update the firmware by selecting the “Auto Mode” to the required
level. Refer to 3.7.4. (Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory Card).
Note:
After the SC Firmware recovering, if the Error Code E5-12 or E5-13 is showed, use the Master SD
Memory Card to update the firmware selecting the required firmware, ES, SCN, FCB or PS, refer to
3.7.4. In this case, the Network update method can not be used.
3.7.8. Firmware Version
SC : CMFP1 SC A A Vxxxxx PU
Destination Code
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
D : PS Option
Model Number
EC : CMFP1 EC A A V1xxxx

AA: Fixed
Model Number
SCN : CMFP1SCN A A V1xxxx

AA: Fixed
Model Number
169
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
FCB : CMFP1FCB A A Vxxxxx AU
Destination Code (FAX)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
D : PS Option
Model Number
170
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.8. Adjusting Copy Quality
3.8.1. Manual Copy Quality Adjustment
1. Press the “Function” key.
2. Select “General Settings”.
3. Select “01 Manual Copy Quality Adj”.
4. Select “On”.
5. Select “OK” to begin the Manual Copy Quality adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 1-2 minutes).
6. Press the “Reset” key, to exit the General Settings mode.
3.8.2. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)
1. Press the “Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
2. Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.
3. Select “Quality Adj.” and set the Density to the center position.
Select “Black”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial” and “OK” to set the machine to Mono Text/ Photo
Density.
4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
below.
Text/Photo Text Photo
A Not visible A Not visible A Not visible
.. . .. . .. .
. . . . . .1 Hardly visible 1 Not visible 1 Clearly visible
. . .
2 Clearly visible 2 Clearly visible 2 Clearly visible
3 3 3
5. Press the "Reset" key twice to exit to the initial screen of the F2 Service Mode.
6. Press the “6”, and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Service Mode.
7. Enter F6-221 Mono T/P Density(lt) Mode.
8. Select "Input".
9. Enter the new content.
10. Enter a 2-digit value.
Note:
The "Reset" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.
(+) : Lighter
(-) : Darker
1. Select "OK", and then “Close”.
2. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter F2 Service Mode.
3. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat Step (3) to (10) until proper density is attained.
<Light Part Adjustment>
F6-220 : Mono Text Density(lt)
F6-222 : Mono Photo Density(lt)
2. Press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
171
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.8.3. Color Exposure (Special Adjustment for Customer's Requirement)
1. Press the "Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
3. Select “Quality Adj” and set the Density to the center position.
Select “Full Color”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial” and “OK” to set the machine to Color T/ P Density.
4. Make a copy of Color Test Chart 101, or the Customer’s Document and verify the density.
7. Enter F6-211 Color T/P Density(lt) Mode.
8. Select "Input".
Note:
(+) : Lighter
(-) : Darker
2. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.
Note:
Repeat Step (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.
F6-210 : Color Text Density(lt)
F6-212 : Color Photo Density(lt)
<Dark Part Adjustment>
F6-215 : Color Text Density(dk)
F6-216 : Color T/P Density(dk)
F6-217 : Color Photo Density(dk)
Color Test Chart 101 (P/N PJQRC0119Z : LDR, PJQRC0120Z : A3)
172
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
Ver. 1.1
3.8.4.
When the following items are replaced or cleaned, perform the adjustments in the correct order.
General
Adjustment Clean F8 Mode Mech. Image Remarks
Settings
TDC Adjustment TDC Adjustment

(When replacing the (When replacing the
Developer Unit ) Developer only) Auto
Order IT Belt Fuser Fuser
No. Work Toner Toner IT belt STR Print
Belt IT Open Open Length Color Belt Main Color Copy
Reg. / Reg. Counter Counter Image
Optics Initial Metal Front Front Adj. Measu- Reg. Counter Counter Skew Quality
Density Sensors Adj. Close Close Reset Reset Control
Point Rollers Cover, Cover, Toner rement F8-30 Reset Reset Adj. Check
Sensor (L/R) TDC Front Front F8-29 F8-32 (APIC)
then then Density (F8-28) F8-26 F8-27
(F8-09) Cover Cover *1
Part Item Power Power (F8-11)
SW ON SW ON
1 Installation Main 1 2
2 Optics 1 2
3 Toner Reg. / Density Sensor 1 2 3 4
Cleaning
4 Toner Reg. Sensors (L/R) 1 2 3 4
5 Belt Initial Point Sensor 1 2 3 4 5
6 Developer Unit 1 *4 2 3 4 When performing F8-09, APIC is also performed.
7 Developer 1 *4 2 3 4 When performing F8-11, APIC is also performed.
When new Drum is detected, Drum counter is
8 Drum Unit 1
reset, Color Reg. and APIC are also performed.
Developer Unit / Developer / Drum
9 Do not replace the Developer Unit (Developer) & Drum Unit together. Replace one at a time.
Unit
173
10 Toner Reg. / Density Sensor 1 2 3
11 Toner Reg. Sensors (L/R) 1 2 3
12 Toner Density Sensor & Developer 1 *4 2 3 4 When performing F8-11, APIC is also performed.
Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)
When performing F8-29, APIC and Belt length

13 IT Belt / FTR / Drive Roller Brush 1 *5 2 3 4
Replace measurement are also performed.
When performing F8-32, APIC is also performed.
14 Cleaning Blade Assy & STR Unit 1 2 3
Replace together at the same time.
15 SC PCB 1 *2
16 EC PCB 1 *2 2
17 PNL1 PCB 1 *2
18 To prevent the Serial Number Error from
SC PCB/EC PCB/PNL1PCB Do not replace the SC, EC & PNL1 PCBs together. Replace one at a time.
occurring.
19 LSU 1 *3 2 3
20 Fuser Belt Unit 1 2
21 Fuser Main Unit 1 2
22 Complete Fuser Unit 1 2 3
Note:
*1. Perform Auto Print Image Control (APIC) by following these steps: Press Function, and then select General Settings, 01 Manual Copy Quality Adj., ON, and then OK.
*2. Before replacing any PCBs, print out the F5/F6/F7 Parameter Lists using the F7, and F9 Modes.
*3. After Mechanical adjustment, also adjust the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side, etc.
*4. To perform F8-09 or F8-11, open the Front Cover first before turning the Power SW ON.
*5. When replacing the IT Belt, clean all the Metal Rollers, such as Bias Roller, and Feed Rollers with a soft cloth saturated with Alcohol first. Toner stuck on the Rollers will affect the Print quality, and may reduce the life of the IT.
6. Approximately after printing 100 pages, the machine will self-adjust itself for Copy Quality.
APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DP-C262/C322
3.9. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side,
Color Registration
After installing the System Console option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must be
performed.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the following
procedure.
3.9.1. Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into Tray 2, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size.
Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Perform the Service Modes F1-03 to F1-07 (Print Test Pattern 1 to 5).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-000 to F6-007 (F6-002, and F6-003 are not used),
to adjust the gap to 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
7. Press "Reset" key first, and then Press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit
the Service Mode.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).
For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)
Two lines are printed
5 mm 5 mm
Two lines are printed
3.9.2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

1. Insert paper into Tray 1, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out
all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Modes F6-040 to F6-044, to adjust the gap to 5 mm, for all the trays.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Press "Reset" key first, and then press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit
the Service Mode.
3.9.3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU
1. Insert paper intoTray 1, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out
all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-045 to F6-049, to adjust the gap to 5 mm, for all the trays.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Press "Reset" key first, and then press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit
the Service Mode.
174
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.9.4. Color Registration
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Perform the Service Mode F8-30.
4. Press "Reset" key first and then press "Function" + "Clear" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
3.10. Calibrating the LCD

1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position and leave the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position.
2. Ensure that the SD Memory Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is
installed in the machine, remove it.
3. Press and hold the “Energy Saver “and “Copy” keys down simultaneously, then turn the Main Power
Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position and continue holding the keys for
approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable.
The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a “+” on the upper left edge of the display.
Note:
If you do not hold the "Energy Saver" and "Copy" keys down long enough, the Display may go
OFF.
4. Press the “+” on the upper left edge of the display, press the “+” on the center and press the “+” on the
lower right edge of the display. Then the display goes to standby.
Caution:
Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball
Point Pen, etc.
5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF (O) then ON (I) position.
3.11. LEDs on the EC PCB

The LEDs are mounted on the EC PCB, which are working properly. The LEDs and the signal names are
listed below.
LED 1 : +5V
LED 3 : +24VF (Voltage for Fan)
LED 2 : +24VM (Voltage for Interlock and Motor drive)
LED 5 : +5Vp (5V pilot)
Note:
1. LED 1 to 3 will be off when machine is in Sleep mode.
2. The LED numbers are printed near the IPC PCB connector. (Order from left side)
175
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3.12. Adjusting Scanner Skew
<Leading Edge>
1. Remove the Glass Assembly, refer to Section 2.2.2.
2. When the printed image is skewed to the left as illustrated.
a. Turn Screw (A) Clockwise.
b. Turn Screw (B) Counterclockwise.
Note:
(1) Turn both Screws (A) and (B) for each adjustment by the same amount.
(2) Amount of adjustment: Half a turn of both screws, adjusts the skewed image by approximately
0.0275 in (0.7 mm).
(3) Do not turn 2-3 turns at once.
<Side Edge>
1. Remove the Glass Assembly and move the Scanner Front Cover, refer to Section 2.2.3.
2. When the printed image is skewed to the left as illustrated.
a. Loosen the Screw (C).
b. Slide the Mirror Frame 2 in the direction illustrated below.
Note:
(1) Amount of adjustment: Sliding the Mirror Frame 0.0394 in (1 mm) in the Direction (D), adjusts the
skewed image by approximately 0.0315 in (0.8 mm).
(2) Do not slide the Mirror Frame 2-3 mm at a time.
7.87 in (200 mm) Screw (A)

Screw (B)
<Leading Edge>
Amount of
Adjustment:
0.0275 in (0.7 mm)
/ Half Turn
11.81 in
(300 mm)
Screw (C)
<Side Edge>
Sliding
Direction (D)
Amount of Adjustment:
0.0315 in (0.8 mm) / 0.0394 in (1 mm) Slide
176
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4 Troubleshooting
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START
Plug in the Power Cord, and then

turn the Power Switches ON.
Does the unit power up No

normally?
Does the LCD display No
Yes function correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display
Troubleshoot any 3-digit

CODE displayed
Does the unit produce No

normal copies?
Yes Does the original document No
feed through correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot the
Document Feeder
Does the recording paper No

exit the unit?
Yes Check for recording
paper path problems.
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling, Troubleshoot printed
information codes, or copy quality problems
diagnostic codes.)
177
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.2. Improper LCD Display
START
Check connectors: CN58 & 59 (SC PCB)

and CN5 & 8 (PNL1 PCB).
Yes
Is LED/LCD displayed? Does the display appear normal?
No Yes No
Does CN58, pin 3 on the SC Yes

PCB measure +5 VDC?
No
Replace the LCD No
Replace the SC PCB. Module. Replace the
Touch Panel.
No Replace the Low
Is the trouble Is the trouble resolved?
resolved? Voltage Power Yes
Yes Supply Unit.
END
END
178
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems
4.3.1. Printed Image
Print Test Pattern
Horizontal Line (Front to Rear), Check/Clean/ Diameter Pitch

Vertical Line (Feed direction), Cyclical Replace (mm) (mm)
Stripes or Dots on the Printed Image Charge Roller 14 44.0
Magnet Roller 18 28.3
FTR Roller 18 56.5
STR Bias Roller 21 66.0
Vertical Stripe
Check: OPC Drum; Charge/Developer STR Roller 28 88.0
Clean: IT Belt, STR Unit, Cleaning Unit, OPC Drum 30 94.2
LSU/Scanner, Glass/Mirror/Lens Fuser Belt -- 148
IT Belt -- 986
Horizontal Stripe (Cyclical) Test Pattern F1 Mode

- Check the periodic pitch. F1-24/25/26/27: Y/M/C/BK Halftone (2x2dots)
- Clean the appropriated parts. F1-36 : BK Solid Patch A3/LDR
- Replace the inoperative parts/unit. F1-37 : BK by YMC Halftone Patch A3/LDR
Not OK Caution:
Print Test Pattern
Check the Image 1. Gently clean the soiled area only as
described below:
OK a) Clean the Cleaning Unit with a Dry Soft
END cloth; carefully removing paper powder,
pieces of paper.
b) Clean the IT Belt & the STR Unit with
a Dry Soft cloth; carefully removing the
Toner first, and then cleaning with a Soft
cloth saturated with Alcohol.
2. If the problem is not resolved, then replace
the inoperative Part/Unit.
4.3.2. Copy Image Quality Adjustment

4.3.2.1. Monochrome Image Quality Adjustment
Mode Adjustment F-Code Function

Text F6-220 Density Adjustment of Highlighted area
T/P F6-221 * Perform after completing the printer and scanner
Photo F6-222 adjustment
* Not used for reducing the density compensation
Mono Density Adj. -32 - 31
* Adjust according to customer's needs
Copy Highlight 0 (default)
Default: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Lighter to Darker)
Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etc
T/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color
Photo mode: Useful for Photo
179
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Text F6-225 Density Adjustment of Dark area
T/P F6-226 * Not used for reducing the density compensation
Density Adj. Photo F6-227 * Adjust according to customer's needs
Dark -32 - 31
0 (default)
Text F6-205 Contrast Adjustment (For 1-Color, 2-Color)
Contrast Photo F6-207 * Adjust according to customer's needs
Default: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Higher to Lower)
Adjustment -32 - 31
0 (default)
Text F6-230 Image sharpness adjustment (Color and Monochrome)
Mono T/P F6-231 * Not used for reducing the density compensation
Copy Sharpness Photo F6-232 * Adjust according to customer's needs
(BK/Color) -3 - 3
0 (default)
Slice level F6-235 Detection level for color document(s) in Auto Mode
Area level F6-236 * Copier Function Setting No: 31 Color Judge Level setting is
0 - 15 also available: 1 (Monochrome)=>4 (Default)=>7 (Color)
6 (default) (Combination with slice level and area)
(1) Slice Level
Color Judge * Use for the light density color original
Level Default: 6 : 0 => 15 (Color to Monochrome)
(2) Area Level
* Use for the small color area original
Note:
Dust might be detected under low area level setting
Default: 6 : 0 => 15 (Color to Monochrome)
4.3.2.2. Color Image Quality Adjustment

Text F6-210 Density Adjustment of Highlighted area for Color Image
T/P F6-211 * Perform after completing the printer and scanner
Photo F6-212 adjustment
* Not used for reducing the density compensation
Density Adj. -32 - 31
* Adjust according to customer's needs
Highlight 0 (default)
Color T/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color
Copy Photo mode: Useful for Photo
Text F6-215 Density Adjustment of Dark Area
Photo F6-217 * Adjust according to customer's needs
Density Adj.
Dark -32 - 31
0 (default)
180
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Text F6-200 Contrast Adjustment (For 1-Color, 2-Color)
Contrast Photo F6-202 * Adjust according to customer's needs
Adjustment -32 - 31
0 (default)
Chroma Adjustment
-32 - 31 * Not used for Monochrome and 2-Color copy
Saturation F6-240
0 (default) * Halftone step will decrease under high saturation
Color Color Balance Magnification Ratio Adjustment for 1 Step
Copy Color * Used for Color mode ( Y/M/C/K )
0 - 10
Balance F6-241 Note:
5 (default) Copier Function Setting No: 15
Ratio
Default: 5 : 0 => 10 + (Smaller to Larger)
Tint Magnification Ratio Adjustment for 1 Step
-1 - 2
Tint Ratio F6-242 Note:Copier Function Setting No: 14
0 (default)
Default: 0 : -1 => 2 + (Smaller to Larger)
Hue Circle Adjustment
-3 - 3
Hue Circle F6-243 Note:
Not required under normal conditions
0 (default)
Default: 0 : -3 => 3 + (CW -: CCW rotation 10deg./step)
181
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.3. Copy Skewing or Color Deviation
AAAA
Mod e BBBB
Copy le CCCC
Samp
START
1. Adjust the Printer Registration.
(section 3.9)
2. Perform F8-30 Color Registration
Is the Test Pattern printout No for Color Document.
in Copier F1 Mode normal? (section 3.9.4)
Yes 3. Check or replace the LSU.
(section 2.2.11)
Is the Scanner operating No

Check the Scanner mechanism.
properly? (section 2.2.2)
Yes
Is the ADF operating No Check the ADF mechanism.

properly? (section 2.2.1)
Yes
END
182
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.4. Black Copy
Paper Travel
START
No
Is the Test Pattern printout in
Copier F1 Mode normal?
1. Check all the connectors
Yes (Normal) on the SC PCB.
2. Check the Scanner mechanism.
3. Replace the SC PCB.
4. Replace the AFE PCB.
5. Replace the CCD Unit.
Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operating properly?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
Is the HVPS1 operating No

properly?
Yes 1. Check all the connectors and
voltages on the HVPS1.
2. Check the high voltage terminal
on the HVPS1.
3. Replace two (2 ) HVPS1 Units.
Is the EC PCB operating No

properly?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the EC PCB.
2. Replace the EC PCB.
END
183
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.5. Blank Copy
Paper Travel
START
No
1. Check all the connectors
Yes (Normal) on the SC PCB.
2. Check the Scanner mechanism.
4. Replace the AFE PCB.
5. Replace the CCD Unit.
Yes (Normal)
Is "F8-30 Color Registration"
results normal?
No Replace the SC PCB.
No
Is the HVPS1, HVPS2
normal? 1. Check all the connectors and
voltages on the HVPS1 and HVPS2.
Yes 2. Check the high voltage terminal
on the HVPS1.
3. Replace two (2 ) HVPS1 and HVPS2.
Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
1. Remove the particles from the
No laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
Is the EC PCB operating No

properly?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the EC PCB.
2. Replace the EC PCB.
END
184
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.6. Vertical White Lines
Paper Travel
START
No
Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Replace the recording paper.
Is the Drum/Developer No
Yes Replace the Drum/Developer Unit.

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path? 1. Remove the particles from
No the laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
Is the Fuser belt surfaces No

clean?
Yes
Replace the Fuser Belt Unit.
END
185
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Vertical Line Sample
Check point:
The Vertical Line
is easier to see
in this area
The Vertical Line

is harder to see
in this area.
White
Balance White
Plate Balance
Original Document
Plate
ADF Flatbed
Optical Line
Clean the Glass & Mirror
To differentiate whether the Vertical Line(s) is caused by the Scanner, or the Printer.
1. Make a copy of the Test Chart by enlarging it to 110%.
2. If the Vertical Line moves, then it is caused by the Scanner.
If the Vertical Line does not move, then it is caused by the Printer.
186
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.7. Ghost Images
Paper Travel
AAA
A
START
No
Yes
Is the recording paper damp? Yes
No
Is the IT Unit operating

properly?
Check the IT mechanism.
Is the Fuser Belt surface No

clean?
Yes
END
187
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.8. Vertical Dark Lines
Paper Travel
START
No
Yes
Is the Drum/Developer Unit No

operating properly?
Yes
Is the LSU operating properly?
No
Replace the LSU.
Is the IT Unit operating No

properly?
Yes Check the IT mechanism.

clean?
Yes Replace the Fuser Belt Unit.
END
188
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.9. Horizontal Dark Lines
Paper Travel
START
Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Yes
Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
Is the LSU operating

properly?
Yes Replace the LSU.
Is the HVPS operating No

properly?
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltages on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.

properly?

clean?
Yes
END
189
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.10. Dark Background
Paper Travel
START
No
Yes
No
Yes
Replace the Drum/Developer Unit.
No
Is the LSU operating properly?
Yes
Replace the LSU.
Is the HVPS operating No

properly?

properly?
Yes
END
190
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.11. Light Print
Paper Travel
START
Yes
No
Yes
No
Replace the paper.
No
Is the Drum/Developer Unit
operating properly?
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or
stains blocking the Laser Unit
path? 1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
No 2. Replace the LSU.
No
Is the HVPS operating properly?
Yes
1. Check all connectors and
No
Is the IT Unit operating properly?
Yes
END
191
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.12. Horizontal White Lines
Paper Travel
START
No
Yes
No
Yes
Replace the Drum/Developer Unit.
Yes
Is the HVPS operating
properly?
No 1. Check all connectors and
No
Is the IT Unit operating
properly?

clean?
Yes
END
192
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.13. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
START
P
Yes
No
No
Is the Fuser Unit operating
properly?
Yes Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)
END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor breakdown into an open-
circuit.
193
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.14. Voids in Solid Areas
Paper Travel
START
No

properly?

clean?
Yes
END
194
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.15. Black Dots
Paper Travel
START

properly?
Yes

clean?
Yes
END
195
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.16. Recording Paper Creases
Paper Travel
START
No

or stains in the paper path?
No Remove any obstructions and / or
clean the paper path.
Is the recording paper skewing? Yes
No Ensure the paper is set correctly in

the Paper Tray and that the Paper
Guides are properly adjusted.
Are the Fuser Belt and Pressure Yes

Roller surfaces soiled or are
there any foreign particles or 1. Remove any foreign particles
stains in the Fuser Unit? and / or clean the stains.
No 2. Replace the Fuser Belt Unit.
3. Replace the Fuser Unit.
END
196
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.17. Poor Printed Copy Quality
START
Is the Test Pattern printout No

in Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal? 1. Replace the EC PCB.
2. Replace the LSU.
Yes 3. Replace the HVPS.
4. Replace the Developer Unit.
Make a local copy.
No
Is the printed copy correct?
Yes
Check the connections of
CN 56/57 on the SC PCB,
the Scanning Lamp.
Perform a receiving test

with the reference fax unit.
No
Is the received copy correct?
Yes
1. Check CN352/353 on the FCB PCB.
2. Check the Telephone Line Cord.
3. Replace the FCB PCB.
Is a poor copy printed only No

when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes Telephone line quality is poor.
The transmitting machine

may be defective.
END
197
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.18. Abnormal Printing
START
Is the recording paper loaded No

in the Paper Tray properly?
Yes 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.
2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.
Is the recording paper size and No

thickness within specification?
Yes Replace with correct paper.
Is Panasonic Toner being No

used?
Yes Replace with the Panasonic Toner.
Are all switches and sensors No

operating properly?
Yes Adjust, clean or replace.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or paper pieces in the receiver
unit? Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
No from the receiver unit.
No
Do the rollers rotate properly?
Yes 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and

springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Is the receiving mechanism No

operating correctly?
Yes Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
198
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.3.19. Scanned Copy Quality Problems
START
Yes
Is the Lamp abnormal?
No
Check and replace the Lamp.

or paper pieces in the scanning
area? Remove the foreign particles or paper
No pieces from the scanning area.
Yes
Is the scanning area dirty?
No 1. Clean the Scanning Glass.
2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2.
Yes
Are the Feed Rollers dirty?
No Clean the Rollers.
Yes
Is the Scanner Block abnormal?
No 1. Check the connectors on the SC PCB.

2. Check the connectors on the CCD PCB.
3. Replace the CCD Assembly.
END
199
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.4. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface
4.4.1. Checking Network Configuration
START
Print the current Internet Parameters List
Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation

Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet No
Parameters List that you just printed. Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following

command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,

match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
No
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address: Ask the Network Administrator to verify
Subnet Mask: the proper information.
Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"
Does the current routing table for the No

Gateway match ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
Does the Default Gateway respond to the No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Check the power switch, cables and the
current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the "ping
No
IP" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the "ping host No
name" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the "telnet" No
command ?
Yes Replace the SC PCB
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the

POP/SMTP account and system status.
200
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.4.2. Testing the TCP/IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model

Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.
201
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Checking Current Configuration
Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:

DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP

The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name : ec4.labo.pcc.com
DNS Servers : 192.168.1.1
Node Type : Hybrid
NetBIOS Scope ID :
IP Routing Enabled. : No
WINS Proxy Enabled : No
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No
Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 :

Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
Physical Address : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8

DHCP Enabled : No
IP Address : 192.168.3.4
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway : 192.168.3.254
Primary WINS Server : 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity

The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
202
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
PINGing the Unit
C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com
Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254
Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com
Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.

Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
203
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send.
-w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000
Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:

4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.
The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name)
is available, it will be displayed as well.
This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:

a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.
To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>
Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254
2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
204
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5. Managing Network Route Tables
In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.
The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:
Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface

192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.254
192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only
a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some
are shown below:
• MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
• Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
• Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
• METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
205
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
192.168.3.2 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working
properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com
Address: 192.168.1.1
NS (Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.
[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
MX (Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
sv1 A 192.168.1.1
sv2 A 192.168.1.2
ec5 A 192.168.1.4
ec4 A 192.168.3.4
ef1 A 192.168.3.5
(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)
206
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command
TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]

Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel
207
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.5. Error Codes (For Copier)
The self-diagnostic functions detect malfunctions in the important components of the copier.
When any malfunction occurs, the copier stops, and displays a relevant error message on the Panel
Display.
4.5.1. User Error Codes (U Code)
Note:
Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Code Item Check Points
U0 Key Counter 1. Card Key is not installed.
2. Key Counter Harness is disconnected.
3. Department Code is not assigned.
U1 Close Front Cover 1. Front Cover is open.
2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Front Cover Sensor is defective
4. LVPS connector is disconnected.
5. LVPS is defective.
6. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
7. EC PCB is defective.
U4 Close Finisher 1. Finisher is open.
2. Paper is in the output bin.
3. Stapler is empty.
U6 Close Right Cover 1. Right Cover is open.
(Feed Cover 1/ Feed Cover 2 / 2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.
ADU Cover) 3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.
208
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
U7 Close Right Cover Lower 1. Right Cover is open.
(Paper Tray 1-4) 2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.
U8 Close Paper Transport Unit 1. Paper Transport Unit open.
2. Paper Transport Unit Sensor disconnected.
3. LVPS connector disconnected.
4. LVPS defective.
5. EC PCB connector disconnected.
6. EC PCB defective.
U9 Close Left Cover 1. Left Cover is open.
2. Left Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Left Cover Sensor is defective.
U11 Remove Paper in Finisher 1. Paper left in the Finisher.
2. Finisher Paper Exit Sensor defective.
U12 Close Finisher Staple Cover / 1. Close Finisher Staple Cover.
Upper Cover 2. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is defective.
No Punch Dust Box 4. Punch Dust Box is not installed(FS325 only).
U13 No Toner or Low Toner 1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed.
(Y, M, C, BK) 2. No or Low Toner.
U14 Replace Toner Waste 1. Toner Waste Container is full.
Container
U15 No Toner Waste Container 1. Toner Waste Container is not installed.
2. Toner Waste Container Sensor is disconnected.
3. Toner Waste Container Sensor is defective.
U16 No Developer Unit 1. Developer Unit is not installed.
(Y, M, C, BK)
U18 Total Copy Limit Over 1. Department Copy Counter is full.
U20 Close ADF Cover 1. ADF Cover is open.
2. ADF is not installed correctly.
3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected.
4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective.
U21 Close ADF 1. ADF and ADF Cover are open.
2. ADF Sensor is disconnected.
3. ADF Sensor is defective.
U25 Toner Cartridge Motor Rotation 1. Toner blocked in the Toner Cartridge.
Error (Shake the Toner Cartridge to loosen the contents)
(Y, M, C, BK)
U27 No Fuser Unit 1. Fuser Unit is not installed.
U28 No Drum Unit 1. Drum Unit is not installed.
(Y, M, C, BK)
209
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
U30 Close Punch Cover 1. Punch Cover is open.
(Upper/Front Cover) 2. Punch Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Punch Cover Sensor is defective.
U31 Remove Paper in Saddle Unit 1. Paper Jam in the Saddle Unit.
2. Paper Sensor is disconnected.
3. Paper Sensor is defective.
U32 Close Saddle Unit Cover 1. Saddle Unit Cover is open.
2. Saddle Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Cover Sensor is defective.
U33 No Saddle Staple Unit 1. Staple Unit is not installed properly.
U34 Close Saddle Unit Front Cover 1. Saddle Unit Front Cover is open.
2. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is defective.
U35 Close Saddle Unit Exit Cover 1. Saddle Unit Exit Cover is open.
2. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is defective.
U90 Replace Battery 1. Internal battery requires replacement.
4.5.2. Jam Error Codes (J Code)
210
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
• Jam Sensor Location of Printer
Paper Path Sensor
Outer Exit Sensor (Paper Transport Unit)
Paper Path Sensor (ADU 0)
Paper Path
Inner Exit Sensor Sensor (ADU 1)
Fuser Paper Exit Sensor
Fuser Entrance Sensor

ADU
Intermediate Transfer Belt
Registration Sensor Paper Path

Sensor (ADU 2)
OHP Film Sensor
Paper Path Sensor (Tray 1) Sheet Bypass

NP Sensor
Paper Tray 1
Sheet Bypass
Paper Tray 2 Intermediate

Roller Sensor
Paper Path Sensor (Tray 3) Optional Intermediate

Roller Sensor
Paper Tray 3
Paper Tray 4
• Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

ADF Registration ADF Registration
Sensor 1 Sensor 3
ADF Registration ADF Exit

Sensor 2 ADF Selection
Sensor
Sensor
211
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Code Contents Section
J00 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Sheet
paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass) Bypass
J01 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 1)
J02 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 2) Paper
J03 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after Tray
J04 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
J06 The Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 2)
J07 The Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3-4) Paper
J08 The Option Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined Feed
time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3)
J09 The Option Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined
time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 4)
J11 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
J12 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the
Paper Path Sensor is activated. Paper
J13 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the Tray
J14 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the
J18 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.
Paper
(Paper Tray 1-4)
Feed
J19 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. (ADU)
J21 1. The 1st Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
2. The 1st Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller rotating.
(Paper Tray 1)
J22 1. The 2nd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
2. The 2nd Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
(Paper Tray 2) Paper
J23 1. The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization. Tray
2. The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
(Paper Tray 3)
J24 1. The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
2. The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
(Paper Tray 4)
J26 1. The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
2. The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
Paper
(Paper Tray 2)
Feed
J27 The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
(Paper Tray 3-4)
212
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
J28 1. The Option Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time before
initialization.
2. The Option Intermediate Roller detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. Paper
(Paper Tray 3) Feed
3. The Option Intermediate Roller detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
(Paper Tray 4)
J30 1. The Registration Sensor goes Off within a predetermined time. (Abnormal Paper
Fuser
Length)
2. Printing does not go Off after the Fuser Exit Sensor goes Off. (Abnormal Paper Paper
Length) Exit
J31 The Registration Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time.
J33 1. The Registration Sensor detects paper before initialization.
2. The Registration Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
(Paper Tray 1)
Paper
Feed
(Paper Tray 2-4)
(Sheet Bypass)
J35 The Media type (OHP / Paper) is mis-matched.
J38 The Paper Entrance Sensor does not go On within a predetermined time.
J39 1. The Paper Entrance Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
2. The Paper Entrance Sensor detects paper during initialization.
3. The Paper Entrance Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
J40 The Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
Fuser
Registration Sensor is activated.
J41 The Paper Exit Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time.
J42 1. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
2. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper during initialization.
3. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
J43 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Fuser
Exit Paper Sensor is activated. (Inner Tray)
Paper
J44 The Exit Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time. (Inner Tray)
Exit
J45 1. The Exit Sensor detects paper before initialization. (Outer Tray)
2. The Exit Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Inner Tray)
J50 The Transport Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. Transport
J51 The Transport Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. Transport
(ADU) ADU
J52 1. The Transport Paper Path Sensor detects paper before initialization
2. The Transport Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts
rotating. (Outer Tray)
3. The Transport Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts
rotating. (ADU) Transport
J54 The Outer Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.
J55 The Outer Exit Sensor keeps does not go Off within a predetermined time.
J56 The Outer Exit Sensor detects paper before initialization.
J60 1. The Finisher Enter Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.
2. The Finisher Enter Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
Finisher
after the Sensor is activated.
3. The Finisher Enter Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
213
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
J63 1. The Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the
Finisher
Saddle. (FS325)
Saddle
2. The Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a determined time after the
sensor is activated. (FS325)
J64 1. The Puncher is not activated correctly. (FS325) Finisher
2. The Punch Sensor goes On at the time before initialization. Punch
J65 1. The Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the
Finisher. (FS320)
2. The Paper Exit Sensor does not go Off within a determined time in the Finisher.
Finisher
(FS320)
3. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.
J66 The Stapler is not activated correctly. (FS325)
J70-79 (See the following table below)
J80 The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Paper Path Sensor 0 does not detect paper within
a predetermined time.
J81 The ADU Paper Path Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined time.
J82 The ADU Paper Path Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined time.
J83 The ADU Paper Path Sensor 0 does not go Off within a determined time.
J86 1. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 0 detects paper before initialization. ADU
2. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 0 detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.
J87 1. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 1 detects paper before initialization.
J88 1. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 2 detects paper before initialization.
J91 A Paper Tray is pulled out when feeding a paper. Paper
Tray
J92-94 (See the following table below)
<J70~79 and J92~94 Codes for i-ADF>

J70 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined time in
the ADF.
J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps dedicating paper after a predetermined time in
the ADF.
J72 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined
time after the ADF Registration Sensor 1 is activated. ADF
2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined
time after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is activated.
J73 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF
Registration Sensor 1 is deactivated.
2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF
Registration Sensor 3 is deactivated.
214
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
J74 The ADF Exit Sensor does not detect paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided Scanning.
J75 The ADF Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided Scanning.
J76 The ADF Selection Sensor does not detect paper during 2-Sided Scanning.
J77 The ADF Registration Sensor 3 keeps detecting paper during the Back Page
Scanning.
J78 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 3 does not detect paper after the Face Page is
ADF
scanned, during 2-Sided Scanning.
2. The ADF Selection Sensor keeps detecting paper during 2-Sided Scanning.
J79 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detecting paper in the ADF.
J92 The paper is not detected.
J93 The paper remained in the ADF.
J94 The ADF does not go Off after the predetermined time.
4.5.3. Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)
E1: Optical Unit Error Codes

Code Function Check Points
E1-01 Abnormal Platen Glass 1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.
scanning 2. Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor is defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.
6. SCN PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN710/709 &
703)
7. SCN PCB is defective. (Check Fuse F1& F3)
8. LVPS1 connector is disconnected. (Check CN702)
E1-22 Polygon Motor synchronization 1. Polygon Motor connector is disconnected. (Check CN3)
2. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN701)
3. LSU Relay Harness connector is disconnected.
4. Polygon Motor is defective.
5. LVPS1 is defective. (+24 V)
6. EC PCB is defective. (+24 V Circuit is defective)
E1-23 LSU Shutter Error 1. LSU Shutter Sensor is defective.
2. LSU Shutter Sensor connector is disconnected.
3. LSU Shutter Drive is defective.
4. LSU Shutter Mechanism is defective.
E1-31 Scanning Lamp 1. Scanning Lamp Inverter PCB connector is disconnected.
(Does not turn On) 2. Scanning Lamp Inverter PCB is defective.
3. Scanning Lamp is defective.
4. SCN PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN704/709)
5. SCN PCB is defective. (Check Fuse F1)
6. LVPS1 connector is disconnected. (Check CN702)
7. SC PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN56/57)
8. CCD PCB is defective.
E1-45 LSU Fan Rotation 1. LSU Fan connector is disconnected.
2. LSU Fan is defective.
215
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E1: Optical Unit Error Codes
E1-60 Beam Detect (Y) Error 1. LSU is defective.
E1-61 Beam Detect (M) Error 2. EC PCB is defective.
E1-62 Laser (Y) Error 3. LSU - EC PCB Harness is defective.
4. LSU or EC PCB connector is disconnected.
E1-63 Laser (M) Error
E1-64 Laser (C) Error
E1-65 Laser (BK) Error
E2: Lift DC Motor Error Codes

E2-01 Lift Motor rotation 1. Level Sensor connector is disconnected.
(1st Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor is defective.
E2-02 Lift Motor rotation 3. Lift Mechanism is defective.
(2nd Paper Tray) 4. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
E2-03 Lift Motor rotation 5. Lift Motor is defective.
(3rd Paper Tray) 6. LVPS connector is disconnected.
E2-04 Lift Motor rotation 7. LVPS is defective.
(4th Paper Tray) 8. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
10. CST PCB connector is disconnected.
11. CST PCB is defective.
12. Paper Feed Module connector is disconnected.
E2-10 System Console Drive Motor 1. System Console Cable is disconnected.
rotation 2. Drive Mechanism is defective.
3. Drive Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Drive Motor is defective.
5. CST PCB connector is disconnected.
6. CST PCB is defective.
E3: Development System Error Codes

E3-14 STR High Voltage Power 1. STR Terminal is contaminated with Toner.
Supply leak 2. STR Terminal is abnormal.
3. HVPS is defective.
E3-22 Toner Cartridge Fan rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Fan is defective.
E3-26 OPC Drum Motor 1 rotation 1. Motor connector is disconnected.
(Y/M/C) 2. Motor is defective.
5. Y/M/C Drum Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Y/M/C Drum Unit is defective.
216
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E3-27 OPC Drum Motor 2 rotation 1. Motor connector is disconnected.
(BK) 2. Motor is defective.
5. BK Drum Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. BK Drum Unit is defective.
E3-28 Developer Motor 1 rotation 1. Motor connector is disconnected.
(Y/M/C) 2. Motor is defective.
5. Y/M/C Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Y/M/C Developer Unit is defective.
E3-29 Developer Motor 2 rotation 1. Motor connector is disconnected.
(BK) 2. Motor is defective.
5. BK Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. BK Developer Unit is defective.
E3-30 Feed Motor rotation 1. Motor connector is disconnected.
2. Motor is defective.
5. Paper Feed Mechanism is defective.
6. Paper Feed, Sheet Bypass or Paper Exit Unit is defective.
E3-31 Intermediate Transfer Belt 1. Motor connector is disconnected.
Motor rotation 2. Motor is defective.
5. Intermediate Transfer Belt Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Intermediate Transfer Belt or Toner Waste Transfer Unit is
defective.
E3-33 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor 1. Toner Cartridge is locked. (Shake Toner Cartridge to
rotation (Y) loosen the contents)
E3-34 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor 2. Motor connector is disconnected.
rotation (M) 3. Motor is defective.
E3-35 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor 4. Motor mechanism is defective.
rotation (C) 5. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
E3-36 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor
7. Motor mechanism is defective.
rotation (BK)
E3-37 FTR Motor rotation 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
E3-38 STR Motor rotation 2. EC PCB is defective.
E3-63 FTR Cam Position Error 1. FTR Cam Motor is defective.
2. FTR Cam Motor connector is disconnected.
3. MOTDRV PCB connector is disconnected.
4. MOTDRV PCB is defective.
5. FTR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 is defective.
6. FTR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 connector is disconnected.
9. FTR Cam Drive mechanism is defective.
217
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E3-64 STR Cam Position Error 1. STR Cam Motor is defective.
2. STR Cam Motor connector is disconnected.
3. MOTDRV PCB connector is disconnected.
5. STR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 is defective.
6. STR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 connector is disconnected.
9. STR Cam Drive mechanism is defective.
E3-65 STR Monitor Current Read 1. STR Connection Error.
Error 2. STR HVPS is abnormal.
3. STR HVPS connector is disconnected.
E3-66 FTR (Y) Monitor Voltage Read 1. FTR (Y) Connection Error.
Error 2. FTR (Y) HVPS is abnormal.
3. FTR (Y) HVPS connector is disconnected.
E3-67 FTR (M) Monitor Voltage Read 1. FTR (M) Connection Error.
Error 2. FTR (M) HVPS is abnormal.
3. FTR (M) HVPS connector is disconnected.
E3-68 FTR (C) Monitor Voltage Read 1. FTR (C) Connection Error.
Error 2. FTR (C) HVPS is abnormal.
3. FTR (C) HVPS connector is disconnected.
E3-69 FTR (BK) Monitor Voltage Read 1. FTR (BK) Connection Error.
Error 2. FTR (BK) HVPS is abnormal.
3. FTR (BK) HVPS connector is disconnected.
E3-79 Intermediate Transfer Belt 1. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor is defective.
Length Detection Error 2. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor connector is
disconnected.
5. Intermediate Transfer Belt is defective.
6. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor is defective.
7. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor Connector is disconnected.
E3-80 Intermediate Transfer Belt 1. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor is defective.
Initial Point Detection Error 2. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor connector is
disconnected.
4. Intermediate Transfer Belt is defective.
5. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor is defective.
6. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor Connector is disconnected.
7. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor Harness is defective.
9. Belt Initial Point mark is defective.
E3-85 Color Registration Sensor 1. Toner Registration Sensor (Right) connector is
(Right) Calibration Error disconnected.
2. Toner Registration Sensor (Right) is defective.
218
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E3-86 Color Registration Sensor (Left) 1. Sensor Shutter Solenoid connector is disconnected.
Calibration Error 2. Sensor Shutter Open-Close is abnormal.
3. Toner Registration Sensor (Left) connector is disconnected.
4. Toner Registration Sensor (Left) is defective.
E3-87 Color Registration Sensor 1. Toner Registration Density Sensor (Center) connector is
(Center) Calibration Error disconnected.
2. Toner Registration Density Sensor (Center) is defective.
E3-88 Color Registration 1. Belt surface is scratched or dirty.
Compensation Error 2. OPC Drum is scratched or dirty.
4. Sensor PCB is defective.
E3-89 Color Registration Detection 1. Belt surface is scratched or dirty.
Error 2. OPC Drum is scratched or dirty.
3. LSU Shutter Open-Close is abnormal.
5. Sensor PCB is defective.
E3-90 TDC Sensor (Y) Calibration 1. Toner Sensor connector is disconnected.
Error 2. Toner Sensor is defective.
E3-91 TDC Sensor (M) Calibration 3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
Error 4. EC PCB is defective.
E3-92 TDC Sensor (C) Calibration
Error
E3-93 TDC Sensor (BK) Calibration
Error
E3-94 Intermediate Transfer Belt 1. Belt surface is scratched or contaminated with dirt.
Detection Error for color 2. OPC surface is scratched.
registration pattern on the right
side of sensor.
registration pattern on the
center of sensor.
registration pattern on the left
side of sensor.
E4: Induction Heating (IH) Fuser Unit Error Codes

E4-01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature 1. Fuser Unit is defective.
2. Induction Heating (IH) Unit is defective.
3. Thermistor is defective.
219
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E4-02 Fuser Paper Jam 1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.
2. Paper Entrance Sensor is disconnected.
3. Paper Entrance Sensor is defective.
4. Paper Exit Sensor is disconnected.
5. Paper Exit Sensor is defective.
E4-03 Fuser Pressure Sensor Position 1. Fuser Motor is defective.
Error 2. Fuser Motor connector is disconnected.
3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)
4. EC PCB is defective (Fuse is open).
6. Home Position Sensor 1 or 2 is defective.
7. Home Position Sensor connector 1 or 2 is disconnected.
8. Fuser Unit Relay connector is disconnected.
E4-05 Fuser Safety Timer The Induction Heating (IH) unit was stopped when the software
failed to control the temperature within a certain range.
Turn the Power SW OFF to Reset.
E4-11 Right Cover Fan Rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.
3. ADU PCB connector is disconnected. (CN403)
4. ADU PCB is defective.
E4-12 Fuser Pressure Roller Fan 1. Fan connector is disconnected.
Rotation 2. Fan is defective.
E4-13 Fuser IH Cooling Fan Rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.
E4-14 Fuser IH Driver Fan Rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.
E4-20 Thermistor (TH1) Open Error 1. Thermistor (TH1) is defective.
2. Thermistor (TH1) connector is disconnected.
220
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E4-24 Thermistor (TH1) High 1. Thermistor (TH1) is defective.
Temperature Error 2. Thermistor (TH1) connector is disconnected.
3. Induction Heating (IH) PCB is defective.
3. Contact of Thermistor (TH1) and Heater Belt is abnormal.
4. Thermistor (TH2) is defective.
E4-41 Fuser IH Core Motor Rotation 1. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor is defective.
2. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor connector is
disconnected.
4. EC PCB is defective. (Fuse is open)
E4-42 Fuser IH Core Motor Position 1. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor is defective.
2. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor connector is
disconnected.
4. EC PCB is defective. (Fuse is open)
221
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E4-43 Fuser Roller Rotate Detection 1. Fuser Motor is defective.
Sensor 2. Fuser Motor connector is disconnected.
3. MOTDRV PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)
4. MOTDRV PCB is defective. (Fuse is open)
6. Rotation detect Sensor 1 is defective.
7. Rotation detect Sensor 1 connector is disconnected.
8. Rotation detect Sensor 2 is defective.
9. Rotation detect Sensor 2 connector is disconnected.
E4-44 Fuser Input Voltage Upper Limit Power Voltage is too high. (Power Source is out of
specification)
E4-46 Fuser Temperature Rising Error 1. Intermittent blackouts occur frequently. (Power Source is out
of specification)
2. Induction Heating (IH) Unit is defective.
4. Fuser Unit is defective. (Heater Belt / Thermistor)
E4-48 Fuser Input Current Upper Limit 1. Induction Heating (IH) PCB is defective. (Check Fuse F002)
2. Induction Heating (IH) Coil is defective.
E5: System Error Codes

E5-01 Vp (+24V, Printer) 1. LVPS Output is abnormal.
E5-02 Vp (+12V, Printer) 2. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
E5-05 Vp (+24V, Scanner) 3. EC PCB is defective.
E5-10 Sequence Error 1. EC ROM Version is not correct.
E5-11 Printer Engine Communication 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN717)
Abnormal 2. EC PCB is defective.
3. SC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN61)
4. SC PCB is defective.
E5-12 Scanner Engine 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN709)
Communication Abnormal 2. EC PCB is defective.
E5-13 Printer Engine Communication 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN717)
Abnormal During Initialization 2. EC PCB is defective.
E5-17 Scanner Synchronization 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN709)
E5-19 Scanner Line Synchronization 2. EC PCB is defective.
222
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E5: System Error Codes
E5-22 Finisher Communication 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
3. IPC PCB is disconnected.
4. IPC PCB is defective.
5. Finisher Interface Cable is disconnected.
6. OP LVPS connector is disconnected.
7. OP LVPS is defective.
8. DC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. Finisher is defective.
E5-42 Total Counter 1 Connection 1. Total Counter connector is disconnected.
(Upper side) 2. Total Counter is defective.
E5-43 Total Counter 2 Connection 3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.
(Down side) 4. EC PCB is defective.
E5-60 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1. Cooling Fan connector is disconnected.
Motor Rotation 2. Cooling Fan is defective.
E5-70 SC PCB Abnormal 1 1. SC PCB is defective.
E5-71 SC PCB Abnormal 2
E5-72 SC PCB Abnormal 3 1. Update SC Firmware.
E5-90 LSU & PCB Mismatched 1. LSU is incorrect.
2. EC PCB is incorrect.
3. LSU is defective.
E5-91 Serial Number Mismatched Register Serial Number again.
E7: Optional Unit Error Codes

Code Function Check Points Unit
E7-21 Finisher Paper Exit Motor 1. Paper Feed Motor connector is disconnected.
2. Paper Feed Motor is locked by Paper Jam.
E7-23 Finisher Staple Motor 1. Stapler Unit connector is disconnected.
2. Stapler Unit is defective.
3. Stapler Home Position Sensor is defective. DA-
4. Stapler Cover Micro-SW is defective. FS320/
5. Saddle Unit Micro-SW is defective. FS325
6. Large Gear Solenoid is defective.
7. Large Gear Solenoid connector is disconnected.
8. Paper Feed Motor connector is disconnected.
9. Staple Motor is jammed with a staple.
E7-24 Finisher Staple Sift Motor
E7-27 Finisher Tray Lift Motor 1. Stack Tray Paper Height detection Sensor or Paper
Hold Lever detection Sensor is defective, or the DA-
connector is disconnected. FS320
2. Lift Motor is defective. only
3. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
4. PCB is defective.
5. Lift Drive Gear is defective.
223
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E7-51 Finisher Delivery Motor 1. Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is defective.
2. Wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the
DA-
delivery motor is abnormal.
FS325
3. Stack Delivery Roller is abnormal.
only
4. Delivery Motor is defective.
E7-52 Finisher Paddle Motor 1. Paddle Home Position Sensor is defective.
2. Swing Guide Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB, and
the Paddle Motor is abnormal.
4. Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly is abnormal. Try
turning the Paddle Motor clockwise and counter-
clockwise by hand. Is there mechanical tapping in
the rotation of the Paddle or the up/down movement
of the swing guide? Correct the mechanical
mechanism.
5. Finisher Controller PCB is defective. DA-
E7-53 Finisher Saddle Folding Sensor 1. Saddle Folding Sensor is defective. FS325
2. Finisher PCB is defective. only
E7-54 Finisher Punch Communication 1. Finisher PCB is defective.
2. Punch PCB is defective.
E7-55 Finisher Punch Power Supply 1. Punch PCB is defective.
E7-56 Finisher Punch Registration 1. Punch Registration Sensor is defective.
Sensor 2. Punch PCB is defective.
E7-57 Finisher Punch Sensor 1. Saddle Folding Sensor is defective.
(Horizontal Registration) 2. Punch PCB is defective.
E7-58 Finisher Punch Sensor 1. Punch Sensor is defective.
(Waste Full)) 2. Punch PCB is defective.
E7-59 Finisher Staple Motor 1. Stack Tray Paper Height detection Sensor, or Paper
Hold Lever detection Sensor is defective, or the
connector is disconnected. DA-
2. Upper Limit detection Sensor is defective. FS320
3. Upper Limit detection Sensor connector is only
disconnected.
E7-60 Finisher Aligning: Rear Motor DA-
1. Rear Aligning Home Position Sensor is defective.
FS325
2. Rear Aligning Motor is defective.
only
E7-61 Finisher Aligning: Front Motor 1. Front Aligning Home Position Sensor is defective.
2. Front Aligning Motor is defective. DA-
E7-62 Finisher Aligning: Stapler 1. Stapler Jam in the Cartridge. FS320/
2. Stapler Sensor is defective. FS325
3. Stapler Motor is defective.
E7-63 Finisher Backup RAM 1 DA-
(Punch) Data Error 1. Punch PCB is defective. FS325
only
224
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
E7-64 Finisher Backup RAM 2
1. Finisher Controller PCB is defective.
(Finisher) Data Error
DA-
E7-65 Finisher Communication Error 1. Finisher ROM Version is incorrect.
FS320/
(EC PCB-Finisher PCB) 2. EC Firmware Version is incorrect.
FS325
E7-90 Hardware Key Abnormal 1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.
2. Hardware Key is defective.
Note:
These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate
Optional Unit Service Manual.
E13: Out of Toner

E13 Toner Sensor 1. Toner Cartridge is not installed correctly.
2. Out of Toner.
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
Paper Full Error

Display Function Check Points
“Remove Paper Paper Full Sensor 1. Paper Full Sensor is defective.
from Inner Tray” 2. EC PCB is defective.
--- Paper Full Sensor 1. Paper Full Sensor is disconnected.
2. Paper Full Sensor is defective.
4. Service Mode F5-173 setting is OFF.
225
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.6. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)
Fax Information Codes

Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause
012 RCV C, D The length of the received Transmitter Document Jam.
document is over 2 m.
030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not Document is not set properly.
activate within 10 seconds after Defective Read Point Sensor.
the document starts feeding.
031 XMT C Transmitting document was longer The document may jam.
COPY than 2,000 mm (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor.
(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (or 39.4
in), 600 dpi: 430 mm (or 16.2 in))
061 - A ADF Door is open. Cover is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
200 RCV C Decoding process is not Defective FCB PCB.
completed at the end of phase C.
212 XMT A-E Interface error occurred between Modem is defective. (FCB PCB)
RCV the CPU and modem. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
301 XMT System fault. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
RCV
331 XMT C 8-minutes timer error.
(Germany only)
400 XMT B T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed Wrong number is dialed and the START
without detecting 300 bps signal. button is pushed.
Telephone line is disconnected while
dialing.
FCB PCB (Modem) is defective.
Receiver is defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)
401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number is not
while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed.
or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect
Password (Password Reception,
Selective Receive).
Mailbox is full.
402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility)
NSF/DIS.
403 RCV B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is
(Polling) function. not set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted is not
placed at the transmitter.
404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
followed by TCF three times, but FCB PCB is defective.
the receiver did not respond. (CFR Receiver disconnects line during first
or FTT is usually returned) NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.
405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged
transmitted TCF at 2400 bps. due to line noise)
Received RTN after Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
communicating at 2400 bps. FCB PCB is defective.
226
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
406 RCV B XMT-Password mismatched. RCV- XMT, RCV password does not match.
(Password Password mismatched. Selective Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
Comm.) RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone
number.
407 XMT D Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN. excessive error. (Line quality is poor)
FCB PCB (Modem) is defective.
408 XMT D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. quality is poor)
Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
FCB PCB is defective.
409 XMT D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact.
Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line is faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective.
etc.)
411 RCV B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling
(Polling) NSC. communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter and receiver.
412 G3 RX B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After FCB PCB is defective.
transmitting FTT)
414 RCV B No response received after Password does not match between
(Polling) transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver.
Transmitter is defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
415 XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
(Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling
polling communication. transmission feature.
416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is
EOM, etc. distorted due to line noise)
417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality is poor. (There are
response to post message. excessive errors in received data)
418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality is poor. (There are
response to PRI-Q from excessive errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator FCB PCB is defective.
requests voice contact)
420 RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without There is wrong incoming call.
detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication)
Transmitter is defective.
421 RCV B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal. Wrong number is dialed.
227
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
422 XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC There is an incompatibility.
(or DTC) was invalid.
427 G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS The interface is incompatible.
RCV transmitted.
433 XMT B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal. Defective remote station.
RCV
434 XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit is defective.
not turn OFF within 180 sec. after FCB PCB is defective.
receiver detected FLAG signal.
436 G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter is defective or incompatible.
FTT. Line quality is poor.
456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
457 RELAY XMT B Remote unit does not have
CONF. XMT/ Relayed XMT or Confidential
POLL Comm. capability.
459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality is poor. (Training signal is
distorted due to line noise)
490 RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality is poor.
limit (Function Parameter No. 70) FCB PCB is defective.
of 64 lines.
494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter is defective.
more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged
received message data. due to line noise)
495 XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - FCB PCB is defective.
current.
496 XMT C CS of modem is not able to turn FCB PCB is defective.
ON.
501 XMT/ B Incompatible Modem on the
RCV(V.34) Remote unit.
502 XMT/ B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV(V.34) or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - FCB PCB is defective.
current.
503 XMT/ B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn FCB PCB is defective.
RCV(V.34) ON during training. Line is disconnected.
504 RCV/V.34 B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set.
(Polling) station.
505 XMT/V.34 B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original is set.
(Polling)
540 XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface.
CTC or DCN received.
541 XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd Line is faulty.
EOR or received DCN. FCB PCB abnormal.
228
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
542 XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR Remote unit is abnormal.
transmitted or received DCN.
543 XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit is abnormal.
MCF.
544 XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Line is faulty.
Transmission. FCB PCB abnormal.
550 RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station.
has elapsed.
554 RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving Faulty line.
EOR. FCB PCB abnormal.
555 RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving Faulty line and Operator Call requested
EOR. by RX side.
570 RCV B Password or machine code did not
match during remote diagnostic
communication.
571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the
remote diagnostic function.
580 XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function.
155) OFF.
581 XMT B Sub-address Password Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
582 XMT B Sub-address SEP (for Polling) Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.
601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
623 XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the
in dialer engaged) ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
630 XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone
(Polling) is not detected. (Country dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (Country
dependent) T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed
without a signal from the receiver.
631 XMT A "STOP" key was pressed during
Auto Dialing.
634 XMT Redial count over with no
response or busy tone was not
detected.
Note:
U.S.A. and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
638 XMT Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off.
data in memory or during Power failure occurred.
communication.
700 XMT PSTN Communication terminated by
RCV LAN Operator pressing the "STOP" key.
229
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
711 RCV LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login
Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP
Search Base are incorrect.
712 XMT LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server's Mail
application)
714 XMT LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not
RCV Cannot logon to the LAN. connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
715 XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
716 XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is
set.
No email application is activated on the
Mail Server.
717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.
transmission. Mail Server is defective.
718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
paper size selected within your Ask originator to re-send in a supported
application to print is larger than size and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the paper
tray(s).
719 RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a
format that is not supported. supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
720 POP LAN Unable to connect to the POP Incorrect POP Server address is set.
Server. POP Server is down.
721 POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is
set.
722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network DHCP is not available.
Parameters (such as: IP Address, (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
725 XMT LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.
POP DNS Server is down.
726 XMT LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set.
POP the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.
727 XMT LAN Received an Error or No Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or
Response from the Remote Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT.
Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT) (Retry is possible)
728 XMT LAN Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory
Overflow or No Power.
(Retry is not possible)
729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name
AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)
230
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
730 RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters or the autodialer via set to Valid.
Email from a PC.
731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was (70 stations) are being used.
received.
741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name
before dialing with Timer Controlled
Communications, etc.
800 Relay PSTN The machine was requested to
Comm. relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
814 Conf. XMT PSTN The remote station does not have
Conf. Polling Relay XMT nor Confidential
Relay Communication capability.
Comm.
815 Conf. RCV PSTN Mailbox is full.
816 Conf. Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did
not match.
825 Conf. RCV PSTN Parameter settings of the remote
Conf. Polled station are not properly set.
870 MEM XMT PSTN If applicable sub-address is not Receiver side does not have correct
Multi-Copy LAN registered in the phone book of the sub-address in their phone book.
receiver side when using sub-
addressing function.
741 XMT, Polling PSTN Memory overflow occurred while
storing documents into memory.
879 Memory PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side.
RCV substitute memory reception.
LAN Memory overflow. Memory overflow on the Fax side.
Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy
while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs).
machine.
880 - - File Access Error.
884 - - File Access Error.
961 RCV LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
962 XMT PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
231
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.7. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC
01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM-dd 01:55 C8649003C0000
1st digit 13th digit
- PANASONIC MACHINE
****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Manufacturer
Code
0 -
1 Casio
2 Canon
3 Sanyo
4 Sharp
5 Tamura
6 Toshiba
7 NEC
8 Oki
9 Hitachi
A Xerox
B Fujitsu
C Matsushita
D Mitsubishi
E Murata
F Ricoh
232
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN STOP Button
0 - - - -
1 Received - - -
2 - Received - -
3 Received Received - -
4 - - Received -
5 Received - Received -
6 - Received Received -
7 Received Received Received -
8 - - - Pressed
9 Received - - Pressed
A - Received - Pressed
B Received Received - Pressed
C - - Received Pressed
D Received - Received Pressed
E - Received Received Pressed
F Received Received Received Pressed
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Resolution (dpi) Paper Width
0 - A4
1 S-Fine A4
2 400 x 400 A4
3 300 x 300 A4
4 - B4
5 S-Fine B4
6 400 x 400 B4
7 300 x 300 B4
8 600 x 600 A4
9 600 x 600 B4
A - -
B 600 x 600 A3
C - A3
D S-Fine A3
E 400 x 400 A3
F 300 x 300 A3
233
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Scanning Rate Resolution
0 20 ms/line Std
1 5 ms/line Std
2 10 ms/line Std
3 - Std
4 40 ms/line Std
5 - Std
6 - Std
7 0 ms/line Std
8 20 ms/line Fine
9 5 ms/line Fine
A 10 ms/line Fine
B - Fine
C 40 ms/line Fine
D - Fine
E - Fine
F 0 ms/line Fine
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Memory/
Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
0 - Manual Non-Memory
Communication
1 Used Manual Non-Memory
Communication
2 - Auto Dialing Non-Memory
3 Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory
4 - Auto RCV Non-Memory
5 Used Auto RCV Non-Memory
6 - Remote RCV Non-Memory
7 Used Remote RCV Non-Memory
8 - Manual Memory
Communication
9 Used Manual Memory
Communication
A - Auto Dialing Memory
B Used Auto Dialing Memory
C - Auto RCV Memory
D Used Auto RCV Memory
E - Remote RCV Memory
F Used Remote RCV Memory
234
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Password
Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm.
Comm.
0 - RCV Off Off
1 Yes RCV Off Off
2 - XMT Off Off
3 Yes XMT Off Off
4 - RCV On Off
5 Yes RCV On Off
6 - XMT On Off
7 Yes XMT On Off
8 - RCV Off On
9 Yes RCV Off On
A - XMT Off On
B Yes XMT Off On
C - RCV On On
D Yes RCV On On
E - XMT On On
F Yes XMT On On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Sub-Address Confidential Turnaround
Relayed Comm.
Comm. Comm. Polling
0 - - - -
1 Yes - - -
2 - Yes - -
3 Yes Yes - -
4 - - Yes -
5 Yes - Yes -
6 - Yes Yes -
7 Yes Yes Yes -
8 - - - Yes
9 Yes - - Yes
A - Yes - Yes
B Yes Yes - Yes
C - - Yes Yes
D Yes - Yes Yes
E - Yes Yes Yes
F Yes Yes Yes Yes
235
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Advanced Cover Sheet
Comm. XMT
0 - -
1 Report XMT -
2 Check & Call -
3 - -
4 Memory Transfer -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - Yes
9 Report XMT Yes
A Check & Call Yes
B - Yes
C Memory Transfer Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Standard/ Non-
Short Protocol
Standard
0 - Standard
1 - Standard
2 - Standard
3 - Standard
4 - Standard
5 - Standard
6 - Standard
7 - Standard
8 - Non-Standard
9 B Non-Standard
A - Non-Standard
B D Non-Standard
C - Non-Standard
D B Non-Standard
E - Non-Standard
F D Non-Standard
236
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Coding ECM
0 MH -
1 MR -
2 MMR -
3 JBIG -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 MH Yes
9 MR Yes
A MMR Yes
B JBIG Yes
C - Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Symbol Rate
V.34
(V.34)
0 - -
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 2400 sr Yes
9 - Yes
A 2800 sr Yes
B 3000 sr Yes
C 3200 sr Yes
D 3429 sr Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
237
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Modem Speed
Modem Speed
(V.34)
0 2400 bps -
1 4800 bps 2400 bps
2 7200 bps 4800 bps
3 9600 bps 7200 bps
4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps
5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps
6 12000 bps 14400 bps
7 14400 bps 16800 bps
8 - 19200 bps
9 - 21600 bps
A - 24000 bps
B - 26400 bps
C - 28800 bps
D - 31200 bps
E - 33600 bps
F - -
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
238
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.8. Troubleshooting (For Printer)
4.8.1. Checking the Basics
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.
If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:
• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
• Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
• Ensure that the Unit is turned On
• Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit
• No error message is displayed on the Unit
• Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
4.8.2. Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem Possible Solution(s)
Character is not printing in the • Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
correct positions or the driver to coincide with the application.
characters near the edges of the • Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
page are missing. • Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of ¼ inches (5 mm) on all sides.
The font type is incorrect • Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.
• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in
the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select ”Always use True Type fonts” from the Font tab of the Printer
Driver Properties dialog box.
The character is not smooth. • Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.
Fine line print cannot be • Select 600 dpi resolution.
obtained.
Poor photograph print quality. • Select 600 dpi resolution.
Different character or symbol • Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.
from the document is printed.
The printer does not print • Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an
anything or prints irregular Expansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the
images from the middle of the Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
1st page.
Printing is exceedingly slow. • Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select 300 dpi resolution.
239
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4.8.3. Error Message Appears on the PC
Error Message Possible Solution(s)
Network Print DLL Error. • Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/
is 100Base-TX cable properly connected.
• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Network Port is Busy. • The Panasonic Device may be processing someonefs print job,
please wait, and try again later.
• The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.
Cannot print because an error is • Verify and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with the
found in the current printer application and the printer driver settings.
setting.
4.8.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message
Cannot complete print job • The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be
Image memory overflow enough to complete the print job.
Either install an optional Sort Memory, or change the
resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Cannot complete • The print settings may not be matched for the system.
Confirm print condition Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties
dialog box.
i.e. Multi-sized printing.
Cannot print • Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties
System error dialog box.
4.8.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem Possible Solution(s)
Cannot read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive and click “Retry”.
240
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5 Service Modes
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (destination dependent) for optimum performance and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become
inoperable.
5.1.1. Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode
The service mode is selected when “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys are simultaneously pressed, then
F1 will appear in the display.
2. To exit the Service Mode

The service mode is reset when the “Function” and “C (Clear)” keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.1.2. Copier Service Mode Functions
Service Modes (For Copier)

Service
Item Function
Mode
F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD.
01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD and
LEDs.
02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page Memory.
03- Print Test Patterns Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position
38 alignment, etc.
F2 Single Copy Test One sheet is copied when the Start key is
pressed.
F3 Continuous Copy Test Multi copies are made when the Start key is
pressed.
F4 Input / Output Status Test The functioning of Input / Output items (selected
item numbers) is checked.
F5 Function Parameters Various function settings (selected by code
numbers) can be changed.
F6 Adjust Parameters Various function settings (selected by code
numbers) can be adjusted.
F7 Electronic Counter Electronic Counters for Maintenance
F8 Service Adjustment Perform pseudo-operation of an item (selected
by code numbers)
F9 Unit Maintenance Fax Service Mode
Service Alert Tel #
Firmware Version
Print Device Info.
241
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F5-000 Country Version USA/CAN F5-086 PM Cycle (Optics) No

F5-004 LSU off timer 15 Sec F5-087 PM Cycle (ADF) No
F5-005 LSU Fan Extention 5 min F5-088 USB Port Function Off
F5-007 Language Default None F5-089 LAN Speed/Duplex Off
F5-008 Batch Printing Mode F5-090 TCH Panel Beep Sound Soft
F5-012 Printer Fan Extention5 min F5-091 M1, Size 70*160
F5-013 Paper Out Red Indicator On F5-092 M2, Size 95*220
F5-014 Paper Size Tray 1 8.5x11 F5-095 Paper Size(FA) USA/CAN
F5-015 Paper Size Tray 2 11x17 F5-096 Bypass Detection USA/CAN
F5-016 Paper Size Tray 3 None F5-097 Bp Tray A4R/FLS/LGL(FA) 8x13
F5-017 Paper Size Tray 4 None F5-104 Red Sel(2C/1C Cpy) 1

F5-020 ADF Auto F5-105 Green Sel(2C/1C Cpy) 1
F5-021 Finisher Auto F5-106 Blue Sel(2C/1C Cpy) 1
F5-022 System Console Auto F5-107 Prt Paper Photo HT1 Screen
F5-023 Paper Transport Unit Auto F5-108 Ground Color Removal RealTime
F5-026 2-Sided Unit Auto F5-109 JPEG Sampling Ratio 4.1.1
F5-032 Job Build And SADF Mode Yes F5-120 Heater Off Timer 1min
F5-034 Multi Size Feed Default Off F5-121 Fuser Unit Type USA/CAN
F5-036 Display DD Key Yes F5-125 ACBias Phase FullSpeed No
F5-038 2-Sided Mode Default No F5-126 ACBias Phase HalfSpeed No
F5-040 Dounle Cont LDR F5-130 AutoPrintImageControl No
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02
F6-000 Registration Clr Normal 0 F6-088 ITMotor Speed Half 0

F6-001 Registration Clr Slow 0 F6-090 FuserMotor MSpeed STD 0
F6-005 Registration B&W Normal 0 F6-091 FuserMotor CSpeed STD 0
F6-006 Registration B&W Slow 0 F6-093 FuserMotor Speed Half 0
F6-007 Registration BW CLspeed 0 F6-095 FuserMotor Speed Half L 0
F6-010 Paper Loop Tray,B&W,Nrm 0 F6-105 HR Temp Balance1 0
F6-011 Paper Loop Tray,Clr,Nrm 0 F6-106 HR Temp Balance2 0
F6-012 Paper Loop Tray,*,Slow 0 F6-107 CoolDown Escape Temp1 0
F6-015 Paper Loop By-p,B&W,Nrm 0 F6-108 CoolDown Escape Temp2 0
F6-016 Paper Loop By-p,Clr,Nrm 0 F6-110 Mono HR Temp Balance3 0
F6-017 Paper Loop By-p,Clr,Slow 0 F6-111 Mono HR Temp Balance4 0

F6-018 PaperLoop Bp,Thick,Slow 0 F6-112 Color HR Temp Balance5 0
F6-020 Paper Loop ADU,Clr,Nrm 0 F6-113 Color HR Temp Balance6 0
F6-021 Paper Loop ADU,B&W,Nrm 0 F6-115 CoolDown Judg Tmp(OP) 0
F6-022 Paper Loop ADU,*Slow 0 F6-116 CoolDown Escape Tmp(OP) 0
F6-025 Registration Viod 20 F6-117 Mono SlowDown Temp1 0
F6-030 Trail Edge Void A3,LD 20 F6-118 Mono SlowDown Temp2 0
F6-031 Trail Edge Void B4,LG 20 F6-119 Mono SlowDown Temp3 0
F6-032 Trail Edge Void FLS 20 F6-120 Print Pause Temp 0
F6-033 Trail Edge Void A4R,LTR 20 F6-121 Color SlowDown Temp1 0
F6-034 Trail Edge Void B5R 20 F6-122 Color SlowDown Temp2 0

F6-035 Trail Edge Void A4,LT 20 F6-123 Color SlowDown Temp3 0
F6-036 Trail Edge Void B5,Exc 20 F6-124 WarmUP Timer 0
242
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- M A C H I N E S E T U P I N F O R M A T I O N -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
1.MACHINE INFORMATION
MACHINE NAME : DP-C322
MAC ADDRESS : 0800230233F0
SERIAL NUMBER : sssssss
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : AAT001xxPU
SC BOOT : V004
PNL : T00006
EC : 32cpm T1xxxx
SCN : T00005
FCB : FCBAATxxxxx_AU
FINISHER : 001
3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY : 640 MB
SORT MEMORY : 105 MB
FAX MEMORY : 3 MB
4.OPTION
3rd PAPER TRAY : Yes
4th PAPER TRAY : Yes
FINISHER : FS325
PUNCH UNIT : No
FAX BOARD : Yes
NETWORK SCANNER : No
PS PRINTER : No
EMAIL : Yes
DDS : Yes
HDD : Yes
5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 2082
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J70 XX-00000008
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 E03-311 XX-00000000
(See Remarks)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC -
****************************** -PANASONIC - ***** - 0001- ********
Remarks:
XX-00000140
Page Count
00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error
243
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F7 Total Counter List (Sample)
**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F7-01 Key Operator ID Code : 0000
F7-02 Maintenance Count

Total Count : 8
PM Count : 8
Scanner PM Count : 1
ADF Count : 8
ADF PM Count : 8
244
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.3. F1 Mode: Self Test
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "1" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "Start" key.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display.
↓
When the "C (Clear)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "Function" and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
F1 Mode
Remarks
No. Item Function
Printout Print Mode
00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the
--- ---
CCD.
01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the
--- ---
LCD and LEDs.
02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the
--- ---
Page Memory.
03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Mono (BK) Color, Full Speed
04 Print Test Pattern 2 Paper position alignment. Color, Half Speed
(1200 dpi)
05 Print Test Pattern 3 Mono, Full Speed
06 Print Test Pattern 4 Mono, Half Speed
(1200 dpi)
07 Print Test Pattern 5 Mono, Mixed Speed
08 Print Test Pattern 6 Prints the “Slant” pattern for Mono, Full Speed
09 Print Test Pattern 7 setting the Paper position Color, Full Speed
10 Print Test Pattern 8 alignment. Mono, Half Speed
(1200 dpi)
11 Print Test Pattern 9 Prints the “Grid” pattern for Mono, Full Speed
12 Print Test Pattern 10 setting the Paper position Color, Full Speed
13 Print Test Pattern 11 alignment. Mono, Half Speed
(1200 dpi)
14 Print Test Pattern 12 Prints the pattern for setting the Color, Full Speed
15 Print Test Pattern 13 “Duplex” Paper position Color, Half Speed
alignment. (1200 dpi)
16 Print Test Pattern 14 Mono, Full Speed
17 Print Test Pattern 15 Mono, Half Speed
(1200 dpi)
18 Print Test Pattern 16 Mono, Mixed Speed
245
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F1 Mode
Remarks
No. Item Function
Printout Print Mode
19 Print Test Pattern 17 Prints the pattern for Color Color Color, Full Speed
(Only A3/11x17) Registration.
20 Print Test Pattern 18 Prints the pattern using All Color (Y)
Primary Colors
21 Print Test Pattern 19 Prints the pattern using All Color (M) Color, Full Speed
22 Print Test Pattern 20 Primary Colors Color (C)
23 Print Test Pattern 21 Color (BK)
24 Print Test Pattern 22 Prints the 2 by 2 pattern Color (Y)
25 Print Test Pattern 23 Color (M)
26 Print Test Pattern 24 Color (C)
28 Print Test Pattern 26 Prints the 4 by 4 pattern Color (Y) Mono, Half Speed
29 Print Test Pattern 27 Color (M) (1200 dpi)
32 Print Test Pattern 30 Prints the 1 by 1 pattern Color (Y) Color, Full Speed
33 Print Test Pattern 31 Color (M)
36 Print Test Pattern 34 Prints the pattern for Fusing Color (BK)
(Only A3/11x17)
37 Print Test Pattern 35 Color (YMC)
(Only A3/11x17)
38 Print Test Pattern 36 This test is used for checking the Color Color (1 by 1),
(Only A3/11x17) OPC Drum for scratches. Full Speed
246
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.4. F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test
Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.
↓
↓
Enter the number to activate the test then press "Start" key.
↓
Press "Stop" key to cancel the test.
↓
↓
F4 Mode (Input Check)

Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
100 Size Sensor X Original detected on the 1 Z B A
X position.
Y Platen
Size Sensor Y Original detected on the 1
Y position. X
Size Sensor Z Original detected on the 1

Front Side
Z position.
Size Sensor A Original detected on the 1
A position.
Size Sensor B Original detected on the 1
B position.
101 +24V Line Error Detecting +24V Line is ON. 1
Signal
Home Position Sensor Home position is 1
detected.
ADF/Platen Cover Open ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open.
ADF/Platen Cover Angle ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open more than 30°
angle.
102 ADF Detection Sensor Unit is not connected. 1
ADF Cover Open Cover is open. 1
Detection Sensor
ADF Paper Exit Detection Original is detected. 1
Sensor
ADF Inverting Detection Original is detected. 1
Sensor
ADF Registration Sensor 3 Original is detected. 1
247
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
103 ADF Original Length Sensor is activated. 1
Sensor 2
ADF Original Length Sensor is activated. 1
Sensor 1
ADF Original Width Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
2
ADF Original Width Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
1
ADF Original Sensor Original is detected. 1
102- Not Used
199
F4 Mode (Output Check)

No. Item Function Remark
200 Lamp When SCN PCB CN704-1, CN704-4
signal level changes to 0V from
+24V, Lamp operates for 4 seconds.
201 ADF Main Motor Rotating ADF Main Motor spins at a 50% rate.
(50% rotation speed)
202 ADF Main Motor Rotating ADF Main Motor spins at a 100%
(100% rotation speed) rate.
203 ADF Main Motor Rotating ADF Main Motor spins at a 400%
(400% rotation speed) rate.
204 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse ADF paper Feed Motor spins in
Rotating reverse at a 50% rate.
207 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CN655-2 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for
3 seconds.
208 ADF Registration Roller 1 Clutch When CN656-4 signal level changes
3 seconds.
209 ADF Registration Roller 2 Clutch When CN656-2 signal level changes
3 seconds.
210 ADF Inverting Roller 1 Clutch When CN659-6 signal level changes
3 seconds.
211 ADF Inverting Roller 2 Clutch When CN659-7 signal level changes
3 seconds.
248
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
212 ADF Speed Down Clutch When CN659-5 signal level changes
3 seconds.
214 ADF Solenoid When CN660-7 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates
for 200ms.
215 ADF Inverting Solenoid When CN660-5 signal level changes
for 200ms.
216 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid When CN660-2 signal level changes
for 1 second.
217 ADF Stamp Solenoid When CN658-2 signal level changes
for 1 second.
218- Not Used
299

Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
300 100V/200V LVPS Signal LVPS is connected. 0 1 : 200V LVPS
24V F PS "On" Detection +24V PS Voltage is Off. 1
24V M PS "On" Detection +24V PS Voltage is Off. 1
301 Right Cover 3 Open/Close Cover is open. 1
Sensor
Right Cover 1 Open/Close Cover is open. 1
Sensor
Right Cover 2 Open/Close Cover is open. 1
Sensor
Front Cover Open/Close Cover is open. 1
Sensor
New OPC Drum Unit K OPC Drum Unit 1
Detection detected.
New OPC Drum Unit C OPC Drum Unit 1
Detection detected.
New OPC Drum Unit M OPC Drum Unit 1
Detection detected.
New OPC Drum Unit Y OPC Drum Unit 1
Detection detected.
249
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
302 Paper Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(2nd Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor Paper is detected. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
Paper NP Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(2nd Paper Tray)
Paper Tray Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
Size Sensor 1 Sensor is activated. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
Paper Tray Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
303 FTR Cam Sensor 1 Sensor is not activated. 0
FTR Cam Sensor 2 Sensor is not activated. 0
STR Cam Sensor 1 Sensor is not activated. 0
STR Cam Sensor 2 Sensor is not activated. 0
Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
OHP Sensor OHP is detected. 1
304 IH Core Sensor 2 Sensor is not activated 0
A3 Home Position. (Lo)
IH Core Sensor 1 Sensor is not activated 0
A3 Home Position. (Lo)
Fuser Pressure Release Sensor is not activated 0
Sensor 2 Release Position. (Lo)
Fuser Pressure Release Sensor is not activated 0
Sensor 1 Release Position. (Lo)
Fuser Unit Enter Sensor Sensor is activated. (Hi) 1
IT Belt Home Position IT Belt Home Position is 1
Sensor. detected.
305 Polygon Motor Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
Development Motor 2 Ready state not 1
Ready detected.
Development Motor 1 Ready state not 1
Ready detected.
Drum Motor 2 Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
Drum Motor 1 Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
Paper Feed Motor Ready Ready state not 1
Sensor detected.
250
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
306 IH Fan Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
IH Driver Fan Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
Toner Bottle Motor Lock Locked position 0
Detection Sensor K detected.
Detection Sensor C detected.
Detection Sensor M detected.
Detection Sensor Y detected.
Fuser Roller Rotating Rotation not detected. 0
Encoder 1 (Low = not detected).
307 Belt Motor Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
Shutter Sensor 1 LSU closed Shutter 0
detected.
Fuser Roller Rotating Rotation not detected. 0
Encoder 2 (Low = not detected).
LSU Fan Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
Toner Bottle Fan Ready Ready state is detected. 1
Pressure Roller Fan Ready Ready state not 1
detected.
308 Thermistor 4 Broken Wire Broken wire detected. 0
Detection
Thermistor 3 Broken Wire Broken wire detected. 0
Detection
Detection
Detection
Thermistor 4 Abnormal Abnormal High 0
High Temperature Temperature detected.
Detection
308 Thermistor 3 Abnormal Abnormal High 0
Detection
Detection
Detection
309 Jam Sensor Paper Jam is detected. 0
251
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
310 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(4th Paper Tray)
4th Tray Detection Sensor Unit is connected. 0
4th Tray Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
Paper Feed PCB Detection PCB is connected. 1
(Paper Tray Option)
Paper Feed Motor Look Motor is Stopped. 1
Detection
(Paper Tray Option)
311 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1
(3rd Paper Tray)
Paper Remaining Sensor 4 Sensor is activated. 1
(3rd Paper Tray)
3rd Tray Detection Sensor Unit is connected. 0
NP Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
(3rdth Paper Tray)
Paper Tray Open Sensor Door is opened. 0
(Paper Tray Option)
312 Transportation Unit Path Paper is detected. 0
Sensor
Outer Exit Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Transportation Unit Cover Cover is open. 0
Sensor
Transportation Unit Unit is connected. 1
Detection Sensor
252
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
313 Paper Size Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
Intermediate Roller Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Cooling Fan for Main Unit Fan is stopped. 1
Ready
Inner Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Fuser Unit Paper Exit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
Intermediate Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(1st Paper Tray)
314 Size Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
(Sheet Bypass)
(Sheet Bypass)
(Sheet Bypass)
ADU Right Cover Open Door is opened. 0
Sensor
ADU 2 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
ADU 1 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
ADU Inner Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
315 Coin Vendor Insufficient Insufficient Amount “0“ is 1
Amount Signal detected.
LSU Identification 2 of Paper is detected.
Machine
LSU Identification 1 of Paper is detected.
Machine
Key Counter Detection Unit is connected. 0
Sensor
Mechanical Counter Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
(Color)
Mechanical Counter Unit is connected. 0
Detection Sensor
(Monochrome)
253
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
316 Developer Unit K Detection Developer Unit is 0
Sensor connected.
Developer Unit C Detection Developer Unit is 0
Sensor connected.
Developer Unit M Detection Developer Unit is 0
Sensor connected.
Developer Unit Y Detection Developer Unit is 0
Sensor connected.
STR Leak Detection Leak is detected. 0
Toner Waste Container Full Toner Waste Container 1
Detection Sensor is full.
Toner Waste Container Toner Waste Container 1
Detection Sensor is detected.
317 Finisher Unit Detection Unit is connected. 0
Sensor
318- Not Used
319
320 LVPS Fan Ready Ready state not 0
detected.
321- Not Used
399

400 Toner Bottle Fan Toner bottle fan rotates.
401 IH Driver Fan IH driver fan rotates.
402 LSU Fan LSU fan rotates.
403 Pressure Roller Fan Pressure roller fan rotates.
404 IH Cooling Fan IH cooling fan rotates.
405 Right Cover Fan Right cover fan rotates.
406 LVPS Fan Operation controlled by SC
board.
407- Not Used
439
440 Developing Motor 1 Motor stops automatically after
rotating 5 sec.
441 Developing Motor 2 Motor stops automatically after
rotating 5 sec.
442 Toner Bottle Motor Y Motor stops automatically after
rotating 2 sec.
443 Toner Bottle Motor M Motor stops automatically after
rotating 2 sec.
444 Toner Bottle Motor C Motor stops automatically after
rotating 2 sec.
445 Toner Bottle Motor K Motor stops automatically after
rotating 2 sec.
254
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
446 Intermediate Transfer (IT) Belt Motor stops automatically after
Motor rotating 5 sec.
447 FTR Pressure Motor Motor rotates after detecting home
position, and then it stops
automatically.
448 STR Pressure Motor Motor rotates after detecting home
position, and then it stops
automatically.
449 Fuser Motor Rotation in Forward Press Start : The Fuser Motor Without heating.
Direction rotates in the Forward Direction,
initiating contact between the
Pressure Roller and Fuser Roller.
(ON position)
Press Stop : The Fuser Motor
rotates in the Reverse direction,
initiating separation of the Pressure
Roller from the Fuser Roller, and
then the motor stops automatically.
(OFF position)
450 Fuser Motor Rotation in Reverse Pressure Roller from the Fuser
Direction Roller, and then the motor stops
automatically. (OFF position)
451 Core Switching Motor Core switching motor rotates.
452 Lift Motor Lift motor rotates.
(1st Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
456 Paper Feed Motor Paper feed motor rotates.
457 Paper Feed Motor Paper feed motor rotates.
(Paper Tray Option)
458 Transportation Unit Motor Transportation unit motor rotates.
459 LSU Motor LSU motor rotates.
460- Not Used
479
480 STR Guide Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after
energizing for 2 sec.
481 Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after
(Sheet Bypass) energizing for 2 sec.
482 PF Solenoid 1 Solenoid stops automatically after
255
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
486 Paper Exit Path Switching Solenoid stops automatically after
Solenoid (Outer) energizing for 0.3 sec.
487 Paper Exit Path Switching Solenoid stops automatically after
Solenoid (Inner) re-energizing for 0.3 sec.
488 Sensor Shutter Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after
489 ADU Path Switching Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after
(ADU) re-energizing for 0.3 sec.
490 ADU Path Switching Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after
(Exit) energizing for 0.3 sec.
491- Not Used
519
520 Registration Clutch Clutch stops automatically after
energizing for 1 min.
521 Intermediate Roller Clutch Clutch stops automatically after
522 Clutch Clutch stops automatically after
(Sheet Bypass) energizing for 1 min.
523 PF Clutch 1 Clutch stops automatically after
527 ADU Clutch 1 Clutch stops automatically after
528 ADU Clutch 2 Clutch stops automatically after
529 Exit 2 Way Roller Rotation in Clutch stops automatically after
Forward Direction Clutch energizing for 1 min.
530 Exit 2 Way Roller Rotation in Clutch stops automatically after
Reverse Direction Clutch energizing for 1 min.
531 Paper Feed Intermediate Roller Clutch stops automatically after
Clutch (Paper Tray Option) energizing for 1 min.
532 Transportation Unit Transport Clutch stops automatically after
Clutch energizing for 1 min.
533- Not Used
559
560 Mechanical Counter 1 Stops automatically after 1 count.
561 Mechanical Counter 2 Stops automatically after 1 count.
562- Not Used
599
256
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
600 Entrance Paper Path Paper is detected. 1 1-Bin Finisher
Sensor (DA-FS320) Only.
Exit Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Alignment Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Paper Detection Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Paper Holding Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Upper Limit Detection Paper is detected. 1
Sensor
Exit Tray Full Sensor Paper Exit Tray is full. 1
Stapler Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
601 Stapler Cartridge Sensor No Stapler Cartridge is 1
detected.
Staple Empty Limit Sensor Stapler nearly empty is 1
detected.
Stapler Unit Lock Sensor Stapler Unit is detected. 1
Stapler Cover Switch Cover is open. 0
Top Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0
Joint Detect Sensor Finisher Unit is detected. 0
602- Not Used
649

650 Transportation Motor Paper transport motor rotates. 1-Bin Finisher (DA-FS320)
651 Alignment Motor Alignment Motor rotates. Only.
652 Tray Motor Tray motor rotates.
653 Stapler Motor The stapler motor turns one
revolution, then resets.
654 Paddle Solenoid The solenoid energizes for 0.5
second cycle.
655 Gear Solenoid The solenoid energizes for 0.5
second cycle.
656 Paper Set Lever Solenoid The solenoid energizes for one
second cycle.
657- Not Used
699
257
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
700 Punch Timing Sensor Paper is detected. 1 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Paper Path Entrance Paper is detected. 1 Finisher (DA-FS325)
Sensor Only.
Processing Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Folding Position Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Joint Detect Switch Finisher Unit is not 0
detected.
Front Door Switch Cover is open. 0
Front Door Sensor Cover is open. 0
Top Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0
701 Paddle Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Stack Delivery Roller Home position is 1
Home Position Sensor detected.
Delivery Belt Home Home position is 1
Position Sensor detected.
Rear Alignment Home Home position is 1
Front Alignment Home Home position is 1
Folding Roller Home Home position is 1
Folding Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Folding Paper Tray Home Paper is detected. 1
Position Sensor
702 Stapler Connect Signal Stapler is connected. 1 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Stapler Slide Home Home position is 1 Finisher (DA-FS325)
Position Sensor detected. Only.
Stapler Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Stapler Safety Switch Stapler drive ready is 1
detected.
Staple Sensor Staple is detected. 1
Self Prime Sensor Staple is detected. 1
703 Stack Tray Paper Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Paper Surface Sensor Paper surface is 1
detected.
Stack Tray Middle Sensor Paper is detected. 1
Stack Tray Upper Limit Upper limit is detected. 1
Sensor
Stack Tray Lower Limit Lower limit is detected. 1
Sensor
704 Punch Unit Connect Signal Punch Unit is 1
connected.
258
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
705- Not Used
749

750 Transportation Motor Paper Transport Motor rotates. 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
751 Saddle Roller Contacting Saddle Roller making contact. Finisher (DA-FS325) Only.
752 Stack Delivery Motor rotates in the Stack Delivery Motor rotates.
forward direction
753 Stack Delivery Motor rotates in the Stack Delivery Motor rotates.
reverse direction
754 Paddle Rotates Paddle rotates.
755 Stack Roller Contacting Stack Roller making contact.
756 Slide Motor Stapler Unit horizontal shift.
757 Alignment Operation Alignment Plate Shuttle home
position between A4 position.
758 Tray Motor Tray Shuttle paper surface between
full position.
759 Staple Operation Staple operation.
760 Folding Operation Folding operation.
761 Transport Motor (Folding) Transport to folding position.
762 Folding Clutch Clutch turns ON/OFF for 1 sec.
cycle.
763 Punch Operation Punch operation.
764 Punch Horizontal Registration Punch horizontal registration
Operation operation.
765- Not Used
799
259
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.5. F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)
↓
↓
↓
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" button.
↓
↓
Press "Function", and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
↓
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
00 Country Version 0 : Japan Country Dependent
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
01-03 Not Used
04 LSU Off Timer 1 : 5 sec. 3 : 15 sec.
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
05 LSU Fan Extention 5 : 5 min. 0 : None
2 : 2 min.
0 : None
06 Not Used
260
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
07 Language Default English English
French
(Available language selections C. French
are Destination Dependent) German
Swedish
Italian
Dutch
Portugal
Spanish
Norway
Danish
Finnish
English
Polish
Hungary
Japanese
Czech
Russian
Greek
Chinese
Taiwan
Korean
08 Batch Printing Mode 0 : Off 0 : Off
1 : On
09-11 Not Used
12 Printer Fan Extension 5 : 5 min 0 : None
2 : 2 min
0 : None
13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 : Off 1 : On
1 : On
14 Paper Size Tray 1 0 : None 13 : (for USA /
3 : A4 Canada)
[ When "OK" is selected, a 5 : B5
prompt comes up asking you 13 : 8.5x11 3 : (for Europe)
what Media Type you want - 20 :16K
Trays 2, 3, & 4 work the same 20 : (Others)
way ]
261
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
15 Paper Size Tray 2 0 : None 1 : (for Europe)
1 : A3
[ When "OK" is selected, a 2 : B4 11 : (for USA /
prompt comes up asking you 3 : A4 Canada)
what Media Type you want - 4 : A4-R
Trays 2, 3, & 4 work the same 5 : B5 19 : (Others)
way ] 6 : B5-R 20 : (Others)
8 : A5-R
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : 11 x 17
12 : LEGAL
13 : 8.5 x 11
14 : 8.5 x 11 R
15 : 5.5 x 8.5
19 : 8K
20 :16K
16 Paper Size Tray 3 Same as F5-15
17 Paper Size Tray 4 Same as F5-15
18-19 Not Used
20 ADF 0 : No 1 : Auto
1 : Auto
21 Finisher 0 : No 1 : Auto
1 : Auto
22 System Console 0 : No 1 : Auto
1 : Auto
23 Paper Transport Unit 0 : No 1 : Auto
1 : Auto
24-25 Not Used
26 2-Sided Unit 0 : No 1 : Auto
1 : Auto
27-31 Not Used
32 Job Build And SADF Mode 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
33 Not Used
34 Multi Size Feed Default 0 : Off 0 : Off
1 : On
35-37 Not Used
38 2-Sided Mode Default 0 : No 0 : No
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
3 : B to 2
39 Not Used
40 Double Count 0 : No 1 : (for USA / Canada)
1 : LDR
2 : LDR, LGL
3 : A3 3 : (for Europe, Other)
4 : A3, B4
41 Count Up Timing 0 : At feed 1 : At exit
1 : At exit
262
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
42 Key/Dept Counter 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Key Cntr
2 : Dept.
3 : Card
43 Key Counter Timing 0 : At feed 0 : At feed
1 : At exit
44 Insert Paper Count 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
45 Dept Code Reentry Again 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
46-50 Not Used
51 Dept. Counter (COPY) 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
52 Dept. Counter (FAX) 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
53 2-Sided Auto Shift 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Auto sft
54 Margin Reduction 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
55 Margin Value Default 0 : 5 mm 1 : 10 mm
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
56 Edge Value Default 0 : 5 mm 0 : 5 mm
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
57 Book Value Default 0 : 15 mm 1 : 20 mm
1 : 20 mm
2 : 25 mm
3 : 30 mm
58 U14 Clear 0 : Continue 1 : Any Key
1 : Any Keys
59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm 0 : Stop 0 : Stop
1 : Continue
60 Auto Tray Selection 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
61 Not Used
62 Overflow Detection 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
63 U13 Clear 0 : Any Keys 0 : Any Key
1 : Func + 1
64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 0 : Yes 0 : Yes
1 : No
65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) 0 : Yes 0 : Yes
1 : No
66 Not Used
67 Page Insertion Default 0 : Blank 0 : Blank
1 : Copy
263
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
68 Cover Mode Default 0 : F, Blank 0 : F, Blank
1 : F, Copy
2 : FB, Blank
3 : FB, Copy
69 Reduce N in 1 Space 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
70 PM Cycle 0 : No 12 : 120 K
1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 80 K
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K
14 : 200 K
15 : 240 K
71-77 Not Used
78 A4/LTR Size Select 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
79 Not Used
80 Paper Size Priority 1 : A3 13 : (for USA /
2 : B4 Canada)
3 : A4 3 : (for Europe)
4 : A4-R
5 : B5
6 : B5-R
8 : A5-R
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : 11 x 17
12 : LEGAL
13 : 8.5 x 11
14 : 8.5 x 11 R
15 : 5.5 x 8.5
19 : 8K 19 : (Others)
20 : 16K 20 : (Others)
81 B4/FLS Size 0 : B4 0 : B4
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
82 Manual Skyshot Mode 0 : Off 0 : Off
1 : M1, On
2 : M2, On
3 : M1, M2, On
83 Digital Skyshot Mode 0 : No 1 : Normal
1 : Normal
2 : Quality
264
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
84-85 Not Used
86 PM Cycle (Optics) 0 : No 0 : No
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
87 PM Cycle (ADF) 0 : No 0 : No
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
88 USB Port Function 0 : Off 0 : Off
1 : Once
2 : On
89 LAN Speed/Duplex 0 : Auto 0 : Auto
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
90 Panel Beep Sound 0 : Off 1 : Off
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
91 M1, Size Set the default size for Manual Skyshot 70 x 160
92 M2, Size Mode, M1 and M2. 95 x 220
93-94 Not Used
95 Paper Size (FA)
(Factory use only)
96 Bypass Detection
(Factory use only)
97 BP Tray A4R/FLS/LGL (FA)
(Factory use only)
98- Not Used
103
104 Red Sel (2C/1C Copy) 1:1 1
2:2
3:3
105 Green Sel (2C/1C Copy) 1:1 1
2:2
3:3
106 Blue Sel (2C/1C Copy) 1:1 1
2:2
3:3
107 Photo Paper HT Mode 0 : Errordif 0 : Errordif
1 : Screen
108 Not Used
265
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
109 JPEG Sampling Ratio 3 : 4. 2. 0 0 : 4. 1. 1
0 : 4. 1. 1
1 : 4. 2. 2
2 : 4. 4. 4
110- Not Used
114
115 Accounting Server Func 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
116- Not Used
119
120 Heater Off Timer 0 : None 60 : 60 sec.
5 : 5 sec.
10 : 10 sec.
15 : 15 sec.
20 : 20 sec.
25 : 25 sec.
30 : 30 sec.
45 : 45 sec.
60 : 60 sec.
120 : 2 min.
180 : 3 min.
121 Fuser Unit Type 0 : Jpn/Euro 1 : (for USA / Canada)
1 : USA/CAN 0 : (for Europe)
122 Between Pages Timer 0 : None 30 : 30 sec.
5 : 5 sec.
10 : 10 sec.
15 : 15 sec.
20 : 20 sec.
25 : 25 sec.
30 : 30 sec.
45 : 45 sec.
60 : 60 sec.
123- Not Used
124
125 AC Bias Phase FullSpeed 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
126 AC Bias Phase HalfSpeed 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
127- Not Used
129
130 Auto Print Image Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
131 Drum Life Laser 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
132 Drum Life Charge 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
133 Drum Temp. Charge 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
134 Not Used
135 TDC Deve. Life 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
266
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
136 TDC Half Speed 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
137 TDC Humidity 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
138 TDC Image Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
139 Not Used
140 TDC Image Case Y 0 : Low 1 : Yes
1 : Medium
2 : High
141 TDC Image Case M 0 : Low 1 : Yes
1 : Medium
2 : High
142 TDC Image Case C 0 : Low 1 : Yes
1 : Medium
2 : High
143 TDC Image Case BK 0 : Low 1 : Yes
1 : Medium
2 : High
144 Not Used
145 FTR Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
146 FTR Device 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
147 FTR Humidity 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
148 FTR OPC Drum 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
149 FTR Deve. 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
150 FTR STD Current Y 0 : Min 2 : Medium
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
4 : Max
151 FTR STD Current M 0 : Min 2 : Medium
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
4 : Max
152 FTR STD Current C 0 : Min 2 : Medium
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
4 : Max
153 FTR STD Current BK 0 : Min 2 : Medium
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
4 : Max
154 Not Used
267
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
155 STR Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
156 STR Device 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
157 STR STD Current BK 0 : Min 2 : Medium
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
4 : Max
158 STR T/H 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
159 Not Used
160 Discharge Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
161 Discharge H/T Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
162 Transfer Belt Control 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
163 Belt Motor Reverse Ctrl 0 : Off 3 : 1/200
1 : 1/10
2 : 1/100
3 : 1/200
4 : 1/300
5 : 1/500
164 Drum Warning Select 0 : Off 1 : On
1 : On
165- Not Used
169
170 Color Reg Control 0 : Off-0 2 : On
1 : Off-1
2 : On
171 Skew Control 0 : No 0 : No
1 : Yes
172 Color Reg Entry 0 : Min 2 : Medium
1 : Low
2 : Medium
173 Paper Full Sensor 0 : No 1 : Yes
1 : Yes
174 Not Used
175 Mechanical Counter1 0 : No 0 : (North America)
1 : Bk 1 : (Others)
2 : 1C
4 : 2C
8 : 4C
3 : Bk+1C
12 : 2C+4C
7 : Bk+1C+2C
14 : 1C+2C+4C
15 : Total
268
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F5 Mode
176 Mechanical Counter2 0 : No 0 : (North America)
1 : Bk 14 : (Others)
2 : 1C
4 : 2C
8 : 4C
3 : Bk+1C
12 : 2C+4C
7 : Bk+1C+2C
14 : 1C+2C+4C
15 : Total
177 PS Limit Toner Overlap 0 : Off 1 : On
1 : On
269
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.6. F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)
↓
↓
↓
If you wish to select another function, touch tub key or scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Touch "Input" key code number on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" button.
↓
If you wish to input minus value, press "Reset" key.
↓
↓
Press "Close" key.
↓
↓
Note:
The Factory Setting is different in each model.
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
000 Registration Clr Normal Color original registration adjustment for -50 - +50
normal scan speed. 0.21 mm
001 Registration Clr Slow Color original registration adjustment for half -50 - +50
of normal scan speed. 0.21 mm
002 Not Used
-004
005 Registration B/W Normal Monochrome original registration adjustment -50 - +50
for normal scan speed. 0.34 mm
(DP-C322)
0.27 mm
(DP-C262)
006 Registration B/W Slow Monochrome original registration adjustment -50 - +50
for half of normal scan speed. 0.21 mm
007 Registration B/W & CL Mixed original registration adjustment for -50 - +50
normal scan speed. 0.21 mm
008 Not Used
-009
010 Paper Loop Tray,B/W,Nrm Fine Adjustment for an Individual Tray for -50 - +50
Monochrome original at standard speed. 0.34 mm
(DP-C322)
0.27 mm
(DP-C262)
011 Paper Loop Tray,Clr,Nrm Fine Adjustment for an Individual Tray for -50 - +50
Color original at standard speed. 0.21 mm
270
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
012 Paper Loop Tray,*,Slow Fine Adjustment for an Individual Tray for -50 - +50
Mixed originals at half of the standard speed. 0.105 mm
013 Not Used
-014
015 Paper Loop By-p,B/W,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for -50 - +50
Monochrome original at standard speed. 0.34 mm
(DP-C322)
0.27 mm
(DP-C262)
016 Paper Loop By-p,Clr,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for -50 - +50
Color original at standard speed. 0.21 mm
017 Paper Loop By-p,*,Slow Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for -50 - +50
Mixed original at half of the standard speed. 0.105 mm
018 PaperLoop Bp,Thick,Slow Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for -50 - +50
Thick original at half of the standard speed. 0.105 mm
019 Not Used
020 Paper Loop ADU,B/W,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the ADU for Monochrome -50 - +50
original at standard speed. 0.34 mm
(DP-C322)
0.27 mm
(DP-C262)
021 Paper Loop ADU,Clr,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the ADU for Color original -50 - +50
at standard speed. 0.21 mm
022 Paper Loop ADU,*,Slow Fine Adjustment for the ADU for Mixed -50 - +50
original at half of the standard speed. 0.105 mm
023- Not Used
024
025 Registration Void Lead edge read point adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
026- Not Used
029
030 Trail Edge Void A3,LD Trail edge void for A3, LD adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
031 Trail Edge Void B4,LG Trail edge void for B4, LG adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
032 Trail Edge Void FLS Trail edge void for FLS adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
033 Trail Edge Void A4R,LTR Trail edge void for A4R, LTR adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
034 Trail Edge Void B5R Trail edge void for B5R adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
035 Trail Edge Void A4,LT Trail edge void for A4, LT adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
036 Trail Edge Void B5,Exc Trail edge void for B5, Exc adjustment. 0 - +99
0.2 mm
037- Not Used
039
040 Side Adjust (Bypass) LSU side to side adjustment for the Sheet -50 - +50
Bypass. 0.2 mm
271
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
041 Side Adjust (Tray1) LSU side to side adjustment for the Tray 1. -50 - +50
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
045 Side Adjust (ADU,By-p) LSU side to side adjustment for ADU, Sheet -50 - +50
Bypass. 0.2 mm
046 Side Adjust (ADU,Tray1) LSU side to side adjustment for ADU, -50 - +50
Tray 1. 0.2 mm
Tray 2. 0.2 mm
Tray 3. 0.2 mm
Tray 4. 0.2 mm
050- Not Used
054
055 Polygon Motor Speed,CL Polygon motor speed adjustment for color -99 - +99
printouts. 0.10%
056 Polygon Motor Speed,B/W Polygon motor speed adjustment for -99 - +99
monochrome printouts. 0.10%
057- Not Used
059
060 OPC1 MTR CL STD Speed OPC 1 motor standard speed adjustment for -99 - +99
color printouts. 0.05%
061 OPC1 MTR CL Half Speed OPC 1 motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
adjustment for color printouts. 0.05%
062- Not Used
064
065 OPC2 MTR B/W STD Speed OPC 2 motor standard speed adjustment for -99 - +99
066 OPC2 MTR CL STD Speed OPC 2 motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
adjustment for monochrome printouts. 0.05%
067 Not Used
068 OPC2 MTR Half Speed OPC 2 motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
adjustment for mixed printouts. 0.05%
069 Not Used
070 DEV1 MTR CL STD Speed Developer 1 motor standard speed -99 - +99
071 DEV1 MTR CL Half Speed Developer 1 motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
072- Not Used
074
075 DEV2 MTR B/W STD Speed Developer 2 motor standard speed -99 - +99
272
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
076 DEV2 MTR CL STD Speed Developer 2 motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
077 Not Used
078 DEV2 MTR Half Speed Developer 2 motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
079 Not Used
080 Feed MTR B/W STD Speed Feed motor standard speed adjustment for -50 - +50
monochrome printouts. 0.10 %
081 Feed MTR CL STD Speed Feed motor standard speed adjustment for -50 - +50
color printouts. 0.10 %
082 Not Used
083 Feed MTR Half Speed Feed motor half of standard speed -50 - +50
adjustment for mixed printouts. 0.10 %
084 Not Used
085 ITMotor B/W STD Speed Intermediate Transfer motor standard speed -99 - +99
086 ITMotor CL STD Speed Intermediate Transfer motor standard speed -99 - +99
087 Not Used
088 ITMotor Half Speed Intermediate Transfer motor half of standard -99 - +99
speed adjustment for mixed printouts. 0.05%
089 Not Used
090 Fuser MTR BK STD Speed Fuser motor standard speed adjustment for -99 - +99
091 Fuser MTR CL STD Speed Fuser motor standard speed adjustment for -99 - +99
color printouts. 0.10%
092 Not Used
093 Fuser MTR Half Speed Fuser motor half of standard speed -99 - +99
094 Not Used
095 Fuser MTR Half Speed L Fuser motor L half of standard speed -99 - +99
adjustment. 0.10%
096- Not Used
123
124 WarmUP Timer WarmUP Timer Compensation for special -20 - +20
environment. 1sec.
125 T4 tmp (color Half Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) half of standard -5 - +5
speed adjustment for color printouts. 1°C
126 T4 tmp (mono Half Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) half of standard -5 - +5
speed adjustment for monochrome printouts. 1°C
127 T4 tmp (color STD Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) of standard speed -5 - +5
adjustment for color printouts. 1°C
128 T4 tmp (mono STD Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) of standard speed -5 - +5
adjustment for monochrome printouts. 1°C
129 T5 tmp Standby temperature (T5) adjustment. -5 - +5
1°C
130 OHP Min Temp OHP minimum temperature adjustment. -30 - +30
1°C
273
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
131 OHP Max Temp OHP maximum temperature adjustment. -30 - +30
1°C
132 Long Min Temp Long paper minimum temperature -30 - +30
adjustment. 1°C
133 Envelope Min Temp Envelope minimum temperature adjustment. -30 - +30
1°C
134 Envelope Max Temp Envelope maximum temperature adjustment. -30 - +30
1°C
135 Th1 Temp(Print Start) Thermistor 1 temperature at the start of 0 - +255
printing. (Read Only)
139 Not Used
140 Th1 Temp(Error) Thermistor 1 temperature when error 0 - +255
occurred. (Read Only)
144 Not Used
145 IH Voltage(Print Start) IH drive voltage at the start of printing. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
146 IH Current(Print Start) IH drive current at the start of printing. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
147 Cnt. Ratio(Print Start) Control ratio at the start of printing. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
148- Not Used
149
150 IH Voltage(Error) IH drive voltage when error occurred. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
151 IH Current(Error) IH drive current when error occurred. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
152 Control Ratio(Error) Control ratio when error occurred. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
153- Not Used
199
200 Color Text Contrast Color contrast adjustment for text mode. -32 - +31
1/256 step
201 Color T/P Contrast Color contrast adjustment for text/photo -32 - +31
mode. 1/256 step
202 Color Photo Contrast Color contrast adjustment for photo mode. -32 - +31
1/256 step
274
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
203- Not Used
204
205 Mono. Text Contrast Monochrome contrast adjustment for text -32 - +31
mode. 1/256 step
206 Mono. T/P Contrast Monochrome contrast adjustment for text/ -32 - +31
photo mode. 1/256 step
207 Mono. Photo Contrast Monochrome contrast adjustment for photo -32 - +31
mode. 1/256 step
208- Not Used
209
210 Color Text Density(lt) Color image density adjustment for text mode -32 - +31
(highlight). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
211 Color T/P Density(lt) Color image density adjustment for text/photo -32 - +31
mode (highlight). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
212 Color Photo Density(lt) Color image density adjustment for photo -32 - +31
mode (highlight). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
213- Not Used -32 - +31
214 1/256 step
215 Color Text Density(dk) Color image density adjustment for text mode -32 - +31
(dark). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
216 Color T/P Density(dk) Color image density adjustment for text/photo -32 - +31
mode (dark). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
217 Color Photo Density(dk) Color image density adjustment for photo -32 - +31
mode (dark). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
218- Not Used
219
220 Mono. Text Density(lt) Monochrome image density adjustment for -32 - +31
text mode (highlight). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
221 Mono. T/P Density(lt) Monochrome image density adjustment for -32 - +31
text/photo mode (highlight). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
222 Mono. Photo Density(lt) Monochrome image density adjustment for -32 - +31
photo mode (highlight). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
275
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
223- Not Used
224
225 Mono. Text Density(dk) Monochrome image density adjustment for -32 - +31
text mode (dark). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
226 Mono. T/P Density(dk) Monochrome image density adjustment for -32 - +31
text/photo mode (dark). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
227 Mono. Photo Density(dk) Monochrome image density adjustment for -32 - +31
photo mode (dark). 1/256 step
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
228- Not Used
229
230 Adjust Text Sharpness Scanner Sharpness adjustment using digital -3 - +3
image processing for Text Copy Mode. 1 level step
231 Adjust T/P Sharpness Scanner Sharpness adjustment using digital -3 - +3
image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode. 1 level step
232 Adjust Photo Sharpness Scanner Sharpness adjustment using digital -3 - +3
image processing for Photo Copy Mode. 1 level step
233- Not Used
234
235 Adjust Auto Mode(slice) Slice level adjustment using digital image 0 - +15
processing for Automatic Copy Mode. 1 level step
236 Adjust Auto Mode(area) Area level adjustment using digital image 0 - +15
processing for Automatic Copy Mode. 1 level step
237 Adjust 2C Mode Color/Monochrome level adjustment using 0 - +15
digital image processing for 2-Color Copy 1 level step
Mode.
238- Not Used
239
240 Adjust Saturation Chroma adjustment. -32 - +31
1 level step
241 Adjust Color balance Color balance adjustment. 0 - +10
1 level step
242 Adjust Tint Tint adjustment. -1 - +2
1 level step
243 Adjust Hue Circle Hue circle adjustment. -3 - +3
10°
244- Not Used
245
246 Rm. G-Color Start Y Horizontal start line position adjustment for +2 - +8192
Digital Sky Shot mode. 1dot.
247 Rm. G-Color End Y Horizontal end line position adjustment for +2 - +8192
248 Rm. G-Color Start Y(p) Horizontal start line position adjustment for +2 - +8192
276
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
249 Rm. G-Color End Y(p) Horizontal end line position adjustment for +2 - +8192
250 ADF Rm. G-Color Start X Vertical start position adjustment for base hue 0 - +16
(ADF). 1/16
251 ADF Rm. G-Color End X Vertical end position adjustment for base hue 0 - +16
(ADF). 1/16
252 FB Rm. G-Color Start X Vertical start position adjustment for base hue 0 - +16
(FB). 1/16
253 FB Rm. G-Color End X Vertical end position adjustment for base hue 0 - +16
(FB). 1/16
254 Not Used
255 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:R Gamma adjustment for real time base hue -8 - +7
(color). 1/256 step
256 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:R Offset adjustment for real time base hue -128 - +127
(color). 1/256 step
257 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:R Gamma adjustment for real time base hue -8 - +7
(monochrome). 1/256 step
258 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:R Offset adjustment for real time base hue -128 - +127
259 Not Used
260 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:M Gamma adjustment for pre-scan base hue -8 - +7
(color). 1 level step
261 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:M Offset adjustment for pre-scan base hue -128 - +127
(color). 1 level step
262 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:M Gamma adjustment for pre-scan base hue -8 - +7
263 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:M Offset adjustment for pre-scan base hue -128 - +127
264 Not Used
265 Tone Adjust Under Limit Tone Under Limit adjustment. -64 - +63
(-) : Down. 1/256 step
(+) : Up.
266- Not Used
299
300 Adj 100% Side-Side Read Identical vertical (side-to-side) size ratio (FB, -9 - +9
ADF) adjustment. 0.1%
301 100% Selection Select from 99.1% to 100.9% adjustment. -9 - +9
(FB, ADF). 0.1%
302- Not Used
304
305 Original Registration Platen original registration detection timing -30 - +30
adjustment. 0.2 mm
306 Trail Edge Read Timing Trail edge void adjustment. -9 - 0
0.5 mm
307 CCD Read Position Adj CCD read position adjustment. -50 - +50
0.2 mm
308 Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read Identical horizontal (top-to-bottom) size ratio -9 - +9
adjustment. 0.1%
277
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
309 Shading Position Offset Shading position offset (FB) adjustment. -10 - +10
0.1 mm
310 FB Lead Void Setting Registration edge void (FB) adjustment. 0 - +9
0.5 mm
311 FB Side Void Setting Registration side void (FB) adjustment. 0 - +9
0.5 mm
312 FB Trail Void Setting Registration trail void (FB) adjustment. 0 - +9
0.5 mm
313- Not Used
314
315 ADF Lead Void Setting Registration edge void (ADF) adjustment. 0 - +9
0.5 mm
316 ADF Side Void Setting Registration side void (ADF) adjustment. 0 - +9
0.5 mm
317 ADF Trail Void Setting Registration trail void (ADF) adjustment. 0 - +9
0.5 mm
318- Not Used
319
320 Stamp Position Adjust Verification Stamp position adjustment. -50 - +50
0.3 mm
321 ADF Reverse Stop Posi. ADF reverse stop position adjustment. -99 - +99
0.3 mm
322 ADF Exhaust Stop Posi. ADF ejection stop position adjustment. -99 - +99
0.3 mm
323 ADF Feed Regist.1-Sided Individual Fine Adjustment for ADF 1 sided. -99 - +99
0.3 mm
324 ADF Feed Regist.2-Sided Individual Fine Adjustment for ADF 2 sided. -99 - +99
0.3 mm
325 ADF Read Main Scan Pos. ADF horizontal image read start position -99 - +99
adjustment. 0.05 mm
326 Original Lead Edge ADF ADF Original Lead Edge adjustment. -99 - +99
0.3 mm
327 Original Trail Edge ADF ADF Original Trail Edge adjustment. -99 - +99
0.3 mm
328 ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Identical vertical (side-to-side) size ratio -9 - +9
adjustment. 0.1%
329 ADF 100% Image 2-Sided Identical horizontal (top-to-bottom) size ratio -9 - +9
adjustment. 0.1%
330 FB Lead Void(NWS) Lead edge void for Network Scanner (FB) 0 - +9
adjustment. 0.5 mm
331 FB Side Void(NWS) Side edge void for Network Scanner (FB) 0 - +9
adjustment. 0.5 mm
332 FB Trail Void(NWS) Trail edge void for Network Scanner (FB) 0 - +9
adjustment. 0.5 mm
333- Not Used
334
335 ADF Lead Void(NWS) Lead edge void for Network Scanner (ADF) 0 - +9
adjustment. 0.5 mm
278
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
336 ADF Side Void(NWS) Side edge void for Network Scanner (ADF) 0 - +9
adjustment. 0.5 mm
337 ADF Trail Void(NWS) Trail edge void for Network Scanner (ADF) 0 - +9
adjustment. 0.5 mm
338- Not Used
399
400 AC Charge Freq.Adj.Full AC Charge voltage bias frequency ----
adjustment for full speed (color).
401 AC Charge Freq.Adj.Half AC Charge voltage bias frequency ----
adjustment for half speed (mixed).
402 AC Charge Freq.Adj.B/W AC Charge voltage bias frequency ----
adjustment (monochrome).
403- Not Used
404
405 AC Charge Adj. Y Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +92
speed (Y). 3.79 µA/step
406 AC Charge Adj. M Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +92
speed (M). 3.79 µA/step
407 AC Charge Adj. C Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +92
speed (C). 3.79 µA/step
408 AC Charge Adj. BK Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +92
speed (BK). 3.79 µA/step
409 Not Used
410 AC Charge Adj. Y Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -85 - +127
411 AC Charge Adj. M Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -85 - +127
412 AC Charge Adj. C Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -85 - +127
413 AC Charge Adj. BK Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -85 - +127
414 AC Charge Adj. B/W AC Charge bias voltage adjustment (B/W). -125 - +71
32 : 4.24 µA/
step
26 : 3.98 µA/
step
415- Not Used
419
420 DC Charge Adj. Y Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -88 - +127
421 DC Charge Adj. M Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -88 - +127
422 DC Charge Adj. C Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -88 - +127
423 DC Charge Adj. BK Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -88 - +127
424 Not Used
425 DC Charge Adj. Y Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -88 - +127
279
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
426 DC Charge Adj. M Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -88 - +127
427 DC Charge Adj. C Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -88 - +127
428 DC Charge Adj. Bk Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -88 - +127
429 DC Charge Adj. B/W DC Charge bias voltage adjustment (BK). -88 - +127
3.71 µA/step
430 AC Bias Freqency Adj. AC bias voltage frequency adjustment. -----
431 AC Bias Duty Adj. AC bias voltage duty adjustment. -95 - +127
0.1 %/step
432 AC Bias 4C Adj. Full AC bias voltage adjustment for full speed -127 - +127
(color). 3.91 V/step
433 AC Bias Adj. Half AC bias voltage adjustment for half speed -127 - +127
(mixed). 3.91 V/step
434 AC Bias Adj. B/W AC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (B/ -127 - +127
W). 3.91 V/step
435 DC Bias Adj. Y Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (Y). -125 - +127
3.13 V/step
436 DC Bias Adj. M Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (M). -125 - +127
3.13 V/step
437 DC Bias Adj. C Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (C). -125 - +127
3.13 V/step
438 DC Bias Adj. BK Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed -125 - +127
(BK). 3.13 V/step
439 Not Used
440 DC Bias Adj. Y Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed -125 - +127
(Y). 3.13 V/step
441 DC BiasDC Bias Adj. M Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed -125 - +127
(M). 3.13 V/step
442 DC Bias Adj. C Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed -125 - +127
(C). 3.13 V/step
443 DC Bias Adj. BK Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed -125 - +127
(BK). 3.13 V/step
444 DC Bias Adj. B/W DC bias voltage adjustment (BK). -125 - +127
3.13 V/step
445 DC Charge Y WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (Y). 3.13 V/step
446 DC Charge M WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (M). 3.13 V/step
447 DC Charge C WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (C). 3.13 V/step
448 DC Charge BK WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (BK). 3.13 V/step
449 Not Used
450 DC Charge Y WO/PaperHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (Y). 3.71 V/step
280
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
451 DC Charge M WO/PaperHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (M). 3.71 V/step
452 DC Charge C WO/PaperlHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (C). 3.71 V/step
453 DC Charge BK WO/PaperHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half -127 - +68
speed paper spacing (BK). 3.71 V/step
454 DC Charge B/W WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for paper -127 - +68
spacing (B/W). 3.71 V/step
455 DC Bias Adj. WO/Paper DC bias voltage adjustment for paper -52 - +127
spacing. 3.13 V/step
456 Laser Power Adj. Y Full Laser Power for full speed (Y) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
457 Laser Power Adj. M Full Laser Power for full speed (M) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
458 Laser Power Adj. C Full Laser Power for full speed (C) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
459 Laser Power Adj.BK Full Laser Power for full speed (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
460 Laser Power Adj. Y Half Laser Power for half speed (Y) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
461 Laser Power Adj. M Half Laser Power for half speed (M) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
462 Laser Power Adj. C Half Laser Power for half speed (C) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
463 Laser Power Adj.Bk Half Laser Power for half speed (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
464 Not Used
465 Laser Pwr Adj. Y 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (Y) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
466 Laser Pwr Adj. M 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (M) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
467 Laser Pwr Adj. C 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (C) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
468 Laser Pwr Adj.Bk 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
469 Laser Power Adj. B/W Laser Power (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.0018 mW/
step
281
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
470 Solid PWM Adj. Y Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (Y) -127 - +127
adjustment. 0.39 %/step
471 Solid PWM Adj. M Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (M) -127 - +127
472 Solid PWM Adj. C Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (C) -127 - +127
473 Solid PWM Adj. BK Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (BK) -127 - +127
474 Not Used
475 Solid PWM Adj. Y Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (Y) -127 - +127
476 Solid PWM Adj. M Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (M) -127 - +127
477 Solid PWM Adj. C Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (C) -127 - +127
478 Solid PWM Adj. BK Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (BK) -127 - +127
479 Solid PWMAdj. B/W Solid PWM value of LSU (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.39 %/step
480 Edge PWM Adj. Y Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (Y) -127 - +127
481 Edge PWM Adj. M Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (M) -127 - +127
482 Edge PWM Adj. C Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (C) -127 - +127
483 Edge PWM Adj. BK Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (K) -127 - +127
484 Not Used
485 Edge PWM Adj. Y Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (Y) -127 - +127
486 Edge PWM Adj. M Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (M) -127 - +127
487 Edge PWM Adj. C Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (C) -127 - +127
488 Edge PWM Adj. BK Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (BK) -127 - +127
489 Edge PWM Adj. Y B/W Edge PWM value of LSU (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.39 %/step
490 Dot PWM Adj. Y Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (Y) -127 - +127
491 Dot PWM Adj. M Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (M) -127 - +127
492 Dot PWM Adj. C Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (C) -127 - +127
493 Dot PWM Adj. BK Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (BK) -127 - +127
494 Not Used
282
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
495 Dot PWM Adj. Y Half Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (Y) -127 - +127
496 Dot PWM Adj. M Half Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (M) -127 - +127
497 Dot PWM Adj. C Half Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (C) -127 - +127
498 Dot PWM Adj. BKHalf Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (BK) -127 - +127
499 Dot PWM Adj. B/W Dot PWM value of LSU (Y) adjustment. -127 - +127
0.39 %/step
500 Solid PWM Adj.Y 1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (Y) -127 - +127
501 Solid PWM Adj.M 1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (M) -127 - +127
502 Solid PWM Adj.C 1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (C) -127 - +127
503 Solid PWM Adj.BK1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (BK) -127 - +127
504 Not Used
505 Edge PWM Adj. Y 1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (Y) -127 - +127
506 Edge PWM Adj. M 1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (M) -127 - +127
507 Edge PWM Adj. C 1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (C) -127 - +127
508 Edge PWM Adj. BK1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (BK) -127 - +127
509 Not Used
510 Dot PWM Adj. Y 1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (Y) -127 - +127
511 Dot PWM Adj. M 1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (M) -127 - +127
512 Dot PWM Adj. C 1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (C) -127 - +127
513 Dot PWM Adj. BK1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (BK) -127 - +127
514 Not Used
515 STR Cleaning Adj. + Cleaning voltage plus value for STR -32 - +9
adjustment. 28.04 V/step
516 STR Cleaning Adj. - Cleaning voltage minus value for STR -32 - +127
517- Not Used
519
520 TDC Gain Adj. Y Toner density sensor gain voltage (Y) -127 - +127
521 TDC Gain Adj. M Toner density sensor gain voltage (M) -127 - +127
283
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
522 TDC Gain Adj. C Toner density sensor gain voltage (C) -127 - +127
523 TDC Gain Adj. BK Toner density sensor gain voltage (BK) -127 - +127
524 TDC Gain Adj. B/W Toner density sensor gain voltage (B/W) -127 - +127
525 TDC Image Limit Adj. Y The Upper Limit and the Bottom for 0 - +24
F6-610 (Y) adjustment. 1 V/step
526 TDC Image Limit Adj. M The Upper Limit and the Bottom for 0 - +24
F6-611 (M) adjustment. 1 V/step
527 TDC Image Limit Adj. C The Upper Limit and the Bottom for 0 - +24
F6-612 (C) adjustment. 1 V/step
528 TDC Image Limit Adj. BK The Upper Limit and the Bottom for 0 - +24
F6-613 (BK) adjustment. 1 V/step
529- Not Used
534
535 APIC Solid Target Y (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (Y) -127 - +127
536 APIC Solid Target M (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (M) -127 - +127
537 APIC Solid Target C (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (C) -127 - +127
538 APIC Solid Target BK (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (BK) -127 - +127
539 Not Used
540 APIC Edge PWM Target Y Edge PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (Y) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
Effective for F5-130 : Yes
541 APIC Edge PWM Target M Edge PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (M) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
542 APIC Edge PWM Target C Edge PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (C) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
543 APIC Edge PWM Target BK Edge PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (BK) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
544 Not Used
545 APIC Dot PWM Target Y Dot PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (Y) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
546 APIC Dot PWM Target M Dot PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (M) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
547 APIC Dot PWM Target C Dot PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (C) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
548 APIC Dot PWM Target BK Dot PWM target voltage for Image -127 - +127
temperature sensor (BK) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
284
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
549 Not Used
550 TDC Gain Voltage Y Toner density sensor gain voltage (Y) -127 - +105
Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.
551 TDC Gain Voltage M Toner density sensor gain voltage (M) -127 - +105
552 TDC Gain Voltage C Toner density sensor gain voltage (C) -127 - +105
553 TDC Gain Voltage BK Toner density sensor gain voltage (BK) -127 - +105
554 TDC Gain Voltage B/W Toner density sensor gain voltage (B/W) -127 - +105
555 TDC Judg. Lebel Y Toner supply starting judgement voltage -25 - +25
level (Y) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
556 TDC Judg. Lebel M Toner supply starting judgement voltage -25 - +25
level (M) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
557 TDC Judg. Lebel C Toner supply starting judgement voltage -25 - +25
level (C) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
558 TDC Judg. Lebel BK Toner supply starting judgement voltage -25 - +25
level (BK) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
559 TDC Judg. Lebel B/W Toner supply starting judgement voltage -25 - +25
level (B/W) adjustment. 0.016 V/step
560 TDC Max. Read Only Y TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum -25 - +25
toner output supply (Y). (Read Only)
561 TDC Max. Read Only M TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum -25 - +25
toner output supply (M). (Read Only)
562 TDC Max. Read Only C TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum -25 - +25
toner output supply (C). (Read Only)
563 TDC Max. Read Only BK TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum -25 - +25
toner output supply (BK). (Read Only)
564 Not Used
565 TDC Min. Read Only Y TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum +5 - +55
566 TDC Min. Read Only M TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum +5 - +55
285
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
567 TDC Min. Read Only C TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum +5 - +55
568 TDC Min. Read Only BK TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum +5 - +55
569 Not Used
570 TDC Avg. Read Only Y TDC sensor power adjustment for average -15 - +35
571 TDC Avg. Read Only M TDC sensor power adjustment for average -15 - +35
572 TDC Avg. Read Only C TDC sensor power adjustment for average -15 - +35
573 TDC Avg. Read Only BK TDC sensor power adjustment for average -15 - +35
574 Not Used
575 Toner Supply Read Y Measures the toner supply (Y). 0 - +7
(Read Only)
576 Toner Supply Read M Measures the toner supply (M). 0 - +7
(Read Only)
577 Toner Supply Read C Measures the toner supply (C). 0 - +7
(Read Only)
578 Toner Supply Read BK Measures the toner supply (BK). 0 - +7
(Read Only)
579 Not Used
580 TDC Deve. Life Read Y TDC Developer (Y) resistance value -63 - +63
adjustment. (Read Only)
581 TDC Deve. Life Read M TDC Developer (M) resistance value -63 - +63
582 TDC Deve. Life Read C TDC Developer (C) resistance value -63 - +63
583 TDC Deve. Life Read BK TDC Developer (BK) resistance value -63 - +63
584 Not Used
585 DrumLife Charge Read Y OPC Drum (Y) degradation charge -127 - +127
(Not Used) compensation adjustment. (Read Only)
586 DrumLife Charge Read M OPC Drum (M) degradation charge -127 - +127
587 DrumLife Charge Read C OPC Drum (C) degradation charge -127 - +127
588 Drum Life Chrge Read BK OPC Drum (BK) degradation charge -127 - +127
589 Not Used
286
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
590 Drum Life Laser Read Y OPC Drum life (Y) Laser power compensation 0 - +127
591 Drum Life Laser Read M OPC Drum life (M) Laser power 0 - +127
compensation adjustment. (Read Only)
592 Drum Life Laser Read C OPC Drum life (C) Laser power compensation 0 - +127
593 Drum Life Laser Read BK OPC Drum life (BK) Laser power 0 - +127
594 Drum Life Laser Adj. 4C Laser compensation (4 color) adjustment. -10 - +10
0.39 %/step
595 Drum T/H Charge Read Y OPC Drum (Y) environment temperature and -127 - +127
(Not Used) humidity charge adjustment. (Read Only)
596 Drum T/H Charge Read M OPC Drum (M) environment temperature and -127 - +127
597 Drum T/H Charge Read C OPC Drum (C) environment temperature and -127 - +127
598 Drum T/H Charge Read BK OPC Drum (BK) environment temperature -127 - +127
(Not Used) and humidity charge adjustment. (Read Only)
599 Not Used
600 Drum Life Charge Y WO/P Drum life (Y) voltage compensation charge -67 - 0
601 Drum Life Charge M WO/P Drum life (M) voltage compensation charge -67 - 0
602 Drum Life Charge C WO/P Drum life (C) voltage compensation charge -67 - 0
603 Drum Life Chrge BK WO/P Drum life (BK) voltage compensation charge -67 - 0
604 Not Used
605 Drum T/H Charge Y WO/Paper Drum paper spacing (Y) environment -15 - +15
temperature and humidity compensation (Rad Only)
charge adjustment.
606 Drum T/H Charge M WO/Paper Drum paper spacing (M) environment -15 - +15
charge adjustment.
607 Drum T/H Charge C WO/Paper Drum paper spacing (C) environment -15 - +15
charge adjustment.
287
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
608 Drum T/H Charge BK WO/P Drum paper spacing (BK) environment -15 - +15
charge adjustment.
609 Not Used
610 TDC Image Read Y TDC image (Y) dot development charge -12 - +24
611 TDC Image Read M TDC image (M) dot development charge -12 - +24
612 TDC Image Read C TDC image (C) dot development charge -12 - +24
613 TDC Image Read BK TDC image (BK) dot development charge -12 - +24
614 Not Used
615 TDC T/H Read Y TDC (Y) temperature and humidity -63 - +63
compensation adjustment. (Read only)
616 TDC T/H Read M TDC (M) temperature and humidity -63 - +63
617 TDC T/H Read C TDC (C) temperature and humidity -63 - +63
618 TDC T/H Read BK TDC (BK) temperature and humidity -63 - +63
619 Not Used
620 TDC Half Speed Read Y TDC half speed charge adjustment (Y). -63 - +63
Effective for F5-136 : Yes (Read only)
621 TDC Half Speed Read M TDC half speed charge adjustment (M). -63 - +63
622 TDC Half Speed Read C TDC half speed charge adjustment (C). -63 - +63
623 TDC Half Speed Read BK TDC half speed charge adjustment (BK). -63 - +63
624 Not Used
625 FTR/STR Temp. Read FTR / STR temperature sensor value 0 - +255
adjustment. (Read only)
626 FTR/STR Humidity Read FTR / STR humidity sensor value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read only)
627- Not Used
629
630 FTR Drive Read Y FTR (Y) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
288
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
631 FTR Drive Read M FTR (M) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
632 FTR Drive Read C FTR (C) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
633 FTR Drive Read BK FTR (BK) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
634 Not Used
635 STR Drive Read STR drive voltage adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
636 Discharge Drive Discharge drive voltage adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
637- Not Used
639
640 Patch Sens Read Y Patch sensor (Y) value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
641 Patch Sens Read M Patch sensor (M) value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
642 Patch Sens Read C Patch sensor (C) value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
643 Patch Sens Read BK Patch sensor (BK) value adjustment. 0 - +255
(Read Only)
644 Not Used
645 Reg Sens Dirty Std Read Registration sensor dirty standard -127 - +127
646 Reg Sens Dirty Mon Read Registration sensor dirty monitor adjustment. -127 - +127
(Read Only)
647- Not Used
649
650 APIC DC Charge Read Y APIC DC Charge (Y) compensation -27 - +27
(Not Used) adjustment. (Read Only)
651 APIC DC Charge Read M APIC DC Charge (M) compensation -27 - +27
652 APIC DC Charge Read C APIC DC Charge (C) compensation -27 - +27
653 APIC DC Charge Read BK APIC DC Charge (BK) compensation -27 - +27
654 Not Used
655 APIC DC Bais Read Y APIC DC Bias (Y) charge compensation -32 - +32
656 APIC DC Bais Read M APIC DC Bias (M) charge compensation -32 - +32
657 APIC DC Bais Read C APIC DC Bias (C) charge compensation -32 - +32
658 APIC DC Bais Read BK APIC DC Bias (BK) charge compensation -32 - +32
659 Not Used
660 APIC Laser Read Y APIC LSU (Y) power charge compensation -127 - +127
289
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
661 APIC Laser Read M APIC LSU (M) power charge compensation -127 - +127
662 APIC Laser Read C APIC LSU (C) power charge compensation -127 - +127
663 APIC Laser Read BK APIC LSU (BK) power charge compensation -127 - +127
664 Not Used
665 APIC Edge PWM Read Y APIC Edge PWM (Y) compensation 0 - +255
666 APIC Edge PWM Read M APIC Edge PWM (M) compensation 0 - +255
667 APIC Edge PWM Read C APIC Edge PWM (C) compensation 0 - +255
668 APIC Edge PWM Read BK APIC Edge PWM (BK) compensation 0 - +255
669 Not Used
670 APIC Dot PWM Read Y APIC Dot PWM (Y) compensation 0 - +255
671 APIC Dot PWM Read M APIC Dot PWM (M) compensation 0 - +255
672 APIC Dot PWM Read C APIC Dot PWM (C) compensation 0 - +255
673 APIC Dot PWM Read BK APIC Dot PWM (BK) compensation 0 - +255
674 Not Used
675 Belt Length Read Only Belt circumference compensation adjustment. -30 - +50
(Read only)
676- Not Used
679
680 FTR Adj. Y FTR (Y) current for control adjustment. -127 - +127
Effective for F5-145 : No 0.147 µA/
step
681 FTR Adj. M FTR (M) current for control adjustment. -127 - +127
step
682 FTR Adj. C FTR (C) current for control adjustment. -127 - +127
step
683 FTR Adj. BK FTR (BK) current for control adjustment. -127 - +127
step
290
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
684 Not Used
685 STR Adj. Face STR (Y) voltage control adjustment. -57 - +127
Effective for F5-155 : No 28.04 V/step
686 STR Adj. Back STR (M) voltage control adjustment. -86 - +127
687 Discharge Adj. Face STR (C) voltage control adjustment. 0 - +127
688 Discharge Adj. Back STR (BK) voltage control adjustment. -86 - +117
689 Not Used
690 FTR Device Adj. Y FTR (Y) detect resistance voltage adjustment. -100 - +127
691 FTR Device Adj. M FTR (M) detect resistance voltage -100 - +127
Effective for F5-146 : No
692 FTR Device Adj. C FTR (C) detect resistance voltage adjustment. -100 - +127
693 FTR Device Adj. BK FTR (BK) detect resistance voltage -100 - +127
Effective for F5-146 : No
694 Not Used
695 STR Resistance Adj. STR detect resistance value adjustment. -3 - +127
Effective for F5-156 : No 4 MΩ/step
696 STR Voltage Adj. STR detect resistance voltage adjustment. -25 - +127
Effective for F5-156 : No 16 V/step
697 Belt Reverse Time Adj. Belt reverse time adjustment. -1 - +12
10 msec./
step
698- Not Used
819
820 Color Reg Result Y-L-X Color (Y) Left sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
821 Color Reg Result Y-L-Y Color (Y) Left sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
822 Color Reg Result Y-C-X Color (Y) Middle sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
823 Color Reg Result Y-C-Y Color (Y) Middle sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
824 Color Reg Result Y-R-X Color (Y) Right sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
825 Color Reg Result Y-R-Y Color (Y) Right sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
826 Color Reg Result M-L-X Color (M) Left sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
827 Color Reg Result M-L-Y Color (M) Left sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
828 Color Reg Result M-C-X Color (M) Middle sensor horizontal -127 - +127
registration compensation adjustment. (Read Only)
291
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
829 Color Reg Result M-C-Y Color (M) Middle sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
830 Color Reg Result M-R-X Color (M) Right sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
831 Color Reg Result M-R-Y Color (M) Right sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
832 Color Reg Result C-L-X Color (C) Left sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
833 Color Reg Result C-L-Y Color (C) Left sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
834 Color Reg Result C-C-X Color (C) Middle sensor horizontal -127 - +127
registration compensation adjustment. (Read Only)
835 Color Reg Result C-C-Y Color (C) Middle sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
836 Color Reg Result C-R-X Color (C) Right sensor horizontal registration -127 - +127
837 Color Reg Result C-R-Y Color (C) Right sensor vertical registration -127 - +127
838- Not Used
839
840 Color Reg Calib. L Left sensor color registration LED intensity -127 - +127
target value adjustment. 0.016 mV
841 Color Reg Calib. C Middle sensor color registration LED intensity -127 - +127
842 Color Reg Calib. R Right sensor color registration LED intensity -127 - +127
843- Not Used
844
845 Color Reg Sensor mon.L Left sensor color registration LED intensity 0 - +255
target value monitor adjustment. (Read Only)
846 Color Reg Sensor mon.C Middle sensor color registration LED intensity 0 - +255
847 Color Reg Sensor mon.R Right sensor color registration LED intensity 0 - +255
848- Not Used
849
850 Color Reg Slice L Color registration of left sensor slice level -127 - +127
adjustment. 0.016 mV
851 Color Reg Slice C Color registration of middle sensor slice level -127 - +127
852 Color Reg Slice R Color registration of right sensor slice level -127 - +127
853- Not Used
854
855 Skew Y Right rotation Color (Y) skew registration adjustment. -90 - +90
(Read Only)
856 Skew M Right rotation Color (M) skew registration adjustment. -90 - +90
(Read Only)
292
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
857 Skew C Right rotation Color (C) skew registration adjustment. -90 - +90
(Read Only)
858 Color Reg Main Max Maximum dot color horizontal registration -127 - +127
859 Color Reg Sub Max Maximum dot color vertical registration -127 - +127
860 Color Reg Offset L-Y Color registration horizontal offset for left -3 - +3
sensor adjustment. 1 dot
861 Color Reg Offset C-Y Color registration horizontal offset for middle -3 - +3
862 Color Reg Offset R-Y Color registration horizontal offset right -3 - +3
863- Not Used
998
999 F5/F6 Initialization
293
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.7. F7 Mode: Electronic Counter
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F7 Mode
No. Item Function Remarks
00 List Print
01 Key Operator ID Code Key Operator’s identification code for access
to the counter mode.
02 Maintenance 00 Total Count B/W Copies / Prints Total Counter.
Count 01 Total Count 1C
02 Total Count 2C
03 Total Count 4C
04 Not Used
05 Toner Page Count Y Copies / Prints Toner Page Counter.
06 Toner Page Count M
07 Toner Page Count C
08 Toner Page Count BK
09 Not Used
10 PM Count Preventive Maintenance Counter.
11 Scanner PM Count Scanner Reading PM Counter.
12 ADF Count Total Originals fed through the ADF Counter.
13 ADF PM Count ADF PM counter
14 Not Used
15 OPC Drum Count Y Recording paper fed through the OPC Drum
16 OPC Drum Count M PM Counter.
17 OPC Drum Count C
18 OPC Drum Count BK
19 Not Used
20 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up C OPC Drum Average Print Counter.
21 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up B/W (Read only)
22 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up AUT
23-24 Not Used
294
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F7 Mode
02 Maintenance 25 Drum Life Count Down Y Drum Life Count Down Counter.
Count 26 Drum Life Count Down M (Read only)
27 Drum Life Count Down C
28 Drum Life Count Down BK
29 Not Used
30 AC Charge Count Y AC Charge Integrated value.
31 AC Charge Count M
32 AC Charge Count C
33 AC Charge Count BK
34 Not Used
35 DC Charge Count Y DC Charge Integrated value.
36 DC Charge Count M
37 DC Charge Count C
38 DC Charge Count BK
39 Not Used
40 Deve. Unit Count Y Developer Units Counter.
41 Deve. Unit Count M Perform F8-09 to reset counter. (Read Only)
42 Deve. Unit Count C
43 Deve. Unit Count BK
44 Not Used
45 Developer Count Y Developer Units Counter. (Read Only)
46 Developer Count M Perform F8-09/11 to reset counter.
47 Developer Count C
48 Developer Count BK
49 Not Used
50 Transfer Belt Count Transfer Belt Unit Counter.
Perform F8-29 to reset counter.
51 Belt Life Count Down Transfer Belt Life Count Down Counter.
(Read Only)
52 STR Life Count STR / Cleaning Blade Counter. (Read Only)
53 Belt RotationTime Count Transfer Belt Running Counter.
54 STR RotationTime Count STR Running Counter.
55 Deve.UnitRotateCountY Developer Unit Counter.
56 Deve.UnitRotateCountM Perform F8-09 to reset counter.
57 Deve.UnitRotateCountC
58 Deve.UnitRotateCountBK
59 Not Used
60 Add Toner Count Y Toner Supply Counter.
61 Add Toner Count M Perform F8-09/11 to reset counter.
62 Add Toner Count C
63 Add Toner Count BK
295
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F7 Mode
02 Maintenance 64 Not Used
Count 65 Fuser Belt Remain Count Fuser Belt Life Counter. (Read Only)
66 Fuser Main Remain Count Fuser Life Counter. (Read Only)
67-69 Not Used
70 Dot Count Y
71 Dot Count M
72 Dot Count C
73 Dot Count BK
74 Not Used
75 Total Dot Count BK B/W
76 Total Dot Count Y
77 Total Dot Count M
78 Total Dot Count C
79 Total Dot Count BK CL
80 Last Page Dot Count Y
81 Last Page Dot Count M
82 Last Page Dot Count C
83 Last Page Dot Count BK
84 Not Used
85 Fuser Belt Page Count Fuser Belt Unit Counter.
86 Fuser Belt Time Count Perform F8-26 to reset counter.
87 Fuser Main Page Count Fuser Unit Counter.
88 Fuser Main Time Count Perform F8-27 to reset counter.
89 Not Used
90 Drum Extra Count Y OPC Drum Unit Counter.
91 Drum Extra Count M
92 Drum Extra Count C
93 Drum Extra Count BK
94 Belt Extra Count Transfer Belt Unit Counter.
03 Paper Feed 00 Sheet Bypass Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Sheet
Count Bypass counter.
01 1st Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 1
counter.
02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 2
counter.
03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 3
counter.
04 4th Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 4
counter.
05 Not Used
06 2-sided Count 2-sided Total Prints Counter.
07 A4 / LETTER Count A4 / Letter Total Prints Counter.
08 A4-R / LETTER-R Count A4-R / Letter-R Total Prints Counter.
09 A3 / LEDGER Count A3 / Ledger Total Prints Counter.
10 B4 / LEGAL Count B4 / Legal Total Prints Counter.
296
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F7 Mode
04 Scanner 00 ADF Count Total originals fed through the ADF counter.
Count 01 ADF Read Count Total originals scanned through the ADF
counter.
02 Scanner Count Scanning operations Total Counter.
03 Scanner Read Count Scanner Total Read Counter.
05 Copy Count 00 Copy Print Count B/W Copies Total Prints Counter.
01 Copy Print Count 1C
04 Copy Print Count Single
05 Copy Scan Count Copies Total Scan Counter.
06 PC Count 00 PC Print Count B/W Printed from PC Total Prints Counter.
01 PC Print Count 4C
02 PC Print Count Single
03 PC Scan Count Scanned to PC Total Scan Counter.
07 Fax Count 00 Fax Transmit Count Fax Total Transmit Counter.
01 Fax Receive Count Fax Total Receive Counter.
02 Fax Print Count Fax Total Prints Counter.
03 Fax Print Count Single
08 All Counter Clears All Counters.
Clear
297
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.8. F8 Mode: Service Adjustment
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
00 Exp. Lamp Replacement When replacing the exposure lamp.
Procedure:
a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to
the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics
home position) where it can be replaced.
b) To return the optical system to the home position,
press the Clear key.*
01-05 Not Used
06 Error Log Print/View a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine
displays errors or paper jam codes stored in
memory, beginning with the oldest code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
07 Error Log Clear a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
08 Factory Use Only
09 Toner Density Adj Toner Density Adjustment Operation.
(When replacing Developer Unit.)
10 Not Used
11 Deve. Counter Reset Resets the Developer Counter and adjusts the
Toner Density.
(When replacing Developer.)
12-18 Not Used
19 Move Mirror To Lock a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
20-24 Not Used
298
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
25 Drum Counter Reset Resets the Drum Counter and adjusts the Toner
Density.
26 Fuser Belt Counter Reset Resets the Fuser Belt Counter (F7-65).
27 Fuser Main Counter Reset Resets the Fuser Main Counter (F7-66).
28 Belt Length Control Measures the Transfer Belt Length
29 Belt Counter Reset Resets Transfer Belt Counter and measures
Transfer Belt Length
30 Color Registration Color Registration Manual Adjustment Operation.
31 Not Used
32 STR Counter Reset Resets the STR Counter
33-46 Not Used
47 ADF Continuous Test Press START key to begin.
48 Platen Continuous Test Press START key to begin.
49 Not Used
50 Scan Image Test Available when the Network Scanner Option is
installed.
299
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.1.9. F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance
↓
↓
↓
If you wish to select another function, touch tub key or scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Press "Stop" key.
↓
↓
F9 Mode
Service Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 00 Fax Service Mode
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a
machine malfunction occurs.
02 Firmware 00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.
Version 01 SC Boot Displays the firmware version for SC
Boot.
02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.
03 EC Displays the firmware version for EC.
04 SCN Displays the firmware version for SCN.
05 Finisher Displays the firmware version for
Finisher.
06 FCB Displays the firmware version for FCB.
07 Not Used
03 Print 00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5
Device Info. and F6 modes.
01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.
02 System Address Prints the system memory setting.
Info.
03 Not Used
-
04
05 Calibration Prints the calibration information.
Information.
06 SC Board Check Prints the SC Board check list.
List.
04 RAM Edit 00 Relative Address Setting of Relative address.
Mode 01 Real Address Setting of Real address.
05 Serial - - Indicate of Serial number.
Number
300
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
F9 Mode
Service Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 06 RAM 00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax and Function
Maintenance Initialize parameters to default values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF
and back to the ON position to enable
the parameter settings.
01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
02 Not Used
03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.
05 Dept. Counter Clear Clears the Department Counter.
06 Job Log Clear Clears the Job Log.
07 Firmware 00 Update from F-ROM Updates the firmware in the machine
Update Master Card with the Master Firmware Card.
01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine
with the USB.
08
- Not Used - - -
10
11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.
12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.
13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).
14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).
301
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile)
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (destination dependent) for optimum performance and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become
inoperable.
5.2.1. Fax Service Mode Procedure
To enter the Fax Service Mode
Press “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously to enter the Service Mode, then F1 will
appear in the display.
Press "9" key on the Keypad.

↓
↓
Touch "00 Fax Service Mode" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired function or code number on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK"
key.
↓
When the "Cancel" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "Stop" key three time.
↓
↓
Note:
The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:
"START" : The new setting value is stored in the machine.
"V" : Scroll the function parameter number down.
"/\ " : Scroll the function parameter number up.
5.2.2. FAX Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.
Service Modes (For Facsimile)

No. Service Mode Description
00 Not Used
01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters (the home
position, etc.).
02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only.
03 Print Parameter List / Report Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order
Form.
04 Modem Tests Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
302
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Service Modes (For Facsimile)
No. Service Mode Description
05 Not Used
06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
07 Not Used
08 Check & Call Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
09 System Maintenance Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.
303
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.3. Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.
↓
↓
↓
Touch "01 Function Parameter Setting" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired function or code number on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" key.
↓
If you wish to code number touch "Input" key code number on the Touch Panel display.
If you wish to input minus value, press "Reset" key.
↓
When the "Cancel" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
If you wish to select another function or code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.
↓
Press “Close” key three time.
↓
Function Parameter Table

No. Parameter Selections Function
000 Monitor/Tel Dial 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX
2 = Tel/Dial automatically during On-Hook dialing.
Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START
TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically
001 Alarm Status 1 = Off Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer OFF : Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is
pressed or the error is cleared/
corrected.
002 Stop Comm. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC and STOP is pressed during communication.
003 Continuous Poll 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled.
3 = Hub (Rx only) Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,
then press the assigned Program Key to
store or add the documents into a polled file.
(See Note 1)
Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the
machine will continuously poll originals from
the remote stations until it is interrupted by
pressing "STOP".
004 Numeric ID Set 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to
2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID.
304
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
005 Destination Code 000 : Austria Specified destinations only.
001 : U.K.
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark
004 : Taiwan
005 : Finland
006 : Germany
007 : Netherlands
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
006 ID Display 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
007 JRNL Column 1 = Station Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
2 = RCV’D ID Journal.
008 Monitor 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
009 DC Loop 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook) communication test.
010 TX Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)
15 = -15 dBm
011 RX Level 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm
305
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
012 DTMF Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
013 G3 RX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
014 G3 TX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
015 ~ Not Used
016
017 TX Start 2400 bps Selects the transmission modem start speed,
4800 bps 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/
7200 bps 2400 bps.
9600 bps Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
TC7200 Note:
TC9600 This parameter is applicable only when
12000 bps communicating with regular G3 machines. When
14400 bps communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 32.
018 RX Start 2400 bps Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
4800 bps 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
7200 bps Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
9600 bps Note:
TC7200 This parameter is applicable only when
TC9600 communicating with regular G3 machines. When
12000 bps communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
14400 bps use Parameter No. 33.
019 ITU-T V.34 1 = Off Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.
2 = On Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,
3 = Select when entering Phone Book Dialing
Numbers or Manual Number Dialing.
020 ITU-T ECM 1 = Off (Invalid) Select the ECM mode.
2 = On (Valid)
021 EP Tone 1 = Off (without EP Tone) Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on
2 = On (with EP Tone) V.29 mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
022 Signal Interval 1 = 100 ms Selects the time interval between the receiving
2 = 200 ms signal and the transmitting signal.
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF Check 1 = Normal (Short) Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
2 = Long
024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
2 = 2100 Hz
025 COMM. Start-Up 1 = First Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT
2 = Second and Polling).
306
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
026 Non-Standard 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
2 = On (Valid)
027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode.
2 = On (Valid)
028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
2 = On (Valid) allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
029 Remote 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
Diagnostics 2 = On (accepts) Diagnostics from the service station.
030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and
2 = 1 sec the 300 bps signal.
031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
032 V34 TX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for
V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
033 V34 RX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
034 V34 TX SR 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
035 V34 RX SR 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/
3000/2800/2400 sr.
036 Not Used
037 Protocol Display 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed
2 = On (displayed) during communication.
(Press the Job Status Key to display)
038 Not Used
039 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the
~ Flash key.
100 = 1000 ms
040 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the
(PSTN) ~ Flash key.
100 = 1000 ms (For Germany, Austria and Czech)
041 Pause Time 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
~ dialing through a switchboard or for international
10 = 10 sec. calls.
042 Not Used
043 Redial Interval 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
~ minute steps.
15 = 15 minutes
044 Redial Count 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~ intervals.
15 = 15 times Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only) in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.
307
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
045 Ring Detect 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in
Count ~ 1 ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings
046 On-Hook Time 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
047 Response Wait 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after
Interval ~ completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.
20 ~ 150 sec.
(For France Only)
048~ Not Used
049
050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line
2 = Rough signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
051 Not Used
052 Pulse Rate 1 = 10 pps Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
2 = 20 pps
053~ Not Used
054
055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.
2 = On
056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing
2 = On the telephone number.
057 DC Loop Check 1 = Off Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during
(Except for USA 2 = On communication.
and Canada)
058 Comm. JRNL + 1 = Off (without image) Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.
Image 2 = On (with image) Journal with image.
059 Confidential RCV 1 = Off (does not print out) Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential
Report 2 = On (prints out) RCV Report.
060 Version Indicates the Host software
version.
061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:****** Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and
RX:****** CPY:****** copied document count.
062 Print Counter 1 = Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
2 = On the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
063~ Not Used
067
068 NYSE Fax 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the
Forward 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
(USA and Canada Note:
Only) Once this parameter is activated, Fax
Forwarding via Fax Parameter No. 054 is
automatically disabled, an Access Code of
"0000" is automatically assigned and Fax
Parameter No. 038 has a new setting added
called "NYSE".
308
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
069 NYSE Local Print 1 = Inc Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
(USA and Canada 2 = On (Always) after FAX Forwarding.
Only) INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
ON : Always prints.
070 Line Error 128 lines 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
256 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
512 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
1024 line Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
2048 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or
Off RTN/PIN.
(will not disconnect line) (Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to
"LINES") (See Note 1)
071 Total Error 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
2 = 10% PIN.
3 = 15% (Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20% (See Note 2)
072 Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6
2 = 3 lines/STD or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total
3 = 6 lines/STD error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit
4 = 12 lines/STD RTN/PIN.
(Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
073 Error Detect 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
2 = Rate
074 RTN Receive 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or
2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received.
075 Coding 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH or MR)
3 = MMR
(MH or MR or MMR)
4 = JBIG
076 Batch TX 1 = Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available.
(USA and Canada 2 = On
Only)
077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received
2=2m document that can be printed.
078~ Not Used
079
080 Doc Top Feed -99 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
~ ON position and the scanning start position.
+99
081 Doc End Feed -90 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
~ OFF position and the scanning end position.
+127
082 JAM Length 1=1m Selects the maximum length of the original that can
2=2m be scanned.
083 Not Used
084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring) Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the
2 = Busy (keep line busy) remote station when the recording paper runs out or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
085 Not Used
309
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
086 Reduction Fine 1 = Off Selects whether to fix with Fine Mode or not for the
2 = On Reduction transmission.
087 Darker Level 0 = Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level.
088 Normal Level ~ 0← →15
089 Lighter Level 15 = Darkest Contrast Lightest← →Darkest
090~ Not Used
091
092 Smoothing 1 = Off Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
2 = On
093 ~ Not Used
094
095 Reduction Ratio (70-100) Selects Print Reduction Ratio (%).
096 ~ Not Used
101
102 Original -30 Adjustment of original registration detection timing.
Registration ~
+30
103 Trail Edge Read -9 Adjustment of trail edge void.
Timing ~
0
104~ Not Used
109
110 MAC Address Indicates the MAC Address.
111 Not Used
112 Insert EMAIL TXT 1 = Off Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
2 = On is programmable and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
113 Not Used
114 SYMBOL SET 1 = Standard Selects whether the extended symbols other than
2 = Extended "%" is available for Internet Parameters entry.
115 Time Zone 1 = Scroll Selects the setting method for Time Zone.
2 = Direct Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll
through the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone
directly, (*) key to be used as a switch
between +/-.
116 Overwrite 1 = Yes Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
Warning 2 = No on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.
117~ Not Used
121
122 LDAP 1 = Off When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be
2 = On displayed as different characters.
310
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
123 One Ring Sound 1 = Off When Function Parameter No. 45 "Ring Detect
(USA and Canada 2 = On Count" is set to 1 Ring, and this parameter is
Only) (Effective from Oct. 2004 enabled (On), the machine will only ring once out
Production) loud, answering on the second ring count.
124 ~ Not Used
139
140 Text Density -32 Adjustment of text density.
~
+32
141 Text / Photo -32 Adjustment of text / photo density.
Density (It) ~
+32
142 Photo Density (It) -32 Adjustment of photo density.
~
+32
143~ Not Used
145
146 T / P Density (dk) -32 Adjustment of text / photo density for dark.
~
+32
147 Photo Density -32 Adjustment of photo density for dark.
(dk) ~
+32
148~ Not Used
174
175 FAX/EMAIL 1 = Adr.Book
Default 2 = ModeSet
176~ Not Used
199
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.
To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station".
The last Program Key will be assigned with the “Store 4 Poll” Key name automatically
and cannot be changed.
To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen
and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.
(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will
not be accepted.)
Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Setting
Signal
1:128 2:256 3:512 4:1024 5:2048 6:Off
MCF/PIP 0-31 0-63 0-127 0-255 0-511 Always
RTP/PIP 32-63 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 -
RTN/PIN 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-2047 -
311
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Setting
Signal
1:5% 2:10% 3:15% 4:20%
MCF/PIP 0-2 0-4 0-7 0-9
RTP/PIP 3-4 5-9 8-14 10-19
RTN/PIN 5- 10- 15- 20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications or regulations. Print the
Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
312
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.4. Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1. Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.
↓
↓
↓
Touch "03 Print Parameter List / Report" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
↓
If you wish to select another function or code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.
↓
↓
313
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Function Parameter List (Sample)
************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
000 Monitor/Tel Dial Monitor 050 Ring Detect Mode Normal

001 Alarm Status Timer 051 ----------
002 Stop Comm. JRNL On 052 Pulse Rate 10pps
003 Continuous Polling Off 053 ----------
004 Numeric ID Set On 054 ----------
005 Destination Code 999 055 Busy Tone Check On
006 ID Display Chara 056 Dial Tone Check Off
007 JRNL Column Station 057 DC Loop Check Off
008 Monitor Off 058 Comm. JRNL + Image On
009 DC Loop Off 059 Confidential RCV Report On
010 TX Level -9dBm 060 Version ..... AcV........

011 RX Level -43dBm 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 000080/000168/000003/000000
012 DTMF Level -5dBm 062 Print Counter Off
013 G3 RX EQL 0dB 063 ----------
014 G3 TX EQL 0dB 064 ----------
015 --------- 065 ----------
016 --------- 066 ----------
017 TX Start 14400bps 067 ----------
018 RX Start 14400bps 068 ----------
019 ITU-T V.34 On 069 ----------
020 ITU-T ECM On 070 Line Error 128

021 EP Tone Off 071 Total Error 10
022 Sig. Interval 500ms 072 Continuous Error Off
023 TCF Check Normal 073 Error Detect Rate
024 CED Frequency 2100Hz 074 RTN Receive Discon
025 Comm. Start-Up First 075 Coding JBIG
026 Non-Standard On 076 ----------
027 Short Protocol B On 077 RX JAM Length 2 m
028 Short Protocol D On 078 ----------
029 Remote Diagnostics On 079 ----------
030 CED & 300bps 75ms 080 Original Lead Edge ADF 0
031 RTC = EQL x 12 Off 081 Original Tail Edge ADF 0
032 V34 TX Start 33600bps 082 JAM Length 2 m
033 V34 RX Start 33600bps 083 ----------
034 V34 TX SR 3429sr 084 Line As No-Paper Ring
035 V34 RX SR 3429sr 085 ----------
036 --------- 086 Reduction Fine On
037 Protocol Display Off 087 ----------
038 --------- 088 Normal Level 8
039 Flash Time 500ms 089 ----------
040 --------- 090 ----------

041 Pause Time 3sec 091 ----------
042 --------- 092 Smoothing On
043 Redial Interval 3min 093 ----------
044 Redial Count 5 094 ----------
045 Ring Detect Count 2 095 ----------
046 On-Hook Time 5sec 096 ----------
047 Response Wait Interval 55sec 097 ----------
048 --------- 098 ----------
049 --------- 099 ----------
-PANASONIC -
***** ******************* -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- *********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.
2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
314
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.4.2. Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following
procedure.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "03 Page Memory Test" on the display.
↓
↓
************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
SC : TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/000456/000789/000666
SC BOOT : MEMORY SIZE : (3 MB)
PNL : MAC ADDRESS : 08002300E078
EC : SHIPMENT SET
SCN :
Finisher :
FCB :
-PANASONIC -
***** ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
315
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.4.3. Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "04 Printer Report" on the display.
↓
↓
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016
SERIAL NUMBER :
CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC :
PNL :
EC :
SCN :
TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000475
RECEIVE COUNTER : 000398
COPY COUNTER : 000083
PRINT COUNTER : 000016
NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT | NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 |
02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016 |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC -
***** *******************-PANASONIC -*******-12345678901234567890-**************
316
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.4.4. All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "05 All Document Files" on the display.
↓
↓
317
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.4.5. Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "06 Protocol Trace" on the display.
↓
↓
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
STATUS : OK
MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD)
SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L
REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44
COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR
LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP
------------------------------------------------------------------
REMOTE : MCF
LOCAL : DCN
-PANASONIC -
****************************-PANASONIC -*************-12345678901234567890-***************
318
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.4.6. Supply Order Form
The Supply Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "07 Toner Order Form" on the display.
↓
↓
319
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
*************************************
> SUPPLY ORDER FORM <
*************************************
**** The supplies in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Supplies
Please Contact or Fax This form to your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to: Bill to:
Attention: Attention:
Phone No.: Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):
Serial No.:
Description Order No. (6) Quantity Required:
Toner Cartridge (Black) : DQ-TUN28K
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) : DQ-TUN20C
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) : DQ-TUN20M
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) : DQ-TUN20Y
OPC Drum Unit (Black) : DQ-UHN36
TOPC Drum Unit (Color) : DQ-UHN30
Toner Waste Container : DQ-BFN45
/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Cartridge No.
320
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.5. Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)
5.2.5.1. Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
↓
↓
↓
Touch "04 Modem tests" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Press the "01 Binary Signal" on the display.
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Start" key on the
Control Panel button.
↓
Press the "Stop" key on the Control Panel button.
↓
↓
Binary Signal Table

Number Signals
1 V21 300bps
2 V27ter 2400bps
3 V27ter 4800bps
4 V29 7200bps
5 V29 9600bps
6 V17 TC7200bps
7 V17 TC9600bps
8 V17 12000bps
9 V17 14400bps
321
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.5.2. Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "02 Tonal Signal" on the display.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Tonal Signal Table

Number Signals
1 462 Hz
2 1080 Hz
3 1100 Hz
4 1300 Hz
5 1650 Hz
6 1850 Hz
7 2100 Hz
322
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.5.3. DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.
• DTMF Single Tone

↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "03 DTMF Single Tone" on the display.
↓
↓
↓
↓
• DTMF Dual Tone

↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "04 DTMF Dual Tone" on the display.
↓
↓
↓
↓
323
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table
Number DTMF Signal Tones Number DTMF Dual Tones
1 697 Hz 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz
2 770 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz
3 852 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz
4 941 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz
5 1209 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz
6 1336 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz
7 1477 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz
8 1633 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz
8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz
9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz
* 941 Hz + 1209 Hz
# 941 Hz + 1477 Hz
324
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.5.4. Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)
↓
↓
↓
↓
Press the "05 V34 Modem" on the display.
↓
↓
↓
Press “Close” key four time.
↓
Binary Signal Table

Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals
01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam
15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM
16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM
17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFO0c & TONEB
18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFO0c & TONEA
19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh & AC & ALT
20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
325
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.6. Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
↓
↓
↓
Touch "06 RAM Initialize" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired Mode on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Yes" or “No“.
↓
Press the "Yes" key to initialize RAM, or press the “No“ key to cancel.
↓
Press “Close” key four time.
↓
RAM Initialization Table

No. Initialize Mode Description
01 PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the
ON position to enable the parameter settings.
02 JOURNAL CLEAR Clears the Journal contents.
03 AUTO DIAL CLEAR Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
04 PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR Clears the Program keys.
05 LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
06 LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the Printer Error Log.
07 SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values.
08 FLASH MEMORY CLEAR Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
09 ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
326
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.7. FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)
5.2.7.1. Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to
their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-
registered telephone number or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
↓
↓
↓
Touch "08 Check & Call" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired code on the Touch Panel display.
(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL"
Mode key, and then input the email address.)
↓
↓
5.2.7.2. Printer Reports

• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted
1. Manual print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See sect. 5.2.4.3.)
2. Automatic transmission/printout
a. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service
Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not
transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
b. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report
to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.
c. Toner Order Form
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the pre-
registered order information.
d. Call Counter Report
When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call
Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Note:
The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
327
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Error Tx
Log Remarks
Code Report
Ex-xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.3.)
E13 Out of Toner.
Jxx Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.2.)
Uxx Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.1.)
U13 M Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
328
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.7.3. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********
****************************
> SERVICE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
SERIAL NUMBER :
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC :
PNL :
SPC :
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE
F7-02 Total Count : 13 (------)
F7-03 PM COUNT : 13 120000
F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 9 (------)
F7-05 . . . . . :
F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 13 (------)
F7-07 Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
F7-08 ADF PM Count : 1
F7-10 Developer Count : 13
F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-23 PC Print Count : 0
F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 3 F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6
F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0
F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0
F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0
F7-16 2-Sided Count : 0 F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0
F7-17 ADF/iADF Count : 0 F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0
F7-18 ADF/iADF Read Count : 0 F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0
F7-19 Scanner Count : 0 F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0
F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 0 F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Print Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Scan Count : 0
Call Counter Pri-set Value : 999999
(4) PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)
329
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.7.4. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)
SERIAL NUMBER :
CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2)
FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

SC :
PNL :
SPC :
TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244 (4)

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082
COPY COUNTER : 000000
PRINT COUNTER : 000000
NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”

(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
330
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.7.5. Toner Order Form
*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to: Bill to:
Attention: Attention:
Phone No.: Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Bottle No.: (6) Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(6) Toner Cartridge No.
331
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.7.6. CALL COUNTER REPORT
*****************************************************************
> SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE <
*****************************************************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
SERIAL NUMBER :
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC :
PNL :
SPC :
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE
F7-02 Total Count : 13 (------)
F7-03 PM COUNT : 13 120000
F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 9 (------)
F7-05 . . . . . :
F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 13 (------)
F7-07 Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
F7-08 ADF PM Count : 1
F7-10 Developer Count : 13
F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-23 PC Print Count : 0
F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 3 F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6
F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0
F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0
F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0
F7-16 2-Sided Count : 0 F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0
F7-17 ADF/iADF Count : 0 F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0
F7-18 ADF/iADF Read Count : 0 F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0
F7-19 Scanner Count : 0 F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0
F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 0 F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Print Count : 0
F7-21 Copy Scan Count : 0
Call Counter Pri-set Value : 1
(4) PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
332
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5.2.8. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.2.8.1. Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
↓
↓
↓
Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "09 System Maintenance" key on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Press the "01 Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
↓
Select the desired Fax number.
↓
Press "START" to send the Fax.
After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.
Note:
If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function.
Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.
System Maintenance Table

No. Maintenance Mode Description
01 Send RCV'D File Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.
333
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6 System Description
6.1. Mechanical Operation
6.1.1. Scanning Mechanism (Flatbed)
1. Scanning Mechanism
The Scanning Mechanism consisting of Lens, Color CCD PCB Assembly, Mirrors, Scanner Lamp,
Lamp Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket, is used to scan originals.
• The Mirror 1 and Mirrors 2 reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens.
• The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the Color CCD.
• The Color CCD, mounted on the Color CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an
electrical signal.
• The Timing Belt and Driving Wire are driven by the Stepping Motor, move the Scanner Assembly.
Scanning (S) Glass
Scanner Lamp
Reflection Plate Platen (L) Glass
Size Sensor 1 Scanning Motor
Driving Wire
Lamp Base Bracket Timing Belt
Mirror 2
Scanning Lens
Mirror 2 Mirror 1
Color CCD PC Board Assembly
2. Transmit Mechanism
a. When i-ADF is used, originals are scanned on the Scanning (S) Glass. The Platen (L) Glass is used
when scanning on the Platen.
b. The Scanning point is established by the setting on the Panel or by an Automatic Document Size
Detection Sensor.
c. Document size is manually set when the Platen is used or is set automatically by the Document
Size Detection Sensor.
d. The Transmit Mechanism starts feeding and scanning originals based on the above Document Size
Setting.
e. When scanning is completed, the Stepping Motor stops rotating and the Lamp Base and Mirror 2
Brackets return to the standby position.
During scanning, the Lamp Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket move in the direction of the Black arrow
and while returning to standby position, it moves in the direction of the White arrow as shown in the
illustration. The location of these two brackets and the scanning length are established by the setting
on the Panel. The following illustration shows the Drive system.
334
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
When scanning originals

When returning to Standby position
Scanning Motor
Drive Shaft Assembly
Lamp Base Bracket
Mirror 2 Bracket
335
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.2. Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)
The i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds documents into the unit, one
original at a time. When duplex mode is selected, this feature enables two-sided faxing or copying of
the original(s).
Its main features are:
1. Place originals Face-Up
2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)
3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller
The following is the ADF / i-ADF Mechanical operation description.
6.2.1. Automatic Document Feeder Operation
1. Initialization
The ADF begins its operation by turning on the Feed Motor for a specified time, lowering the Pickup
Roller to re-set the Original Stopper to its standby position.
2. Original Setting and Size Sensors

Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper.
Adjust the Original Guides to center the original on the ADF. The Original Stopper prevents originals
from skewing and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor detects the presence of documents
on the ADF when the original(s) actuate Original Sensor Actuator on the ADF Cover. The two Sensors
mounted on the SNS PC Board which is installed in the Original Tray are actuated by the Original
Guides, their position determines the original's width and the Original Length Sensor 1 and Length
Sensor 2 (401) detect the length of the original.
3. Feeding and Separation

When the Start button is pressed, the ADF Motor 1 starts to rotate and drive the Pickup Roller. The 1st
original is fed into the Paper Feed Roller and the Separation Roller with the Torque Limiter Assembly
preventing multiple feeding.
4. Transmission and Ejection

The original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 and when the original actuates the Registration Sensor
2, the Paper Feed Roller stops rotating. The Registration Sensor 2 detects the scanning position and
the Registration Roller 2 and Transport Roller transport the original while scanning. The Stamp Head
stamps an [X] mark on the front of the original after the document is successfully transmitted or stored.
It consists of the Stamp Head and Stamp Solenoid. The Exit Roller feeds and ejects the original out of
the ADF. If there are additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.
5. Final Operation
After ejecting the last original from the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising
the Original Stopper to its standby position.
6.2.2. i-ADF Operation

The i-ADF automatically inverts 2-Sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This
feature enables your machine to perform duplex faxing or copying.
An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions like the ADF with the main exception being
the original eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences.
1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode

After passing through the Read Point, the path of the original is switched over by the Selection Guide
1, to the Exit Roller or to the Inverting Roller. For single-sided scanning, the Selection Guide 1 (815) is
rotated clockwise by the Selection Solenoid guiding the original to the Exit Roller. For 2-Sided
scanning, the Selection Guide 1 is rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection Solenoid guiding the
336
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
original to the Inverting Roller. The Selection Guide 1 moves only once, in the direction according to
whether a single or 2-Sided scanning is selected (Copier or Fax) before the Start button is pressed.
It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was
2-Sided scanning, a Single-Sided scanning is performed).
2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original

The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-Sided original is accomplished by means of the
Selection Guide 1 and Selection Guide 2.
After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1,
through the Selection Guide 2 that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection Solenoid and is
carried beyond the Inverting Roller and upper Pinch Rollers into the Sub Tray. The original is carried for
a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original triggers the Selection Sensor and stops
within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. Then, the Selection Guide 2 is rotated clockwise by the
Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 pulls the original back
around the Registration Roller 1 and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original.
3. Eject by Reverse Rotation

After the Back is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1, through the
Selection Guide 2 and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller and lower Pinch Rollers, into the Sub Tray,
again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
The Selection Guide 2 is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly and the reverse
rotation of the ADF Motor 1 pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1, however, this time
the original is routed to the Exit Roller and exits into the ADF Base.
4. Sub Tray
The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray, which supports the originals during the ejection mode
of the 2-Sided scanning operation.
r)
m (Ledge
2)
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)

m (FLS1.
210 mm (INVOICE)
(A3)
(B4)
(A4-R)
(B5-R)
431.8 m
420 mm
364 mm
Original Tray
330.2 m
(A5)
297 mm
Separation Paper Feed Roller

257 mm
m
215.9 m
Roller Original Stopper Original Guide

Registration Sensor 1
Pick Up Roller
Registration Sensor 3
Original Detection Sensor
Registration Roller 1
Inverting Guide Sheet
Anti Drive Registration Roller
(Pinch Roller) Anti Drive Exit Roller
(Pinch Roller)
Inverting Roller Sub Tray
Anti Drive Exit Roller

(Pinch Roller)
Exit Roller
Anti Drive Registration Exit Sensor Selection Guide 2

Roller 2 (Pinch Roller) Selection Guide 1
Read Point
Registration Roller 2 Anti Drive Transport Roller (Pinch Roller)
Registration Sensor 2 Transport Roller
Selection Sensor
337
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.3. Printer Mechanism
6.3.1. Paper Tray
1. Paper Tray (1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th)
< NP Sensor Operation >
Upper Limit Actuator

NP Actuator
Upper Limit Sensor
NP Sensor
Note:
Above Figure is the 2nd Paper Tray, the operation is the same for all 4 trays.
a. The NP Actuators attached to the Paper Feed Blocks No.1, 2, 3 and 4 determine if there is paper in
the paper tray.
b. The paper in the paper tray lifts up the NP Actuator, allowing the light from the LED to actuate the
NP Sensor.
338
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
< Paper Tray Operation >
Clutch
Registration Roller
Registration Actuator
Registration Sensor
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor starts driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.
The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and is transported.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a
specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the Registration
Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the STR area.
d. The paper passes through the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is
turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.
339
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
< Paper Tray (Optional) Operation >
Clutch
Intermiidiate Roller
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Drive Motor
Separation Roller
a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor and the Drive Motor start driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.
The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and transported by the
Intermediate Roller.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a
specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller starts rotating. The
paper is transported to the STR area.
d. The paper passes through the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is
turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.
340
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
< Paper Tray Lift up Mechanism >
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Bottom Plate
Lift Plate
a. When inserting the Paper Tray into the machine, the Upper Limit Sensor activates. At the same
time, the Lift Plate is combined with the coupling which drives the Lift Plate of the machine. The Lift
Plate rotates, lifting the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper.
b. Once the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper are raised, the Upper Limit Sensor is turned ON.
The Lift DC Motor stops rotating, maintaining the recording paper at the certain level.
341
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Upper Limit Actuator

NP Actuator
Lift DC Motor
Upper Limit Sensor
NP Sensor
< Paper Tray Recording Paper Size Setting >

The Recording Paper size in the Paper Feed Module is set on the Touch Panel.
342
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Sheet Bypass
< NP Sensor Operation >
a. The NP Actuator attached to the Paper Feed Unit determines if there is paper in the paper tray.
b. The paper in the paper tray lowers the NP Actuator and the NP Sensor actuates.
< Sheet Bypass Operation >
Intermediate Roller
Feed Roller
Pick Up Roller
Separating Roller NP Sensor

NP Actuator
a. When the printing operation begins, the PRINT (Print Request Signal) turns On and the Main Motor
starts driving the Gears.
b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper Feed
Roller and the Pick Up Roller. The paper is transported to the Separating Roller by the Pick Up
Roller. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separating Roller.
c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor.
d. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the
Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. After the paper is transported to the Intermediate Roller
(Main), the Clutch is turned OFF. The paper is transported to the STR area by the Intermediate
Roller.
e. After the trailing edge of the paper passes the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of
time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop
rotating.
343
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.4. Printing Process
Laser Printer creates an image on the paper using a technique called laser electrophotography. The printer
uses the electrographic process known as Discharged Area Development, or “write black”. In this process,
a digitally modulated laser scans laterally across a rotating OPC (Organic Photo Conductive) drum that has
been negatively charged. Wherever the OPC drum is exposed by laser beam, the image is written and
toner is transferred.
(Optional Paper Transport Unit)
Heat Roller
IH Coil
Toner Toner Toner Toner

Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge Cartridge
Y M C BK
Heater Belt Pressure
Intermediate Fuser Roller ADU
Transfer Belt Roller Paper
Registration
First Bias Transfer Roller (FTR) Roller
Intermediate OPC OPC OPC OPC Second Bias

Transfer Belt Y M C BK Transfer Roller
Cleaning Blade (STR)
Charge
Roller
Polygon Motor Pickup Roller
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Pickup Roller
Reverse Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
344
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
To generate a color image, the OPC drum suitably rotates to the image length, one for each of the primary
colors and for the black color. During each successive pass, the laser exposes the portions of OPC drum
that corresponds to the primary color’s component of the image. Toner is attracted onto the laser-exposed
portions of the OPC drum.
As each color layer is developed on each OPC drum, they are transferred to the Intermediate Transfer Belt
until all four color layers eventually reside one on top of the other on the Intermediate Transfer Belt.
At this point, a sheet of paper is advanced under the Intermediate Transfer Belt and the toner is transferred
to the sheet of paper. The paper advances to the Fuser, where heat and pressure permanently bond
the toner to the paper. From the Fuser, the paper is driven to the Output Tray.
A cleaning blade scrapes residual toner from the OPC drum before the next primary color toner is applied to
the OPC drum. This prevents contamination of the next color layer. The cleaning blade is in constant
contact with the OPC drum.
An Intermediate Transfer Belt cleaner scrapes residual toner from the Intermediate Transfer Belt. This
prevents “ghosting “of the next print.
6.4.1. Charging

Y M C BK
Intermediate
Transfer Belt
First Bias Transfer Roller (FTR)
OPC OPC OPC OPC

Drum Drum Drum Drum Second Bias
Y M C BK
Charge Transfer Roller
Roller (STR)
Doctor
-430V Blade
VCH/CMY : -480V VCH/K : -480V
The charging roller, comes in contact with the OPC drum surface and charges it to approximately DC-480
volts + AC voltage, and ensures a uniform negative potential of approximately -430 volts on the OPC drum
surface by the charging roller, depending on the selected printing quality (Std: 600 dpi, or Enhanced: 1,200
dpi) and ambient temperature.
345
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.4.2. Laser Exposure and Scanning

Y M C BK
Intermediate
Transfer Belt
First Bias Transfer Roller (FTR)
OPC OPC OPC OPC

Drum Drum Drum Drum
Y M C BK
Laser Beam
Mirror
Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) Polygon

Motor
1. Laser Exposure
As the OPC drum rotates, the uniformly charged OPC drum is exposed by the modulated laser beam.
The vertically-moving OPC drum passes in front of horizontally scanning laser beam, and the negative
charge on the OPC drum surface are neutralized by the laser beam. This forms a latent image.
Laser output power is either approximately 0.075 mW (1200 dpi), 0.13 mW (600 dpi, Color) or 0.21
mW (600 dpi, Mono) on the OPC drum surface, depending on whether the printer is printing resolution
in 1200 dpi mode or 600 dpi mode. The laser exposure, the negative potential on the OPC drum varies
from approximately -430 volts (unexposed) to -60 volts (fully exposed).
2. Laser Scanning
A laser diode generates the laser beam, and lenses and mirror in the laser scanner direct the beam to
the OPC drum. The beam is parallel to the collimator lens and is directed at the rotating polygonal
mirror, attached with the polygon motor. The beam is parallel to the collimator lens and is directed at
the rotating polygon mirror. The polygon mirror rotates at approximately 24,800 to 40,000 constant
revolutions per minute.
This transforms the beam into a horizontally scanning beam, which is directed through the primary and
the secondary lens, altering the beam’s angular rotation motion into a constant horizontal motion. The
cylindrical mirrors corrects the beam for any vertical mis-registration. Next, the beam reflects off of a
mirror and passes through a window where it scans across the rotating OPC drum. At the beginning of
each horizontal sweep, the horizontal sync mirrors deflect the laser beam to the horizontal sync sensor.
This informs the engine control board that the laser beam is beginning its horizontal sweep and that it
can begin to modulate the signal with the data to be printed on that line of the image.
346
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.4.3. Developing
Vp-p : 1000V AC Developer Roller
-410V
OPC
Drum
Doctor Blade
Toner Supply Auger

As the OPC drum continues to rotate, it passes by the developer roller. The currently activated
developer roller is charged to a potential approximately DC -410 volts (AC 1,000 Vp-p). Toner is
attracted to the exposed portions of the OPC drum in reverse proportion to the negative charge. The
greatest amount of toner is transferred to the most positive potential. The developer roller rotates at 2.0
times the speed of the OPC drum to ensure a constant supply of toner.
This supplies a layer of toner onto the developer roller. The doctor blade smooths and evenly
distributes the toner on the developer roller.
6.4.4. Toner Transfer to the Intermediate Transfer Belt

First Transfer Roller (FTR)
OPC
Drum
As the OPC drum rotates, in contact with the Intermediate Transfer Belt, which is rotating at the same
speed. Located under the Intermediate Transfer Belt at the contact point with the OPC drum, the first
bias transfer roller carries a charge approximately 8-12 µA for Color mode or 18 µA for Monochrome
mode (FTR Current).
This strong potential attracts and holds the toner from the OPC drum to Intermediate Transfer Belt.
The four color layers are created while the Intermediate Transfer Belt makes one complete rotation.
Any toner remaining on the OPC drum after the transfer to the Intermediate Transfer Belt is scraped off
by the OPC drum cleaning blade, which is always in contact with the OPC drum. This leaves the OPC
drum clean for the next layer of toner to be transferred from the developing roller into the developer.
347
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.4.5. Developer Unit
OPC
Drum
Toner Waste Paddle
Cleaning Blade
Auger A
Auger B
The developer unit consists of the Magnet Roller, Sleeve and 2 Toner Auger.
The Toner Auger A transfers the developer to the front direction and the Auger B transfers to the rear
direction to circulate the developer for mixing. The Toner Auger A also transfers the developer to the
Sleeve. The developer on the sleeve forms a brush by the magnetic force of the Magnetic Roller, and
makes contact with the electrostatic latent image on the drum. Toner is attracted to the areas of the
drum which have been discharged by the laser. The Doctor Blade regulates the height of the magnetic
brush which is formed by the developer which is attracted to the sleeve of the Magnetic Roller.
The system uses Dry Dual Components and Trickle developing method to mix the carrier to the
Toner. When the Toner is supplied, the Carrier is also supplied a little at the time. When the Carrier is
increased over the Constant value, the unnecessary Carrier is transferred together with the Toner by
the Auger A to the Toner Waste Container. As a result, it realizes the stable developing without
maintenance, without replacing the developer for a long time.
The TDC sensor is located near the Auger B to measure the ratio of toner to developer. The Toner
Density Control (TDC) is linked with Image Density detection and Image dot count to stabilize the Color
Image Quality.
6.4.6. Toner Transfer to Paper
To Fuser Unit
Intermediate Second
Transfer Belt Bias Roller Transfer Roller
(STR)
Intermediate
Transfer Belt
Cleaning Blade
VSTR : -1500V Registration Roller
From Standard Paper Tray, Sheet Bypass Tray,

Optional Paper Tray or Automatic Duplex Unit
Once all four layers of toner reside up on the Intermediate Transfer Belt, the registration roller clutch is
energized to advance a sheet of paper (which has already been picked) to the second bias transfer
348
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
roller. The toner image on the rotating Intermediate Transfer Belt and the paper that is being fed into
the image unit are synchronized for proper alignment. The leading edge of toner image on the
Intermediate Transfer Belt is aligned 4 mm from the leading edge of the paper. A strong negative
voltage in the bias roller pushes out the toner from the Intermediate Transfer Belt onto the paper. The
bias roller voltage is approximately -1500 volts. This voltage varies depending on the ambient
temperature, humidity, print speed, and media being printed upon. The paper (or transparency film)
advances at the same speed as the Intermediate Transfer Belt.
The Intermediate Transfer Belt Blade scrapes any remaining traces of toner from the Intermediate
Transfer Belt prior to the next image transfer. The scraped toner is discharged to the Toner Waste
Container by the spiral paddle shaft.
6.4.7. Induction Heating (IH) Fusing System Operation
Paper Exit Sensor
Thermistor
Induction Heating (IH) Coil

Pressure Roller
Heat Roller
Heater Belt Paper Entrance Sensor
Fuser Roller
Second Bias Transfer Roller (STR)
After the toner image has been applied to the paper, it passes through the Fuser Unit.
When the Heater Belt Motor starts to rotate, the Induction Heating (IH) Coil is turned on, heating the Heat
Roller. As a result, the Heater Belt, contacted with the Heat Roller surface, is heated by the Heat Roller. A
heated Heater Belt melts the toner and the pressure of the Pressure Roller fuses it into the paper. The
melted toner bonds to the paper. After fusing, the paper advances to the output tray. When the printer is
idle, the IH coil is turned off and the Heater Belt is not heated. This Heater Belt temperature varies with the
selected settings of 600 or 1200 dpi printing mode, thick paper printing mode, transparency printing mode,
etc. The Fuser Unit has the Paper Entrance Sensor and Paper Exit Sensor, which are used for determining
the Control timings of the paper feeding by detecting the paper entrance, exit and Jam.
349
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.4.8. Paper Exit and Paper Switchback
After Fusing, the paper is fed to the Inner Paper Exit Tray, the ADU, or to the Optional Paper Transfer Unit.
The paper path is switched by the combination of ADU Path Switching Solenoid and Three-step 2-Way
Roller and Paper Exit Path Switching Solenoid.
6.4.8.1. Normal Printing Mode
The ADU Path Switching Solenoid keeps ON and the Lever is switched to the Upper side, the paper is fed
through the lower path and goes into the Three-step 2-Way Roller.
1. Inner Exit Tray

Clutch Reverse Clutch
To Optional Paper Paper Exit Path 2-Way Roller

Transfer Unit Switching Solenoid
ADU Path Switching
OFF ON Solenoid
ADU Path
Paper Full Sensor

Inner Paper Exit Tray
From Fuser Unit
The Paper Exit path Switching Solenoid keeps OFF and the Lever is switched to the Upper side, the
paper is fed by the 2-Way roller and goes through the lower path and out to the Inner Paper Exit Tray.
When the Inner Paper Tray is full, the Paper Full sensor detects, stops printing and displays the Error
message on the LCD Panel.
2. Outer Exit Tray / Finisher with Paper Transfer Unit
The Paper Exit path Switching Solenoid keeps ON and the Lever is moved to the lower side, the paper is
fed by the 2-Way roller and goes through the Lower path and goes to the Paper Transfer Unit, then goes
out to the outer Paper Tray, or Finisher.
350
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.4.8.2. Duplex Printing Mode (Paper Switchback)
The ADU Path Switching Solenoid switches OFF and the Lever switched to the Lower side, the paper is fed
through the Upper path and goes into the Three-step 2-Way Roller.
To Optional Paper Exit Path 2-Way Roller

Paper Transfer Unit Switching Solenoid
ADU Path Switching
OFF OFF
Solenoid
ADU Path
ADU Pass Sensor 0
Paper Full Sensor

From Fuser Unit
The Paper Exit path Switching Solenoid keeps OFF and the Lever is switched to the upper side, the
paper is fed by the 2-Way roller and goes through the Upper path and fed into the Paper Transfer Unit.
Paper Exit Path 2-Way Roller

Switching Solenoid
To Optional
Paper Transfer Unit ADU Path Switching
OFF ON
Solenoid
ADU Path
Paper Full Sensor
From Fuser Unit
The ADU Pass Sensor 0 detects the end of the paper and the 2-Way Roller Reverse clutch goes OFF,
and the paper stops in the middle. The ADU Path Switching Solenoid goes ON and the Lever switches to
the Upper side. Then the 2-Way Roller Clutch goes ON and the Roller turns clockwise to feed the paper
into the ADU Unit.
While the single side printed paper is feeding into the ADU, the duplex printed paper is also fed out to the
Inner Exit Tray to realize high productivity.
351
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6.5. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
6.5.1. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Signal Name Function
*A Sub Motor Phase A
*B Sub Motor Phase B
+10V +10V DC Power Supply
+2.5V +2.5V DC Power Supply
+24V_1 +24V DC Power Supply
+24VD +24V DC Power Supply
+24VF +24V DC Power Supply
+24VF_1 +24V DC Power Supply
+24VM +24V DC Power Supply
+24VM_1 +24V DC Power Supply
+24VS +24V DC Power Supply
+3.3V +24V DC Power Supply
+5VADF +5V DC Power Supply
+5V_HOME +5V DC Power Supply for Belt Home Position Sensor
+5V_LSU_1 +5V DC Power Supply for LSU
+5V_LSU_2 +5V DC Power Supply for LSU
+5V_RR +5V DC Power Supply Signal for OHP Registration Sensor
+5VD +5V DC Power Supply
+5VLSU_IN +5V DC Power Supply
+5VP +5V DC Power Supply
+5VSW_1 +5V DC Switching Power Supply
+5VSW_2 +5V DC Switching Power Supply
100V/200V Output is controlled by the Signal Level
(100V/120V : 0V; 230V : 5V)
100V_200V 100V/200V Identifying Signal
24V +24V DC Power Supply
3.3V +3.3V VDC Power Supply
A FTR/STR/Fuser/Sub Motor Phase A
352
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
A[0] Address Bus Bit 0
A0 Address
A1 Address
A10/AP Address
A11 Address
A12 Address
A2 Address
A3 Address
A4 Address
A5 Address
A6 Address
A7 Address
A8 Address
A9 Address
ADFFIFOCLK Serial Interface Clock
ADFFIFODIN Input Serial Data
ADFFIFODOUT Output Serial Data
ADFFIFOENB Serial Interface Enable
ADFFIFOLD Serial Interface Load Signal
ADFFIFOLTH Serial Interface Latch Signal
ADFMMCLK Main Motor Clock
ADFPMCLK Paper Feed Motor Clock
ADUENB ADU Serial Driver Enable Data Signal
ADULD ADU Serial Load
ADULT ADU Serial Latch
ADUSICLK ADU Serial Clock
ADUSIIN ADU Serial Data Input
ADUSIOUT ADU Serial Data Output
AGND Analog Ground
APFLD AFP Serial Load
APFLT AFP Serial Latch
APFMCLK APF Motor Clock
APFSICLK APF Serial Clock
APFSIIN APF Serial Data Input
APFSIOUT APF Serial Data Output
ASICRCLK- Reserve Clock -
ASICRCLK+ Reserve Clock +
ATA0 HDD Address Bus
353
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
ATAINT HDD B807 Signal
ATCS0 Second HDD Selection Signal
ATCS1 Primary HDD Selection Signal
ATD0 HDD Data Bus
ATD1 HDD Data Bus
ATD10 HDD Data Bus
ATD11 HDD Data Bus
ATD12 HDD Data Bus
ATD13 HDD Data Bus
ATD14 HDD Data Bus
ATD15 HDD Data Bus
ATD2 HDD Data Bus
ATD3 HDD Data Bus
ATD4 HDD Data Bus
ATD5 HDD Data Bus
ATD6 HDD Data Bus
ATD7 HDD Data Bus
ATD8 HDD Data Bus
ATD9 HDD Data Bus
ATIORD HDD Data Read Signal
ATIORDY HDDRW Ready Signal
ATIOWR HDD Data Write Signal
ATRST Reset Signal
B Motor Phase B
BA0 Address
BA1 Address
BBA0 Address
BBA1 Address
BDCLK0 L Word Clock
BDCLK1 H Word Clock
BLCNT Back Light Control Signal
BLSN_C Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal C
BLSN_K Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal K
BLSN_M Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal M
BLSN_Y Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal Y
BLUESCLK - Blue AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock -
(BLUESCLK-)
BLUESCLK + Blue AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock +
(BLUESCLK+)
BMA0 Address
BMA1 Address
BMA10 Address
BMA11 Address
BMA12 Address
BMA15 Address
354
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
BMA2 Address
BMA3 Address
BMA4 Address
BMA5 Address
BMA6 Address
BMA7 Address
BMA8 Address
BMA9 Address
BMD0 Data
BMD1 Data
BMD10 Data
BMD11 Data
BMD12 Data
BMD13 Data
BMD14 Data
BMD16 Data
BMD17 Data
BMD18 Data
BMD19 Data
BMD2 Data
BMD20 Data
BMD21 Data
BMD22 Data
BMD23 Data
BMD24 Data
BMD25 Data
BMD26 Data
BMD27 Data
BMD28 Data
BMD29 Data
BMD3 Data
BMD30 Data
BMD31 Data
BMD4 Data
BMD5 Data
BMD6 Data
BMD7 Data
BMD8 Data
BMD9 Data
BZ+ Buzzer Power Supply
BZCLK Buzzer Clock
C_CLK_CK Bias Charge AC Output Clock (CK)
C_CLK_YM Bias Charge AC Output Clock (YM)
Card_Detect Card Detection Signal
CAS Column Address Select
CB0 No Connection
355
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
CB1 No Connection
CB2 No Connection
CB3 No Connection
CB4 No Connection
CB5 No Connection
CB6 No Connection
CB7 No Connection
CBTMCLK Belt Motor Clock
CBTMGAIN Belt Motor Gain
CCDASICLK- CCD-ASIC System Clock -
CCDASICLK+ CCD-ASIC System Clock +
CD/DAT3 Data
CK0 Clock
CK1 Clock
CK2 Clock
CKE0 Clock Enable
CKE1 Clock Enable
CL1 Latch Signal
CL2 Shift Clock
CLK Clock
CMD Command
CREG_LD_L Left Registration Sensor LED Reference
CREG_LD_M Middle Registration Sensor LED Reference
CREG_LD_R Right Registration Sensor LED Reference
CREG_OT_L Input Left Registration Sensor
CREG_OT_M Input Middle Registration Sensor
CREG_OT_R Input Right Registration Sensor
CSSRXD Input CSS RXD
CSSTXD Output CSS TXD
CT1 Common Terminal 1 Signal
D- Data
D[0] Data Bus Bit 0
D[1] Data Bus Bit 1
D[2] Data Bus Bit 2
D[3] Data Bus Bit 3
D[4] Data Bus Bit 4
D[5] Data Bus Bit 5
D[6] Data Bus Bit 6
D[7] Data Bus Bit 7
D_CLK_CK Bias Charge AC Output Clock (CK)
D_CLK_nCK Bias Charge AC Output Clock (CK)
D_CLK_nYM Developer Bias AC Clock (YM)
D_CLK_YM Developer Bias AC Clock (YM)
D+ Data
D0 Data
D1 Data
356
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
D2 Data
D3 Data
D4 Data
D5 Data
D6 Data
D7 Data
DASP HDD Activation Signal
DATA_C Image Data (C) +
DATA_K Image Data (K) +
DATA_M Image Data (M) +
DATA_Y Image Data (Y) +
DATA0 Data
DATA1 Data
DATA2 Data
DCLKC Data Clock C
DCLKK K Data Clock
DCLKM M Data Clock
DCLKY Y Data Clock
DCS_M Middle Registration Sensor Detection Range Switch
DEV1CLK Developer Motor 1 Clock
DEV1GAIN Developer Motor 1 Gain
DEV2CLK Developer Motor 2 Clock
DEV2GAIN Developer Motor 2 Gain
DGLRST Dongle Reset
DM0 Data Mask
DM1 Data Mask
DM2 Data Mask
DM3 Data Mask
DM4 Data Mask
DM5 Data Mask
DM6 Data Mask
DM7 Data Mask
DM8 Data Mask
DNGL1 Dongle 1 Select
DNGLCD1 Presence of Dongle Key 1
DNLDCL Download Clock
DNLDDT Download Data
DQ0 Data
DQ1 Data
DQ10 Data
DQ11 Data
DQ12 Data
357
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DQ13 Data
DQ14 Data
DQ15 Data
DQ16 Data
DQ17 Data
DQ18 Data
DQ19 Data
DQ2 Data
DQ20 Data
DQ21 Data
DQ22 Data
DQ23 Data
DQ24 Data
DQ25 Data
DQ26 Data
DQ27 Data
DQ28 Data
DQ29 Data
DQ3 Data
DQ30 Data
DQ31 Data
DQ32 Data
DQ33 Data
DQ34 Data
DQ35 Data
DQ36 Data
DQ37 Data
DQ38 Data
DQ39 Data
DQ4 Data
DQ40 Data
DQ41 Data
DQ42 Data
DQ43 Data
DQ44 Data
DQ45 Data
DQ46 Data
DQ47 Data
DQ48 Data
DQ49 Data
DQ5 Data
DQ50 Data
DQ51 Data
DQ52 Data
DQ53 Data
DQ54 Data
358
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DQ55 Data
DQ56 Data
DQ57 Data
DQ58 Data
DQ59 Data
DQ6 Data
DQ60 Data
DQ61 Data
DQ62 Data
DQ63 Data
DQ7 Data
DQ8 Data
DQ9 Data
DQS0 Data
DQS1 Data
DQS2 Data
DQS3 Data
DQS4 Data
DQS5 Data
DQS6 Data
DQS7 Data
DQS8 Data
ECDI1 SC Data Input 1 Signal
ECDI2 SC Data Input 2 Signal
ECDO1 SC Data Output 1 Signal
ECDO2 SC Data Output 2 Signal
ECPRG Program Download Data
ECRDY Engine Ready Signal
ECRST Reset Signal
ECSTS Engine Status Signal
F1 Shift Register Clock 1
F2 Shift Register Clock 2
F2L Last Stage Shift Register Clock
FAN+24V1 Ground
FAN+24V2 Ground
FAN1SN +24V DC Power Supply
FAN2SN +24V DC Power Supply
FCP Reset Feed Through Level Clamp Clock
FLM Frame Signal
FR Reset Gate Clock
FTG1 Transfer Gate Clock 1
FTG2 Transfer Gate Clock 2
FTRMCLK FTR Motor Clock
FTRMON_C FTR Voltage Monitor C
FTRMON_K FTR Voltage Monitor K
FTRMON_M FTR Voltage Monitor M
359
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
FTRMON_Y FTR Voltage Monitor Y
FUMCLK Fuser Motor Clock
FUMREF Fuser Motor Reference
FUROTSN1 Fuser Rotor Sensor 1
FUROTSN2 Fuser Rotor Sensor 2
GAIN Gain Control
GAIN_K Laser Gain (C, K)
GAIN_Y Laser Gain (Y, M)
GLA Green LED Anode Signal
GLK(GND) Green LED Cathode Signal
GND Ground
GND_1 Ground
GND_2 Ground
GND_3 GND
GND_4 GND
GND_5 GND
GND_6 GND
GND_7 GND
GND_8 GND
GND_9 GND
GREENSCLK- Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock +
GREENSCLK+ Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock +
HSYNCC C Horizontal Synchronized Signal
HSYNCK K Horizontal Synchronized Signal
HSYNCM M Horizontal Synchronized Signal
HSYNCY Y Horizontal Synchronized Signal
HUMISN Humidity Sensor
IH_ROTSN2 Fuser Rotor Encoder Output 2
IHADIN IH AD Converter Data Output
IHADO IH AD Converter Data Input
IHPWR IH Power OWM Output
IO16 16 Bit Block Transfer Control Signal
IPRXD Finisher Serial RXD
IPTXD Finisher Serial TXD
KIN0 Key Input Signal
KYE No Connection
LD_ERS_C1 Discharge LED C Power Supply 1
LD_ERS_C2 Discharge LED C Power Supply 2
LD_ERS_K1 Discharge LED K Power Supply 1
LD_ERS_K2 Discharge LED K Power Supply 2
LD_ERS_M1 Discharge LED M Power Supply 1
LD_ERS_M2 Discharge LED M Power Supply 2
360
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
LD_ERS_Y1 Discharge LED Y Power Supply 1
LD_ERS_Y2 Discharge LED Y Power Supply 2
LDADUDR Right Sub Cover Sensor Power Supply
LDADUPP0 ADU Path Sensor 0 Power Supply
LDADUPP2 ADU Path Sensor 2 Power Supply
LDBL_C Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal C Power Supply
LDBL_K Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal K Power Supply
LDBL_M Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal M Power Supply
LDBL_Y Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal Y Power Supply
LDCST1a Tray 1 Sensor a Power Supply
LDCST1b Tray 1 Sensor b Power Supply
LDCST2a Tray 2 Sensor a Power Supply
LDCST2b Tray 2 Sensor b Power Supply
LDCST3 +5V DC Power Supply
LDCST4 +5V DC Power Supply
LDFTR1 FTR 1 Sensor Power Supply
LDFTRÇQ FTR 2 Sensor Power Supply
LDFUEX Fuser Exit Sensor Power Supply
LDFUIN Fuser Entrance Sensor Power Supply
LDFURT1 Fuser Rotor Sensor 1 Power Supply
LDFURT2 Fuser Rotor Sensor 2 Power Supply
LDHFL Sheet Bypass Length Sensor Power Supply
LDHFPE Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Detection Sensor Power Supply
LDHFS1 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor Power Supply
LDHFS2 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor 2 Power Supply
LDHFS3 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor 3 Power Supply
LDHV_CK DAC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (CK)
LDHV_T DAC0 Serial Data Latch Signal
LDHV_YM AC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (YM)
LDIHC1 IH Core Sensor 1 Power Supply
LDIHC2 IH Core Sensor 2 Power Supply
LDINRSN Inner Exit Sensor Power Supply
LDJAM Intermediate Roller Jam Sensor Power Supply
LDJDR Jam Release Door Sensor Power Supply
LDLFTSN +5V DC Power Supply
LDOPC_BK OPC Gear Phase Sensor BK Power Supply
LDOPC_C New OPC Drum Detection Sensor C Power Supply
LDOPC_COL OPC Gear Phase Sensor Color Power Supply
LDOPC_K New OPC Drum Detection Sensor K Power Supply
LDOPC_M New OPC Drum Detection Sensor M Power Supply
LDOPC_Y New OPC Drum Detection Sensor Y Power Supply
LDOQDOSN +5V DC Power Supply
LDPEWSN3 +5V DC Power Supply
LDPEWSN4 +5V DC Power Supply
LDPR1 Pressure Roller Sensor 1 Power Supply
LDPR2 Pressure Roller Sensor 2 Power Supply
361
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
LDSHT Shutter Open and Close Detection Sensor Power Supply
LDSTR1 STR 1 Sensor Power Supply
LDSTR2 STR 2 Sensor Power Supply
LDTF Waste Toner Full Sensor Power Supply
LDTRUCVSN +5V DC Power Supply
LDTRUSN +5V DC Power Supply
LDWTB Waste Toner Bottle Detection Sensor Power Supply
LED0 LED 0 Activation Signal
LED24V-1 LED Power Supply
LED24V-2 LED Power Supply
LEDPGND LED Control
Live 100/120/230V VAC Power Supply
LSUDACK LSU DA Converter Clock
LSUDALD LSU DA Converter Load
LSUDAOUT LSU DA Converter Data Output
LUM3-1 +24V DC Power Supply
LUM3-2 LUM Control
LUM4-1 +24V DC Power Supply
LUM4-2 LUM Control
LVSCLK- Flat Link LVDS Shift Clock (LVSCLK-)
LVSCLK+ Flat Link LVDS Shift Clock (LVSCLK+)
mask1 CCD Drive Control Signal
mask2 CCD Drive Control Signal
MEXFAN Right Cover Fan Power Supply
MGND Power Ground
MOTLT Motor Driver Serial Latch
MOTSICLK Motor Driver Serial Clock
MOTSIOUT Motor Driver Serial Data Output
N.C. No Connection
nADFDXSN Duplex Signal
nADFORGSEN Original Detection Sensor (ADF)
nADFRRSN1 Registration Roller Sensor 1 Signal
nADFRRSN2 Registration Roller Sensor 2 Signal
nADFSN ADF PCB Sensor
nADUCL1 ADU Clutch 1 Control Signal
nADUCL2 ADU Clutch 2 Control Signal
nADUDRSN Right Sub Cover Sensor Signal
nADUENB ADU Serial Driver Enable Data Signal
362
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
nADULD ADU Serial Load Data Signal
nADULT ADU Serial Latch Data Signal
nADUPP0 ADU Path Sensor 0 Signal
nADUSICLK ADU Serial Data Clock Signal
nADUSIDI ADU Serial Data Output Signal
nADUSIDO ADU Serial Data Input Signal
nAPFENB Serial Interface Enable
nBAL0 Remaining Amount Signal
nBCAS Column Address Select
nBCD Presence of Page Memory PC Board Signal
nBCKE Clock Enable
nBCS2 Select for IC 1, 2
nBDQMH Data Mask H Bite
nBDQML Data Mask L Bite
nBID0 Storage Capacity
nBLKCLP High-Active Black Level Clamp Switch Input Signal
nBMWT Memory Write
nBRAS RAW Address Select
nBTM_C Bottle Motor C Activation Signal
nBTM_K Bottle Motor K Activation Signal
nBTM_M Bottle Motor M Activation Signal
nBTM_Y Bottle Motor Y Activation Signal
nBWCT Monochrome Count
NC No Connection
nCBTMENB Belt Motor Enable
nCBTMRDY Belt Motor Lock Detection
nCCDRST CCD Board System Reset
nCCTCNT Card Counter Activation Signal
nCLPIN Input Clamp Enable
nCLPIN1 Input Clamp Enable
nCPPSN3 Tray 3 Paper Path Sensor Signal
nCPPSN4 Tray 4 Paper Path Sensor Signal
nCST3 Tray 3 Paper Feed Sensor Signal
nCST4 Tray 4 Paper Feed Sensor Signal
nCSTSN1a Tray 1 Detection Sensor
nCSTSN1b Tray 1 No Paper Sensor (Paper Tray Sensor : Tray 1 )
nCSTSN2a Tray 2 Detection Sensor
nCSTSN2b Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (Paper Tray Sensor : Tray 2 )
nCSTU3 Tray 3 Unit Sensor
363
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
nCSTU4 Tray 4 Unit Sensor
nDATA_C Image Data (C) +
nDATA_K Image Data (K) +
nDATA_M Image Data (M) +
nDATA_Y Image Data (Y) +
nDEV1ENB Developer Motor 1 Enable
nDEV1RDY Developer Motor 1 Lock Detection
nDEV2ENB Developer Motor 2 Enable
nDEV2RDY Developer Motor 2 Lock Detection
nDISPOFF Display Off Signal
nERSLED_C Discharge LED C Activation Signal
nERSLED_K Discharge LED K Activation Signal
nERSLED_M Discharge LED M Activation Signal
nERSLED_Y Discharge LED Y Activation Signal
Neutral 100V-240V AC Power Supply
nFAXRING Fax Received Detection Signal
nFCCT Full Color Count
nFDOPSN Front Door Open Detection Signal
nFEEDCT Paper Feed Signal
nFTRMCLK FTR Motor Clock
nFTRSN1 FTR 1 Sensor
nFTRSN2 FTR 2 Sensor
nFUEXSN Fuser Exit Sensor Signal
nFUINSN Fuser Entrance Sensor Signal
nFUMCLK Fuser Motor Clock
nFINISHER_SENS Finisher Detection Signal
nGYAKUTENCL 2-Way Roller Clutch Control Signal
nHFCL Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Feed Clutch Sensor Signal
nHFLSN Sheet Bypass Length Sensor Signal
nHFPESN Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Detection Sensor Signal
nHFSOL Sheet Bypass Tray Pickup Solenoid Sensor Signal
nHFSSN1 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor Signal
nHFSSN3 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor 3 Signal
nHPSN Home Position Sensor
nHSYNC_K Horizontal Synchronizing Signal C, K
nHSYNC_Y Horizontal Synchronizing Signal Y, M
nHVEN_CK High Voltage Power Supply Output Control Signal (CK)
nHVEN_T High Voltage Power Supply Output Enabling Signal (T)
nHVEN_YM High Voltage Power Supply Output Control Signal (YM)
nIHADCK IH AD Converter Clock
nIHADCS IH AD Converter Chip Select
nIHCM_A IH Core Motor Phase A
nIHCM_AB IH Core Motor Phase AB
nIHCM_B IH Core Motor Phase B
nIHCM_BB IH Core Motor Phase BB
nIHCSN1 IH Core Sensor 1
364
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
nIHCSN2 IH Core Sensor 2
nIHDFCNT IH Driver Fan Activation Signal
nIHDFRDY IH Driver Fan Lock Detection
nIHRDY IH Fan Lock Detection
nIHRELAY IH Power Fan Relay Activation Signal
nINRSN Inner Exit Sensor Signal
nIPCCS IPC Chip Select
nJAMSN Intermediate Roller Jam Sensor
nKCCNT Key Counter Activation Signal
nKCS Key Counter Pull Out Detection
nLBSN3 Tray 3 Paper Detection Sensor Signal
nLBSN4 Tray 4 Paper Detection Sensor Signal
nLDENB LSU Enable
nLEDACT Active LED (Green) Activation Signal
nLEDALM1 Alarm LED (Red) Activation Signal
nLEDALM2-1 Alarm 1 LED (Orange) Activation Signal
nLEDALM2-2 Alarm 2 LED (Orange) Activation Signal
nLEDDAT Print Data LED (Green) Activation Signal
nLEDSLP Energy Saver LED Activation Signal
nLFTSN Transfer Roller Unit Cover Sensor
nLPCNT Inverter Drive Control Signal
nLPF_RDY Signal Ready
nLPOW1 +3.3V Power Supply Output Control
nLPOW2 +5V Power Supply Output Control
nLSUTFRDY LSU Cooling Fan Lock Detection
nLUM1 Lift Up Motor 1
nLUM2 Lift Up Motor 2
nMCCT Monochrome Color Count
nMCRUN Activation Monitoring Signal
nMEXFRDY Right Cover Fan Ready Signal
nMO_C Laser Monitor C
nMO_K Laser Monitor K
nMO_M Laser Monitor M
nMO_Y Laser Monitor Y
nMOTENB Motor Driver Serial Driver Enable
nMOTLT Latch
nMOTSIOUT Serial Data
nOGMLK Lock Signal
nOPC_BKSN OPC Gear Phase Sensor BK
nOPC_COLSN OPC Gear Phase Sensor Color
nOPC1ENB OPC Motor 1 Enable
nOPC1RDY OPC Motor 1 Lock Detection
nOPC2ENB OPC Motor 2 Enable
nOPC2RDY OPC Motor 2 Lock Detection
nOPCNEW_C New OPC Drum Detection Signal C
nOPCNEW_K New OPC Drum Detection Signal K
365
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
nOPCNEW_M New OPC Drum Detection Signal M
nOPCNEW_Y New OPC Drum Detection Signal Y
nOQDOSN Open and Close Tray 4 Light Door Detection Sensor
nOQMCT Motor Control
nOQRRCL Registration Roller Clutch
nORGSEN Original Size Sensor Signal
nORSIZIN0 Original Size 0 Sensor
nPASN Platen Angle Sensor
nPCRCL Intermediate Roller Clutch
nPCSN Sensor Platen Cover
nPESN1 Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Signal
nPEWSN3 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Warning Signal
nPEWSN4 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Warning Signal
nPEXFRDY Paper Exit Fan Lock Detection
nPFCL1 Tray 1 Feed Clutch Control Signal
nPFMENB Paper Feed Motor Enable
nPFMRDY Paper Feed Motor Lock Detection
nPFSOL1 Power Supply for 1st Tray Pickup Solenoid
nPFSOL2 Paper Feed Solenoid 2
nPMCNT Polygon Motor Activation Signal
nPMRDY Polygon Motor Lock Detection
nPNLRST Reset for PNL PCB
nPPSN1 Tray 1 Paper Path Sensor Signal
nPPSN2 Paper Path Sensor 2
nPRFRDY Pressure Roller Fan Lock Detection
nPRGDWN Control Program Download
nPRSN1 Pressure Roller Sensor 1
nPRSN2 Pressure Roller Sensor 2
nSRST Scanner CPU PCB Reset
nPUSOL3 Tray 3 Solenoid Control Signal
nPUSOL4 Tray 4 Solenoid Control Signal
nPUSSOLKYUI ADU Path Change Solenoid Control Signal
nPUSSORFUK ADU Path Change Solenoid Control Signal
nRD Read
nRESERVCLK Sub Motor Clock
nRRCL Registration Clutch
366
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
nRST5 Reset
nRSTMO Motor Driver Serial Driver Reset
nSACK Scanner Acknowledge Signal
nSCNMA Scan Motor Control A
nSCNMAB Scan Motor Control *A
nSCNMB Scan Motor Control B
nSCNMBB Scan Motor Control *B
nSEITENCL 2-Way Roller Clutch Control Signal
nSENSB Serial Interface Blue AFE Low-Active Chip Enable
nSENSG Serial Interface Green AFE Low-Active Chip Enable
nSENSR Serial Interface Red AFE Low-Active Chip Enable
nSENTIM Image Sent Signal
nSH_C Laser Sample Hold Control C
nSH_K Laser Sample Hold Control K
nSH_M Laser Sample Hold Control M
nSH_Y Laser Sample Hold Control Y
nSHIN Shading Interrupt Signal
nSHTSN Open and Close Shutter Detection Sensor
nSHTSOL Shutter Solenoid
nSIZE0 Paper Size Signal 0
nSLPKY Sleeve Return Signal
nSOLCNT1 Solenoid 1 Control Signal
nSOLCNT2 Solenoid 2 Control Signal
nSREQ Scanner Request Signal
nSTRCLK STR Motor Clock
nSTRLK STR Leak Signal
nSTRSN1 STR 1 Sensor
nSTRSN2 STR 2 Sensor
nSTSOL STR Guide Solenoid Control Signal
nTBFCNT Toner Bottle Fan Activation Signal
nTBFRDY Toner Bottle Lock Detection
nTCT_BK Total Counter BK Activation Signal
nTCT_CL Total Counter Color Activation Signal
nTFSN Waste Toner Full Sensor
nTRUCL Transfer Roller Unit Clutch
nTRUCVSN Transfer Roller Unit Cover Sensor
nTRUENB Transfer Roller Unit Serial Interface Enable
nTRUMA Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control A
nTRUMAB Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control *A
nTRUMB Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control B
nTRUMBB Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control *B
nTRUSN Transfer Roller Unit Detection Sensor
nULSN1 Tray 1 Upper Limit of Paper Sensor Signal
367
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
nVCNTON LED Contrast ON Signal
NVDC0 C Data 0
NVDC1 C Data 1
NVDC2 C Data 2
NVDC3 C Data 3
NVDK0 K Data 0
NVDK1 K Data 1
NVDK2 K Data 2
NVDK3 K Data 3
NVDM0 M Data 0
NVDM1 M Data 1
NVDM2 M Data 2
NVDM3 M Data 3
NVDY0 Y Data 0
NVDY1 Y Data 1
NVDY2 Y Data 2
NVDY3 Y Data 3
nVEN Vertical Enable Signal
nVGB Voice Guidance PCB Detection
nVREQ Vertical Request Signal
nWAKE ADF Wake Up Signal
nWR Write
nWTBSN Presence of Waste Toner Bottle
nZCROS Zero Cross Input
OPC1CLK OPC Drum Unit Motor 1 Clock
OPC1DIR OPC Drum Unit Motor 1 Rotation Direction Switch
OPC1GAIN OPC Drum Unit Motor 1 Gain
OPC2CLK OPC Drum Unit Motor 2 Clock
OPC2DIR OPC Drum Unit Motor 2 Rotation Direction Switch
OPC2GAIN OPC Drum Unit Motor 2 Gain
OPCNEW-x Presence of Drum Unit
OPCNEW-x-5V Drum Unit Detection Sensor Power Supply
OPCNEW-x-GND Ground
OQMCLK Motor Clock
pADFRRCNT Registration Roller Clutch Drive Control Signal
pADFRST ADF Reset
pADFRVCNT1 Reverse Clutch 1 Drive Control Signal
pADFRVCNT2 Reverse Clutch 2 Drive Control Signal
pBLKCLP1 Black Level Clamp Switch Signal
pFAXRING Fax Ringing Signal
pFDOPSN Open and Close Front Door Detection
pFINISH_POW Finisher Power Supply
PFMCLK Paper Feed Motor Clock
PFMGAIN Paper Feed Motor Gain Switch
PGND Power Ground
PGND_1 Power Ground
368
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
PGND_2 Power Ground
pHOMESN Belt Home Position Sensor
pIHENB IH Enable
pIHFCNT IH Fan Activation Signal
pJDRSN Jam Release Door Sensor
pLDOPSN Open and Close Jam Release Lower Door Detection Sensor
pLPF_CNT_1 Control Lamp Fan
pLPF_CNT_2 Control Lamp Fan
pLPOW1 +3.3V Power Return Signal
pLSUTFCNT LSU Cooling Fan Activation Signal
PMCLK Polygon Motor Clock
pMOTENB Enable
PNLRXD PNL PCB RXD Data
PNLTXD PNL PCB TXD Data
pOHPSN OHP Sensor Signal
POWSW POWSW
pPEXFCNT Paper Exit Fan Activation Signal
pPF1UPERSN Tray 1 Upper Limit of Paper Sensor Signal
pPRFCNT Pressure Roller Fan Activation Signal
pRESSN Registration Sensor Signal
pRRSN Registration Sensor Signal
pRSTMO Reset
pSENTIM Scanner LSYNC
pSLSYNC1 CCD Activation Control Signal
pSLSYNC2 CCD Activation Control Signal
pUDOPSN Open and Close Jam Release Upper Door Detection Sensor
pULSN2 Tray 2 Upper Limit of Paper Sensor
pVREQ Start to Print Request
RAS RAW Address Select
REDSCLK- Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock-
(REDSCLK-)
REDSCLK+ Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock+
(REDSCLK+)
RXD- RXD-
RXD+ RXD+
S0 Select
S1 Serial ROM Address
SA0 Serial ROM Address
SCCMD Control Command Signal
SCK Serial Clock
SCL Serial Clock
SCLKHV_CK DAC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (CK)
SCLKHV_T DAC0 Serial Data Clock Signal
SCLKHV_YM AC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (YM)
369
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
SCN0 Key Scan 0 Signal
SCNRXD Input Serial Data
SCNTXD Output Serial Data
SCPCLK Scanner Program Serial Interface Clock
SCPDATA Scanner Program Serial Interface Data
SCRDY Control Ready Signal
SDA Serial Data
SDHV_CD DAC0 Serial Data (YM)
SDHV_CK DAC0 Serial Data (CK)
SDHV_T DAC0 Serial Data
SDIB Blue AFE Serial Interface Input Signal
SDIG Green AFE Serial Interface Input Signal
SDIR Red AFE Serial Interface Input Signal
SHIN Shading Interrupt Start
SLSYNC1 CCD Drive Control Signal
SLSYNC2 CCD Drive Control Signal
SOUT Output Serial Data
SPEED0 Model Identifying Signal 1
SPEED1 Model Identifying Signal 2
STRCLK STR Motor Clock
STRMON STR Current Monitor
TDCDT_C Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal C
TDCDT_K Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal K
TDCDT_M Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal M
TDCDT_Y Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal Y
TDCREF_C Toner Density Sensor Reference C
TDCREF_K Toner Density Sensor Reference K
TDCREF_M Toner Density Sensor Reference M
TDCREF_Y Toner Density Sensor Reference Y
TDCS_C Toner Density Sensor C
TDCS_K Toner Density Sensor K
TDCS_M Toner Density Sensor M
TDCS_Y Toner Density Sensor Y
TEMPSN Temperature Sensor
TH1A Thermistor 1 A
TH1B Thermistor 1 B
TH2A Thermistor 2 A
TH2B Thermistor 2 B
TH3A Thermistor 3 A
TH3B Thermistor 3 B
TH4A Thermistor 4 A
370
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
TH4B Thermistor 4 B
TRULD Serial Interface Load Signal
TRULT Serial Interface Latch Signal
TRUMCLK Motor Clock
TRUSICLK SI Clock
TRUSIDI Input Serial Data
TRUSIDO Output Serial Data
Txclk- Clock Signal -
Txclk+ Clock Signal +
TXCLK0OUT- Digital Video Data Shift Clock -
TXCLK0OUT+ Digital Video Data Shift Clock +
TXCLK1OUT- Digital Video Data Shift Clock -
TXCLK1OUT+ Digital Video Data Shift Clock +
Txclock- Clock Signal -
Txclock+ Clock Signal +
TXD- TXD-
TXD+ TXD+
TXOUT0- Digital Video Data (TXOUT0-)
TXOUT0+ Digital Video Data (TXOUT0+)
VBUS +5 VDC Power Supply
VCON Contrast Compensation Voltage
VDD +2.5 VDC Power Supply
Vdd +3 VDC Power Supply
VDDID +2.5 VDC Power Supply
VDDSPD +2.5 VDC Power Supply
VINEVEN_Blue CCD Output Blue Even Signal
VINEVEN_Green CCD Output Green Even Signal
VINEVEN_Red CCD Output Red Even Signal
VINODD_Blue CCD Output Blue Odd Signal
VINODD_Green CCD Output Green Odd Signal
VINODD_Red CCD Output Red Odd Signal
VINV Inverter Power Supply
VO2R Diffuse Reflection Right Input
VOUT2C Image Level Diffusion Input
VREF Reference Voltage
Vss Ground
VSYNCC C Vertical Synchronized Signal
VSYNCK K Vertical Synchronized Signal
371
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
VSYNCM M Vertical Synchronized Signal
VSYNCY Y Vertical Synchronized Signal
WE Write Enable
Write_Protect Write Protection
X1 LCD Touch Position Signal Right
X2 LCD Touch Position Signal Left
Y1 LCD Touch Position Signal Top
Y2 LCD Touch Position Signal Bottom
YLA Yellow LED Anode Signal
YLK (GND) Yellow LED Cathode Signal
YOBICLK Sub Motor Clock
372
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7 Installation
7.1. Set Up Precautions
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.
Machine performance and copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:
1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:
• Extremely high or low temperature and humidity.

Ambient conditions Temperature : 50 - 86 °F (10 - 30 °C)
Relative humidity : 30 - 80 %
• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity
• Exposed to direct sunlight
• Dusty environment
• Poorly ventilated location
• Exposed to chemical gases (Ex: Ammonia gas)
• Exposed to strong vibration
• Exposed to direct air current (Ex: Air conditioner vent)
2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:

DP-C262/C322/AS322: Approx. 360.8 lb (164 kg)
3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet
must be rated for 120 VAC / 15 Amps or 220-240 VAC / 10 Amps accordingly. If you have doubts
regarding a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any
other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)
4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipes)
5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.
6. This machine has ventilation openings on both sides and on the rear, which must remain unobstructed
for safe operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall.
Obstructing the ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.
Using the space requirements shown on the following page, ensures that the machine has the
ventilation it requires, and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
373
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Space Requirements
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
25.83 in 11.45 in
(656 mm) (291 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
45.14 in (1147mm)
Main Unit + Exit Tray (Outer)

3.46 in 3.94 in (100 mm)
(88 mm)
10.83 in 25.83 in 11.45 in
(275 mm) (656 mm) (291 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
59.44 in (1510 mm)
Main Unit + 1 Bin Finisher

9.88 in 14.84 in 3.94 in (100 mm)
(251 mm) (377 mm)
25.83 in 11.45 in
3.94 in (100 mm)
(656 mm) (291 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)
55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
69.86 in (1776 mm)
Main Unit + 1 Bin Saddle Finisher

3.94 in (100 mm)
11.81 in 29.53 in 25.83 in 11.45 in

(300 mm) (750 mm) (656 mm) (291 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)
32.50 in (826 mm)
15.11 in (384 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
86.48 in (2197 mm)
374
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7.2. Unpacking
Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness or any shipping damage before
starting with the installation.
Remove all Tesa Tapes and the packing materials used to secure the Units during shipment.
Caution:
Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately 360.8 lb (164 kg) without any options.
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move
the machine.
No. Qty. Description Remarks

Printer Unit Packing
1 1 Printer Unit
2 1 Model Label
3 1 Paper Size Label
4 1 AC Power Cord
5 1 Operating Instructions Basic Operations
6 1 Operating Instructions Setting Up
Making Copies, Scanner/E-mail, Fax/
7 1 Operating Instructions CD Internet Fax, and Function Settings
manuals in PDF file format.
8 1 Panasonic-DMS and Print Driver CD Includes Operating Instructions
9 1 Installation Instructions This document
Scanner Unit Packing
1 1 Scanner Unit
2 1 Scanner Base Bracket
3 1 Scanner Base Bracket Cover
4 1 Scanner Mounting Bracket
5 1 SCN Harness
6 7 Screw
7 3 Washer-head Screw
8 1 Unpacking Caution Sheet

Note:
1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Supplies (Toner Cartridges) are not included, and are sold separately.
375
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6
4
2
7, 8 9 3 7
2
5
3
4 5, 6
8
1
<Printer Unit Packing> <Scanner Unit Packing>
376
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7.3. Installation Procedure
Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options.
2. The following machine illustrations, depict a DP-C322 with a standard configuration.
Caution:
1. The scanner is locked in place with a Shipping Screw (Blue) to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner (see step 34).
2. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Shipping Brackets for the Intermediate Transfer Unit
and the Fuser Unit, to avoid shipping damage.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before removing the Shipping Brackets.
7.3.1. Installation Procedure
(1) Pull the Handles all the way out to lock them in
place.
Note:
To release the Handle, push the Release Latch
and push the Handle into the machine.
377
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(2) Lift and place the Printer Unit on a suitable

Stand / Paper Tray, aligning with the Front and
Side Covers.
For DP-C262/C322
Paper Tray : (DA-DS320 / DS321)
Stand : (DA-DA322)
Caution:
The Printer Unit weights approximately 275 lb
(125 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate
number of personnel and the proper equipment to
lift or move the Printer Unit.
Caution:
The Scanner Unit weights approximately 85.8 lb
number of personnel and the proper equipment to
lift or move the Scanner Unit.
Do not lift the Scanner Unit by the Control Panel,
Cord/Harness as it may cause damage and/or
bodily injury.
(3) Lift and place the Scanner Unit on the machine,

aligning it with the Rear and Side Covers.
378
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(4) Install the Scanner Base Bracket.

(5) Secure the Scanner Base Bracket with 5
Screws.
(6) Install the Scanner Base Bracket Cover.

(7) Secure the Scanner Base Bracket Cover with 3
Washer-head Screws.
(8) Remove 2 Screws.

(9) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover.

(11) Remove the Rear Cover.
379
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(12) Connect the SCN Harness to connectors

CN702, and CN709 on the SCN PC Board.
(13) Route the Harnesses through the access slot on

the machine as illustrated.
(14) Connect the SCN Harness to the pre-installed

Harness.
(15) Connect the SCN Harness to CN51 on the SC
PC Board.
(16) Connect the USB Cable to CN65 on the SC PC
Board.
Caution:
Connect the USB Cable to the upper USB port
connector on the SC PCB.
(17) Secure the SCN Harness, and USB Cable with 1

Harness Clamp.
(18) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.
(19) Connect the Harness to connectors CN56, and
CN57 on the SC PC Board.
380
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(20) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.

Caution:
The Tie Wrap should be located on the left side of
the Harness Clamp as illustrated.
(21) Connect the Harness to connectors CN58, and

CN59 on the SC PC Board.
(22) Install the Scanner Mounting Bracket.

(23) Secure the Scanner Mounting Bracket with 2
Screws.
(24) Reinstall the Rear Scanner Cover (that was
removed in step 11).
(25) Open the Right Side Cover.
(26) Fasten the Scanner Unit with 1 Thumb Screw.
381
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
<Removing the Protective Shipping Materials>

Caution:
If the Shipping Materials (Blue Screws, and
Shipping Brackets) are not removed as instructed,
the machine may get damaged when the Power
Switches are turned ON.
(27) Remove 2 Tesa Tapes.

(28) Remove 4 Blue Screws.
(29) Remove 2 Shipping Brackets.
(30) Open the Sheet Bypass.
(31) Open the Feed Cover.
(32) Remove 2 Blue Screws.

(33) Pull the Red Wire Strap with the Caution Tag to
remove 2 Shipping Brackets.
Caution:
If the Shipping Materials (Blue Screws, and
Shipping Brackets) are not removed as instructed,
the machine may get damaged when the Power
Switches are turned ON.
382
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(34) Remove the Tesa Tape.

(35) Remove 1 Blue Screw to unlock the Scanner.
Caution:
If the Shipping Material (Blue Screw) is not
removed as instructed, the machine may get
damaged when the Power Switches are turned
ON.
Note:
Store the Shipping Materials (Blue Screws, and
Shipping Brackets) in a safe place for future use.
(36) Remove the Protective Strip from the Battery.
<Installing the Toner Cartridge>

(38) Shake the Toner Cartridge 10 to 15 Times to

loosen the contents.
Note:
Shake it up and down, then turn the bottom up and
repeat.
383
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(39) Gently peel the Tesa Tape off in the direction of

the arrow as illustrated, however, do not open
the Shutter or Toner will spill.
(40) Insert the Toner Cartridge with the arrow label

on the top, and pointing to the Unlock Mark.
(41) Turn the Toner Cartridge clockwise gently until

it stops (pointing to the Locked Mark).
(42) Firmly close the Front Cover.
384
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(43) Attach the Model Label to the machine as

illustrated.
(44) Reinstall and close all Covers.
(45) Load paper into the Paper Tray.
Note:
1. Ensure that all Tesa Tapes, Packing, and
Shipping Materials are removed.
2. For setting the Paper Size on Tray 3 and 4, refer
to the Installation Instructions of the System
Console 1 (DA-DS320) and System Console 2
(DA-DS321).
(46) Remove the Caution Label covering the AC
Inlet on the machine.
(47) Plug the AC Power Cord.
(48) If required, connect the LAN / USB Cable
(not included).
(49) Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
the ON position.
385
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7.4. Adjustment
7.4.1. Manual Copy Quality Adjustment
3. Select “01 Manual Copy Quality Adj”.
4. Select “On”.
5. Select “OK” to begin the Manual Copy Quality adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 1-2 minutes).
7.4.2. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)
1. Press the “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
3. Select “Quality Adj.”, and then set the Density to the center position.
Select “Black”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial”, and then “OK” to set the machine to Mono Text/ Photo
Density.
4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
below.
Text/Photo Text Photo
A Not visible A Not visible A Not visible
.. . .. . .. .
. . . . . .1 Hardly visible 1 Not visible 1 Clearly visible
. . .
2 Clearly visible 2 Clearly visible 2 Clearly visible
3 3 3
7. Enter F6-221 Mono T/P Density (lt) Mode.
8. Select "Input".
Note:
(+) : Lighter
(-) : Darker
12. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter F2 Service Mode.
Note:
Repeat Step (3) to (10) until proper density is attained.
F6-220 : Mono Text Density (lt)
F6-222 : Mono Photo Density (lt)
386
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7.4.3. Color Exposure (Special Adjustment for Customer's Requirement)
1. Press the "Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
3. Select “Quality Adj”, and then set the Density to the center position.
Select “Full Color”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial”, and then “OK” to set the machine to Color T/ P Den-
sity.
4. Make a copy of Color Test Chart 101 (P/N PJQRC0119Z : LDR, PJQRC0120Z : A3), or the Customer’s
Document and verify the density.
7. Enter F6-211 Color T/P Density (lt) Mode.
8. Select "Input".
Note:
(+) : Lighter
(-) : Darker
12. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.
Note:
Repeat Step (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.
F6-210 : Color Text Density (lt)
F6-212 : Color Photo Density (lt)
<Dark Part Adjustment>
F6-215 : Color Text Density (dk)
F6-216 : Color T/P Density (dk)
F6-217 : Color Photo Density (dk)
7.4.4. Set the Date and the Time

3. Select “09 Key Operator Mode”.
4. Enter the 4 Digit Code (default is 0000), and then select “OK”.
5. Select "22 Date Time Setting".
6. Select "Input", and then enter the Date and the Time.
7. Select "OK".
8. Select "Close".
387
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8 Options and Supplies

8.1. Installing the Network Scanner/Email Module (DA-NS320)
8.1.1. Contents
Qty. Description Remarks

1 Hardware Key NWS KEY
1 Scan Memory Board 128 MB
1 Installation Instructions This document
Note:
8.1.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main
Memory (DA-EMN56) are installed first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Hard Disk
Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main Memory (DA-EMN56).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation. (When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of
electrocution when servicing the unit during a Lightning Storm. To protect yourself,
disconnect the Telephone Line Cable before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

Caution:
If the Red LED on the SC PC Board is lit (ON), the
Power to the machine is still ON.
Please read the entire section "8.1.2. Installation"
above once again.
388
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN71, CN72, or CN73) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the
SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.
(4) Install the Scan Memory Board into connector

(CN76) on the SC PC Board.
Note:
Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the
Scan Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the
memory socket, and then lock it down.
(5) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, reinstall all Harnesses and Covers.
(6) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Main
Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch
on the Left Side of the machine to the ON
position.
(7) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was
disconnected.
(8) Install the Panasonic-DMS Software into the PC
with the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
Note:
The Network Scanner/Email Module for DDS (DA-NS321) cannot be installed together with this option.
If the Network Scanner/Email Module for DDS (DA-NS321) is already installed, remove it first.
389
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.2. Installing the Network Scanner Module/Email Module for Document
Distribution System (DA-NS321)
8.2.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key DDS KEY
1 Scan Memory Board 128 MB
Note:
8.2.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main
Memory (DA-EMN56) are installed first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Hard Disk
Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main Memory (DA-EMN56).
CAUTION!

Caution:
above once again.
390
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

the SC PC Board.
Note:
(4) Install the Scan Memory Board into connector

Note:
Scan Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the

position.
disconnected.
(8) Install the Document Distribution System
software (DA-WR10) into the PC by following
the prompts of the Installation Wizard.
Note:
The Network Scanner/Email Module (DA-NS320) cannot be installed together with this option. If the
Network Scanner/Email Module (DA-NS320) is already installed, remove it first.
391
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.3. Installing the Internet Fax Module (DA-NF320)
8.3.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key IFX KEY
Note:
8.3.2. Installation
CAUTION!

Caution:
above once again.
392
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

the SC PC Board.
Note:

position.
disconnected.
(7) Perform Parameter Initialization by following the
steps below.
a) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys
simultaneously in that order to enter the
Service Mode.
b) Press "9", and then “Start” keys.
c) Select "00 FAX Service Mode".
d. Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM
Initialize“.
e) Select “V” arrow, and then "01 Parameter
Initialize".
f) Select “Yes”. Wait approximately 1-2
seconds, the unit beeps when initialization is
completed.
g) Press "Stop".
h) Press the "Function" and "Clear” keys
simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
i) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the
machine to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
(8) Install the Internet Fax Software into the PC with
the Operating Instructions by following the
(9) Proceed the communication test to ensure the
Internet Fax Option works properly.
393
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>
An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total is available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD32) is
installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration
from 200 to 1,000 Stations and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD
automatically.
Note:
1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book
information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or
RDS as backup.
2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the
200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will
be preserved).
3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling
the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address
book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the
Power Switch) procedure was not followed.
<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (using copy and
paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).
Note:
The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the C262/C322.
1) The "C262/C322" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
2) The "C262/C322 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.
a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of
Fax Address Book is activated on the C262/C322.
b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management
System\Network MFP Utilities.
2) Click on Network Device Locator.
3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.
4) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
5) The Network Address Book Editor "C262/C322" window appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
6) When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on
File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
7) Then click the OK button.
c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode
described above.
d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "C262/C322 (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu
bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully
completed.
394
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.4. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG320)
8.4.1. Contents

1 Fax Box
1 Speaker Assembly
1 USB Cable
1 FXB Harness
1 Speaker Harness
5 Screw (Short)
1 Screw (Long)
2 Clamp A
6 Clamp B
1 Telephone Line Cable

1 TEL /LINE Label
1 Type Approval Label For Specified Destination only
1 Telepermit Label For New Zealand only
1 Stamp Solenoid
1 Stamp Assembly
Note:
8.4.2. Installation
Install the Hardware by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
installation.
(1) Connect the FXB Harness to the Fax Box.

(2) Connect the USB Cable to the Fax Box.
395
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Connect one end of the Speaker Harness

(Black) to the Fax Box.
(4) Secure the Speaker Harness with the Harness
Clamp.

Caution:
above once again.
(7) Install the Fax Box as illustrated.

(8) Secure the Fax Box with 3 Screws (Short).
396
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(9) Connect other end of the Speaker Harness

(White) to the Speaker Assembly.
(10) Install the Speaker Assembly.

(11) Secure the Speaker Assembly with 2 Screws
(Short).
(12) Install 5 Clamps B.

(13) Secure the Speaker Harness with 5 Harness
Clamps and 1 Edge Saddle.
(14) Install 1 Clamp B.

(15) Secure the Speaker Harness with 1 Harness
Clamp.
397
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(16) Connect the FXB Harness to connector CN64

on the SC PC Board.
(17) Secure the FXB Harness with 2 Harness
Clamps.
(18) Install 2 Clamps A.

(19) Connect the USB Cable to connector CN67 on
the SC PC Board.
(20) Secure the USB Cable with 2 Harness Clamps,
and Edge Saddle.
(21) Open the ADF Cover.

(22) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2
Assembly.
(23) Lift the ADF Tray Assembly.
398
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(24) Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly.

(26) Remove the Inverting Guide 3 Assembly.

(28) Remove the Lower Exit Guide.
(29) Connect the Stamp Harness to the Stamp

Solenoid.
(30) Secure the Stamp Solenoid with 1 Screw
(Long).
399
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(31) Reinstall the Lower Exit Guide removed in Step

(28).
(32) Install the Stamp Assembly.
(33) Reinstall all the parts removed in the previous
steps and close the ADF Covers.

(35) Remove 1 Screw.
(36) Remove the Cover.
(37) Remove the Protective Tab using a Nipper or a

Cutter.
(38) ReInstall the Cover.

(39) Secure the Cover with 1 Screw.
400
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(40) Attach the TEL/LINE Label to the Rear Cover as

illustrated.
position.
(42) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable
to the LINE Jack on the Rear side of the
machine, and the other end to the Telephone
Jack on the wall.
(43) Attach the Type Approval Label (for specified

destinations only) on the top of the other labels
to the Rear Cover as illustrated.
Note: (For New Zealand only)
Attach the Telepermit Label around the LINE Jack
on the Rear Cover.
401
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(44) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the Note:

following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware For other destinations, set the Function Parameter
is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware. #005 (Destination Code).
PB : UK 000 : Austria
PF : France 001 : U.K.
PK : China 002 : Canada
PM: Germany 003 : Denmark
PP : Poland 004 : Taiwan
PS : Sweden 005 : Finland
006 : Germany
PT : Taiwan
007 : Netherlands
PU : USA
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
(45) Perform Parameter Initialization by following the steps below.
1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press "9", and then “Start” keys.
3) Select "00 FAX Service Mode".
4) Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM Initialize“.
5) Select "01 Parameter Initialize".
6) Select “Yes”. Wait approximately 1-2 seconds, the unit beeps when initialization is completed.
7) Press the "Reset" key to exit to the initial screen of F9 Service Mode.
8) Press the "Function" and "Clear” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
9) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to
enable the parameter settings.
(46) Proceed the communication test to ensure the Fax Option works properly.
Note:
If the machine does not start dialing properly, change the Fax Parameter “68 Dial Tone Check” to
the “Off” position by following the steps below.
402
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1) Press the "Function" key.
2) Select “Fax/Email Settings”.
3) Select "04 Key Operator Mode".
4) Enter the 4 Digit Code (default is 0000), and then select “OK”.
5) Select "01 Fax Parameters".
6) Select “V” arrow, and then "68 Dial Tone Check".
7) Select “Off”, and then “OK”.
8) Press "Reset" key.
9) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to
enable the parameter settings.

automatically.
Note:
information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software, or
the RDS as a backup.
200 addresses that were registered on the F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they
will be preserved).
Note:
Book.
7) Then click OK.
403
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
described above.
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step (b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step (d). Copy the 200 Fax
data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it
again. (Refer to Help.)
completed.
404
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.5. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32)
8.5.1. Contents
No. Qty. Description Remarks

1 1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
2 1 DC12 PC Board Assembly
3 1 HDD Bracket
4 1 HD Harness
5 1 HD2 Harness
6 1 DC12 Harness
7 1 Harness Clamp (Metal)
8 4 Black Screw
9 4 Screw
- 1 Installation Instructions This document
Note:
1
3
5
6
4
2 7
8 9
8.5.2. Installation
Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
(1) Install the HDD Bracket over the HDD.

(2) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Black Screws.
405
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Connect the HDD Harness to the HDD

connector.
Note:
Correct Incorrect Make sure that the HD Harness is connected to
the HDD connector correctly as illustrated.
1) The Key on the connector must be facing
Downwards.
2) Either connector of the HD Harness will fit into
the HDD connector. However, the correct one
HDD HDD is shown in the illustration (Harness comes
out from the top of the connector).
Key
Key
(4) Connect the HD2 Harness to connector CN143

on the DC12 PC Board.
(5) Secure the HD2 Harness with 2 Harness
Clamps.
Caution:
The Tie Wrap should be located on the right side
of the Harness Clamp as illustrated.
(6) Connect the DC12 Harness to connectors

CN141 and CN142 on the DC12 PC Board.
(7) Secure the DC12 Harness with 1 Harness
Clamp.
Caution:
The Tie Wrap should be located on the right side
of the Harness Clamp as illustrated.

406
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Caution:
above once again.
(10) Install the DC 12 PC Board Assembly.

(11) Secure the DC 12 PC Board Assembly with 1
Screw.
(12) Install the HDD Assembly.

Note:
Make sure that the 2 Hooks are latched properly.
(13) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Screws.
(14) Connect the HDD Harness to connector CN74

on the SC PC Board.
(15) Secure the HDD Harness with 1 Harness
Clamp.
(16) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness
Clamp (Metal) and 1 Screw.
407
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(17) Connect the DC12 Harness to connector CN55

on the SC PC Board.
(18) Connect the HD2 Harness to the HDD
connector.
(19) Secure the HD2 Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.
position.
Note:
It takes approximately 10-15 minutes for
formatting the Hard Disk Drive.
disconnected.
CAUTION!
<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed
(similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step
sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard
Disk Drive Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect
the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option is
installed.)

automatically.
Note:
information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software, or
the RDS as a backup.
200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will
be preserved).
408
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Note:
Book.
7) Then click OK.
described above.
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
completed.
409
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.6. Installing the Main Memory 256MB (DA-EMN56)
8.6.1. Contents

1 Main Memory Board 256 MB (PJWPF217MPU)
Note:
8.6.2. Installation
CAUTION!

Caution:
above once again.
410
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Install the Main Memory Board into the Socket

Note:
Main Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the
Note:
The Main Memory Board must always be installed
into Socket (CN78) for the PS Printer Option to
function.

position.
disconnected.
411
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.7. Installing the Page Memory 256MB (DA-PMN56)
8.7.1. Contents

2 Image Memory Board 128 MB (DZEC103878)
Note:
8.7.2. Installation
CAUTION!

Caution:
above once again.
412
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Install 2 Image Memory Boards into two

connectors (CN75, and CN77) on the SC PC
Board.
Note:
Image Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the

position.
disconnected.
413
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.8. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)
8.8.1. Contents

1 Accounting Software CD Includes Operating Instructions
Note:
8.8.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) is installed into
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32).
2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the
3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.
1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service
Mode.
2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Service Mode (Function Parameters).
3) Press the "Start" key.
4) Select “V” arrow several times, and then “42 KEY/DEPT Counter“.
5) Select "Dept.", and then "OK" to activate the Dept. Counter function.
6) Press the "STOP" key.
7) Press the "Function" and "Clear" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
Note:
The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "0000", to ensure security it is
recommended to change this code.
Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code:
• While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Service Mode.
• Press the "Start" key, and then select "01 Key Operator Mode".
• Select "Start", and then input a 4-digit code.
• Select "OK", and then press "Stop" key to exit to the initial screen of F7 Service Mode.
• Press the "Function" and "Clear" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.

1) Press the "Function" key, and then select "GENERAL SETTINGS".
2) Select "V" arrow several times, and then "09 Key Operator Mode".
3) Input the 4 Digit Code, and then select “OK” to enter the Key Operator Mode.
4) Select "V" arrow several times, and then "21 Dept. Counter Mode".
5) Select "Identification Code", and then one of the Dept Counter Codes ("001:" up to
"1000:").
6) Select "Input"; enter a new Departmental Counter Code (up to 8-digit), and then select
"OK".
7) Enter a desired name in the "Departmental Counter Data/Enter Text" field, and then
select "OK".
8) Select "OK", and then "Close".
9) Press the "STOP" key to return to the standby mode.
414
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.9. Installing the Printer Controller Module (DA-MC320)
8.9.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key PS KEY
1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions
1 Adobe PostScript 3 Label
Note:
8.9.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Main Memory Board (DA-EMN56) is installed into
the Socket (CN78) on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Main
Memory Board (DA-EMN56).
2. Before installing this option, make sure the SD Memory Card is installed into the Slot on the SC
PC Board. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the SD Memory Card.
CAUTION!

(2) Remove the Rear Cover 1.
Caution:
above once again.
415
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

available connectors (CN71, CN72 or CN73) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:

position.
disconnected.
(7) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS Option
firmware. Refer to the attached "Service Notes".
(8) Install the PS Software into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.
(9) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label onto the
Front Panel as illustrated.
416
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.9.3. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PS Option Installation
To use PS (DA-MC320) option, the standard firmware must be updated, changing to Type D SC
firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the option.
Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly
identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for
the appropriate option.
The firmware for SC, EC, SCN and FCB must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the
firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.
Firmware Version Table

Standard Firmware PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type A) (SC = Type D)
SC CMFP1_SCAAVxxxxx_xx \CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x
Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions
Caution:
1. Updating through a LAN Port

The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1. Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code,
or access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2. Preparing the Firmware Code

latest Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the
417
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
3. Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). Make sure the unit's
Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4. Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in the

\ Scn \ CMFP1SCNAAVxxxxx_xx
When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
5. Confirmation
different.
Note:
a. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the
type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
b. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal
upon completion of the firmware update.
c. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not
be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, refer to Section 3.7.7. “Firmware Emergency
Recovery”.
d. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
418
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Updating through the USB Port
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.
1. Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code, or
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2. Preparing the Firmware Code

Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
3. Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.
4. Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in
theC:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder. The Firmware Type window appears and proper
Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware

Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected
automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.
419
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5. Confirmation
different.
Note:
location.
3. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory Card

If the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a package.
(1 SD Memory Card required if the SD Memory Card capacity is Large enough size for all necessary
Firmware.)
Caution:
1. Remove the PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter from the PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front of the machine.
2. Install the Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.
Do not install it into the Card Slot on the SC PCB, or the machine will automatically format the SD Card
for the Fax Image Memory.
3. Do not remove the SD Memory Card from the SD Card Slot in Front of the machine or turn the power
OFF during Formatting or while Updating the Firmware.
<Procedure>
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
2. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.
5. Press the “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
If selecting the "Auto Mode", copies all the necessary firmware at once, and after the update is
completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
8. Turn the Power Switch on the back side of the machine to the OFF position.
9. Remove the Master Firmware SD Memory Card from the machine.
11. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in Step 5, refer to Section 3.7.7 “Firmware Emergency Recovery”.
3.1. Creating a Master Firmware SD Memory Card using a PC

1) Install the “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” to your PC.
The “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” can be downloaded from your sales company’s Web
Site or the PCC DIC Service Web site. Please refer to the Readme file for additional details.

420
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Example:
From:
To:
3) Preparing the Master Firmware SD Memory Card
1. Insert the SD Memory Card (128 MB to 1 GB) into the SD Memory Card Slot.
2. Perform the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool.
3. After all firmware codes are copied, remove the SD Memory Card from the Slot.
The SD Memory Card is now ready to use for firmware update.

(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD and the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing
Tool OI.)
421
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.10. Installing the SD Memory Card (64 MB up to 1 GB)
8.10.1. Contents

SD Memory Card (RP-SD064****) 64 MB
1 SD Memory Card (RP-SD256****) 256 MB
SD Memory Card (RP-SD01G****) 1 GB
Note:
The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.
8.10.2. Installation
1. Ensure that the Write Protect Switch of the SD Memory Card is in the “Unlock” position.
2. Ensure that there is no Fax Jobs in memory. If there is a Fax Job in memory, clear all Jobs first
by following the steps below.
1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service
Mode.
2) Press "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Service Mode (Unit Maintenance).
3) Select "00 Fax Service Mode".
5) Select "09 All Job Clear", and then "Yes".
3. Install the SD Memory Card by following the steps below.
CAUTION!

422
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Caution:
above once again.
(3) Gently insert the SD Memory Card into the SD

Card Slot (CN70) on the SC PCB as illustrated
(Logo facing outward).
Caution:
Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage
to the card or machine.
position.
disconnected.
Caution:
Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the power OFF during Formatting.
Note:
1. When a New (Blank) SD Memory Card is detected for the first time, a prompt for Formatting will appear
on the LCD. The machine will format the SD Card for DATA (used for G3 Fax / Internet Fax Image, PS
Fonts), and it takes approximately 3 to 12 min. to format depending on the manufacturer, SD Memory
Card Size or Data Access Speed of the SD Card.
2. If the SD Memory Card is formatted by the machine, clear all Jobs by following the steps below.
1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Service Mode (Unit Maintenance).
3) Select "00 Fax Service Mode".
5) Select "09 All Job Clear", and then "Yes".
423
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.11. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS320) and
System Console 2 (DA-DS321)
8.11.1. Contents
<DA-DS320> System Console 1

1 Paper Tray Unit
1 Paper Size Label
2 Bracket
2 Screw
<DA-DS321> System Console 2

1 Paper Tray Unit
1 Paper Size Label
2 Bracket
2 Screw

Note:
CAUTION!
(1) Carefully unpack the System Console 1 or 2, and

remove all shipping Tesa Tapes.
424
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
<On the Printer Unit>

(4) Pull the Handles all the way out to lock them in
place.
Note:
To release the Handle, push on the Release Latch,
and push the Handle into the machine.
(5) Lift and place the Printer Unit on the Paper Tray,
aligning with it the Front and Side Covers.
Caution:
The Printer Unit weights approximately 275 lb
number of personnel, and the proper equipment to
lift, or move the Printer Unit.
425
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

(7) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
(8) Connect the pre-installed Harness in the

machine to the pre-installed Harness in the
Paper Tray.
(9) Install 2 Brackets as illustrated.

(10) Secure each Bracket with 1 Screw.
426
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(11) Open the Paper Tray 3.

(12) Fasten the Paper Tray with 1 Thumb Screw.
<Paper Size setting (Paper Tray 3 and 4) to your

customer's requirement>
Default Paper Size setting

For USA and Canada
Paper Tray 3 : 11 x 17”
Paper Tray 4 : 11 x 17”
For Europe and Other Destinations
Paper Tray 3 : A3
Paper Tray 4 : A3
427
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(14) Adjust the Paper Guides.

Note:
1. Adjust the Front Paper Guide to lineup with the
Paper Size Marker as illustrated (Ex: Legal,
Letter or FLS2, etc.).
2. Adjust the Rear Paper Guide proportionally.
Caution:
Confirm that Paper Guides are adjusted to the
correct position.
(15) Secure the Paper Guides with 5 Screws.

(16) Load paper into the Paper Tray.
(17) Close the Paper Tray 3.
Note:
For System Console 2 (DA-DS321), repeat the
same steps for the Paper Tray 4.
(18) Attach the appropriate Paper Size Label(s) onto

the 3rd/4th Paper Tray(s) as illustrated.
position.
disconnected.
(22) To level the machine and to add more stability,
adjust the 2 Levelers behind the front casters as
illustrated.
8.11.3. Paper Size Setting (System Console)

3. Select "16 Paper Size Tray 3".
4. Select the desired Paper Size, and then “OK”.
5. Select a Media Type, and then select “OK”.
Note:
For System Console 1 (DA-DS320), skip to step (9).
For System Console 2 (DA-DS321), follow the steps below.
6. Select "17 Paper Size Tray 4".
7. Select a desired Paper Size, and then “OK”.
8. Select a Media Type, and then “OK”.
9. Press the "Reset" key to exit to the initial screen of the F5 Service Mode.
11. Confirm that System Console (Tray 3 and/or Tray 4) is displayed on the Touch Panel Display.
428
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.12. Installing the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320)
8.12.1. Contents

1 Paper Transport Unit
1 Front Cover
1 Bracket
1 Bracket Cover
1 Screw (Short A)
1 Screw (Long)
3 Screw (Short B)
2 Screw (Medium)
Note:
CAUTION!
Note:
1. For Finisher Option (DA-FS320 or DA-FS325),
skip to step (3).
2. For Exit Tray (Outer) (DA-XT320), follow the
steps below.
(1) Remove 1 Screw.

(2) Remove the Gear Cover Bracket.
(3) Install the Bracket Cover over the Bracket.

(4) Do not use force to secure the Bracket Cover
with 1 Screw (Short A).
Note:
Do not tighten the Screw (Short A) too tight, as it
may crack the plastic.
429
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(5) Remove 1 Screw.

(6) Remove the Connector Cover.
(7) Remove 1 Screw.

(8) Remove the Exit Sub Guide.
(9) Install the Paper Transport Unit as illustrated.
(10) Connect the Harness into the machine's

connector.
430
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(11) Install the Bracket Assembly by Lifting up the

Paper Transport Unit.
(12) Secure the Bracket Assembly with 1 Screw

(Long), 2 Screws (Medium) and 2 Screws
(Short B).
(13) Install the Front Cover.

(14) Secure the Front Cover with 1 Screw (Short B)
by pushing the Flap downward as illustrated.
position.
disconnected.
431
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.13. Installing the Exit Tray (Outer) (DA-XT320)
8.13.1. Contents

1 Exit Tray
1 Outer Cover Assembly
5 Screw
Note:
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320) is installed to
machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320).
CAUTION!
(1) Insert 2 Screws first and tighten them 1/2 way.
(2) Install the Outer Cover Assembly.

(3) Secure the Outer Cover Assembly with
3 Screws.
(4) Tighten 2 Screws installed in Step (1) above.
432
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(5) Install the Exit Tray onto the Outer Cover

Assembly.
position.
disconnected.
433
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.14. Installing the 1 Bin Finisher (DA-FS320)
8.14.1. Contents

1 1-Bin Finisher
1 Finisher Tray Assembly
1 Base Bracket
1 Front Slide Guide Bracket
1 Rear Slide Guide Bracket
1 IPC PC Board
1 Optional LVPS
1 Optional LVPS Harness
2 Snap Ring
4 Screw (M4 x 6)
2 Screw (M3 x 6)
Note:
machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320).
2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
4. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Finisher (DA-FS320), read these entire
instructions.
CAUTION!
Note:
3.94 in (100 mm) Make sure that there will be adequate space for
3.94 in working area (Ex: Loading paper, replacing
(100 mm) 3.94 in
(100 mm)
supplies, etc.).
55.48 in
(1410 mm)
3.94 in
(100 mm)
69.86 in (1776 mm)
434
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(1) Connect the Optional LVPS Harness to

connector CN64 on the Optional LVPS.

Caution:
above once again.
(4) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
435
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(5) Remove the Dummy Plug.

Note:
The Dummy Plug is used for Safety Purposes.
Store it in a safe place for removing the Optional
LVPS just in case.
(6) Release 2 Harnesses from Harness Clamp.
(7) Connect the pre-installed Harness to the

Optional LVPS Harness.
(8) Connect the pre-installed Harnesses to
connectors CN65 and CN66 on the Optional
LVPS.
(9) Install the Optional LVPS.

(10) Secure the Optional LVPS with 2 Screws
(M3 x 6).
436
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(11) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board into connector

CN535 on the EC PC Board.
Note:
Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as
illustrated.
(12) Hook the Base Bracket and secure it with

2 Screws (M4 x 6).
Note:
It is easier to align the screw holes, if you insert
the Front Screw first.
(13) Place the Finisher on the Base Bracket.

Note:
Make sure that the 2 Lock Levers Hook into the
Guide Brackets properly.
(14) Install 2 Slide Guide Brackets.

(15) Secure 2 Slide Guide Brackets with 2 Screws
(M4 x 6).
437
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(16) Install the Finisher Tray Assembly.

(17) Secure the Finisher Tray Assembly with
2 Snap Rings.
(18) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with

the Interface Cable.
position.
disconnected.
438
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.15. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325)
8.15.1. Contents

1 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
1 Stapler
1 Delivery Tray
1 Stand
1 Latch Plate
6 Screw (M3 x 6)
6 Screw (M4 x 7)
2 Screw (M4 x 30)
1 IPC PC Board
1 Optional LVPS
1 Optional LVPS Harness
1 Label
Note:
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Paper Transport Unit
(DA-FK320).
4. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325), read these
entire instructions.
CAUTION!
1. Selecting the Installation Site
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in
3.94 in (100 mm) (100 mm) Make sure that there will be adequate space for work
(Ex: Loading paper, replacing supplies, etc.).
Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the
55.48 in same floor surface as its host machine
(1410 mm)
(Ex: At the same height, slope, etc.).
3.94 in
(100 mm)
86.48 in (2197 mm)
439
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Unpacking
Note:
This finisher is protected with Packing Materials
such as Tapes and Spacers against vibration and
shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to
remove them before using the finisher.
Caution:
The finisher weights approximately 60 lb (27 kg).
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of
personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move
the finisher.
Move the finisher next to the left side of the
machine and remove the packing materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Unpack the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories.
(2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher,
Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing
materials.
Note:
The removed tapes and packing materials will be
needed when transporting the finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.
3. Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher

Installation
(1) Connect the Optional LVPS Harness to

connector CN64 on the Optional LVPS.

440
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Caution:
above once again.
(4) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
(5) Remove the Dummy Plug.

Note:
The Dummy Plug is used for Safety Purposes.
Store it in a safe place for removing the Optional
LVPS just in case.
(6) Release 2 Harnesses from the Harness Clamp.
441
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(7) Connect the pre-installed Harness to the

Optional LVPS Harness.
(8) Connect the pre-installed Harnesses to
connectors CN65 and CN66 on the Optional
LVPS.
(9) Install the Optional LVPS.

(10) Secure the Optional LVPS with 2 Screws
(M3 x 6).
(11) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board into connector

CN535 on the EC PC Board.
Note:
Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as
illustrated.
(12) Install the Latch Plate.

(13) Secure the Latch Plate with 4 Screws (M3 x 6).
Note:
Before connecting the Finisher to its Host
Machine, be sure to attach the Latch Plate to the
Host Machine.
442
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(14) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips

type Screwdriver as illustrated.
(15) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper
or a Cutter.
4. Attaching to the Host Machine
Caution:
Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine
on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can
result in improper paper feed.
(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting

holes on the side panel of the Host Machine,
then secure the Stand with 2 Screws (M4 x 30).
(2) Slide the Slider of the Stand outward, loosen the

Screws securing the Bracket, then secure the
Slider.
(3) Place the Finisher on the Slider of the Stand, and

loosely secure it with 2 Screws (M4 x 7).
443
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Caution:
When mounting the Finisher in place, be sure to
insert the lower tabs of the Finisher into the holes
Finisher on top of the Slider. Ensure that there is no gap
between the Finisher and the Stand. A gap would
No Gap
indicate the Finisher is overlapping. Remove and
re-mount the Finisher correctly.
Stand
(4) Align the positioning lines of the Finisher and the

Stand. Keep checking the alignment by moving
the Finisher back and forth, and tighten 2 Screws
when they are aligned.
(5) Attach the Delivery Tray with 4 Screws (M4 x 7)

as illustrated.
(6) Open the Front Door of the Finisher, then insert

the Stapler along the Guide Rails.
(7) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher.
444
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(8) Place the Bracket in its original position, then

secure it with Screws. Slide the Finisher toward
the Host Machine and connect it to the Host
Machine.
(9) Attach the Label as illustrated.
(10) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with

the Interface Cable.
Caution:
Before connecting the Interface Cable, make sure
to turn OFF the Host Machine and unplug the AC
Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock
hazards.
(11) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the

perpendicular position of the Finisher to the
machine. (Gaps “A” and “B” should be identical).
Note:
If the Finisher is not latched properly, loosen 2
Screws and adjust the height using the adjusters.
(12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
the ON position.
445
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.16. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41)
8.16.1. Contents

1 Punch Unit
1 Punch Relay Harness (Orange)
1 Punch Relay Harness (Violet)
1 Jam Removal Label
1 Punch Dust Label
1 Screw (M4 x 6)

Note:
CAUTION!
1. Removing Packing Materials
Note:
This machine is protected with packing materials
such as tapes and spacers against vibration and
shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to
remove them before using the machine.
(1) Unpack the Punch Unit and its accessories.

(2) Remove the tapes securing the Covers and
Front Door.
2. Preparing the Finisher for Punch Unit

Front Door Screw
Installation
(1) Turn OFF the Host Machine, and disconnect the

Finisher's Interface Cable from the Host
Machine.
Jam (2) Release the Latch on the Finisher, and separate
Release
Dial the Finisher from the host machine.
(3) Open the Front Door. While pinching the Tabs
Tab remove the Jam Release Dial.
Screw
446
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(5) Raise the clips under the Latch Release Lever

Latch Release Front Cover
Lever
and remove the Latch Release Lever.
(7) Open the Jam Access Cover, and detach the
Front Cover.
(8) Close the Jam Access Cover.
Screws
Jam
Access
Cover
Screw
Rear Cover
Screws
(10) Remove 1 Screw.

(11) Detach the Rear Cover.
Rear Cover
Screw
447
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Upper-Right Cover Assembly (12) Remove 2 Screws.
Screws

Upper-Right Cover
(14) Detach the Upper-Right Cover Assembly.
Screws
3. Attaching Punch Unit to the Finisher
Punch Base Cover (1) Place the Punch Unit onto the Finisher as
illustrated.
Note:
Make sure that the Front and Rear Latches are
Latch positioned correctly.
Positioning Pin
448
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(2) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher using 2

Screws (M4 X 6) removed in Step (12) above,
and 1 Enclosed Screw (Screw with Threaded
Star Washer, M4 x 6).
Screw
Screw with Threaded

Star Washer
Screw
(3) Open the Upper Cover.

Upper-Right Cover
(4) Fit the clips of the Upper-Right Cover into the
square holes in the Punch Unit.
(5) Attach the Upper-Right Cover to the Punch Unit.
(6) Close the Upper Cover.
Upper Cover
Punch Unit
449
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Screws (7) Secure the Upper-Right Cover to the Finisher

using the 2 Screws (M4 x 6) removed in Step
(13) above.
Upper-Right
Cover
Upper-Right Cover (8) Attach the Jam Access Label onto the outline of
the Label Frame on the Upper-Right Cover.
(9) Attach the Punch Dust Label onto the Dust Box.
Jam
Access
Label
Punch
Dust
Label
(10) Connect one end of the Punch Relay Harness

(Orange) to J1004 on the Punch Controller
Circuit Board and connect the other Punch Relay
Harness (Violet) to J1003 on the same circuit
Punch
Controller board.
Circuit Board
J1004
Punch Relay
Harness
J1003 (Orange)
Punch Relay
Harness (Violet)
450
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(11) Connect the other end of the Punch Relay

Harness (Orange) to CN14 on the Finisher
Controller Circuit Board and connect the other
end of the Punch Relay Harness (Violet) to
Punch Relay
Harness CN12 on the same Circuit Board.
(Orange) CN14
CN12
Punch Relay
Harness (Violet)
Finisher
Controller
Circuit Board
(12) Insert the Punch Relay Harnesses into a

Harness Clamps and Harness Guides.
Punch Relay
Harness
(Violet)
Punch Relay
Harness
(Orange)
Harness
Clamp
Finisher
Controller
Circuit
Board
Harness
Guide
451
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(13) Attach the Front Cover, Latch Release Lever,

Jam Release Dial, and Rear Cover.
Note:
When attaching the Front Cover, attach it with the
Side Side Guide set inside of the Front Cover as
Guide illustrated.
If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide
Front Cover
set on the outside, the up and down operation of
the Ejection Tray may malfunction.
(14) Loosen 2 Screws securing the Finisher and the

Finisher Frame.
Screws
(15) Slowly move the Finisher back and forth towards

Finisher
the Host Machine and adjust the Finisher so that
the notch of the Latch Plate aligns with the
protrusion of the Punch Base Cover.
Host Machine (16) Tighten 2 Screws loosened in Step (14) above.
(17) Attach the Finisher to the Host Machine and
connect the Finisher's Interface Cable to the
Host Machine.
(18) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
Latch Plate turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
the ON position.
Align
Punch Base
Cover
452
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.17. Installing the ADF Handle for Accessibility (DA-UD321)
8.17.1. Contents

1 ADF Front Cover
1 ADF Caution Label
1 Operating Instructions
Note:
CAUTION!

(3) Remove the ADF Front Cover.
(4) Install the new ADF Front Cover.

(5) Secure the ADF Front Cover with 2 Screws.
(6) Close the ADF Unit.
(7) Attach the ADF Caution Label to the ADF Front

Cover as illustrated.
position.
disconnected.
453
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.18. Installing the Mechanical Counter (PJWEF2170PU)
(Supplied as a Service Part for USA and Canada)
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then
unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to
prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the
AC Power Cord, if the Fax Option is installed.)
Two (2) Mechanical Counters can be installed as Counter 1 and 2.
(2) Remove 1 Screw.

(3) Remove the Mechanical Counter Cover.
(4) Release the pre-installed Harness(es) in the

machine from the Harness Clamp(s).
(5) Connect the Harness(es) to the Mechanical
Counter(s).
454
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(6) Install the Mechanical Counter(s).

(7) Secure the Mechanical Counter(s) with 1
Screw each.
Note:
Upper : Counter 1
Lower : Counter 2
(8) Remove the Protective Tab(s) on the

Mechanical Counter Cover by a Nipper or a
Cutter.
(9) Secure the Mechanical Counter Cover with 1

Screw, that was removed in step (2).
(10) Close the Front Cover.
position.
disconnected.
8.18.2. Mechanical Counter Setting

2. Press the "5", and then "Start" keys to enter the F5 Mode.
3. Select "175 Mechanical Counter 1".
4. Select a Counter Type, and then select “OK”.
Note:
For one (1) counter, skip to step (8).
For two (2) counters, follow the steps below.
5. Select "176 Mechanical Counter 2".
6. Select a Counter Type, and then select “OK”.
7. Press the "Reset" key to exit the F5 Mode.
9. Confirm that Counter(s) count properly.
455
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
8.19. Replacing the OPC Drum
Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Basic Operations, Problem Solving Section).
8.20. Replacing the Toner Waste Container

Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Basic Operations, Problem Solving Section).
456
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9 General Network Information

9.1. Network Protocol
9.1.1. OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer Name Function Protocol
7 Application SMB
SMTP
FTP
6 Presentation DNS
HTTP
Telnet
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc... etc...
5 Session
TDI
4 Transport TCP/IP
TCP, UDP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
3 Network IP, IPX, etc... IP Address etc...
etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver
2 Datalink PPP... Router Ethernet

MAC Address Token Ring
NIC FDDI
SW Hub ATM
1 Physical Repeater
Hub RS-232C, X21... etc...
OSI Reference Model and Network Terms
457
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.1.2. Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function
7 Application Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI
6 Presentation Session, Presentation and Application
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
5 Session network services.
4 Transport Transport Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
3 Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
2 Data Link Network Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Interface the OSI model. This correspondence
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
1 Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.
Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model
9.1.3. Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω.
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category Purpose
1 Voice grade telephone line
2 ISDN
3 10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
4 Token Ring (16M)
5 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
458
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology
9.2.1. MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner.
For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from
each station should be unique.
XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
PCC : 080023
9.2.2. Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and
the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection.
The General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,

Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Most significant bit Least significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS
8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node,
it must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.
Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit.
When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.
The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
459
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.

Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format

Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte 1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format
SFD Access Frame Destination Source Data FCS ED Frame
1 byte Control control MAC MAC 4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte 1 byte 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte 1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)
Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
460
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.2.3. Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)
Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type Max Length

10Base-5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m (1640 ft)
10Base-T 10M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)
100Base-TX 100M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)
802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type
Max length (x 100m)

10 BASE 5
Logical speed BASE : baseband (digital)

(Mbps) BROAD: broadband (analog)
10 BASE - T
TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable
no "-" means max length
Ethernet Configuration
461
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
TX (+) TX (+)
1 1 1 1
TX (-)
2 2 2 TX (-) 2
RX (+)
3 3 3 RX (+) 3
RX (-)
6 6 6 RX (-) 6
Straight Cable Crossed Cable
Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1" "0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent.
The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for
collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the
end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.
9.2.4. Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.
9.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
462
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.3. Network Layer
9.3.1. IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address

Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Network address represented as
Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:
Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255

Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
463
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.3.2. Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP
192.168.32.1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192 168 32 1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255 255 255 0
IP
Subnet Mask
Network
Address 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
192.168.32.0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0 Third
255.255.0.0 190.0.3.1 190.0.3.2 190.0.3.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router Second
190.0.2.1 190.0.2.2 190.0.2.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Ground
Floor
190.0.1.1 190.0.1.2 190.0.1.3
Note 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
Class B Subnet Outline
For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.
1. Host address is set to all “0”

2. Host address is set to all “1”
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with “127”
Reserved for loop back address
464
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.3.3. Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:

1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte
Version Internet Type Of Service Total Length

Header Length
ID Flags Fragment Offset
Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data
IP Datagram
Terms Detail
Version Currently version 4
Internet Header IP Header field length
Length
Type Of Service Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
ID Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Flags Packet disassembly information
Fragment Offset Offset from most significant bit
Time To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Protocol Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Source Address Sender’s IP Address
Destination Address Destination’s IP Address
Option When implemented
Padding Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
465
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.3.4. Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23
192.168.32/24 192.168.33/24
Router B
PC-A PC-B PC-C PC-D

192.168.32.1/24 192.168.32.2/24 192.168.33.1/24 192.168.33.2/24
OK OK
permission denied
permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.
466
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.4. Transport Layer
9.4.1. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Datagram
TCP segment
IP Header TCP Header Application Data
(20 byte) (20 byte) (vary)
TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length Reserved Control Flag
(4 bit) (6 bit) (6 bit) Window (6 byte)
Checksum (2 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
Option PAD
Data (Segment)
TCP Segment Outline
TCP Header Monitoring Sample
467
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
468
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.5. Upper Layer
9.5.1. DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.
469
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. The “Com” root DNS Server sends the query to the “jp” root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.
9.5.2. Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone,
it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
9.5.3. Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.
470
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>
An example of the syntax is shown below:

;
; File: db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
; default parameters for information this DNS is
; authorized for:
;
@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213 ; serial number
43200 ; refresh every 12 hours
7200 ; retry after 2 hours
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file
The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of hostmaster@rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone
transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.
471
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.5.5. A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy
; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.
rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.
IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212
ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26
ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29
A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file
9.5.6. PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.
9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
<alias name> CNAME <host name>
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
472
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.5.8. NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.
9.5.11. Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.
473
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-
SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc.org/rfc821
Internet
SMTP Server
PC DNS Server POP Server PC

SMTP
POP 3
Internet Mail Sending and Receiving
9.6.1. Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35
by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 Delivery route
for <freeport@labo.pcc.com>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <199908200604.PAA09157@mlsv2.labo.pcc.com> Message ID
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
From: "Panasonic" <ifax98-us@labo.pcc.com>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: freeport@labo.pcc.com
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+" Content-Type
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572
474
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305 (New RFC3965)
The Internet Fax protocol had been developed and proposed by Panasonic Communications Company,
used be Matsushita Graphic Communication Systems, Inc. in 1997, and has been defined by ITU and IETF.
9.7.1. Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC3965. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.

Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.
9.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table
Sender
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file
Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Required
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Strongly Include Message-ID
Recommended Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
Optional supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications
Receiver
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place
MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Required
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems
Optional Use other TIFF Profiles
475
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Required Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Strongly
Recommended Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
Optional facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
9.7.3. Definitions and Abbreviations
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

RFC Request For Comment
MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
DSN Delivery Status Notification
MDN Message Disposition Notification
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
IFD TIFF Image File Directory
Offramp Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/G4
Gateway facsimile terminals
Mailstore Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiver
Notice Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to
be determined by the device
RFC Reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

New RFC:
Proposed
Definitions ---> Draft
Standards
Standards
File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301 ---> RFC3949
Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Subtype
RFC2302 ---> RFC3302
Registration
Minimal PSTN address format for Internet Mail RFC2303 ---> RFC3139
Minimal FAX address format for Internet Mail RFC2304 ---> RFC3192
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305 ---> RFC3965
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile RFC2306 --- ---
Note:
The RFC2301-2306 had been defined by IETF as Proposed Standards for the Internet Fax, and had
been used Worldwide. These Proposed Standards have now been upgraded to Draft Standards and
New RFC numbers have been assigned, and these numbers will be used in near future by IETF rule.
.
476
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.7.4. File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC3949], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)
B/W Color
C (JPEG)
J F
(JBIG) (MMR, MR)
L (JPEG) M (MRC)
MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.
Class Color Coding Method Remarks

S B/W MH Internet Fax minimal set
F B/W MMR, MR Internet Fax full mode
J B/W JBIG Internet Fax mixed mode
C Color JPEG (lossy) Color minimal set
L Color JPEG (lossless, One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous
grayscale) tone color and grayscale images
M Color Mixed Raster Multiple coders and resolution within a page
Content
477
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.7.5. Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields Values

Bits Per Sample 1
Compression 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Fill Order Least significant bit first
Image Width 1728 (A-4)
Image Length N: total number of scan lines in image
New Sub File Type 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
Page Number N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
Photometric Interpretation 0: pixel value 1 means black
Resolution Unit 2: inch
Rows Per Strip Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
Samples Per Pixel 1
Strip Byte Counts Number of byte in TIFF strip
Strip Offsets Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
X Resolution 204, 200 (pixels/inch)
Y Resolution 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
Extensions Fields
T4 Options 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned
9.7.6. Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Domain
Service selector
(2) Sub address FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

Sub address Domain
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
(3) Others VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com
Global-phone Domain
Service selector
478
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Note:
For RFC3965, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
“MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”,
“RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.
9.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data
Header
First IFD Offset
Value Offset IFD (Page 0) Next IFD Offset
Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 0)
Value Offset IFD (Page 1) Next IFD Offset

Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 1)
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
479
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Message Header Contents
9.7.8. Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.
9.7.9. Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
480
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.8. Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure
your Panasonic Device SMTP Server

(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
Opening Session
[5 minutes] 220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready
HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
SMTP Command
MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
250 OK
[5 minutes]
RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes] 250 OK
DATA
250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

[2 minutes]
DATA BLOCK 1
DATA BLOCK
[3 minutes] DATA BLOCK 2
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
250 OK
[10 minutes]
QUIT
Closing
221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing

transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
481
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.8.1. Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>

QUIT:<CRLF>
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.
9.8.2. Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.
9.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.
9.8.4. Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.
9.8.5. Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
9.8.6. Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.
9.8.7. Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
9.8.8. Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
9.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
482
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES
211 System status or system help reply

220 <domain> Service ready
221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel
250 Requested mail action okay# completed
251 User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
421 <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing
452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
500 Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments
502 Command not implemented
503 Bad sequence of commands
504 Command parameter not implemented
550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
551 User not local; please try <forward-path>
552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
554 Transaction failed
483
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)
9.9.1. Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2. Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-
ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by

responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
484
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
9.9.3. POP3 Command Summary
Minimal POP3 Commands:
USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION state

PASS string
QUIT
STAT valid in the TRANSACTION state

LIST [msg]
RETR msg
DELE msg
NOOP
RSET
QUIT
Optional POP3 Commands:
APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state
TOP msg n valid in the TRANSACTION state

UIDL [msg]
POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.
From: To:
Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log
485
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device POP 3 Server
(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way
handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <1896.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
TRANSACTION
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
UPDATE
TCP 3 way Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <1898.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TRANSACTION TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
486
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command Sample Purpose

Ping Ping 192.168.1.30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat Netstat Active connection list
Netstat -nr Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
487
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START
Is the LAN connected Yes

to an ISP
No No Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No Is static IP address Yes
available ?
Not supported
Yes
DHCP Client? Is there a MX and A Record
Is G3 Gateway entry for your Panasonic
Yes Device in the DNS table ? No
function being used ?
Yes
No Yes Not supported
Is POP account Is POP account
Yes available ? available ?
No No
Is there a MX and A Record
entry for your Panasonic No Yes
Device in the DNS table ?
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters Set network parameters Set network parameters for
for POP receiving for SMTP receiving POP receiving and set G3
Gateway parameters for
your Panasonic Device
If not ready If not ready If not ready
Ask the Network Check the host name by Ask the Network
Administrator to setup using the DOS Administrator to setup a
a new POP account. command-line "ping" new POP account.
and "nslookup". Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Important Notice:
Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware of
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask
the Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changing
the configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.
Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.
488
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.

In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message Comments
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
489
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Server Client Server
(not selected) (selected)
Begins initialization
Determines DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines

configuration configuration
DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Commits configuration
DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown
DHCPRELEASE Discards lease
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers

when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server Client Server
Begins initialization
Locates DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Locates

configuration configuration
DHCPACK DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address
490
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/
REBOOT DHCPNAK/
DHCPACK -/Send DHCPDISCOVER
(not accepted)/
Restart
Send DHCPDECLINE
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
-/Send DHCPREQUES Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
REBOOTING Collect replies
Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING REBINDING DHCPNAK/

Halt network
DHCPOFFER/
Discard
DHCPACK/
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
timers T1, T2
T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
T1 expires/ DHCPACK/
Send DHCPREQUEST Record lease, set
to leasing server timers T1, T2
T1 expires/
Send RENEWING
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the client’s lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
State-transition diagram for DHCP clients
For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from the following URL:
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
491
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC3965]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)

(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Your Panasonic device supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)

A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server SMTP Server
DSN
DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server SMTP Server

MDN
Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.
492
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from the Options menu of Outlook Express.
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC3965] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 3949, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt
Capabilities
(1) MDN Request
Internet FAX (3) SMTP Server SMTP Server (2) Internet FAX
Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging
(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using following formula.
493
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
MDN Request Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <200202060018.12345@core.mega.edu>
From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <fax@core.mega.edu>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@huge.com
Disposition-Notification-To: <fax@core.mega.edu>
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
MESSAGE X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
HEADER Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com>
From: <fax@huge.com>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@core.mega.edu
In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
********** Read Receipt **********

BODY
TEXT
This message was opened by
’fax@huge.com’
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42
******************************************
ATTACHED Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com

FILE Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
494
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Processing Confirmation
The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.
For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
495
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that “http” & “html” are used to define & implement
the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they
can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-
Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.
Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.
An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.
A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:
<process-ID.clock@hostname>
where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.
496
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp> +OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD

<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
Possible Responses:
+OK
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) -ERR permission denied
Produces a 16 octet digest value of
c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including angle-
brackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
497
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
- Extended Feature
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
SMTP AUTH overview
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
Produces a Challenge BASE64 decoded string
<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft>
Genrates Digest parameter

Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
Fred 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
498
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
499
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature
Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as
SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.
Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an
SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask
the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured
as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the
DNS Server.
For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled
in the General Settings (For Key Operator).
Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's
Intranet.
Several new service extensions were assigned.

(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender Recipient
Establish TCP connection
TCP Port No. 25
220
EHLO
Checks for Capability
250 Response of CONNEG Capability contents sample
250-<june@panasonic.com> recipient ok
MAIL FROM:<pcc@panasonic.com> 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250 250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
RCPT TO:<june@panasonic.com> CONNEG 250- (&(dpi=200)
Request for Capability 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250 Capacity Exchange 250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview 250 (ua-media=stationery) )
500
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.18. Remote Entry
9.18.1. Remote Entry Overview
Remote entry is a feature enabling remote computers to send email to this machine and edit its
settings, such as its Internet parameters and the address book.
Email sent from remote computers to this machine edits Internet parameters as its local station
information, the address book, transaction journals and so on.
Note:
This feature works when “158 PC Remote Update” has been set to “Valid” in the Function Settings
(Fax/Email Settings). The factory setting of “158 PC Remote Update” is “Invalid”. For instructions on how
to modify the factory setting, refer to Fax/Email Settings of the Operating Instructions (For Function
Settings) on provided CDROM.
Command + Password
parameters
get abbr
jnl
PC Internet
Internet Fax
Command + Password -Internet Parameters

-Edit -Auto Dialer
parameters
set -Back up (Phone Book Dialer)
abbr -Transaction Journal
Update or Restore
-Internet Parameters
-Auto Dialer
(Phone Book Dialer)
PC Internet
Internet Fax
501
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.18.2. Commands That Can Be Used
The "Subject" field of an email message can be used as a command line field.
Enter a command here
The following commands can be used with this machine:
Comma nd e ntered in the "S ubje ct" fie ld Explanatio n
1 #set parameters (password)# Enter Internet parameters
2 #get parameters (password)# Retrieve Internet parameters
3 #set abbr (password)# Program an address book
4 #get abbr (password)# Retrieve the address book
5 #get jnl (password)# Retrieve the current transaction journal
set: Entry
get: Retrieval
parameters: Internet parameters
addr: Address book
jnl: Transaction journal
password: Remote password predefined as an entry item of local station
information about this machine.
(Example: 123456789)
Enter the password enclosed with parentheses “().”
Enter the command in single-byte characters, enclosed with # the sharp sign (#).
9.18.3. Internet Parameters That Can Be Entered and Retrieved

1. FROM selection (user name: up to 20 characters)
2. Default domain
3. Selected domain (up to 10 domains)
4. Relay domain (up to 10 domains can be programmed for relayed transmission)
5. Administrator email address
6. Relay password
7. Domain name (name of a relay domain, up to 30 characters)
8. Community name
9. Device name
10. Device location
Note:
1. All other parameters need to be programmed as local station information in the Function Settings.
2. The remote password that has been defined as an Internet parameter (local station information) for this
machine is used to enter and retrieve Internet parameters. (Ex: 1234567879)
502
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3. Execution of this command will overwrite the existing settings of Internet parameters.
As a precaution, you should retrieve the Internet parameters first as instructed later and back them up.
9.18.4. Retrieving Information
Remote entry enables you to retrieve Internet parameters, the address book and the transaction
journal.
To retrieve such information, send an email message (text mail) from a remote computer to this
machine with one of the commands specified below being entered in the “Subject” field of the email.
Command Information that can be retrieved
#get parameters (password)# Internet parameters (Local station information)
#get abbr (password)# Address book
#get jnl (password)# Transaction journal
Note:
1. The password that is entered here is the remote password that has been programmed as local station
information about this machine. Set the remote password for security assurance at all times.
2. Leave other fields, such as CC and Bcc, blank.
Internet Parameter Email Example
(1)
(1) Destination (To) : Email address of this machine

Sender (From) : This field is normally not displayed when a new email
message is created, but it contains the default email
address. This field is used to receive Internet parameters
and post error messages.
Subject (Subject) : Write #get parameters (password)#, #get addr
(password)# or #get jnl (password)# to retrieve data.
9.18.5. Handling the Transaction Journal

1. When the transaction journal is retrieved, convert it into a fixed-width font (for example, Terminal or
Courier) and align its data on the computer.
2. Another email message (“Internet Fax Return Receipt”) is sent to the email address of the
administrator preprogrammed as own information of this machine, to report the transmission of the
transaction journal.
503
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.18.6. Backing Up Internet Parameters and the Address Book Retrieved or Edited
Edit the Internet parameters or the address book that has been retrieved. Save the edited versions of data
as text (.txt) files as backup copies.
To edit information, follow the steps below:
1. Create a new message and fill out the To, From and Subject fields as follows:
Destination (To) : Email address of this machine

Sender (From) : This field is normally not displayed when a new email
message is created, but it contains the default email
address. This field is used to receive Internet parameters
and post error messages.
Subject (Subject) : Write one of the following for data entry:
#set parameters (password)#
#set abbr (password)#
2. Open the backup Internet Parameter text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly
created email message.
3. If there is header information in the message text, delete it to prevent possible errors.
The information that follows the “#” symbol may be deleted or retained, it will be ignored by this
machine anyway.
4. Edit a parameter and/or add additional Sender Name(s) or Domain Name(s).
5. When the editing is completed, select “Save As” from the “File” menu and save the file as an updated
file with “txt” extension as a backup.
6. Email the edited version of information to this machine.
504
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Internet Parameter Email Example
(1)
From: "Your Machine" <ifax2@panasonic.com>

Subject: Your Machine s SYSTEM P ARAMETER List
(8)
To: user1@panasonic.com
[Delete this header before sending the email.]
#---------------------------------------------
# Your Machine s SYSTEM P ARAMETER List
#
# STATION : PANASONIC
# EMAIL : ifax2@panasonic.com
# DATE/TIME : MMM-dd-yyyy 12:34
#---------------------------------------------
#---------------------------------------------
# Internet parameters
#
# IP ADDRESS :192.168.3.21
# SUBNET MASK :255.255.255.0
# SMTP SERVER :es1.panasonic.com
# DEF.ROUTER :192.168.3.22
# DNS SERVER :192.168.3.1
# 2 ND DNS SER VER :0.0.0.0
# POP SERVER :es1.panasonic.com
# POP USER NAME :ifax2
#---------------------------------------------
@sender (a) (b) (c)
01;PANASONIC;ifax@panasonic.com
02;PCC;ifax2@pcc.panasonic.com
(2)
@end
@select-domain
01;pcc.panasonic.com
(3)
02;panasonic.com
@end
@relay-domain
panasonic.com
pcc.panasonic.com (4)
sales.panasonic.com
panasonic.com
@end
@system
domain;panasonic.com (a)
manager;user1@panasonic.com (b) (5)
relay;"rlypass" (c)
remote;"1234567890" (d)
@end
@ldap
server;ldapsvr (a)
login;sonic777 (b) (6)
password;"sbste7" (c)
base;psonic789 (d)
@end
@mib
com_name1;commu1 (a)
com_name2;commu2 (b) (7)
device;Panasonic DP-XXXX (c)
location;devloca (d)
@end
(1) Destination (To) : Email address of this machine

Sender (From) : This field is normally not displayed when a new email message
is created, but it contains the default email address.
This field is used to receive Internet parameters and post error
messages.
Write #set parameters (password)# for data entry.
505
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(2) @sender to @end : @sender and @end: Enter sender (From) information between
@sender and @end in (2).
Enter up to 24 user names and email addresses for sender
selection.
Enter a semicolon (;) to delimit each block of data. If the
subsequent fields are blank, insert a semicolon (;) to delimit
each blank field.
Each set of sender selection entry data must be complete within
a single line.
The syntax is <Sender selection number>; <User name>;
<email address>.
(a) 01 to 24 : Sender selection number indication
(b) User name : (up to 20 alphanumeric characters)
(c) Email address : (up to 52 characters)
(3) @select-domain to @end : @select-domain to @end: Enter selected domain names
between @select-domain and @end in (3). Up to 10 selected
domain names can be programmed.
(4) @relay-domain to @end : @relay-domain to @end: Enter domain names between
@relaydomain and @end in (4).
Enter the names of up to 10 domains authorized to relay
transmissions on a LAN from Internet Fax to general Fax.
(5) @system to @end : @system to @end: Enter Internet parameters in place of
@system to @end in (5).
The following Internet parameters need to be programmed:
(a) Default domain (up to 30 characters)
The syntax is domain; <Default domain>
(b) Administrator email address (up to 52 characters)
The syntax is manager; <administrator email address>
(c) Relay password (up to 10 characters)
The syntax is relay; "<relay password>"
(d) Remote password (up to 10 characters)
The syntax is remote; "<remote password>"
The remote password must be enclosed with a double quote
(") as in the example.
(6) @ldap to@end : Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between
@ldap to @endblock. Register the following Internet
Parameters.
(a) LDAP Server Name (up to 60 characters).
The syntax is: server; <LDAP Server Name>
(b) LDAP Login Name (up to 40 characters).
The syntax is: login; <LDAP Login Name>
(c) LDAP Password (up to 10 characters).
The syntax is: password; "<LDAP Password>". Quotation
marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in
the example.
(d) LDAP Search Base (up to 60 characters).
The syntax is: base; <LDAP Search Base>
(7) @mib to @end : (a) Community name (1) (up to 32 characters)
The syntax is com_name1; < community name>.
(b) Community name (2) (up to 32 characters)
The syntax is com_name2; < community name>.
(c) device name (up to 32 characters)
The syntax is device; < device name>.
(d) Device location (up to 32 characters)
The syntax is location; <device location>.
506
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(8) The header needs to be deleted before email can be transmitted to this machine to
reprogram the Internet parameters.
(9) The information that follows the "#" symbol may be deleted or retained; it will be ignored by
this machine anyway.
Address Book Email Example
(1)
From: "Your Machine" <ifax2@panasonic.com>

Subject: Your Machine's SYSTEM PARAMETER List
(4)
To: user1@panasonic.com
[Delete this header before sending the email.]
#---------------------------------------------
# Your Machine's ADDRESS BOOK List
#
# STATION : PANASONIC
# EMAIL : ifax2@panasonic.com
# DATE/TIME : MMM-dd-yyyy 17:45
#---------------------------------------------
@begin (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
000;SALES DEPT;SALES DEPT;ifaxlink@ifax.panasonic.com;1111;5551234;
001;SP-200;SP-200;#0003;;;
(2)
002;SP-200IFAX;SP-200IFAX;ifax@panasonic.com;;;
003;LONDON;LONDON;ifax-rly@london.panasonic.co.uk;;;
004;ROME;ROME;#396111234;;; (g)
@end (a) (b) (c)
@program P01 "POP3" POP
user;POP3 (d)
password;"pop-pswd" (e)
delete;on (f) (3)
@end (g) (h) (i)
@program P02 "Group1;Group1" GROUP
001-002 (j)
@end
(1) To : Your machine's email address.

From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email
message(s). It is your default email address (email application),
for retrieving the Auto Dialer (Address Book Dialing) data and
for error message notification.
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email
program.)
Subject : To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#
(2) @sender to @end : Defines the Auto Dialer (Address Book Dialing) to be set in
section (2) @begin to @end block.
Edit, Delete or Register the information.
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining
fields are to remain blank, insert a semi-colon (;) for each blank
field)
The data string for each station should be defined within a
single line.
The syntax is: <Entry-number>;<Station-name>;<Keyname>;
<Station-address>;<Routing-subaddress>;<Routing-idnumber>
507
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(a) Entry-number : One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys
to be programmed 000 to 199: Indicates
Address Book entries 000 to 199 (up to
200 stations)
(b) Station-name : Name of the station being programmed
(up to 15 alpha-numeric characters)
(c) Key-name : Name of the key being programmed (up
to 15 alpha-numeric characters)
(d) Station-address: email address or telephone number of
the station being programmed
(e) Routing-subaddress : sub-address to be used for routing
(up to 20-digit)
(f) Routing-id-number : TSI to be used for routing (up to 20-digit)
(g) The End Receiving Station’s telephone number is entered
after the hash sign (#).
(3) @select-domain to @end : Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP
Access Key to be set in section (3) between @program to
@end block.
Edit, Delete or Register the information.
(a) Program Key : P01 - P12
(b) Station-name : Name of the station as a POP key.
(c) POP : The syntax used to set the Program Key
as a POP Access Key.
(d) POP User-name : Name of the POP user account (up to 40
alpha-numeric characters)
(e) POP Password : POP Password (up to 10 alpha-numeric
characters)
(f) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after
retrieving the emails.
(g) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being
programmed (up to 15 alpha-numeric characters).
(h) Key-name: Name of the key being programmed (up to 15
alpha-numeric characters).
(i) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group
Key
(j) Entry-number: Address Book entries 000 to 199 (up to 200
stations)
(4) This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of
Auto Dialer (Address Book Dialing).The information following the “#” sign is ignored by your
machine, therefore, you can leave it as is or delete it if you wish.
Note:
1. If a POP user account is programmed into the P1 to P12 program keys, the data programmed for this
key cannot be deleted, even when the delete command is specified.
2. The email address and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when:
a. Address book (Auto Dialer) Number has been used for communication reservation.
b. Received documents are stored in the image data memory of the machine.
c. While the machine is communicating or printing.
3. When the email address and telephone number are programmed via email, a program result email is
sent back.
4. Some email applications automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the number of
characters in a line exceed a specific number. Turn “Off” the automatic line feed, or define the number
of characters per line to prevent a line feed, or the data will be ignored.
508
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.18.7. Deleting the Entire Address Book
Enter the following command as email text to clear the address book on this machine completely:
@command
delete
@end
This command can be inserted before the @begin to @end block to clear the address book entirety
and then reconfigure it with new data.
If this method is used, the message "The "Overwrite Warning" message is not displayed in the email
that is returned from this machine.
To delete the entire data in the address book, enter the following command on the line in the "Subject"
field in the email.
#set abbr (password)#: This password is a remote password preprogrammed as local

station information about this machine.
Before transmitting this command, receive data on your
computer and back it up as instructed in the earlier sections of this chapter
Note:
The execution of “delete” will clear the address book, resetting it to its factory setting.
509
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
9.19. Error Messages Generated during Remote Entry
If errors occur during remote entry in the address book or program dialing, error messages are Emailed
from this machine to the sending station.
9.19.1. Error Messages
If errors occur during remote entry in the address book or program dialing, the following error
messages are Emailed from this machine to the sending station:
No. Error message Probable cause and recommended action
1 554 Data transfer error (broken header) Process was aborted due to an error occurring while encoding
the header or sub-header. Resend.
2 554 Data transfer error (broken data) Process was aborted due to an error occurring while encoding
data. Resend.
3 554 Data transfer error (Fax module) A data transfer error occurred on the Fax module while
communicating with the LAN module. Resend.
4 554 MIME attachment not supported An unsupported MIME file attachment was transmitted. Resend
(message/file) the document with text data alone.
5 554 MIME format not supported An unsupported MIME type was transmitted. Resend the
document with text data alone.
6 554 Fax relay permission denied The name of the domain requesting relay is not preprogrammed.
7 554 Relay address unknown The telephone number of the final receiving station requesting
relay is unknown.
8 554 Memory fully (Fax module) Fax memory is full. Resend later.
9 554 Data transfer error This error is not on the list. Resend later.
9.19.2. Error Messages on Remote Entry Failure

If errors occur during remote entry in the address book or program dialing, the following error
messages are Emailed from this machine to the sending station:
1 There is an error in the @command block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@command "
block. Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.
2 The @begin command is missing. The block start command "@begin" is missing in the "@begin"
block. Resend with the addition of an "@begin" command.
3 There is an error in the @begin block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@begin" block.
Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.
4 There is an error in the @system block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@system "
block.
5 There is an error in the @sender block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@sender "
block.
6 There is an error in the @domain block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@domain"
510
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
7 There is an error in the @program block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@program "
8 The "@system " command is missing. The system block start command "@system " is missing in the
"@system " block. Resend with the addition of an "@system "
command.
9 Remote retry is disabled because Fax is If a Fax reservation session has been reserved, let the Fax
in operation. operation finish before resending the document.
Check the reservation report and resend in a reservation-free
condition.
10 Remote entry password check error Correct the password and resend.
11 Remote entry is not permitted. Set "158PC Remote Update "to "VALID" in the Function Settings
(Fax/Email Settings> Fax Parameters).
12 Format Error:< error line> The input format is invalid, or it is incomplete because each set of
destination selection entry data is not complete within a single line.
13 Warning: <error line> The input format is invalid, or the input character string exceeds
the maximum allowable character length. Fix and resend.
14 Data is too long. The character length of the station name, domain name, sender
name, program name or the like is too long. Fix the character
length and resend.
15 There is an error in the @List block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@list" block.
Resend with the addition of an "@end" command.
16 There is an error in the @select-domain The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@ select-
block. domain" block. Resend with the addition of an "@end" command.
17 The following data has been overwritten: This error message is sent to alert you that the data has been
<overwritten data) > overwritten.
18 Direct incoming dialing data is not The dialing number corresponding to the modem direct inward
preprogrammed:< error line) > dialing failed to preprogram.
Verify the dialing setting of the station.
511
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
memo
512
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
DCB
APFHT3
APFHT1
APFHT2
ADF
CN552
Paper Transport nSTRM_B
(6503)
LPHT1
+5VP
CN143
CN142
1 6
11 15 1 (6602) Unit Motor (7208) nSTRM_AB
+5V 14 1 2 5
10 1 STR
HDD (4018)
+24VM
CN142
GND +24VM_2
9
ARR3SN
2 Registration
Sensor 3
5 15 4 6 CST4b
1 Paper Tray
TRFMOT_A
6 16
+24VM_1
1
3
+24VM
4
M Motor
Power Cord
GND 5 +24VM 3
3 12 5 GND 2 4
8 Sensor 2 5 15 (3706)
CN654
CN613
2
CN608
+5V nSTRM_BB
CNPHD1
CNHT10
CN143
+5V 4 5 8 +5V (Tray4) TRFMOT_A* PGND_2 5 2
CNHT9
M
CNHT5
7 1 11 8 4 3 4 3 nSTRM_A
CNHT4
GND 14
CNHT8
5VP ARR2SN 3 8 GND_3 TRFMOT_B PGND_1 6 1 0.9A
2 Registration CST4a
1
2
1
2
6 7 3 4
1
2
1
2
1 6 GND 1 6 3 13
1
2
CN141
1 Paper Tray
CN653
Sensor 2
DCC (6506)
Original 10 +24VM
Option Finisher
ORGSN 2 IPTXD +5V
MOT Driver (6504)

GND 8 2 GND
2 5 5 3 12V 5 4 2 2 Sensor 1 2 12 5
Sensor GND 5 1 13 3 GND_2 +5V TRFMOT_B* GND FTRM_B
+5V 4 (Tray4) 1 6
CN141
3 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 1 3 1 11 6
CNHT2
+5V ADF Paper 1 5 IPRXD FTRM_AB
CN529
DXPSN 1 MOTLT 2 5
CN509
3 3 2 Pass 3 CNSHD1 3 2 10 7
FTR and LSU
CNHT7
1
Connector
1
2
3 +5V +24VM
Registration ARR1SN GND Sensor nFIN_SNS nHNSDOSN MOTS1CLK 3
2 2 2 3 1 4 Paper 13 9 8 4
M
1
2
3
Sensor 1 GND
7 10 1 14 1 1
GND +24VM Shutter
3 1 1
F 8 18
Transport
Cover Open 2 GND
13 2 2 12
8
nRSTMD
9
4
FTRM_BB
3
Motor
+5VD
CST4
+24V
GND
GND
LDHNSDO +24VM nMOTENB 5 2
CN65
11
CN66
GND_1 Sensor 3 3 10
17 12 3 7 FTRM_A (3706)
CNHT1
CNHT6
+5V 2 2 GND nLEFTOUTSN +24VM 1
2 5 10 MOTSIOUT 6
ADF pFINI_POW 4 11
3
16 11 4
1
2
6
1
2
6 0.9A
4
1
3
CN657
2
HDD 40P
1
Outer 1
CN655
OPDSN Cover 1 1 +24V PGND nFUMCLK
CN611
3 1 1 15 14 Exit GND 5 9 12
5 2 2 10 5 5
CN508
CN74 CN55
CN612
Open GND PGND nFUM_BB
GND Sensor LDLEFTOUT nFTRMCLK 7 11
2 4 3 Sensor 1 6 14 13 3 3 9 6 6 8 4 13
Clutch 1 (824)
CN550
+5VP NP +24VM
E
HNSUCL
WHITE
PESN4 TRUSIDO nSTRMCLK
BLACK
Paper Transport 8 9
Registration
10
1 1
LVS2 2 Sensor 7
N
13 7
3
Fuser
L
2 12 1 8 7 14
L
3
CN553
PFCL +5V Unit Roller +24VM TRUSICLK nFUM_B
+5V (Tray4) nRESEVCLK
9 9
M
C
PGND 2 6 7
2 2 Paper 11 1 2 8 8 15
Motor
L
3 GND 12 Clutch (7213) 7 2 nFUM_AB
2
24VO1 Feed +24V (6605) GND KYUUIN TRUSIDI FUMREF
C
8 3 5 10 5
L 3 Upper
CN54
1 1 5 Paper Exit 9 16
1
(6116)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 GND 11 10 1 6 9 +24VM
Clutch pLPOW1 CN173 CN172 Limit TRULT
G1
7 4 CNN GND Guide +24VM 11 3
CN606
L
ACLRLB 2 2 4
CN171
(910)
14 5 +24V
CN64 SWN2 10 9 Sensor 2 5 10 10
CN52
nFUM_A
CN6
SW4
Solenoid
S
1 LBSN4 TRULD
N
RRCL1
CN656
E
6
INLET
+5V +5VD 5 6 12 1
CN176
Solenoid (621) Clutch 2 (801)
2 4 6 4 2 9 8 1 (Tray4) (7115) FUKKYU 11 3 0.9A
CN131
L
13 1 Original +24V 3 4 11
LAN I/F
SWN1
CN69
Registration
TRUMCLK
RLB
24VO1 ORSSN4 CPPSN4
3
2
1
GND 5
C C
6 ACNRLB 4 3 1 8 7 3 Paper nHNSPPSN 2

1 3 12 2 Size 7 PGND 2 SWL2 Paper 1 3 12 12
N
CN652
E
Path nTRUENB
L
+5V
RRCL2 GND GND
CN175 3 2
N
3 Sensor 4 4 7 2 GND 1
L
2 2 11 8 7 6 2 Sensor Path 13
N 2 2 13
L
PGND SWL1
24VO1 +5V GND 3 8 1 1 1 +5V Sensor LDHNSPP
1 (Tray4)
2
1
1 1 10 1 9 6 5 3 1
ORSSN3 Original +2.5V 2
pLPOW1
9 CNL PUSOL4 Pickup Roller CNHUC
1
9 2 Size 10 5 4 2
JW1
JW2
nLPOW2 Solenoid
L
ADF Pinch ADF Inverting
PFCL4
TRU
DXSL2 GND
3 Sensor 3 +2.5V 1 10
(6604)
11 +24VF (Tray4) (1917)
1
3 7 8 4 3 1 12
CN532
24VO1 +5V 2 +24VM +5V_2
L
2 6 1 PGND 2 2 Paper Feed 1
L
7 3
CN660
1 8
ACN
ACL
S
N
22
L
DXSL1 Original 1 +24VM
C
ORSSN2 Roller Clutch GND_2
Roller
1 5 6 2 Size PGND 2 7 2 1 1 2
*2
(Tray4) (1947) 21
GND 8 BTMDIR
3 Sensor 2 3
CN7
4 5 6 37 1
1
PGND 3 20
7
3
+5V nBTMRDY
4 Belt
4 1 Original 24V 4 5
CN2 5 36 19
COIL
CN702
PPSOL ORSSN1 6 BTMGAIN Motor
Solenoid
CN8
2 2 Size 4 5
CN604
2 3 24V 5 4 35 18
L
24VO1 BTMCLK
GND
3 Sensor 1
5 +5V_HOME LUM4-2
Lift Motor
_1+5V_2
M (5905)
(615)
1 1 2 3 3 2 16 6
JW1
JW2
GND 6 1 19 1 17
4 nHOMESN LUM4-1 M (Tray4) (2001)
GND_1 nBTMENB
1 2 2
L 2 18 1 2 15 7
CN134
GND 7 +24VM_2 16 PGND_4
GND_6
1
+5V
5 13
CNADF 3
5V 8 1 1 1 3 17 3 14 15
8
CN658
+24VM_1 PGND_3
Exit PFOSN G6 G5 2 4 Optional Paper STR Solenoid (2533) 9
NFL (4116)
2 4 12 GND 5VP GND N N 16 38 11 4 13 14 24
CN1
ACN TH4B +24VM PGND_2 +24VM_4
CN133
Sensor GND 1 4 +5V_2
CN511
4
Feed Motor (6808)
CN4
3 3 11 28 3 2 1 17 34 14 1 1 5 12 10 23
CN53
GND 3 10 1
FROM8
13
L
Therm4 TH4A +24VM_3
Solenoid
nSTRKPSOL PGND_1
1.5A GND_2
S
CN96
STPSL GND 3 3 2 +5V 11
CN708
2 2 10 27 9 2 18 33 2 2 9 6 11 22 2
Stamp
4 +3.3V ACL 13 1 12
CN92
TH3B
L
(725)
24VO1 AORGSN 2 2 SGND ADUCL2 ADUSIOUT +5V_1 OPC2DIR

S
60P
1 1 9 26 1 1 1 19 32 ADU Roller 10 3
CN400
8 3
CN406
7 21
L
2 1 8 11
CN522
+3.3V TH3A 12 1
Therm3
+5VP
L 24VM ADUSICLK GND_1 nOPC2RDY
C
1 1 31 Clutch 2
8 25 2
L 4 20 2
CN132
7
Switch 2 (4209)
7 3 8 9 10 2 20 4
Cover Interlock
+5V 100V_200V TH2B ADUSIIN OPC2GAIN
SBCL2 ACL OQMLK (2731) nADUDRSN
CN662
1A 21 30 Drum
Inverting
7 7 24 1 1 1 6 9 3 5
Clutch 2
2 6 1 7 11 4 1 8 9 19
Right Lower
Therm2
L
+5V GND TH2A Right Cover ADULT OPC2CLK

(1010)
CN602
2A GAIN GND nDEV1RDY
M Motor 2
Roller
8 6 23 5 2 6 3 22 29 10 5 Open 2 5 10 7 8 4 18 6
JW5
JW6
JW3
JW4
CN520
ACN
CN67
24VO1 PGND GND
M ADULD
C
GND TH1B OQMCLK Sensor LDADUDR DEV1GAIN nOPC2ENB

1B (5901)
CN5
(4117)
2
CN659
1 4 5 22 4 1 15 3 5 1 23 28 9 6 3 4 11 6 7 5 17 7
SBCL1 PGND GND 4
USB 4 +5V
N Therm1 TH1A OQMCT nPF1UPERSN DEV1CLK
M
PGND_4
CN353
2B nADUPP2SN 5
FXB (6603)
6 4 21 3 4 2 27 8
Inverting
2 3 2 14 3 4 24 8 7 3 12 6 16
Clutch 1
1 6
L
24VO1 SCNTXD 2 2 +5V nIHCSN2 PGND Paper Path GND nADUENB nDEV1ENB PGND_3
(1010)
Roller
1 3 20 2 3 13 1 1 5 3 1 25 26 7 8 Sensor 2 2 13 4 5 7 15 9
24VO1
C C
24VO1 SCNRXD +5VLSU GND PGND LDADUPP2 nRRLEDON PGND_2 +24VM_4

PGND IH Core (ADU2)
White
White
1
Black
Black
3 2 19 1 4 12 6 2 2 26 25 6 9 3 1 14 3 4 8 14 10
1 6
LVPS
SDCL GND IICSCL +24NV +5VP Sensor 2 LDIHC2 +24VM pPRESSN PGND_1 +24VM_3
3
Clutch
5 7 1 27 15 2 11
Roller
2 1 18 5 11 24 10 3 9 13
L
18 3
(802)
2 5 +24VM
1.4A
pOHPSN
1.5A
CN507
24VO1 AFDIN IICSDA PGND nIHCSN1 ADUCL1 +24VM_2
Exit
ADU Roller
CNP709
GND 12
CN51
CN352
CN64
1 2 6 16 17 6 10 6 6 1 28 23 2 11 1 5 16 1 2 10
L
3 4
CN405 CN403 CN404

JW3
Clutch 1 +24VM_1
JW4
PGND GND 24VM
SW1JW5
JW6
CN651
AFLD OQRRCL
Fuser
nPRGDWN
CN519
IH Core
C
+3.3V 2 29 22
CN3
5
5 15 16 7 9 5 5 2 2 4 1 11
2A 12
L
AFCLK 4 3 Sensor 1 LDIHC1 +24V (2313)
nPRST PGND nADUPP1SN +5V_1
3
C
14 4 14 15 8 8 GND 4 4 30 21 4 1 3 11 1
5 2 1
CN502
MMBB AFLTH nSREQ +24NV Paper Path GND_1
1 13 3 13 14 9 7 +5V 3 3 20 1 Optional Intermediate Sensor 2
GND
2 Developer 10 2
6 1
Motor (926)
24VO1 AFENB pSENTIM +24NV nPRSN2 LDADUPP1 Motor 1 (5904)
CN603
Roller Clutch (6813) (ADU1)
ADF Feed
3 12 2 12 13 10 6 2 2 1 15 3 1 9 3
MMB AFDOUT nVEN +24NV Fuser Pressure 1 GND nDEV2RDY
11 1 2 2 LUM3-2 8
5 11 12 11 5 CNSPC 1 1 Release 14 4
MM MMAB ADFSN nSACK LDPR2
2
M PGND
CN356
Sensor 2 LUM3-1 DEV2GAIN
CST (6601)
3
7 10 12 17 11 12 4 2 2 GND 2 3 13 1 1 7 5
24VO1 pVREQ Developer
ADFRST SPK FUROTSN2
Right Cover
FM
nMEXFRDY DEV2CLK
M
CN661
9 9 11 10 10 13 3 1 1 1 1 4 12 2 6 6
11
MMA
8 10
ARRSN1
14
24VS
2
Fuser Roller
Rotating 2 5
GND
11
Lift Motor Fan (4801) nMEXFAN
3 5
nDEV2ENB
7 Motor 2
CN650
9 9 CNSP LDFURT2 (Tray3) (2001) PGND_2 (5902)

ADF Paper Feed
PMBB ADXSN 15 nORGSEN Encoder 2 3 6 4
CN512
1 7 9 8 8 1 10 4 8
+5VSW
(6402)
24VO1 ARRSN2 FUROTSN1 PGND_1
3 6 3 1 7 9 LDHFPE 9
8 7 7 Fuser Roller 11
LDFUEX
1 3 Sheet 3
Motor (925)
PMB ARRCNT GND OQDOSN GND +24VM_2

CN707
5 5 7 6 6 2 Rotating 2 8 8 10 1 1 3 1 2 2 Bypass 2 10
+5VSW
PM LDFURT1 GND Option Feed GND
2A
CN410
PMAB ARVCL2 Encoder 1 nHFPESN +24VM_1
1 3 9 2 2 Cover Open 2 2 1 NP Sensor 1 11
Switch 2 (4209)
7 4 6 5 5 7 9 3
Cover Interlock
24VO1 ACN nPRSN1 +5V nFUEXSN nHFSOL
ARVCL1 3 Sensor Paper Feed Roller
EC
1 3 4
9 3 5 4 4 GND
DRSW1 DRSW2 DRSW3
2A 1 10 6 8 3 2 1
Right Upper
Fuser Pressure GND Clutch (Sheet
L
20 3 ACL CST3b
PMA APMCLK ADF +24VM nSTACKFULSN
CN607
S
11 2 4 3 3 PCSSN 1A Release 2 11 5 7 1 5 1 Bypass) (3021) 17 2 3
AC(N) Paper Tray 2way Inverting
Open GYAKUTENCL
CN1
AMMCLK 19 2 Sensor 1 LDPR1 GND +24VM GND_3 Inner Upper
1 2 2B 3 12 2 6 Pickup Roller
L
3 2 +5V 2 4 6 Sensor 2 Roller Clutch 1 2 16 3 2
L
GND 1 Sensor AC(L) nFUINSN +5V 10 Limit Sensor
C C
24V
C
18 nZCROS 1B (Tray3) (2731) nHFCL Solenoid (Sheet LDSTACKFUL
2 1 1 GND 14 12 1 1 13 3 5 3 2 9 7 1 Bypass) (3018) 15 4 1
17 3 GND CST3a 2way Ordinary SEITENCL
1 PANSN ADF IHADO Fuser Enter 2 14 1 14
L
15 11 2 4 1 8
Angle Sensor Paper Tray Roller Clutch 24V SFULC
(1327)
16 2 LDFUIN GND
CN2 CN4
IH_ROTSN2
CN401
+5V 16 LCOIL 3 15 1 3 2 Sensor 1 (2731) 2 7 1 5 13
10
(1325)
Sensor
SCN (6502)
1 +5V FUKKYU GND
COIL
15 nIHRELAY
3 (Tray3)
CN411 CN407
ADU Paper RR/OHPSN
CN6
17 16 2 1 2 4 12
CN710
GND 9 6
TS1 TS2
CN506
IHADIN Guide +24VM nOHPSN +5V
L
14 3 Home
FRM
CN14
PCB
CN508
18 1 2 3 (2110)
INV
HPSN 8 COM S Solenoid 5 3 11 1
S
13 2 Position nIHADCK (23212)
KYUUIN nRRSN GND_1
Sensor (3820)
Sensor (3821)
Sensor (3820)
Sensor (3819)
Tenperature &
+5V 19 7 3 4 2 10
CN7
4
Touch
2
Sensor
CN2
OHP Film Sensor

Panel
1 nIHADCS L nADUPP0SN +5V_RR
SN
12 THSTT2 5 OPC1DIR
2
20 1
LCD
Density &
Density &
17 9
CST3
Deviation
Deviation
Deviation
GND 6 4 1 3 3
Humidity
Paper Path GND
(1326) 11 3 Paper pIHENB nOPC1RDY
1
+5V 21 Sensor 2 2 8
Color
Color
Color
5 3 15 16 4
10 2 Size IHPWR GND (ADU0) LDADUPP0 OPC1GAIN
CN1
1
2
3
22 13 14 3 1 7
(4020)
ORSIZ5
Sensor 3 4 2 1 15 14 5
9 1 +5V +5V GND LDPCR OPC1CLK Drum
GND 23 1
THSTT1 2 12 13 14 1 3 6
M
2
1
5
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
3 13 3 6
CN402
8 3 Paper GND APFMCLK PESN3 NP LDINR GND Feed Cover 2 nOPC1ENB Motor 1
+5V 24 3 11 12 13 12 2 Sensor 3 1 2 2 5 7
2 Size 2 Open Sensor
7 GND APFSIIN Inner Exit GND nPCRSN PGND_2 (5903)
+24V
11
10
12
11
10
GND
+5V (Tray3)
Vcnt
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
F 25 2 3 1
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
4 4
IH
ORSIZ4 1 10 11 12 8
Sensor 2 Sensor
CN601
1 APFLD 11 1 nINRSN
6 PGND_1
CN525
CREG_OT_M
CREG_LD_M
CREG_OT_R
CREG_LD_R
26 GND 1
CREG_OT_L
3
CREG_LD_L
5 9 9
CDSN_COL
Upper 3
nSHTSOL
GND 10
CN7
11 10 3
TEMPSN
CN605
nSHTSN
5 APFSICLK
HUMSN
5 +24VM_2
DCS_M
GND
LDSHT
Limit 4
+24VF
VO2R
2
17
18
19
20
+5V 6 9
VO2L
8 10
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
GND
GND
GND
GND
2
GND
10 Sensor Paper Feed
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
4 4 for Coin Vendor APFLT +24VM +24VM_1
Paper LBSN3
L
ORSIZ3 7 7 8 (Tray3) 1 2 Roller Clutch 1 11
CN1 CN7 CN2 3 3 Size nAPFENB
8 9 1 nHFSSN3 nPFCL1
1.5A
C
nDISPOFF ORSIZ2 CPPSN3 1 2 1 (Tray1) (1947) 12
27
28
25
26
10
6 Paper
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
8 7 8 7 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20 20 2 2 Sensor 1 3 GND nPFSOL1
GND ORSIZ1 9
APFSIOUT 5 +5V Path Sheet Bypass 3 2 Pickup Roller
6 Size Sensor 3 2 11
CN531 CN521 7 6 2
L
19 19 1 1 PGND_1_ Sensor LDHFS3 +24VM Solenoid
S
GND +5V 3 4 1
10 4 5 6 5 1 (Tray3) 10 (Tray1) (1917) +5V
18 18 PGND_2 nHFLSN +5V 10 1
PUSOL3
CN409
GND 11 3 4 5 Pickup Roller 9 5 1 Paper GND_1
GND_PNL3 17 17 +24VM_1 4 2 Sheet Bypass 1
LMA Solenoid GND nPPSN1 Path 9 2
L
1 18 TXCLK+ 1 1 12 2 PFCL3 8 6 2
S
3 Size Length 2
CN408
4 3 (Tray3) (1917) Sensor
BZCLK 16 16 24VS
CN510 CN530 +24VM_2
+24VM
1
Sensor
LDHFL GND 3
CN703
2 17 TXCLK- 2 3 13 1 2 3 7 7 3 (Tray1) nPFMRDY

3 2
CN9
2 Paper Feed
L
BZ+ 15 15 LMAB +24VM nHFSSN2 +5V 8 4
15
14
13
12
11
M 10
16 5 Scanning Roller Clutch Upper
7
3
2
3
4
5
6
GND 8
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
C
3 CNAPFC 1 1 1 PFMGAIN
CN505
2 1 1
nSLPKY_PNL3 14 14 LMB Motor (Tray3) (1947) Sheet Bypass 2 GND nULSN1 Limit 7 5 Paper
nIHDFRDY
4 GND 7 1 5 9 2 PFMCLK
nPRFRDY
15 4
nCCTCNT
nTBFRDY
pUDOPSN
nIHDFCNT
Sensor
pLDOPSN
+24VF_2
+24VF_1
nPRFCNT
Feed
PGND_3
PGND_2
PGND_1
nTBFCNT
nLEDSLP 13 13 24VS (1713) Size Sensor 2 LDHFS2 GND 6
CN280
6
GND_2
GND_1
5 14 TXOUT2+ 5 9 3 4 10 3 (Tray1) nPFMENB

M
..... 120/220-240 VAC Line
12 12 +5V 5 7 Motor
+5V
+5VP_PNL3 LMBB nHFSSN1
CN59
11
CN8
CN11
1 11
nKCCNT
6 13 TXOUT2- 6 80 3 1 PGND_2
(Tray2) (1947)
(Tray2) (1917)
1 NP
(6126)
Pickup Roller
+24VM
11
Roller Clutch
LED2 11 GND nPESN1 4 8
nKCS
Paper Feed
12 Sheet Bypass 2 12 2 Sensor PGND_1
GND
GND 2 2
1
3
2
4
7
1
2
79
1
2
+5V_PNL3 10 10 Size Sensor 1 LDFHS1 GND (Tray1) 3 9

..... +3.3 VDC Line
Solenoid
Cover Detection
Cover Detection
1
13 3
..... +24 VDC Line
..... +12 VDC Line
8 11 GND 78 3 3 1 +24VM_2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
..... +5 VDC Line
Switch (4202)
Switch (4202)
LED3 9 9 2 10
CST2
Right Upper
Right Lower
10 TXOUT1+ 77
IPC PCB
6
5
1
2
3
4
9 4 +24VM_1
2.2A
CN535
11
F
KIN0 8 8 1
ADU
CARD
10 76 5
(1332)
READ
TXOUT1-
FM
FM
FM
7 7
(6501)
Key Counter
LED4
CN22
9
11 8 GND 40 Bottle Motor
CN501
SCN4_PNL3 6 6 C S
CN61
12 7 GND 39 BK (5302)
KEY
3 Paper Tray
3 Paper Tray
LED5 5 5 L nBTM_K
2 Sensor 1
2 Sensor 2
38
1
13 6 TXOUT0+
Fan (4008)
Sensor
Sensor
INVERTER
CT
Roller Fan
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Presssure
(Tray2)
(Tray2)
(Tray2)
(Tray2)
(Tray2)
+24VM_4
PNL3
SCN3_PNL3 4
Upper
4
Paper
IH Driver
4 76 37
Limit
14 5 TXOUT0-
Path
5 2
(4801)
NP
LED1 3 3
CN1
pIHFCNT
(1612)
CN2
15 4 +3.3V EXP LAMP 3

4 77 35 1
LED8 2 2 nIHRDY IH Fan
16 3 +3.3V (1615) 2 78
FM
3
2
1
3
2
1
34
1
1
2
C C
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
3 Paper Tray
3 Paper Tray
SCN2_PNL3 1 1 1 PGND (4804)
2 Sensor 1
2 Sensor 2
17 2 SUBSW 2 79 33 3
1
2
1
2
(Tray1)
(Tray1)
1
LSU
SCN1_PNL3 pFAXRING 15
18 1 2 14 1 80 (4303) 36 nSTRSN2
nWAKE CN2 CN1 CN5 L L 32 1
*2: Europe Specification Only
GND_8
*1: Japan Specification Only
3 13 STR Cam
nVCNTON 31 2
10
11
12
Sensor 2
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
14
10
11
12
13
4
1
2
8
7
6
5
12
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
LDSTR2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
Memory
Memory
Memory
nLPOW1 30
CN76
CN79
CN75
5 11 nSTRSN1
2
1
2
1
GND_PNL2 nSLPKY
LSUDAOUT
nHSYNC_K
nHSYNC_Y
29 1
nCSTSN1a
nCSTSN1b
nCSTSN2a
nCSTSN2b
+5VLSU_1
+5VLSU_2
LSUDACK
6
LSUDALD
1 15 10 GND_7
nDATA_M
CN58
nDATA_C
LDCST1a
LDCST1b
LDCST2a
LDCST2b
nPFSOL2
nDATA_Y
nDATA_K
nPMCNT
STR Cam
CN250
PGND_1
SPEED1
SPEED0
nLDENB
DATA_M
nPCRCL
nJAMSN
pJDRSN
DATA_C
GAIN_K
GAIN_Y
nPPSN2
nPESN2
DATA_Y
DATA_K
nULSN2
nPMRDY
KIN3 nLPOW2
nMO_M
nPFCL2
nMO_C
PMCLK
2
nMO_K
nMO_Y
+24VM
GND_4
GND_3
GND_2
GND_1
nSH_M
GND_1
GND_2
28
nSH_C
nSH_K
nSH_Y
nRRCL
LDJAM
LDJDR
+24VM
+24VM
+24VM
+24VF
2 14 7 9 LDSTR1 Sensor 1
72P
72P
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
3
+5V
+5V
+5V
LED0 nPNLRST
72P
CN5
27
3 13 8 8 nFTRSN2
KIN4 PNLTXD 26 1
9
96
4 12 7
14
10
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
GND_6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
4
3
2
1
KIN5 PNLRXD 25 2 FTR Cam
5 11 10 6 Sensor 2
CN517 CN515 CN526 CN527 CN12 LDFTR2
CN71
CN77
CN516 CN524
CN78
DF11-8P
KIN6 +5V 3
24
Card
6 10 11 5
68P
SCN5_PNL2 nFTRSN1
KEY
GND
PNL2 (1331)
23 1
SD
7 9 12 4
CN4
GND_5 FTR Cam

SCN4_PNL2 +5VP 22 2
8 8 13 3 Sensor 1
9
SCN3_PNL2
7 14
GND
2
CN513 CN514 CN504 CN523 CN528 CN518 21
LDFTR1
3
LED7 +24V
12
11
10
31
32
33
34
35
36
26
27
22
23
24
25
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
CN503
31
32
33
34
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
28
29
30
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED PARTS ARE USED FOR
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
1
2
SCN2_PNL2
CN70
11 5 19
Card
nOPCNEW_M
nOPCNEW_C
nERSLED_M
nOPCNEW_Y
nOPCNEW_K
nNHVEN_YM
SCLKHV_YM
LD_ERS_M1
LD_ERS_M2
nERSLED_C
nLSUTFRDY
nERSLED_Y
nERSLED_K
SCLKHV_CK
LD_ERS_C1
1 LD_ERS_C2
CN94 CN66
LD_ERS_Y1
LD_ERS_Y2
LD_ERS_K1
LD_ERS_K2
PNL1 (6505)
D_CLK_nYM
BLSN_K
D_CLK_nCK
FTRMON_M
MARK IN THE SCHEMATIC.
FTRMON_C
SCN1_PNL2
FTRMON_Y
FTRMON_K
nLSUTFCNT
C_CLK_YM
D_CLK_YM
nHVEN_CK
SCLKHV_T
nIHCM_AB
nIHCM_BB
C_CLK_CK
D_CLK_CK
LDOPC_M
nWTBSN
LDOPC_C
LDOPC_Y
LDOPC_K
SDHV_CD
nTCT_COL
LDHV_YM
SDHV_CK
SDHV_CK
TDCREF_M
4 18
TDCREF_C
LDHV_CK
TDCREF_Y
TDCREF_K
nHVEN_T
nIHCM_A
nIHCM_B
+24VM_1
+24VM_2
pFDOPSN
+24VM_2
12
SD
STRMON
TDCS_M
WHEN SERVICING, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY
+24VF_1
+24VF_2
+24VF_3
+24VF_4
9P
+24VF_1
LDWTB
1 Bottle Lock
TDCS_C
TDCS_Y
TDCS_K
nTCT_BK
SDHV_T
CN57 CN56
LDHV_T
nSTRLK
GND_4
TDCDT_M
TDCDT_C
GND_1
GND_2
GND_3
GND_4
GND_5
GND_6
GND_7
GND_8
TDCDT_Y
TDCDT_K
GND_1
GND_2
GND_3
GND_4
GND_5
SCN0_PNL2
nTFSN
+24VM
+24VM
+24VM
PGND
PGND
17
PGND
PGND
MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC
2 Detection
LDTF
13
GND
3
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES
CCD (1631)
SHD
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS
SHD
LED6 LDBL_K
AFE (1630)
SHD
SHD
nLUM1
nLUM2
+24VM
+24VM
40
3 Sensor_K
20
14 2 16
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
+5V_PNL2 BLSN_C
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
6
5
4
3
2
1
15 1 15
3
1
10
1
2
10
10
11
12
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
1 Bottle Lock
3
2
5
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND_3
2 14 2 Detection
CN110 CN110 CN120 HVPS 2 (4015) LDBL_C
3 Sensor_C
2
1
3
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
13
2
Counter 2 (4423) 1
2
Counter 1 (4423) 1
FM
SHD
DF13
DF13
BLSN_M
SHD
12
30
FDOPSNC
M_LED
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
C_LED
Y_LED
K_LED
(4502)
(4502)
(4502)
CN CN CN CN (4502) 12
GND_2 1 Bottle Lock
M
nLEDDAT
HVPS (4014) MY HVPS (4014) CK FTR
M
FTR FTR FTR CN
1 6 5 11 2 Detection
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
CN6 (K) (C) (M) (Y)
CN290
STR
IHCM
LDBL_M
Mechanical
Mechanical
nLEDALM2-2
3 Sensor_M
(6401)
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
5
PS
2
1
10
1
1
1
LSU Fan (4302)

nLEDALM1 BLSN_Y
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY.
CN11
3 9
4
TDC_M
Sensor (4406)
nLEDALM2-1 TDC_Y TDC_C TDC_K GND_1
1 Bottle Lock
(Tray1) (2001)
(Tray2) (2001)
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
3
2
1
3
Toner Waste
DCG
4 3 1 8 2 Detection
CN63
CN9
nLEDACT GND Motor (4807) (5414) (5414) (5414) (5414) LDBL_Y Sensor_Y
Container
7
SC
5 2 2 3
IDENTIFIED WITH A
2 1
OPCNEWM
OPCNEWC
OPCNEWY
OPCNEWK
+5V_PNL4 SW3 nBTM_C
Lift Motor
Lift Motor
SUBSW
GND
GND
GND
GND
6 1 1 2 3 6
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
1 Bottle Motor
+24VM_3
M C (5302)
PARTS WITH A
4
FTR(M)
IH Core
5 2
FTR(C)
FTR(K)
FTR(Y)
PNL4
Switch (4202) 2
2
Switch (4202) 1
Control Panel Power nBTM_M
3
2
1
3
Detection 2
Sensor_M 1
3
Detection 2
Sensor_C 1
3
Detection 2
Sensor_K 1
4 1 Bottle Motor
Switch (1412)
(1333)
+24VM_2
M M (5302)
STR
Sensor_Y
Detection
3 2
Front Cover
Front Cover
CN98
CN65
nBTM_Y
Detection
D3 Detection
4
USB 4 1 1 2
Drum
Drum
Drum
Drum
1 Bottle Motor
SDI (1217) M
DCG
3 3 +24VM_1
2
1 2
1
2
3
PGND
2
3
FM LVPS Fan (4103) 1 2 Y (5302)
Ver. 1.1 513 APR 2005

DP-C262/C322
memo
Ver. 1.1 514 APR 2005

DP-C262/C322
11 Finisher Options
11.1. DA-FS325, DA-SP41
11.1.1. General Description
11.1.1.1. Features
1. Through-type Stapler
Adoption of a through-type stapler allows a stapler to carry out saddle stitching.
2. Three Different Auto Stapling Positions

Three different stapling positions (Front 1-point stapling, Rear 1-point stapling, and Middle 2-point
stapling) are supported.
3. Saddle Stitching
A maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled and folded in the middle.
4. Punch Mechanism (Option)

Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery (64 to 133 g/m2 paper; no
transparencies).
515
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.1.2. DA-FS325, DA-SP41 Specifications
1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly
Item Description Remarks

Stacking 2 locations
(1) Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)
Face-down
(2) Bind Tray (fixed type)
Feed Reference Center reference
Stacking Paper Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R Large-size: A3, B4, LDR,
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS2 LGL, FLS2
Paper Weight Finisher assembly: 17-24 lb (64 to 90 g/ m2)
Saddle Assembly : 17-24 lb (64 to 90 g/ m2)
Non-sort mode : Bond 17-40 lb, Index 90-121 lb
(64-220 g/ m2)
Mode Non-Sort stack
Sort stack
Staple stack
Bind stack
Stack Height (Note 1) Non-Sort Staple
Large-size : 500 sheets
Small-size : 1000 sheets (Note 2)
Staple Sort
Large-size : 30 sets or 500 sheets
Small-size : 30 sets or 1000 sheets
Folded stack
Stack of 6 to 10 sheets : 10 sets
Stack of 2 to 5 sheets : 20 sheets
Paper Detection Delivery tray : Yes
Bind tray : Yes
Control Panel No
Display No
Size (W x D x H) 26.0 x 23.71 x 18.3 in (Excludes installing kit)
(661 x 603 x 464 mm)
Weight 60 lb (27.5 kg)
Power Supply 24 VDC from host machine
Maximum Power At standby : 13 W
Consumption In operation : 84 W (staple sort)
Stapling Rotary cam type
Stapling Position See Fig. 1-001.
Stapling Thickness Finisher
Large-size : 25 sheets 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Small-size : 50 sheets
20 lb (75 g/m2)
Saddle : 10 sheets
20 lb (75 g/m2)
Staple Supply Cartridge of special staples (5000 Staples)
Replacement Staples FQ-SS66 3 Cartridges
Staple Detection Yes (nearly empty : 40 remaining staples)
516
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Stapling Size Front 1-Point Stapling
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS2
Rear 1-Point stapling
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5
Middle 2-Point Stapling
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5
Middle 2-Point Stapling With the saddle in use.
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R
Manual Stapling None
Folding Method Roller contact
Folding Mode Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)
Folding Position Center of sheet Requires a margin of ± 0.08
in (± 2 mm) in the center of
the sheet for a middle
margin.
Saddling Size A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R No special paper.
Note 1 :
The number of sheets is computed based on 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper.
Note 2 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of 750 sheets or more.
517
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Staple Position
Front 1-point stapling Rear 1-point stapling
0.18±0.08 in
(4.5±2 mm)
0.2±0.08 in
(5±2 mm)
0.18±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
(4.5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
Middle 2-point stapling

0.2±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
(5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
A3 or A4 A4-R B4 or B5
3.27±0.16 in (83±4 mm) 1.56±0.16 in (39.5±4 mm) 2.48±0.16 in (63±4 mm)

7.99±0.16 in (203±4 mm) 6.28±0.16 in (159.5±4 mm) 7.2±0.16 in (183±4 mm)
0.2±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
(5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
LDR LGL or LTR-R

or LTR 8.5 FLS
2.92±0.16 in (74.2±4 mm) 1.67±0.16 in (42.5±4 mm)

6.4±0.16 in (162.5±4 mm)
7.65±0.16 in (194.2±4 mm)
Middle 2-point stapling (w/ saddle in use)

Transfer direction
A3 A4-R B4
1
1
2
Folding
position
1 ±1.5 mm 3.27±0.16 in (83±4 mm) 1 ±1.5 mm 1.56±0.16 in (39.5±4 mm) 1 ±1.5 mm 2.48±0.16 in (63±4 mm)
2 210±2.0 mm 7.99±0.16 in (203±4 mm) 2 148.5±2.0 mm 6.28±6.16 in (159.5±4 mm) 2 182±2.0 mm 7.2±0.16 in (183±4 mm)
LDR LTR-R
1
1
2
1 ±1.5 mm 2.92±0.16 in (74.2±4 mm) 1 ±1.5 mm 1.67±0.16 in (42.5±4 mm)

2 216±2.0 mm 7.65±0.16 in (194.2±4 mm) 2 139.7±2.0 mm 6.4±0.16 in (162.5±4 mm)
Fig. 1-001
Stacked Paper Alignment

1.57 in max.(40 mm)
Delivery Direction
0.79 in max.(20 mm)
Fig. 1-002
518
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Punch Unit (Option)

Punching Method Reciprocating method
(sequential processing method)
Paper Size 2- / 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) For USA and Canada
2-hole / LGL, LTR-R
3-hole / LDR, LTR
2- / 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) For EU and Other
4-hole / A3, A4 Destinations
Paper Weight Bond : 17-40 lb, Index : 90-110 lb No transparencies.
(64 g/m2~ 200 g/m2)
Punch Hole Diameter 2-/ 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) For USA and Canada
2-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm
3-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm
6.5 mm Destinations
Punch Waste 2-/ 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) For USA and Canada
2-hole / 1500 sheets
3-hole / 1500 sheets
1500 sheets Destinations
Size (W x D x H) 3.54 x 22.05 x 6.69 in
(90 x 560 x 170 mm)
Weight 8.82 lb (4.0 kg)
Power Supply 24 VDC / 5 VDC supplied by the Finisher Unit.
Maximum Power Standby : 2 W max.
Consumption Operating : 21 W max. (punching)
Table 1-002
519
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Hole Position
[1] 2-Holes (Puncher Unit-J1)
1
A3/A4 4.27±0.12 in (108.5±3 mm)
B5/B4 3.48±0.12 in (88.5±3 mm)
3.15±0.04 in (80±1 mm) A4-R 2.56±0.12 in (65±3 mm)
B5-R 2.01±0.12 in (51±3 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
[2] 2-/3-Holes (Puncher Unit-K1)

1
LGL/LTR-R 2.87±0.12 in (73±3 mm)
2.76±0.04 in (70±1 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
1
LDR/LTR 1.24±0.12 in
(31.5±3 mm)
4.25±0.04 in 4.25±0.04 in
(108±1 mm) (108±1 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
[3] 4-Holes (Puncher Unit-G1)

1
A3/A4 1.12±0.12 in (28.5±3 mm)
3.15±0.04 in 3.15±0.04 in 3.15±0.04 in
(80±1 mm) (80±1 mm) (80±1 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
Fig. 1-003
520
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.1.3. Names of Parts
11.1.1.3.1. Cross Section
1. Finisher Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [9] [10] [11]
[1] Delivery Tray [2] Aligning Plate (Front, Rear)

[3] Paddle [4] Delivery Roller
[5] Processing Tray Stopper [6] Feed Roller
[7] Punch Unit (Option) [8] Delivery Belt
[9] Stack Delivery Roller [10] Stapler
[11] Saddle Unit
Fig. 1-004
521
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Saddle Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[1] Bind Stopper [2] Bind Tray

[3] Stack Feed Roller [4] Bind Delivery Roller
[5] Paper Fold Roller [6] Paper Pushing Plate
Fig. 1-005
[1] [2] [3] [4]
(1) Die (2) Cam

(3) Hole Puncher (Punch Blade) (4) Punch Waste Case
Fig. 1-006
11.1.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User
No. Item Timing

1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
2 Punch Waste Removal (Optional) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
Table 1-003
522
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2. Outline of Operation
11.1.2.1. Basic Operations
11.1.2.1.1. Specifications
The Finisher serves to deliver sheets coming from its host machine. The mode of delivery may be non-sort
stack, job offset*, or staple delivery.
The Saddle Unit build into the Finisher is used to fold a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher Unit in half
for delivery.
All these operations are controlled by various commands sent by the Host Machine in addition to the
commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Punch Unit (option) is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and is used to
punch holes in sheets coming from the Host Machine.
The above operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as
the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
Puncher Unit Drive

System (Puncher Unit;
Option)
Alignment Drive System

Control System
Stapler Drive System
Delivery Drive System
Feed Drive System
Tray Drive System
Saddle Unit Drive System
Fig. 2-001
Caution:
The position of delivery is shifted to the Front/Rear for each stack to assist sorting.
523
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.1.2. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry
The sequence of finisher operations is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is also used for combination with the Host Machine (serial).
The Finisher Controller PCB Drive Motors and other loads in response to the various commands from the
Host Machine. It also communicates such data as on the states of various sensors and switches to the Host
Machine by way of the serial communication line.
The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions:
• IC13 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
• IC12 (EEP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment settings.
• IC6 (EP-ROM)
Stores sequence programs.
• IC11 (communication IC)
Communicates with the host machine.
• IC1 (regulator IC)
Generates 5 V.
Fig. 2-001 shows the flow of signals between finisher and options controller.
Finisher Unit
Host Machine DC
Finisher Controller PCB
Controller PCU
PCB
Motor
IC13
CPU Clutch
IC12 Switch
EEP-ROM
IC11 Sensor
Communication Punch Unit (Option)
IC
Sensor
IC6
EP-ROM Punch Controller
PCB
IC1
Regulator IC
Motor
Fig. 2-002
524
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB
1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
PI1 CN44-3 CN43-1 CN42-3 CN16-10
+5V
-1 -3 -1 -12 ENT_S When the sensor
Inlet Sensor -2 -2 -2 -11 detects paper, ‘1’.
PI2 CN51-1 CN9-1

Paddle Home +5V
-3 -3 PDL_HP When the paddle is at
Position Sensor
-2 -2 home position, ‘1’.
PI3 CN55-3 CN54-1 CN53-3 CN9-7

Swing Guide +5V
-1 -3 -1 -9 BDL_ROL_HP When the swing guide
Home Position
Sensor -2 -2 -2 -8 is at home position, ‘1’.
PI4 CN23-3 CN4

Aligning Plate +5V When the aligning
Home Position -1 -3 F JOG_HP plate (Front) is at
Sensor (Front) -2 -2
home position, ‘1’.
PI5 CN36-3 CN5-13

Aligning Plate +5V When the aligning
Home Position -1 -15 R JOG_HP plate (Rear) is at
-2 -14
Sensor (Rear) home position, ‘1’.
PI6 CN30-3 CN29-1 CN28-9 CN5-1

+5V
Processing -1 -3 -7 -3 ADJ_TRAY_S When the sensor
Tray Sensor -2 -2 -8 -2 detects paper, ‘1’.
PI7 CN31-3 -4 -6 -4
Delivery Belt +5V
Home Position -1 -6 -4 -6 EJCT_BLT_HP When the delivery belt
-2 -5 -5 -5 is at home position, ‘1’.
Sensor
PI8 CN32-3 -7 -3 -7
+5V
-1 -9 -1 -9 TRY_EMPS When paper is present
Tray Paper Sensor -2 -8 -2 -8 on the tray, ‘1’.
PI9 CN35-3 CN34-1 CN33-3 CN5-10

Paper Surface +5V When the paper
-1 -3 -1 -12 LVL_S
Sensor -2 -2 -2 -11 surface is detected,
‘1’.
PI10 CN39-3 CN38-1 CN37-9 CN16-1

+5V
Folding Position -2 -2 -8 -2 BIND_P When paper is
Sensor -1 -3 -7 -3 detected, ‘0’.
BIND_L
When LED is lit, ‘1’.
Fig. 2-003
525
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
PI11 CN40-3 CN38-4 CN37-6 CN16-4 +5V
Folding Home
Position Sensor -1 -6 -4 -6 BIND_HP When at folding home position, ‘0’.
-2 -5 -5 -5
PI12 CN41-3 -7 -3 -7 +5V

Stack Feed Roller When the stack feed roller
-1 -9 -1 -9 BIND_ROL_HP
(Upper) Home -2 -8 -2 -8 (Upper) is at home position, ‘1’.
Position Sensor
PI13 CN47-3 CN15-1 +5V
-1 -3 BIND_EMPS
Bind Tray Sensor -2 -2 When the sensor
detects paper, ‘1’.
PI14 CN52-1 CN9-6 +5V
Staple/Fold Motor -2 -5 BIND_CLK When the staple/fold motor is
Clock Sensor -3 -4 rotating, alternates between
‘1’ and ‘0’.
PI15 CN50-3 CN15-10 +5V
-1 -12 SIFT_UPLMT When the tray is at the
Shift Upper Limit -2 -11
Sensor upper limit, ‘1’.
PI16 CN49-3 CN15-7 +5V
Shift Lower Limit -1 -9 SIFT_DNLMT When the tray is at the
-2 -8
Sensor lower limit, ‘1’.
PI17 CN48-3 CN15-4 +5V
Shift Motor Clock -1 -6 SIFT_CLK While the shift motor
Sensor -2 -5 is rotating, alternates
between ‘1’ and ‘0’.
PI22 CN25-3 CN4-7 +5V
-1 -9 FDOOR_S When the front door
Front Door Sensor -2 -8
is open, ‘1’.
PI23 CN24-3 CN4-4 +5V
Upper Cover Sensor -1 -6 TOPCOV_S When the upper cover
-2 -5 is open, ‘1’.
PI24 CN73-3 CN19-1 +5V

Full Stack Sensor -1 -3 PAPER_F When the paper is
-2 -2 full, ‘1’.
MS2 +24VP
Joint Switch N.O. CN69-2 CN8-6
-1 -5
JOINT SW
When connected to
the host machine, ‘1’.
MS1
N.O. CN68-2 CN8-4
Front Door Switch
-1 -3 When the front
FRONT SW
MS3 door is closed, ‘1’.
Stapler Safety N.O. CN66-2 CN8-2
Switch
-1 -1
STPLSAFE SW
When the swing
guide is closed, ‘1’.
Fig. 2-004
526
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
Binding Clutch +24V

-1 -2 CN18-1
CN72
CL1 -2 -1 -2
B_CLU When the drive is transmitted,
‘1’.
+24V
Feed Motor -6 -1 CN10-7
-5 -2 -8
-4 -3 -9
PDLMTR_A
CN57
M1 -3 -4 -10 Switches between ‘1’ and
PDLMTR_*A
-2 -5 -11 ‘0’ according to the
PDLMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-1 -6 -12
PDLMTR_*B
+24V
Paddle Motor CN56-2 CN10-1
-5 -2
-3 -3
FEEDMTR_A
M2 -1 -4 Switches between ‘1’ and
FEEDMTR_*A
-4 -5 ‘0’ according to the
FEEDMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-6 -6
FEEDMTR_*B
+24V
Delivery Motor -6 -1 CN13-1
-5 -2 -2
-4 -3 -3
EJCTMTR_A
CN59
M3 -3 -4 -4 Switches between ‘1’ and

EJCTMTR_*A
-2 -5 -5
‘0’ according to the
EJCTMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-1 -6 -6
EJCTMTR_*B
+24V
Alignment Motor
(Front) CN63-1 CN62-5 CN3-1
-2 -4 -2
FJOGMTR_A
-3 -3 -3 Switches between ‘1’ and
M4 FJOGMTR_*A
-4 -2 -4 ‘0’ according to the
FJOGMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-5 -1 -5
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
Alignment Motor
(Rear) CN65-1 CN64-5 CN3-6
-2 -4 -7
RJOGMTR_A
-3 -3 -8 Switches between ‘1’ and
M5 RJOGMTR_*A
-4 -2 -9
‘0’ according to the
RJOGMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-5 -1 -10
RJOGMTR_*B
Fig. 2-005
527
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
Shift Motor
-2 -2 -2 -2 CN6-1
Switches between ‘+’ and
CN70
CN70
SIFTMTR_1
M6
-1 -1 -1 -1 -2 SIFTMTR_0
‘-’ according to the
direction of motor rotation.
Staple/Fold Motor
-2 -2 CN6-3
Switches between ‘+’ and
CN71
BINDMTR_1
M7
-1 -1 -4 BINDMTR_0
‘-’ according to the
direction of motor rotation.
Fig. 2-006
528
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller
Stapler Unit Finisher Controller PCB
Slide Home
Position Sensor
PI18 +5V
CN72-5 CN72A-5 CN72A-5 CN11-3 SLID_HP When the stapler is at home
position, ‘1’.
Staple Home
Position Sensor
PI19 +5V
CN72-4 CN72A-4 CN72A-4 CN11-4 STPL_HP When the stapler is at
stapling home position, ‘0’.
Staple Empty
Sensor
PI20 +5V
CN72-3 CN72A-3 CN72A-3 CN11-5 HOOK_S When the cartridge has
staples, ‘0’.
Staple Top
Position Sensor
PI21 +5V
CN72-2 CN72A-2 CN72A-2 CN11-6
SELF_P When the staple is at top
the stapler, ‘0’.
+5V
+5V CN72-6 CN72A-6 CN72A-6 CN11-2
CN72-1 CN72A-1 CN72A-1 CN11-7
CN72-7 CN72A-7 CN72A-7 CN11-1 When the stapler is

STPL_CNCT
connected, ‘0’.
Slide Motor
CN72-10 CN72B-5 CN72B-5 CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A
CN72-11 CN72B-4 CN72B-4 CN7-4 Switches between ‘1’ and
SLIDMTR_*A
M8 CN72-12 CN72B-3 CN72B-3 CN7-5 ‘0’ according to the direction
SLIDMTR_B
CN72-13 CN72B-2 CN72B-2 CN7-6 of motor rotation.
SLIDMTR_*B
+24V
CN2-1
-3 GND
-4
GND
-5 TXD
-7 Communication line
RXD
-6
Host
Machine +24V
CN1-1
-2
Fig. 2-007
529
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.1.4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB (Option)
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
Punch Controller PCB
PI1P J2008-3 J1006-4
+5V
Punch Home -1 -6 When the hole puncher is
Position Sensor -2 -5 PUNCH
at home position, ‘0’.
Horizontal PI2P J2007-3 J1006-1

Registration +5V When the punch slide
-1 -3
Home Position -2 -2 SLIDE unit is at home position,
Sensor ‘1’.
PI3P J2009-3 J1006-7

Punch Motor +5V While the punch motor
-1 -9
Clock Sensor -2 -8 CLOCK is rotating, alternates
between ‘0’ and ‘1’.
Waste full LED PCB +5V

J1005-1
LED121
-2
DUSTLED
Waste Full Photosensor PCB When the light is

blocked, ‘0’.
PT131
J1005-3
DUSTPTR
-4
Photosensor PCB
+5V +5V
J1007-12
PT1 -11 SREG1*
PT2 -10
SREG2*
PT3 -9 When paper is
SREG3*
PT4 -8 detected, ‘0’.
SREG4*
PT5 -7
PAEND*
-13
Fig. 2-008
530
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
LED PCB +5V

J1007-6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
-1
LEDON5
-5
LEDON4
-4 When ‘1’, LED goes ON.
LEDON3
-3
LEDON2
-2
LEDON1
Punch Motor
J1002-1
Switches between ‘+’
M1P and ‘-’ according to
-2 the direction of motor
rotation.
Horizontal
Registration
Motor J1001-1
A
-2
B Switches the pulse
M2P -3 signals according to
A*
-4 the rotation of the motor.
B*
Fig. 2-009
531
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.2. Feed / Drive System
11.1.2.2.1. Outline
The Machine performs the following in response to the commands coming from its host machine on the
sheets arriving from the Host Machine for delivery: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling or folding (in
two).
If a Punch Unit (option) is installed, the sheets are punched and delivered to the Delivery Tray.
Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways (including one for the Punch Unit):
Delivery Normal Punching Simple stacking
method delivery
Job offset
Stapling Front 1-point stapling
Rear 1-point stapling
Middle 2-point stapling
Saddle delivery Stitching Middle 2-point stapling
Fig. 2-010
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray.
Tray
Paper
Fig. 2-011
532
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
b. Job Offset
The Machine pulls the sheet once to the Processing Tray. It then moves the sheet to the front or the
rear using the Aligning Plate. When it has deposited a specific number of sheets, it delivers them in
the form of an aligning plane. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches
a specified value, the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack. Even if the specified value is not
reached, stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large-size paper (300 mm or
longer) or 30 sheets of small-size paper (299 mm or shorter) have been stacked. (5- and STMT-
sizes: 10 sheets)
Results of offset delivery (4 jobs)
4th set
3rd set 2nd set
1st set
(Delivery Direction)
Fig. 2-012
533
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
c. Stapling
The Machine stacks sheets coming from its host machine on the Processing Tray. When the
number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the Finisher staples
them, and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray.
Fig. 2-013
d. Saddle Delivery
The Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray, staples it (middle 2-point), and then
moves it to the Saddle Unit. The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two, and delivers it to the Bind Tray.
Fig. 2-014
534
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.2.2. Feed / Delivery
1. Outline
The Machine forwards the sheets coming from its host machine to the Delivery Tray, Processing Tray,
or Saddle Unit according to the type of delivery used. The sheets forwarded to the processing tray or
the Saddle Unit are offset, stapled, or folded.
Fig. 2-015 shows the motors that are associated with moving and aligning sheets. These motors are
controlled (rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise) by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher
Controller PCB.
The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2-002 used to monitor the arrival or
passage of sheets.
If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher
Controller will assume a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and, at the same time, communicates
the presence of a jam to the Host Machine.
Connector on Finisher
Notation Name Description
Controller PCB
M1 Paddle Motor Stepping Motor CN10
M2 Feed Motor Stepping Motor CN10
M3 Delivery Motor Stepping Motor CN13
M4 Alignment Plate Motor (Front) Stepping Motor CN3
M5 Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Stepping Motor CN3
M7 Staple / Fold Motor Brush DC Motor CN6
Table 2-001
535
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
Ver. 1.1
Shift Motor Drive Signal SIFTMTR
M6
Alignment Plate Motor
(front) drive signal FJOGMTR
Delivery Motor Drive Signal EJCTMTR
M4
M3
Slide Motor Drive Signal SLIDMTR Alignment Plate Motor
M8
(rear) drive signal RJOGMTR
M5
Paddle Motor
Drive Signal PDLMTR
M2
536
Fig. 2-015
Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
Bind Clutch Drive Signal B_CLU

CL
Staple/Fold Motor Drive

Signal BINDMTR Feed Motor
M7
Drive Signal FEEDMTR
Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
M1
PI14
BIND_CLK
APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DP-C262/C322
Inlet paper detect signal ENT_P
Fold position paper detect signal BIND_P

PI1
PI10
Fig. 2-016
Connector on Finisher
Notation Name Description
Controller PCB
PI1 Inlet Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16
PI10 Fold Position Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16
Table 2-002
537
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.2.3. Job Offset
1. Outline
"Job offset" refers to the operation by which the machine delivers a set of sheets with them pulled
forward or backward for sorting.
Switching between the forward and backward directions is accomplished by using an aligning plate
(Front) and an aligning plate (Rear).
The sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray and then fed toward
the stopper by the Paddle.
A swing guide is at the upper position while a sheet is being pulled onto the Processing Tray or during
alignment. It is at the lower position during stack feeding, stack delivery, or stapling.
At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate (Front) Motor (M4) and the Aligning
Plate (Rear) Motor (M5) to return the two aligning plates to their home positions.
Sensor Symbol Connector Function Motor Symbol

Aligning Plate (Front) PI4 CN4-3 Drives the Aligning Plate Aligning Plate M4
Home Position Sensor (Front) (Front) Motor
Aligning Plate (Rear) PI5 CN5-15 Drives the Aligning Plate Aligning Plate M5
Home Position Sensor (Rear) (Rear) Motor
Swing Guide Home PI3 CN9-9 Drives the Swing Guide Paddle Motor M2
Position Sensor Drive
Paddle Home Position PI2 CN9-3 Drives the Paddle (feeds Paddle Motor M2
Sensor paper)
Table 2-003
Aligning plate (Rear) Aligning plate (Rear)
home position sensor (PI5)
Light-shielding plate
Alignment Plate (Front)

Motor (M4)
Aligning plate (Rear)
motor (M5)
Aligning Plate
(Front)
Light-Shielding Plate Paper

(Front)
Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor (PI4)
Fig. 2-017
538
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Processing Tray Paper Stacking Operation
A sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray. Then, the Paddle Taps
on the sheet surface twice (once for the second and subsequent sheets) to position the sheet against
the Processing Tray Stopper.
Paper
Aligning Plate
Paddle
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Swing Guide
Delivery Belt Processing Tray Stopper
Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)
Fig.2-018
3. Offset Operation
Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate (Front) and the Aligning Plate
(Rear).
The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray.
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Aligning Plate (Front)
Fig. 2-019 Offsetting in the forward direction
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Aligning Plate (Front)
Fig. 2-020 Offsetting in the backward direction
539
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4. Stack Delivery Operation
Stack delivery takes place when 10 sheets of large-size paper or 30 sheets of small-size paper (A5-
and STMT-sizes: 10 sheets) have been stacked on the Processing Tray with them offset in either
direction.
The Paddle Motor rotates and the Swing Guide descends to hold the paper stack between the Upper
and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor rotates in the forward direction to rotate the
Delivery Rollers, feeding the paper stack in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position
Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing
Guide to ascend. Next, the Paper Delivery Motor is driven. Next, the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver
the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Swing Guide
Fig. 2-021
Job offset sequence

Start signal
Host machine delivery signal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Processing Tray Sensor
(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)

Delivery Belt Home
Position Sensor (PI7)
360msec 360msec 360msec 360msec
Paddle Motor (M2)
Paddle Home Position
Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
Stapler Safety Switch
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (Front) 60msec 30msec 220msec
(M4)
Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor (Front) (PI4)
Alignment Motor (Rear)
(M5)
Sensor (Rear) (PI5)
CW rotation CCW rotation
Fig. 2-022
540
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.3. Stapling Operation
11.1.2.3.1. Outline
Staple operation is performed to staple specified sheets of paper using a stapler unit.
The stapling position depends on the staple mode and paper size.
When the Machine starts immediately after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Slide Motor
(M8) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. The Stapler Unit starts moving toward the front of the
Stapler Frame. It stops when the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) on the Slide PCB located under the
Stapler Unit. Next, the Slide Motor is driven a specified number of pulses. The Stapler Unit moves to rear
standby position at the back of the Machine, entering the standby state.
Sensor Symbol Connector Function Remarks

Slide Home Position PI18 CN11-3 Detects the home position for the —
Sensor stapler moving back and forth
Staple Home Position PI19 CN11-4 Detects the home position for the In the stapler
Sensor stapling operation
Staple Empty Sensor PI20 CN11-5 Detects presence or absence of In the stapler
staples in the cartridge
Staple Top Position PI21 CN11-6 Detects the staple top position In the stapler
Sensor
Function Motor Symbol Remarks

Moves the Stapler. Slide Motor M8 —
Performs Stapling Operation. Staple/Fold M7 —
Motor
Table 2-004
Stapler
(Deliver Direction)
Paper Stack
Light-Shielding Plate
Slide Motor
(M8)
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)
Fig. 2-023
541
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.3.2. Stapling Operation
When stacking and alignment of paper on the Processing Tray are complete, the Finisher Controller PCB
drives the Paddle Motor (M2) in the reverse direction and lowers the Swing Guide. When the Swing Guide
descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position
(when rear 1-point stapling is specified, the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position). As
a stapler moves forward, the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Processing Tray Stopper
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Stack
Delivery
Roller
(Lower)
Fig. 2-024
Swing Guide Home

Paddle Motor (M2)
Staple Safety Switch

(MS3)
Swing Guide
Stack Delivery Roller

(Upper)

(Lower)
12±3 mm
Fig. 2-025
542
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.3.3. Delivery Operation after Stapling
When stapling is complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Deliver Motor in the forward direction to
feed the paper stack (sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers) in the delivery direction.
The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of
pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. At the same time, the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler
back to the standby position, followed by driving of the Delivery Motor. Then, the paper stack is delivered
with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Delivery Tray Stapler
Delivery Belt
Stack Delivery
Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-026
Swing Guide
Home Position Sensor (PI3)
Paddle Motor (M2)
Staple Safety
Switch (MS3)
Swing Guide

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-027
543
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.3.4. Stapler Unit
The Staple/Fold Motor (M7) is used to perform stapling operation. This motor rotates the Cam one turn for
stapling. The home position of this cam is detected by the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19).
The Staple/Fold Motor is rotated in the forward or reverse direction under the control of the Micro Computer
(IC13) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the Staple Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Staple/Fold Motor in
the forward direction until the sensor turns ON, allowing the Staple Cam to the original position.
The Staple Empty Sensor (PI20) is used to detect presence/absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine
and presence/absence of staples in the Cartridge.
The Staple Top Position Sensor (PI21) is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the
Staple Cartridge.
The Finisher Controller circuit does not drive the Staple/Fold Motor (M7) unless the staple safety switch
(MS3) is ON (the Swing Guide is closed). This assures safety in case where you happen to put your finger
in the stapler.
Fig. 2-028
M7
Staple home position detect signal
Staple top position detect signal
Staple/hold motor drive signal

Staple empty detect signal
Fig. 2-029
544
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1. Stapler Movement Controller
The Stapler Unit is moved by the Slide Motor (M8). Its home position is detected by the Slide Home
Position Sensor (PI18). The Stapler waits at the back irrespective of the staple mode and paper size.
After paper has been stacked on the Processing Tray, the Stapler is moved to the specified stapling
position in response to the stapling command from the Host Machine.
Fig. 2-030 shows the standby position of the Stapler and the stapling position depending on the staple
mode.
a. Front 1-Point Stapling

The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation.
Standby position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Stapling position
Fig. 2-030
b. Rear 1-Point Stapling

The Stapler waits at the back. The stapling position is the same as the standby position.
Standby position
Stapling position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Fig. 2-031
545
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
c. Middle 2-Point Stapling
The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The Stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction
Stapling position
Fig. 2-032
d. Middle 2-Point Stapling (Bind Mode)

The Stapler waits at the back. The stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction Stapling position
Fig. 2-033
546
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Stapling Operation Sequence
Rear 1-Point Stapling of 2 Sheets
Start Signal
Host Machine Delivery Signal
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Staple ???
Processing Tray Sensor

(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)
Delivery Belt Home 10msec

360msec 360msec
Paddle Motor (M2)

Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (front)
(M4)
Sensor (front) (PI4)
20msec
Staple/Fold Motor (M7)
Staple Home Position

Sensor (PI9)
Fig. 2-034
547
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.4. Delivery Tray Operation
11.1.2.4.1. Outline
The Machine has a delivery tray in the Finisher Unit and a bind tray in the Saddle Unit.
The Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit is of the fixed type and all the folded paper stacks are delivered to this tray.
This tray has a bind tray sensor (PI13) to detect presence/absence of paper.
The Delivery Tray in the Finisher Unit is moved up and down using a shift motor (M6).
The Finisher has a tray paper sensor (PI8) to detect presence/absence of paper on the Stack Tray.
The Home Position Sensor of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Paper Surface Sensor (PI19). When
paper has already been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is on the top surface of the stacked
paper. When paper has not yet been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is at the position
where the edge of the Delivery Tray is detected. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Shift
Motor (M6) to return the Delivery Tray to the home position.
When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray, the Shift Motor is driven
a specified number of pulses, causing the Delivery Tray to descend. Clock pulses are detected by the Shift
Motor Clock Sensor (PI17). Then, the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking
operation.
The upper limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15). When the Shift
Upper Limit Sensor (PI15) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is
ascending.
The lower limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16). When the Shift Lower
Limit Sensor (PI16) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is descending.
The Finisher Unit has a full stack sensor (PI24) to detect overstacking of large-size or mixed paper
according to the stack height.
Shift Upper Limit Sensor

(PI15)
Tray Paper Sensor (PI8)

Shift Lower Limit Sensor
(PI16)
Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)
Edge
Delivery Tray
Shift Motor Clock Sensor
(PI17)
Full Stack Sensor (PI24)
Shift Motor (M6)
Fig. 2-035
548
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.5. Saddle Unit
11.1.2.5.1. Basic Operations
1. Outline
The Machine stitches a stack of sheets (middle 2-point), then folds the stack in two in the Finisher.
These operations are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine.
11.1.2.5.2. Feed / Drive System

1. Outline
This machine stitches the paper stack coming from the Finisher, folds it, and delivers it to the Bind Tray
in the Saddle Unit in response to the commands from the Host Machine.
That is, the machine performans the following operations :

1) Paper Feed-in
2) Stitching
3) Stack Feed
4) Folding / Delivery
2) Stitching
1) Paper feed-in
3) Stack feed
4) Folding/delivery
Fig. 2-036
549
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
a. Paper Feed-in
After being aligned on the Processing Tray, a stack of sheets is sandwiched between the Stack
Delivery Rollers. As the Stack Delivery Rollers rotate, the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit.
Paper Stack

(Lower)
Fig. 2-037
b. Stitching
When the center of the paper stack (stitching position) reaches the stapler's staple position, the
Stapler stitches the paper stack.
When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine, the next step (stack feed) is performed without
performing the stitching operation.
Staple
Stapler (Upper)
Stapler (Lower)
Fig. 2-038
550
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
c. Stack Feed
The Stack Feed Rollers feed the paper stack to the stack folding/delivery position where the center
of the stack (stitched position) is level with the Paper Pushing Plate and Paper Folding Roller's nip
part.
Stack Feed Roller (Upper)
Paper Pushing Plate
Stack Feed Roller (Lower)

Paper Fold Roller
Fig. 2-039
d. Folding / Delivery
The Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold
Rollers. Then, the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind
Tray.
Bind Delivery Rollers

Paper Fold Rollers
Fig. 2-040
551
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.5.3. Paper Feed System
1. Outline
The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the
center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step
(stitching and folding) to be performed.
When sheets of paper have been stacked and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2)
rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends,
the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery
Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the
leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller
PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack
(stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack
Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading
edge of the paper stack is not bent.

Paper stack
Fold Position Sensor

(Lower)
Fig. 2-041
552
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.5.4. Stack Feed System
1. Outline
The stack feed system feeds the stitched paper stack to the folding position.
When stitching is complete, the Feed Motor (M2) rotates, causing the Stack Feed Roller (upper) to
descend. The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers. Then, the Bind Clutch (CL1)
is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor (M2) in the forward direction, thus feeding the paper stack to the
folding position. The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor
(M2) unit the paper stack reaches the folding position.
Fe
ed
Am
ou
nt
Fig. 2-042
553
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.5.5. Fold / Delivery System
1. Outline
The paper fold mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and a Paper Pushing Plate.
The Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and Paper Pushing Plate are driven by the Staple/Fold Motor
(M7). The drive force is transferred with a combination of gears and cams. Motor operation is
monitored by the Staple/Fold Motor Lock Sensor (PI14).
Until the paper stack reaches the folding position, the Guide Plate covers the Paper Fold Rollers to act
as a paper path through which a paper stack is fed to the Saddle Unit and to prevent a paper stack
from touching the rollers.
A Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) is provided to detect the positions of the Paper Fold Rollers
and Paper Pushing Plate.
The paper stack folded in two by the Paper Fold Rollers is delivered by Bind Delivery Rollers.
The Bind Delivery Rollers are also driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7).
A Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) is provided on the Bind Tray to detect presence/absence of a paper stack;
however, it is not used to detect a jam.
2. Paper Folding
Paper is folded using paper fold rollers and a paper pushing plate.
Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation, the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push
the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers. When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm
with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers, the Paper Pushing Plate returns to the home position. Then,
the paper stack is delivered to the Bind Tray using the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers.
Half the entire surface of each paper fold roller is uncovered excluding the central area and the area at
the left and right ends. The uncovered surface of the Upper Paper Fold Roller comes in touch with the
uncovered surface of the Lower Paper Fold Roller only at the center and left and right ends, allowing a
paper stack to be fed without causing creases. The other half of the Upper Paper Fold Roller that is
covered comes in touch with the other half of the Lower Paper Fold Roller that is also covered, allowing
a paper stack to be folded while being fed.
Sensor Flag
Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11)
Cam
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper stack
Paper Fold Roller (Upper)
Staple/Fold M7
Motor
Paper Fold Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-043
554
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Folding
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper Fold Roller (Upper)
Staple/Fold M7
Motor
Paper Fold Roller (Lower)
Paper stack
Fig. 2-044
[Paper Folding Start Position]
Paper Stack
Inlet
Paper Push Plate
Outlet
Folds/feeds a paper stack.

Feeds a paper stack.
Fig. 2-045
555
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Staple
?????
Feed Motor (M2)
Delivery Motor (M3)
Paddle Motor (M1)

Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
(MS3)
Slide Motor (M8)
13571msec
Staple/Fold Motor (M7)
Staple Home Position 50msec

Sensor (PI19)
Folding Position Sensor
(PI10)
Binding Clutch (CL1)
Folding Home Position

Sensor (PI11)
Bind Tray Sensor (PI13)
Fig. 2-046
556
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.6. Punch Unit (Option)
11.1.2.6.1. Basic Operations
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is an option and is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher. The
Punch Unit is not equipped with a paper feeding mechanism, and the sheets from the Host Machine
move through the Punch Unit and then the feed system of the Finisher.
When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit, the sheet is stopped
once, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge. These operations are
controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the
Punch Controller PCB.
Punch Drive System
Horizontal Registration
Drive System
Finisher Unit Control System
Punch Controller
PCB
Fig. 2-047
557
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.6.2. Punching Operation
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is located in the pickup assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets
that have been sent from the Host Machine and stopped inside it. When the trailing edge of a sheet
reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Assembly stops the sheet to punch a hole along
the trailing edge of the sheet.
The Punch Unit consists of a Die and Hole Puncher (Punch Blade).
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). It is attached to the Eccentric Cam of the Punch
Shaft, and the rotation of the Punch Shaft is converted into reciprocating motion for punching
operation.
The Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by the Punch
Home Position Sensor (PI1P). To make sure that the Punch Motor, which is a DC motor, stops exactly
at its home position, the Punch Motor is stopped in relation to the count of the clock pulses kept by the
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P).
A single punching operation is executed by rotating punch shaft 180° from its home position.
As many as five light-receiving transistors (Photo Sensor PCB) are mounted over the inlet paper path
of the Punch Unit; on the other hand, as many as five LEDs (LED PCB) are mounted under the path,
together serving as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PT5) is used to detect the training
edge of sheets, and the remaining four (LED1 through LED4, PT1 through PTR4) are used as
Horizontal Registration Sensors to detect the rear position of sheets when punching holes.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and Sensors make up the Punch Slide Unit, which moves to the Front/
Rear to suit the selected paper size. The movement to the Front/Rear is driven by the Horizontal
Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal
Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a Stepping
Motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor are controlled with various commands from the
Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
The waste paper occurring as the result of punching is collected in the Waste Paper Case. The case is
monitored by the LED121 on the Waste Full LED PCB and PT131 on the Waste Full Photo Sensor
PCB.
558
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
Ver. 1.1
LED121
Trailing Edge Detection Signal
(LED5, PT5) PAEND
Horizontal Registration Detection

Signal (LED1~4, PT1~4) SREG1~4
559
5
5
Punch Motor Clock (PI3P)
Fig. 2-048
4
4
Detection Signal PUNCHCLK

3
3
Punch Motor (M1P)

2
2
Punch Controller PCB (2/2)

Punch Controller PCB (1/2)
Drive Signal
PT1
LED1
Waste Full Detection Signal

(LED121, PT131) DFULL
PT131
Horizontal Registration Home Position
(PI2P) Detection Signal SREGHP
Punch Home Position (PI1P)

Detection Signal PUNCHHP
Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P) Drive Signal
APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DP-C262/C322
2. Punching Operation
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The home position for the Hole Puncher is
detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P).
The Punch Unit comes in three types, selected to suit the country of installation: 2-hole (Punch Unit
DA-SP41-AZ), 2- and 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU), or 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB).
The 2-hole and 4-hole types punch a hole when the Punch Shaft is rotated 180° from the home
position, causing the punch to make a single round trip. The 2-/3-hole type punches a hole, but the
circumference of the Punch Shaft is divided into two (half for 2-hole and the other half for 3-hole).
a. 2-Hole, 4-Hole Type

The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON. The punching operation for
the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° and the Punch Home Position Sensor
goes ON; the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180°
in reverse and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two sheets of paper.
1) A hole is punched along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position

Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam Hole

Puncher
Die
Paper
Die
Waste Paper
(Punch Shaft at (Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /

Rest/Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) Punching operation Ends)
Fig. 2-049
2) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by
Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) 180 /End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-050
560
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
b. 2-/3-Hole Type
The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To make two holes,
the punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft rotates 180° (half
circumference) and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher
makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on a half circumference
of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° counter-
clockwise and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON (half circumference). At this time, the 3-
Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on the
other half circumference of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper:
1) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position

Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam Hole

Puncher
Die
Paper
Die
Waste Paper
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-051
While two holes are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape
direction.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 90 / (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) Punch at Upper Limit) Punch Back to Limit Position)
Fig. 2-052
2) Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-053
561
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
While two hole are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction
(moving up the Hole Puncher).
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by (Punch CCW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) 90 /Punch at Upper Limit) Punch Back at Initial Position)
Fig. 2-054
3. Horizontal Registration Operation

The horizontal registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is provided by the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration
Home Position Sensor (PI2P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of sheets using the
Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) and the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 through 4, SREG1
through 4), and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet (in
relation to the size of the sheet).
The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows:

1) When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5), the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit toward
the front.
Punch Slide Unit
Motor (M2P)
Trailing Edge Sensor

(LED5, PT5)
(Direction of
Paper Delivery)
Paper
Fig. 2-055
562
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2) When the Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 though 4, PT1 through) suited to the paper size
signal from the Host Machine detects the rear edge of the sheet, the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P) causes a farther move to a specific position, and stops the Punch Slide Unit.
Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1, PT1);

used to detect the edge of sheets of A3, A4,
LTR, 279x432 (11"x17").
Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PT2);
used to detect the edge of sheets of B4, B5,
LTR-R, LGL.
used to detect the edge of sheets of A4-R.

used to detect the edge of sheets of B5-R.
Fig. 2-056
3) When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) detects the trailing edge of the sheet, the drive of the
Feed Motor (M2) is stopped, thereby stopping the sheet. Then, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to
punch holes in the sheet.
Punch
Fig. 2-057
4) When the punching operation ends, the Feed Motor (M2) of the Fisher Unit is driven and, at the
same time, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide
Unit to its home position.
5) For each sheet that arrives in succession, the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position, and
is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4.
Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5)
Sensor (LED1~4, PT1~4)
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor (PI2P)
Motor (M2P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Feed Motor (M2)
CW Rotation CCW Rotation
Fig. 2-058
563
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.7. Detecting Jams
11.1.2.7.1. Outline
The Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB is programmed to check for jams in the Finisher/
Saddle/Puncher (option) at such times as set in advance. It identifies a jam in reference to the presence/
absence of paper at a specific sensor. If a jam is found, the Finisher Controller PCB communicates the
nature of the jam to the Host Machine in the form of a code (which may be checked in service mode of the
Host Machine).
PI1
PI10
PI1 : Inlet Sensor

PI10 : Folding Position Sensor
Fig. 2-059
1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (1011)

If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out
signal was sent from the hooked-up machine.
Host machine delivery signal Host machine delivery signal
approx. 1.5sec. approx. 1.5sec.

Jam check Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Jam
Feed Motor (M1) Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-060
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (1021)

If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor
detected the paper's front edge.
approx. 2sec. approx. 2sec.

Jam check Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Jam
Feed Motor (M1) Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-061
564
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3. Folding Position Sensor Delay Jam (1012)
In bind mode, the Folding Position Sensor does not detect paper 1200 msec after the Intermediate
Processing Tray starts to send paper to the stapling position.
1200 ms 1200 ms
Jam Check Jam Check
Folding Position Normal Folding Position Jam
Sensor (PI10) Sensor (PI10)
Delivery Motor (M3) Delivery Motor (M3)
Fig. 2-062
4. Folding Position Sensor Stationary Jam (1022)

In bind mode, paper does not leave the Holding Position Sensor approximately 10.5 sec after the
Staple/Fold Motor is driven.
Approx. 10.5sec. Approx. 10.5sec.

Jam Check Jam Check
Folding Position Normal Folding Position Jam
Sensor (PI10) Sensor (PI10)
Staple/Fold Staple/Fold
Motor (M7) Motor (M7)
Fig. 2-063
5. Door Open Jam (paper present)(1008)

The Finisher is disconnected from its host machine or the Front Door, or the Upper Cover is opened
while the system is in operation (paper on the move).
6. Staple Jam (1006)

The Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven. Or, it
does not return to its home position (where the sensor goes ON).
7. Punch Jam
• Paper stuck at punch stapler
• Punching not ended 1 second after the punching request signal.
565
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.2.8. Power Supply System
11.1.2.8.1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly
1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, it supplies the Finisher Controller PCB with two channels of 24
VDC; one is for the motors and clutches, and the other is turned into 5 VDC by the Regulator IC (IC1)
of the Finisher Controller PCB for use by the sensors and ICs on PCBs.
If a punch unit (option) is installed, power is also supplied to the Punch Controller PCB. Some of 24
VDC used to drive motors is cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2), Front Door Switch (MS1), or Stapler
Safety Switch (MS3) is open.
Fig. 2-061 is a block diagram of the power supply system :
Front Door Switch
Joint Switch (MS1) Stapler Safety Switch
(MS2) (MS3)
24V
Motor
24V
Motor
24VP
Circuit Breaker 24V

Clutch
(CB1)
Finisher
Host Controller PCB
Machine
5V
Sensor
(IC1)
24VL 5V
Regulator IC Logic System

(Puncher Unit; Option)
Fig. 2-064
2. Protective Mechanism
A circuit breaker (CB1) is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against
overcurrent. The 24-V system used to drive the Feed Motor (M1), paddle motor (M2), and delivery
motor (M3) is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
11.1.2.8.2. Punch Unit (Option)

1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, the Punch Unit is supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB with
24-V and 5-V power.
The 24-V power is used to drive the motors, while the 5-V power is used by sensors and the ICs on the
Punch Controller PCB.
The 24-V power to the motors will be cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2) or the Front Door Switch
(MS1) of the Finisher Unit is open.
566
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Fig. 2-062 is a block diagram for the power supply system :
24V 24V
Motors
Finisher Punch Controller PCB

Controller 5V
PCB Sensors
5V 5V
Logic System
Fig. 2-065
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24-V system used to drive the Punch Motor (M1P) and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is
equipped with a built-in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
567
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.3. Mechanical Systems
11.1.3.1. Finisher Saddle Unit
11.1.3.1.1. External Components
[1] Tray (4)
[1] [5] [6] [2]
[2] Rear Cover (3)
[3] Front Cover (5)
[4] Front Door
[5] Upper Door
[6] Upper Right Cover Assembly (4)
[7] [7] Jam Removal Cover
The number in parentheses indicates the number of
[4] Mounting Screws used.
[3]
Fig. 3-001
1-1. Removing the Delivery Tray
[2]
(1) Remove the four Screws [1], and detach the
Delivery Tray [2].
[1]
Fig. 3-002
[1] [4] 1-2. Removing the Front Cover

(1) Open the Front Door [1].
(2) While picking the Claw [2], detach the Fold Jam
Releasing Dial [3].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [4].
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 3-003
568
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(4) Remove 3 Screws [5], and detach the Front

[6]
Cover [6].
[5]
[5]
Fig. 3-004
1-3. Removing the Rear Cover

(1) Remove 2 Screws [1] on the pickup side, and
remove 1 Screw [2] on the delivery side; then,
[3] detach the Rear Cover [3].
[1]
Fig. 3-005
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-006
569
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1-4. Removing the Upper Cover

[1]
(1) Open the Upper Cover [1], and turn the Cover
Band Retainer [2] to the left to remove it.
(2) Remove the Cover Band [3].
[3] [2]
Fig. 3-007
(3) Remove 1 Screw [4], and detach the Processing
[6] Tray Rear Cover [5]; then, detach the Upper
Cover [6].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-008
570
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1-5. Removing the Processing Tray Upper Cover

(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(3) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)
(4) Disconnect the Connector [1], and remove the
Screw [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-009
(5) While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover
[3]
[3], disconnect the Connector [4]; then, detach
the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3].
[4]
Fig. 3-010
571
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1-6. Removing the Upper Right Cover Assembly

[3]
(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1] at the front and the two
Screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the Upper
Right Cover Assembly [3].
[1]
Fig. 3-011
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-012
1-7. Removing the Saddle Guide

(1) Remove the Delivery Tray. (See 1.)
[3] (2) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)
[3]
[2]
(3) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)
(4) Free the Delivery Tray Support Plate (front) [1]
[1]
and the Delivery Tray Support Plate (rear) [2] to
the outside from the rail grooves.
[3] (5) Remove 4 Screws [3].
[3]
Fig. 3-013
(6) Shift the Side Guide [4] lightly to the front, and
free the engagement of the Paper surface
[5]
Detecting Lever (rear) [5]; then, detach the Side
Guide [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-014
572
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Caution:
Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely
fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5]
in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever
(middle) [6].
After mounting, push the Paper Surface Detecting
Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide
[5] [6] is mounted securely.
[5]
[6]
Fig. 3-015
573
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.3.1.2. Feeding System
2-1. Removing the Stapler Unit
[1]
(1) Open the Front Door [1].
(2) Slide out the Stapler Unit [3] while pressing the
Stopper Lever [2].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-016
Caution:
[5] Do not remove the stapler from the Stapler Frame
Shaft. If removed, the position where the Staple
Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) [4] shoots
[4] staples will shift from the position where the Staple
Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler) [5] receives
Staples.
Fig. 3-017
2-2. Adjusting the Stapler Phase

When the Gears or Timing Belt at the front of the
Stapler is replaced or removed for some reason, the
Gear staple shooting timing of the Staple Driver (Lower Unit
of the Stapler) does not match the staple bending
timing of the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the
Stapler). Adjust the Stapler phase following the
Timing Belt procedure described below.
Gear
Fig. 3-18
574
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(1) Detach the Gear Cover [2] from the Staple Driver
[4]
[1].
(2) Remove the E-Ring [3] to detach the Side Cover
[5] of the Stapler Clincher [4].
[3]
[5]
[2] [1]
Fig. 3-019
(3) Remove 2 E-Rings [6] to remove the Staple Jam
[7] Releasing Gear [7], Timing Belt [8], and Relay
Gear 1 [9]. Remove the Spacer and Spring at the
[8]
back of the Staple Jam Releasing Gear.
(4) Remove 1 Screw [10] and Spring [11] to remove
[6] [9] the Belt Tentioner [12].
[11] [10]
[12]
Fig. 3-020
(5) Remove the Timing Belt [13].
[15]
(6) Remove 1 E-Ring [14] to remove the Staple
[14] Position Check Gear [15].
[13]
Fig. 3-021
575
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(7) Turn the Gear [16] to align the round hole in the
Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole [17] at
the back.
[16]
[17]
Fig. 3-022
(8) Insert a Pin [18] with a diameter of approximately
2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is
recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the
Gear.
[18]
Fig. 3-023
(9) Turn the Gear [19] to align the Round Hole in the
Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole [20] at
[19]
the back.
[20]
Fig. 3-024
576
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(10) Insert a Pin [21] with a diameter of approximately

2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is
recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the
Gear.
[21]
Fig. 3-025
(11) With the Gears and Cam fixed, install the Timing
Belt [22] on Gears [23] and [24].
[23]
[22]
[24]
Fig. 3-026
(12) Mount the Staple Position Check Gear [27] so
that the Blue Mark [25] on the Staple Position
[26]
Check Gear is aligned with the Round Hole [26]
in the frame.
[25] Caution:
The position where the Blue Mark is aligned with
the Round Hole is the home position for stapling. If
[27]
the Staple Jam Cancel Dial is turned for some
reason, the home position deviates, making it
impossible to remove the Stapler Cartridge. If such
a case, the Gear can be returned to the home
position by checking Blue Mark position.
Therefore, it is necessary to mount the Gear at the
correct position.
Fig. 3-027
(13) Remove the Pin securing the Gear to the Cam.
[28] (14) Assemble the Spring [28], Spacer [29], Staple
Jam Releasing Gear [30], Timing Belt [31], and
[31] Relay Gear [32] and secure them with 1 E-Ring
[33].
[29] [32]
[30] [33]
Fig. 3-028
577
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-3. Adjusting the Phase of the Gear in the Saddle

Unit
If the Gears at the front of the Saddle Unit or the
Paper Fold Rollers in the Sale Unit are replaced or
[2] removed for some reason, adjust the Gear phase
following the procedure described below.
(1) The Paper Fold Rollers [1] and Saddle Cam [2]
must be positioned as shown below.
[1]
Fig. 3-029
(2) With the Paper Fold Rollers and Saddle Cam
positioned as shown in Fig. 3-029, mount Gears
as shown in Fig. 3-030.
• Align the mark (either of two marks) on the
[3] saddle cam drive gear [3] with the mark on
the relay gear [4] (on the half of the periphery
where gears with a smaller face width are
[4] arranged).
• With the mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear
[3] aligned with the mark on the Relay Gear
[4], align the other mark on the relay gear with
[5] the rib of the Paper Folding Roller Drive Gear
[5].
Fig. 3-030
2-4. Removing the Saddle Unit

[3] (1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)
[2] (2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(3) Open the Jam Removal Cover [1]; then, remove
2 Screws [2] and the Right Stay [3].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-031
578
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(4) Turn the Fold Jam Releasing Dial Assembly [4]

[5] to move the Paper Retaining Plate Assembly [5]
to the inside.
[4]
Fig. 3-032
(5) Remove the Stop Ring [6], and detach the
[6] Timing Belt [7].
(6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [8].
[7]
[8]
Fig. 3-033
(7) Remove 3 Screws [9], and slide out the Stapler
[10] [9]
Unit [10] slightly to the front.
(8) Slide out the Saddle Unit [11] to the front.
[9] [11]
Fig. 3-034
2-5. Removing the Processing Tray Assembly

[1]
(1) Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover.
(See 1-5.)
(2) Remove the Side Guide. (See 1-7.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1], and disconnect 5
[2] Connectors [2].
[2] [1] [2]
Fig. 3-035
579
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(4) Pull the processing Stopper Base [3] to the front,

and free the Claw [5] at the front and the Claw [6]
at the rear of the Processing Stopper [4].
[6]
[5]
[4] [4]
[3]
Fig. 3-036
(5) Disconnect 3 Connectors [7].
(6) Release 2 Claws [8] of the harness retainer, and
detach the Motor Harness [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 3-037
580
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(7) Remove the Stop Ring [10], the flange [15], and
detach the Timing Belt [11].
(8) Disconnect the Connector [12], and free the
Harness [14] from the Edge Saddle [13].
[12]
[11] [14]
[15]
[10]
[13]
Fig. 3-038
(9) Remove 2 Screws [15], and slide the Processing
Tray Assembly [16] to the rear; then, lift it to
detach.
[16]
[15]
Fig. 3-039
581
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-6. Removing the Paddle Assembly

[1] (1) Remove the Processing Tray Assembly.
(See 2-3.)
(2) Place the Processing Tray Assembly [1] as
shown.
Caution:
Be sure to take care not to damage the Aligning
Plate [2].
[2]
Fig. 3-040
(3) Detach the Timing Belt [3], and remove 2 Screws
[4].
[4]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-041
(4) Separate the Processing Tray Assembly [5] and
the Paddle Assembly [6] as shown.
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-042
582
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-7. Removing the Staple/Fold Drive Unit

[2]
[1] (1) Open the Front Door [1], and slide out the
Stapler Unit [2] slightly to the front.
Fig. 3-043
(2) Remove 1 screw [3], and detach the Interface
Retainer [4].
[9] (3) Free the six Harness Retainers [5], and
disconnect the Connector [6].
(4) Free the Harness [7] from the Harness Retainer
[8]
[5].
[7]
(5) Free the Harness [7] from the Edge Saddle [8];
then, disconnect the two Connectors [9].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[7] [5]
[5]
[4] [5] [7]
Fig. 3-044
(6) Release the Harness Retainer [10], and
[14] [11] disconnect the Connector [11].
(7) Free the Harness [12] from the Harness Retainer
[10].
[12] (8) Free the Harness [12] for the Edge Saddle [13];
and disconnect the two Connectors [14].
[10]
[13]
Fig. 3-045
583
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(9) Remove 1 Screw [15], and free the Claw [17] of

[15]
the Harness Guide from the Long Angle [16] of
the Base Plate.
[17]
[16]
Fig. 3-046
(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors [18], and free the
Harness [20] from the Edge Saddle [19].
[18]
[20]
[18] [19]
Fig. 3-047
[21]
[21]
[21]
Fig. 3-048
584
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(12) Remove 1 Screw [22], and detach the Staple/

Fold Drive Unit [23].
[22]
[23]
Fig. 3-049
2-8. Removing the Feed Motor Unit

[3] (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(2) Release the Harness Retainer [5], and
[3] disconnect the Connector [6].
(3) Disconnect the Connector [7].
[1] [7] (4) Remove 1 Screw [1], and detach the Harness
Guide [2].
(5) Remove 3 Screws [3], and detach the Feed
Motor Unit [4].
[2]
[4]
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-050
585
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-9. Removing the Feed Roller

(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)
(2) Remove the Upper Right Cover Assembly.
(See 1-6.)
(3) Remove the Feed Motor Unit. (See 2-6.)
(4) Remove 1 Screw [1].
Bushing [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
Fig. 3-051
[4]
Fig. 3-052
586
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(7) Remove the Gear [5], and detach the Gear [6]
while spreading the Claw.
[5]
[8]
[9] Bushing [8].
(9) Remove 1 Screws [9], and detach the Inlet
Sensor [10].
(10) Remove the Lower Paper Guide [11].
[10]
[7] [6]
[11]
Fig. 3-053
(11) Remove the Feed Roller [12].
[12]
Fig. 3-054
2-10. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (upper)

(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)
[1] (2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.
Fig. 3-055
587
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to

move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
(upper) [3].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-056
(4) Push up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4]
from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller
(upper) [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-057
(5) Shift up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4], and
[6]
then push it down to detach the Stack Deliver
[4] Roller (upper) [4].
(6) Likewise, remove the Stack Delivery Roller
(upper) [6] at the front.
Fig. 3-058
588
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-11. Removing the Paddle

(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)
[1] (2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.
Fig. 3-059
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to
move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
[3] (upper) [3].
[2]
Fig. 3-060
(4) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free
one side of the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft
[5].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-061
589
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(5) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free

the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-062
(6) Remove the Paddle [6] in the direction of the
[1] arrow.
(7) Likewise, remove the other Paddle.
Fig. 3-063
2-12. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (lower)/

[1] Delivery Belt
(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly, and separate it
from the Processing Tray Assembly. (See 2-4.)
(2) Slide the Aligning Plate (front) [2] and the
Aligning Plate (rear) [3] of the Processing Tray
[3]
Assembly [1] by sliding them to the outside.
[2]
Fig. 3-064
(3) Remove the Processing Tray Stopper [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-065
590
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(4) Remove the Screw [5], and detach the Paper

[5] Guide (front) [7] while freeing 2 Claws [6].
[7]
[6]
Fig. 3-066
(5) Remove 1 Screw [8]; then, while freeing the
[8] Claw [9], detach the Paper Guide (rear) [10].
[10]
[9]
Fig. 3-067
(6) Remove 2 Stop Rings [11]; then, move 2
Bushings [12] to the inside.
[12]
[11]
[11]
[12]
Fig. 3-068
(7) Remove 4 Screws [13]; then, lift the Stack
Delivery Roller Assembly (lower) [14] to detach.
[13]
[14] [13]
Fig. 3-069
591
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(8) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller (lower) [15]

[16] and 2 Delivery Belts [16].
[15]
Fig. 3-070
Caution:
Be sure to mount them so that the Edges [17] of
the Claws of the Delivery Belts are flush.
[17]
Fig. 3-071
11.1.3.1.3. PCBs
3-1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB
(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(2) Disconnect 17 Connectors [1], and remove 1
[2]
[3] Screw [2].
(3) Free the PCB Retainer [3], and detach the
[1]
[1]
Finisher Controller PCB [4].
[1]
[4]
Fig. 3-072
3-2. Removing the Slide Home Position PCB

[1]
(1) Open the Front Door [1], and turn the Tab [2] on
the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to
slide the Stapler to the frontmost point.
(2) Remove the Stapler Unit. (See 2-1.)
[2]
Fig. 3-073
592
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(3) Place the Stapler Unit [3] as shown.

(4) Remove 2 Screws [4], and detach the Guide [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-074
(5) Turn the Tab [2] on the Stapler side in the
direction of the arrow so that the Fixing Screw [7]
[2]
of the Slide Home Position PCB [6] is in view
through the round hole.
(6) Remove the Fixing Screw [7].
[6]
[7]
Fig. 3-075
(8) Remove the Flexible Cable Retainer [9].
[8] [10]
(9) Free the Lock [10] of the Connector in the
[11] direction of the arrow; then, detach the Flexible
Cable [11], and then detach the Slide Home
Position PCB [12].
[12]
[9]
Fig. 3-076
593
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.3.2. Punch Unit (Option)
11.1.3.2.1. Puncher Driving System
1-1. Removing the Punch Motor
[2] (1) Remove 2 Screws [1].
(2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the
Punch Motor [3].
[1] [3]
Fig. 3-077
1-2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor

[4] (1) Disconnect Connector J1001 [1].
(2) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide
[3] [2].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [4] to remove the Horizontal
Registration Motor [5].
[1]
[2]
[5]
Fig. 3-078
1-3. Removing the Punch Unit

[1] [2] (1) Remove the Waste Case.
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1] to detach the Jam
Processing Cover [2].
Fig. 3-079
(3) Disconnect the Connector J1005 [3].
[4].
[3]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-080
594
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

[6] (6) Remove 1 Screw [7] and Sensor Support Plate
[8].
[8] [7]
Fig. 3-081
(7) Remove 1 Screw [9] and Washer [10].
(9) Remove 2 Screws [12] to detach the Base Cover
[13].
[9]
[10]
[13]
[11] [12]
Fig. 3-082
595
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(10) Remove 4 Screws [14] to remove the Upper

Transmission Sensor Unit [15] and Lower
[15]
Transmission Sensor [16].
[14] [14] [16] [14]
Fig. 3-083
(11) Remove the Punch Unit [18] from the Horizontal
[17] Registration Motor Assembly [17].
[18]
Fig. 3-084
11.1.3.2.2. PCBs
2-1. Removing the Punch Controller PCB
[2] [3]
(2) Disconnect 5 Connectors [2] to remove the
Punch Controller PCB [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-085
596
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-2. Removing the Photo Sensor PCB

(1) Remove the Punch Motor. (See 1-1.)
[4] [1] (2) Remove 1 Screw [1].
[2] on the PCB, then detach the PCB Cover [4].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-086
[6]
Photosensor PCB [6].
[5]
Fig. 3-087
2-3. Removing the LED PCB

(1) Remove the Waste Case.
(2) Disconnect Connector J1005 [1].
[1]
[2].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-088
597
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(4) Remove the Screw [4] and Washer [5].

(6) Remove 1 Screw [7] to detach the Base Cover
[8].
[4]
[5]
[8]
[6] [7]
Fig. 3-089
[10] (8) Disconnect the Connector [10] to remove the
[9]
LED PCB [11].
[11]
Fig. 3-090
598
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2-4. Removing the Waste-Full Photo Sensor PCB

(1) Remove the Punch Controller PCB. (See 2-1.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] to remove the PCB Film
[2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-091
Waste-full Photosensor PCB [4].
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-092
2-5. Removing the Waste Full LED PCB

Waste-full LED PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 3-093
599
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.4. Maintenance and Inspection
11.1.4.1. Periodically Replaced Parts
11.1.4.1.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.1.4.2. Consumables and Durables

Some components of the Machine may require replacement once or more over the period of machine
warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as needed.
11.1.4.2.1. Saddle / Finisher Unit
No. Part Name Part No. Q’ty Expected Life Remarks

A single cartridge is
1 Stapler 4G1-4268-000 1 300,000 operations good for about 5,000
operations.
Table. 4-001
11.1.4.3. Scheduled Maintenance
Item Interval Description Remarks

Feeding Assembly Roller
Feeding Assembly Member Wiping with water.
Minimum maintenance intervals
Paper Path Guide Cleaning
of host machine
Transmission Type Sensor
Dry wiping.
(Optional Punch Unit)
Table. 4-002
600
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5. Troubleshooting
11.1.5.1. Standards and Adjustments
11.1.5.1.1. Electrical System (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. Adjusting the Folding Position
The folding position is adjusted by matching it with the stapling position.
IF you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new
PCB. Perform the following if the folding position must be adjusted for some reason.
Caution:
Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper. In such a case, change
the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine.
1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 5-001
2) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16mm.
• To move the folding position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
• To move the folding position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
• Turn on Points 1, 4 and 8 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press PSW1 and PWS2 at
once, and settings can be cleared.
- direction + direction
Fig. 5-002
3) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the folding position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again (Adjustable range ±5 mm).
601
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Adjusting the Middle 2-Point Stapling Position (Adjustment area : ±5 mm)
The stapling position is adjusted by matching it with the folding position.
If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new
PCB. Perform the following if the stapling position must be adjusted for some reason.
Caution:
Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper.
In such a case, change the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine.
1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 5-003
2) Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0.14mm.
• To move the stapling position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
• To move the stapling position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
• Turn on Points 1, 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press the PSW1 and PSW2 at the
same time clears the adjustment value.
- direction + direction
Fig. 5-004
3) When adjustment of the stapling position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the stapling position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the stapling position again.
602
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.1.2. Electrical System (Punch Unit; Option)
1. Adjusting the Punch Hole Position
This mode requires operation in service mode. The range of hole displacement is between 3 and -3 in
1-mm increments. A higher setting will move the hole toward the leading edge of sheet. (See the
Service Manual of the Host Machine.)
2. Adjusting the Sensor Output

Perform the following when the Punch Controller PCB, Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photosensor
PCB/LED PCB), or Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photosensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB) has been
replaced.
1) Shift bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5-005
2) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the
sensor output.
• The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the Punch Controller PCB are ON: LED1001, LED1002,
LED1003.
3) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
3. Registering the Number of Punch Hole

Perform the following to register the type of punch unit (number of holes) used to the IC on the Punch
Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher. Be sure to register the type whenever you have
replaced the Punch Controller PCB.
1) Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5-006
2) Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes.
• Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to bottom).
Number of Punch Hole LED1001 LED1002 LED1003

2 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ) ON OFF OFF
2 / 3 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) ON ON OFF
4 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) OFF ON OFF
Table 5-001
3) Press SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of
punch holes on the Punch Controller PCB.
• A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003 will
cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration.
4) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
603
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4. After Replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)

1) Turn off the Host Machine.
2) Set bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5-007
3) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time.
• The presses will initialize the EEP-ROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003) will
go ON.
4) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.
604
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.2. Arrangement of Electric Components
11.1.5.2.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
1. Sensors, Microswitches, and Clutch
MS3
PI14
PI16
PI24
PI4
PI23 PI17
MS1
PI22
PI13 MS2
PI19
PI20
PI21
PI18
PI15
PI5 PI3
PI1
PI2
PI7
PI12
CL1
PI8 PI9
PI6
PI11
PI10
Fig. 5-008
605
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Name Notation Description

Photo-interrupters PI1 Inlet paper detection
PI2 Paddle home position detection
PI3 Stack roller home position detection
PI4 Aligning plate home position (front) detection
PI5 Aligning plate home position (rear) detection
PI6 Processing tray paper detection
PI7 Delivery belt home position detection
PI8 Tray paper detection
PI9 Paper surface detection
PI10 Folding position detection
PI11 Folding home position detection
PI12 Folding roller home position detection
PI13 Bind tray paper detection
PI14 Stapler / fold motor clock detection
PI15 Shift upper limit detection
PI16 Shift lower limit detection
PI17 Shift motor clock detection
PI18 Slide home position detection (inside stapler)
PI19 Stapler drive home position detection (inside stapler)
PI20 Staple detection (inside stapler)
PI21 Staple top position detection (in stapler)
PI22 Front door open detection
PI23 Upper cover open detection
PI24 Paper full detection
Micro Switch MS1 Front door open detection
MS2 Joint open detection
MS3 Staple safety detection
Clutch CL1 Bind clutch
Table 5-002
606
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Motor PCBs
M1
M2
M8
M3 M7
M5
M4
[1]
M6
Fig. 5-009
607
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

Motor M1 Paddle Motor
M2 Feed Motor
M3 Delivery Motor
M4 Alignment Motor (front)
M5 Alignment Motor (rear)
M6 Shift Motor
M7 Staple / Fold Motor
M8 Slide Motor
Finisher Controller [1] Finisher Control
PCB
Table 5-003
608
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
1. Sensors
PI3P
PI1P
PI2P
Fig. 5-010

Photo-interrupters PI1P Puncher home position detection
PI2P Horizontal registration home position detection
PI3P Punch motor clock detection
Table 5-004
609
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
2. Motors
M1
M2
Fig. 5-011

Motor M1P Punch Motor
M2P Horizontal Registration Motor
Table 5-005
610
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3. PCBs
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
Fig. 5-012
Ref. Name
[1] Punch Controller PCB
[2] Photosensor PCB
[3] LED PCB
[4] Waste Full Photosensor PCB
[5] Waste Full LED PCB
Table 5-006
611
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.3. LEDs and Check Pins by PCB
Of the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require
special tools and a high degree of accuracy.
11.1.5.3.1. Finisher Controller PCB

1 6
6 1 1 2
CN13
1 12 1 10
CN8 4 1 CN18 CN10 CN3
CN6
1
CN7
3
CB1
CN1
7
9
1
CN4
5
CN14
1
1 1
15
CN2
CN5
7
1
CN12
3
CN19
1
1 5
12
LED3 LED2 LED1
CN15
CN16
PSW3 PSW2 PSW1
1
CN11
12
CN9 7 1
CN17
6 1 SW1 1 9
Fig. 5-013
Switch Description
SW1 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
PSW1 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
PSW2 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
PSW3 Factory mode
Table 5-007
612
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.3.2. Punch Controller PCB
13 1
4
J1007
J1005
91
J1006
SW1001
51
J1001
SW1002
SW1003
1 1
LED1001
J1002
LED1002
LED1003
2
J1003 J1004
1 10 1 5
Fig. 5-014
Switch Description
SW1001 Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.
Table 5-008
613
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.4. Troubleshooting
11.1.5.4.1. Troubleshooting (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. E7-26, Finisher Unit Back-Up Memory Fault

1)Turn off and then on the Host Machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-010
2. E7-21, Feed Motor Fault
Stack Feed Roller (upper) Home Position Sensor (PI12)

1) Check the stack feed roller (upper) home position sensor. Is it normal?
NO : Replace the sensor.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the feed motor normal?
NO : Correct the wring.
Feed Roller
3) Try turning the stack feed roller (upper) shaft by hand. Does the stack feed roller
(upper) move up/down normally?
NO : Correct the mechanical system.
Feed Motor (M1), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the feed motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-011
3. E7-51, Delivery Motor Fault
Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7)

1) Check the delivery belt home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the delivery motor normal?
3) Try turning the stack delivery roller by hand. Is the rotation smooth?
NO : Correct the mechanical system.
Delivery Motor (M3), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the delivery motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-012
614
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
4. E7-22, Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Fault
Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (rear; PI5)

1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (rear). Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the rear alignment motor
(rear) normal?
Aligning Plate (rear)
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the path of the aligning plate?
YES: Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Alignment Motor (rear; M5), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the alignment motor (rear). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-013
5. E7-23, Staple / Fold Motor Fault
Wiring
1) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Staple/Fold Motor
normal?
Stapler Unit
2) Try turning the staple jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
YES : Correct the mechanical system.
Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB
3) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-014
Finisher Controller PCB, Stapler Unit

1) Does the stapler / fold motor operate at the appropriate timing?
YES: Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
NO : Check the stapler unit drive mechanism: if faulty, correct it; if normal.
Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB
2) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-015
Saddle Unit
3) Try turning the fold jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
Table 5-016
615
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
6. E7-24, Slide Motor Fault
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)

1) Check the slide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
NO : Replace the sensor PCB.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the slide motor normal?
Stapler Unit
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the stapler path?
Slide Motor (M8), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the slide motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-018
7. E7-22, Alignment Motor (front) Fault
Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (front; PI4)

1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (front). Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the front aligning plate
motor (front) normal?
Aligning Plate (front)
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the aligning plate path?
Alignment Motor (front; M4), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the Alignment motor (front). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-019
8. E7-27, Shift Motor Fault
Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)

1) Check the paper surface sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Tray Up / Down Mechanism
2) Check the tray up/down mechanism. Is the mechanism normal?
NO : Correct the mechanism.
3) Is 24 VDC supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB to the shift motor as soon as
the tray is driven?
616
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Shift Motor (M6), Wiring
4) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the shift motor normal?
YES: Replace the shift motor.
Table 5-020
9. E7-52, Paddle Motor Fault (For DA-FS325 only)
Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2)

1) Check the paddle home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)
2) Check the swing guide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the paddle motor normal?
Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly
4) Try turning the paddle motor clockwise and counter-clockwise by hands. Is there
mechanical tapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up/down movement of the
swing guide?
Paddle Motor (M2), Finisher Controller PCB
5) Try replacing the paddle motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-024
617
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.4.2. Troubleshooting (Punch Unit, Option)
1. E7-54, Communication Faulty
Finisher Controller PCB, Punch Controller PCB

1) Turn off and then on the host machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB
normal?
Power Supply
3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24VDC?
YES: Replace the punch controller PCB.
Table 5-025
2. E7-55, Punch Unit Power Supply Fault
Finisher Controller PCB, Host Machine DC Controller PCB

1) Turn off and then off the host machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB
normal?
Power Supply
3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN4-3 (-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC?
YES: Replace the punch controller PCB.
Table 5-027
618
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
3. E7-28, Punch Motor Fault
Punch Motor Home Position Sensor (PI1P)

1) Check the punch home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P)
2) Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensor normal?
Punch Mechanism, Punch Motor (M1P)
4) Is there a fault in the punch mechanism?
YES: Correct the punch mechanism.
NO : Replace the punch motor.
Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB
5) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-028
4. E7-57, Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration) Fault
Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photo Sensor PCB / LED PCB)

1) Check the horizontal registration sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the horizontal registration
sensor normal?
3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem correct?
YES: End.
Table 5-029
619
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
5. E7-58, Punch Sensor (Waste Full) Fault
Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB)
1) Check the waste full sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the waste full sensor normal?
YES: End.
Table 5-030
6. E7-29, Horizontal Registration Motor Fault
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P)

1) Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration
home position sensor normal?
Horizontal Registration Mechanism, Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)
3) Is there a fault in the horizontal registration mechanism?
YES: Correct the horizontal registration mechanism.
NO : Replace the horizontal registration motor.
YES: End.
Table 5-031
620
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.5.5. Self Diagnosis
11.1.5.5.1. Alarm
1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
Timing of
Error Condition Operation Resetting
Detection
Stapler Absent The stapler is not Monitored at all The staple / fold Set the stapler.
set. times motor (M7) and the
slide motor (M8)
will stop.
Stapler Absent The staple Monitored at all Normal operation Replace the staple
cartridge has run times will continue; cartridge; or, set it
out of staples. however, operation correctly.
is subject to
instructions from
the host machine.
Mixed Sheets Sheets of different When a sheet of a The sheet will be —
sizes are deposited different size is aligned based on
in the placed. maximum size
compartment. width and delivered
as a stack.
Overstacking The number of When an extra The sheets will be —
for Stapling sheets in the sheet is placed. delivered with
compartment has stapling.
exceeded the limit
imposed on
stapling.
Stack Tray The number of When an extra Normal operation Remove the sheets
Overstacking sheets deposited sheet is placed. will continue. from the delivery
on the delivery tray tray.
has exceeded the
limit imposed on
the tray. (sheets,
sets)
Saddle Remove the stack When an extra Normal operation Remove the stack
Overstacking from the bind tray. sheet is placed. will continue. from the bind tray.
More than 10
stacks are
deposited on the
folded stack tray.
Table 5-034
621
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Timing of
Error Condition Operation Resetting
Detection
Punch Waste The amount of During punching. Normal operation Remove the waste
Paper Full waste paper in the will continue. paper from the
waste case has waste case.
reached the limit.
Punch Waste The amount of During punching. Punching will be Remove the waste
Paper Excess waste paper in the disabled. paper from the
(Overflow) waste case has water case.
exceeded the limit.
Table 5-035
622
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.1.6. Appendix
11.1.6.1. Signals and Abbreviations
The following presents the abbreviations of signals used in this manual and in drawings, and the meaning of
each signal.
Reference:
Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals.
Finisher / Saddle-Stitch Unit

ADJ_TRAY_S Jog Tray Paper Detect Signal
B_CLU Bind Clutch Drive Signal
BDL_ROL_HP Swing Guide HP Detect Signal
BIND_CLK Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
BIND_EMPS Bind Tray Paper Detect Signal
BIND_HP Folding HP Detect Signal
BIND_L Fold Position LED ON Signal
BINDMTR Staple/Fold Motor Drive Signal
BIND_P Fold Position Paper Detect Signal
BIND_ROL_HP Bundle Feed Roller HP Detect Signal
EJCT_BLT_HP Eject Belt HP Detect Signal
EJCTMTR Eject Motor Drive Signal
ENT_S Inlet Paper Detect Signal
FDOOR_S Front Door Open Detect Signal
FEEDMTR Feed Motor Drive Signal
FJOG_HP Front Jog Plate HP Detect Signal
FJOGMTR Front Jog Motor Drive Signal
FRONT_SW Front Door Switch Signal
HOOK_S Hook Empty Detect Signal
JOINT_SW Joint Switch Signal
LVL_S Paper Surface Detect Signal
PAPER_F Paper Full Detect Signal
PDL_HP Paddle HP Detect Signal
PDLMTR Paddle Motor Drive Signal
RJOG_HP Rear Jog Plate HP Detect Signal
RJOGMTR Rear Jog Motor Drive Signal
SELF_P Hook Top Position Detect Signal
SIFT_CLK Sift Motor Clock Detect Signal
SIFT_DNLMT Sift Down Limit Detect Signal
SIFTMTR Sift Motor Drive Signal
SIFT_UPLMT Sift Upper Limit Detect Signal
SLID_HP Slide HP Detect Signal
SLIDMTR Slide Motor Drive Signal
STPL_CNCT Stapler Connect Detect Signal
STPL_HP Staple HP Detect Signal
STPLSAFE_SW Staple Safety Switch Signal
TOPCOV_S Top Cover Open Detect Signal
TRY_EMPS Tray Paper Detect Signal
623
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Punch Unit (Option)

CLOCK Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal
DUSTLED Dust LED ON Signal
DUSTPTR Dust Full Detect Signal
PAEND Paper End Detect Signal
PUNCH Punch HP Detect Signal
SLIDE Side Registration HP Detect Signal
SREG1 Side Registration Detect Signal 1
REG4 Side Registration Detect Signal 4
LEDON1 LED1 ON Signal
624
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
Ver. 1.1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11.1.7.
1 CN56-1 +12V CN56-6
1
9 2 CN56-2 +12V CN56-5
2
CN20-1 FGND CN20-1 1
2 DC+24V CN1-1 1 3 CN56-3 FEEDMTR_A CN56-4
3
CN20-2 PGND CN20-2 CN10-1 +12V MOT Feed Motor
1 N.C. CN1-2 2 4 CN56-4 FEEDMTR_*A CN56-3
4 M1
CN20-3 DC+24VP CN20-3 2 CN10-2 +12V
PGND CN1-3 3 5 CN56-5 FEEDMTR_B CN56-2
5
CN20-4 N.C. CN20-4 CN10-3 FEEDMTR_A
4 6 CN56-6 FEEDMTR_*B CN56-1
6
4 CN10-4 FEEDMTR_*A
CN20A-1 SGND CN20A-1 CN10-5 FEEDMTR_B
5
CN20A-2 DC+24VP CN20A-2
3 6
5 3 CN10-6 FEEDMTR_*B F
CN20A-3 RXD CN20A-3 DC+24VL CN2-1 CN10-7 +24V
7
CN20A-4 TXD CN20A-4
6 N.C. CN2-2 8
8 4 CN10-8 +24V 7 1
CN20A-5 SGND CN20A-5 SGND CN2-3 CN10-9 PDLMTR_A
9 CN57-1 +24V CN57-6
CN20A-6 N.C. CN20A-6
5 SGND CN2-4 10 8 CN57-2 +24V CN57-5
2
To Host 7 6 CN10-10 PDLMTR_*A 9 3
1 CN20A-7 SGND CN20A-7 TXD CN2-5 CN10-11 PDLMTR_B
11 CN57-3 PDLMTR_A CN57-4
CN23-3 DC+5V Machine 7 12 10 4 MOT Paddle Motor M2
2 SGND CN2-6 CN10-12 PDLMTR_*B CN57-4 PDLMTR_*A CN57-3
CN23-2 SGND CN20B-1 N.C. 8 11 5
PI4
3 RXD CN2-7 CN57-5 PDLMTR_B CN57-2
CN23-1 FJOG_HP CN20B-2 N.C. 12 6
CN57-6 PDLMTR_*B CN57-1
CN20B-3 N.C.
Sensor (Front)
Home Position
CN20B-4 N.C.
CN24-3 DC+5V
4 CN20B-5 N.C.
CN24-2 SGND
5 CN20B-6 N.C.
PI23
6
Sensor
CN24-1 TOPCOV_S CN20B-7 N.C.
1
Aligning Plate Upper Cover

CN20B-8 N.C. DC+5V CN4-1 1 1 1
CN13-1 +24V CN59-1 +24V CN59-6
2 SGND CN4-2 2 2 2
7 3 CN13-2 +24V CN59-2 +24V CN59-5
CN25-3 DC+5V FJOG_HP CN4-3 CN13-3 EJCTMTR_A
3 3 CN59-3 EJCTMTR_A CN59-4
3
CN25-2 SGND
8 4 DC+5V CN4-4 4 4 4 MOT Delivery Motor M3
5 CN13-4 EJCTMTR_*A CN59-4 EJCTMTR_*A CN59-3
PI22
9
Sensor
CN25-1 FDOOR_S SGND CN4-5 CN13-5 EJCTMTR_B
5 5 CN59-5 EJCTMTR_B CN59-2
5
Front Door
6 TOPCOV_S CN4-6 6 6 6
7 CN13-6 EJCTMTR_*B CN59-6 EJCTMTR_*B CN59-1
DC+5V CN4-7
8 SGND CN4-8 E
1 9 FDOOR_S CN4-9
CN30-3 DC+5V
CN30-2 SGND
2 1 1
CN29-1 DC+5V CN28-9
Schematic Diagram
Tray
PI6
3 2 2 1 1
Sensor
CN30-1 ADJ_TRAY_S CN29-2 SGND CN28-8 CN62-5 +24V CN63-1
3 3 2 CN62-4 FJOGMTR_A CN63-2
2
CN29-3 ADJ_TRAY_S CN28-7
4 4 3 CN62-3 FJOGMTR_*A CN63-3
3 MOT Alignment Motor (Front) M4
CN29-4 DC+5V CN28-6 1
4 5 5 CN3-1 +24V 4 CN62-2 FJOGMTR_B CN63-4
4
CN31-3 DC+5V CN29-5 SGND CN28-5 2
5 6 6 1 CN3-2 FJOGMTR_A 5 CN62-1 FJOGMTR_*B CN63-5
5
CN31-2 SGND CN29-6 EJCT_BLT_HP CN28-4 DC+5V CN5-1 3
PI7
6 7 7 2 CN3-3 FJOGMTR_*A
Sensor
CN31-1 EJCT_BLT_HP CN29-7 DC+5V CN28-3 SGND CN5-2 4
8 8 3 CN3-4 FJOGMTR_B
CN29-8 SGND CN28-2
Home Position
ADJ_TRAY_S CN5-3 5
9 9 4 CN3-5 FJOGMTR_*B
CN29-9 TRY_EMPS CN28-1 DC+5V CN5-4 6
7 5 CN3-6 +24V
CN32-3 DC+5V SGND CN5-5 7
8 6 CN3-7 RJOGMTR_A 6 1
CN32-2 SGND EJCT_BLT_HP CN5-6 8 CN64-5 +24V CN65-1
PI8
9 7 CN3-8 RJOGMTR_*A
Sensor
CN32-1 TRY_EMPS DC+5V CN5-7 9 7 CN64-4 RJOGMTR_A CN65-2
2
CN3-9 RJOGMTR_B
Processing Delivery Belt Tray Paper

8 SGND CN5-8 10 8 3
9 CN3-10 RJOGMTR_*B CN64-3 RJOGMTR_*A CN65-3 MOT Alignment Motor (Rear) M5
TRY_EMPS CN5-9 9 CN64-2 RJOGMTR_B CN65-4
4
10 DC+5V CN5-10 10 5
CN35-3 DC+5V
1 1 CN34-1 DC+5V CN33-3
10 11 CN64-1 RJOGMTR_*B CN65-5
2 2 11 SGND CN5-11
CN35-2 SGND CN34-2 SGND CN33-2 12
PI9
3 3 12 LVL_S CN5-12
Sensor
CN35-1 LVL_S CN34-3 LVL_S CN33-1 13 DC+5V CN5-13
14 SGND CN5-14 2
15 CN66-2 STPLSAFE_SH NO D
RJOG_HP CN5-15 1 Stapler Safety Switch MS3
13 CN66-1 FDOOR_SH COM
CN36-3 DC+5V
CN36-2 SGND
14
PI5
CN36-1 RJOG_HP
15
CN8-1 STPLSAFE_SW
1
Paper Surface Aligning Plate
Sensor (Rear)
Home Position
CN8-2 FRONT_SW
2
CN8-3 FRONT_SW
3 4 CN68-2 FDOOR_SH NO
4 3 Front Door Switch MS1
CN8-4 JOINT_SW CN68-1 JOINT_SH COM
CN39-3 DC+5V
1 CN8-5 JOINT_SW
5
CN39-2 BIND_P
2 1 CN8-6 DC+24VP
6
DC+5V CN16-1
PI10
3 1 1 2
Sensor
Folding
Position
CN39-1 BIND_L CN38-1 DC+5V CN37-9 BIND_P CN16-2
3
625
2 CN38-2 BIND_P CN37-8
2 BIND_L CN16-3 6
3 3 4 CN69-2 JOINT_SH NO
CN38-3 BIND_L CN37-7 DC+5V CN16-4 5 Joint Switch MS2
4 4 4 5 CN69-1 DC+24VP COM
CN40-3 DC+5V CN38-4 DC+5V CN37-6 SGND CN16-5
CN40-2 SGND
5 5 CN38-5 SGND CN37-5
5 6 BIND_HP CN16-6
7
PI11
6 6 6
Sensor
Folding
CN40-1 BIND_HP CN38-6 BIND_HP CN37-4 DC+5V CN16-7
7 CN38-7 DC+5V CN37-3
7 8 SGND CN16-8

8 CN38-8 SGND CN37-2
8 9 BIND_ROL_HP CN16-9 1 1 1
CN70-2 SIFTMTR_1 CN70-2 CN70-2 SIFTMTR_1 CN70-2
7 9 CN38-9 BIND_ROL_HP CN37-1
9 10 DC+5V CN16-10 2 2 2 MOT Shift Motor M6
CN41-3 DC+5V CN70-1 SIFTMTR_0 CN70-1 CN70-1 SIFTMTR_0 CN70-1
8 11 SGND CN16-11 CN6-1 SIFTMTR_1
1
CN41-2 SGND
12 2
PI12
9
Sensor
CN41-1 BIND_ROL_HP ENT_S CN16-12 CN6-2 SIFTMTR_0 C
3
Stack Feed
CN6-3 BINDMTR_1
Home Position Roller (Upper)

Home Position
CN6-4 BINDMTR_0
4 3 1
CN71-2 BINDMTR_1 CN71-2
1 1 10 4 2 MOT Staple/Fold Motor M7
CN44-3 DC+5V CN43-1 DC+5V CN42-3 CN71-1 BINDMTR_0 CN71-1
2 2 11
11.1.7.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit General Circuit Diagram
CN44-2 SGND CN43-2 SGND CN42-2
Inlet
PI1
3 3 12
Sensor
CN44-1 ENT_S CN43-3 ELT_S CN42-1 1 DC+5V CN15-1
2 SGND CN15-2 1 1 1
3 CN18-1 +24V CN72-2 +24V CN72-1
BIND_EMPS CN15-3 2 2 2 CLU Slide Motor CL1
4 CN18-2 B_CLU CN72-1 B_CLU CN72-2
DC+5V CN15-4
CN47-3 DC+5V
1 5 SGND CN15-5
CN47-2 SGND
2 6 SIFT_CLK CN15-6
7
PI13
3
Sensor
CN47-1 BIND_EMPS DC+5V CN15-7
Bind Tray
8 CN11-1 STPL_CNCT
1
SGND CN15-8
9 CN11-2 DC+5V
2
SIFT_DNLMT CN15-9
10 CN11-3 SLID_HP
3 7
CN48-3 DC+5V
4 DC+5V CN15-10 CN72A-1 SGND CN72-1 Stapler Unit
11 CN11-4 STPL_HP
4 6
CN48-2 SGND
5 SGND CN15-11
5 CN72A-2 SELF_P CN72-2
12 CN11-5 HOOK_S 5
Clock
P118
PI17
6 SIFT_UPLMT CN15-12 CN72A-3 HOOK_S CN72-3
Sensor
CN48-1 SIFT_CLK 6 4 STPL_HP
Shift Motor
CN11-6 SELF_P CN72A-4 STPL_HP CN72-4
CN11-7 SGND
7 3 Stapler Home P119
CN72A-5 SLID_HP CN72-5
2 CN72A-6 DC+5V CN72-6 Position Sensor
CN49-3 DC+5V
7 1 SLIP HP
8 CN72A-7 STPL_CNCT CN72-7 P120 B
CN49-2 SGND Stapler Slide Home
CN72A-8 N.C. N.C.
Shift
Limit
PI16
9 Position Sensor
Sensor
CN49-1 SIFT_DNLMT 8 CN72B-7 +24V CN72-8 P121
9 HOOK S
CN7-1 +24V
8 CN72B-6 +24V CN72-9 Hook Sensor
1 DC+5V CN9-1 10
9 CN72B-5 SLIDMTR_A CN72-10 SLIDMTR
10 2 CN7-2 +24V 11
CN50-3 DC+5V SGND CN9-2 10 CN72B-4 SLIDMTR_*A CN72-11
3 CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A 12 Slide Motor (M8)
CN50-2 SGND
11 PDL_HP CN9-3 11 CN72B-3 SLIDMTR_B CN72-12
CN7-4 SLIDMTR_*A
Limit
4 13
PI15
12 SGND CN9-4
Sensor
CN50-1 SIFT_UPLMT 12 CN72B-2 SLIDMTR_*B CN72-13
5 CN7-5 SLIDMTR_B
Shift Upper
BIND_CLK CN9-5 13 CN72B-1 N.C. CN72-14 M8
6 CN7-6 SLIDMTR_*B 14
DC+5V CN9-6 CN72C-1 FG CN72-15
7 CN7-7 N.C.
DC+5V CN9-7
CN51-3 DC+5V
1 8 SGND CN9-8
CN51-2 SGND
2 9 BDL_ROL_HP CN9-9
PI2
3
Sensor
Position
CN51-1 PDL_HP
Paddle Home
1 CN12-1 PNCH_TXD
1
DC+5V CN19-1
2 CN12-2 SGND
2
4 SGND CN19-2
CN52-3 DC+5V 3 PNCH_RXD
3
5 PAPER_F CN19-3 CN12-3
CN52-2 BIND_CLK CN12-4 PNCH_CNCT
4
Clock
PI14
6
Sensor
CN52-1 DC+5V CN12-5 PNCH_TM_S
5
To Punch Unit (Option)
CN55-3 DC+5V
1 1 CN54-1 DC+5V CN53-3
7 A
CN55-2 SGND
2 2 CN54-2 SGND CN53-2
8 SGND CN17-1
PI3
3 3 9 TXD2 CN17-2 CN14-1 PNCH_+5V
9
Sensor
CN55-1 BDL_ROL_HP CN54-3 BDL_ROL_HP CN53-1 10
RXD2 CN17-3
Staple/Fold Swing Guide

CN14-2 PNCH_SGND
Home Position
DSR CN17-4 CN14-3 PNCH_PGND
11
CN73-3 DC+5V
1 DTR CN17-5 CN14-4 N.C.
2 RESET CN17-6 CN14-5 PNCH_+24V
12
CN73-2 SGND
PI24
3
Sensor
CN73-1 PAPER_F
Full Stack
APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Ver. 1.1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2011 J2011
F
J1007-13
1 1
J1007-12
2 2
J1007-11 3 3 Photo-sensor
J1007-10 PCB
4 4
J1007-9
5 5
J1007-8
6 6
J1007-7
7 7
J2010 J2010
J1007-6
1 1
J1007-5
2 2
J1007-4 3 3 LED PCB
J2011-1
J2011-2
J2011-3
J2011-4
J2011-5
J2011-6
J2011-7
J2010-1
J2010-2
J2010-3
J2010-4
J2010-5
J2010-6
J1007-3
4 4
J1007-2
5 5
J1007-1 E
6 6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
J1007
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
J1007
J1005 J1005 J2006 J2006 Waste Bottle Full

Photo-sensor
4 4 1 1
3 3 2 2 PCB
2 2
1 1
J2005 J2005 Waste Bottle

1 1 Full LED PCB
2 2
D
J2009
1 1 PI3P
2 2 Punch Motor Clock
3 3 Sensor
J1006 J1006
9 9
11.1.7.2. Punch Unit General Circuit Diagram
8 8
7 7 J2008
626
6 6 1 1 PI1P
5 5 2 2 Punch Home Position
CN12 CN12 4 4 3 3 Sensor
10 10 3 3
9 9 2 2
8 8 1 1
J2007

7 7 PI2P
1 1
6 6 Horizontal Registration C
2 2
5 5 Home Position
3 3
4 4 Sensor
3 3
2 2 J1001 J1001 J2001
1 1
5 5 1 M2P
4 4 2 Horizontal Registration
M
3 3 3 Motor
Finisher Unit
CN14 CN14 2 2 4
1 1
5 5
4 4
J1002 J1002 J2002
3 3
2 2 1 1 1 M1P
M
1 1 2 2 2 Punch Motor
5
4
3
2
1
J1003 J1004 B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
5
4
3
2
1
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
J2003 J2004
APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
DP-C262/C322
11.2. DA-FS320
11.2.1. General Description
11.2.1.1. Features
1. Compact and light weight
2. Sorting and stapling by shift-sort

Sheet Stacking, matching, offset stacking, and stapling are performed on a Halfway-processing Tray.
3. Stack Tray loading

The Stack Tray is capable of holding approximately 500 small-sized sheets, or 250 large-sized sheets.
11.2.1.2. Specifications

Stacking 1 location
Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)
Face-down
Feed Reference Center reference
Stacking Paper Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5, B4, B5, B5-R
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS
Paper Weight 17 - 24 lb (64 - 90 g/m2)
Mode Non-Sort stack
Sort stack
Staple stack
Stack Height Non-Sort Note 1, 2
Small-size: 500 sheets
A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R,LTR, LTR-R
A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS
Shift-Sort
Small-size: 500 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, LTR, LTR-R
Staple
Small-size : 10- 30 sheets; 45-16 sets
2-9 sheets; 70-50 sets
A4, A4-R, B5, LTR, LTR-R
Large-size : 10- 20 sheets; 25-12 sets
2-9 sheets; 70-28 sets
Paper Detection No
Control Panel No
Display No
Size 7.17 x 19.61 x 10.12 in Excluding the
(W x D x H) (182 x 498 x 257 mm) installation kit
Weight Approx. 22 lb (10 kg)
Power Supply 24 VDC from Host machine
Maximum Power Less than 48 W
Consumption
Stapling Rotary cam type
627
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Stapling Position Rear 1-Point stapling
Refer to the illustration as follows.
Stapling Thickness Small-size : 30 sheets
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LTR, LTR-R
Staple Supply Cartridge of Staples (3,000/Cartridge)
Replacement Staples DQ-SS35
Staple Detection Yes
Stapling Size A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS
Manual Stapling None
Note 1 :
The number of sheets is computed based on 75 g/m2 paper.
Note 2 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes or Staple/Shift-Sort modes.
Stapling Position:
6±3 mm / 0.24±0.12 in
6±3 mm / 0.24±0.12 in
Delivery direction
628
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.2.1.3. Electrical Components

Motor 1 Feed Motor
2 Alignment Motor
3 Stack Tray Elevation Motor
Solenoid 4 Paddle Solenoid
5 Large Gear Solenoid
6 Paper Detection Solenoid
Stapler Unit 7 Stapler Unit
Micro Switch 8 Staple Safety detection
9 Stapler Cover detection
Photo-interrupters 10 Upper Cover Open detection
11 Inlet Paper detection
12 Aligning Home Position Plate detection
13 Paper Exit detection
14 Stack Tray Paper Height detection
15 Paper Hold Lever detection
16 Stack Tray Upper Limit detection
17 Paper Full detection
18 Finisher Detachment detection
11.2.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User
No. Item Timing

1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) When prompted
(indicator on Host machine's Control Panel)
629
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.2.2. Maintenance and Inspection
11.2.2.1. Periodic Part Replacement
11.2.2.2. Consumables and Durables

Some components may require replacement due to wear, deterioration or damage. Replace them as
required.
11.2.2.2.1. Finisher Unit

No. Part Name Part No. Q’ty Expected Life Remarks
A single cartridge
1 Stapler GH03-7811 1 200,000 operations
contains 3,000 staples.
11.2.2.2.2. Scheduled Maintenance

Item Interval Description Remarks
Feeding Assembly Roller
Wipe with clean cloth
Feeding Assembly Member Shortest cleaning interval of the
Cleaning moistened in water.
Paper Path Guide Host machine
Transmission Type Sensor Wipe with a dry cloth.
11.2.2.3. Disassembly and Assembly

<Removing Finisher Cover Assembly>
(1) Open and hold the Finisher Cover (14108).
(2) Release the Front and Rear Arms (14109 and
14110).
(3) Release the Rear Latch and remove the
Finisher Cover (14108).
(4) Remove 1 Screw (14133).

(5) Remove the Front Cover Assembly (14101).
Note:
When re-installing the Cover, make sure 1 Latch
Hook is in the hole and the Release Lever works
correctly.
630
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(6) Remove 1 Screw (14021).

(7) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly (14105).
Note:
When re-installing the Cover, make sure 2 Latch
Hooks are in the holes.
<Removing Finisher Tray Cover Assembly>

(9) Remove the Tray Assembly (14015).
<Removing Finisher Controller PC Board>

(10) Remove 2 Screws (14132) and 2 Washers
(14134).
(11) Remove the Right Cover (14104).
(12) Lift the PCB Cover Mylar (14135) up.
631
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(13) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the CONT PC

Board.
(14) Remove 1 Screw (14133).
(15) Remove the CONT PC Board (14528).
<Removing Rollers>
(16) Lift up the Guide Base (14301) Assembly.
(17) Clean the Exit Roller (14437).

(19) Remove 1 Screw (14021) and 1 Screw (14131).
(20) Remove the Guide Base (14332) Assembly.
(21) Release the Tension Spring (14524) and Latch,

and then remove the Lock Arm (14525).
632
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(22) Remove the Tension Spring (14524).

(23) Remove 1 Snap Ring (14523).
(24) Remove the Lock Lever Shaft (14520)
Assembly as illustrated.
(25) Loosen 1 Screw (14206).

(27) Remove the Upper Guide Assembly as

illustrated.
Note:
When re-installing, rotate the Timing Belt
counter-clockwise and then fasten 1 Screw.
633
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

(29) Remove the Feed Roller Gear (14202).
(31) Remove the Feed Roller Assembly (14411).
(32) Remove the Feed Arm Assembly (14413).
(33) Remove 1 Screw (14021) and 1 Screw (14133).

(34) Remove the Tray Guide Assembly (14111).
634
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(35) Disconnect 3 Harnesses (14129).
Note:
When re-installing, ensure that the Harnesses are
connected correctly as illustrated.

(37) Remove the Exit Roller Gear (14201).
635
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
(39) Lift up the Guide Base (14301) Assembly.

(40) Lift up the Paper Guide (14421).
(41) Remove the Exit Roller Assembly (14436) as
illustrated.
<Removing the Staple Unit>

(42) Remove 1 Screw (14443).
(43) Remove the Staple Safety Switch (14441).
(44) Release the Harness (14129) from the Harness
Clamp.
(45) Disconnect the Harness (14129).

(47) Remove the Staple Unit (14438) Assembly.
Note:
When re-installing, ensure that Staple Unit
Assembly is installed (hooked) correctly as
illustrated.
636
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322

(49) Loosen 1 Screw.
(50) Remove the Staple Unit (14438).
<Removing the Finisher Interface Cable>

(52) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamps.
(53) Disconnect 2 Harnesses and remove the
Finisher Interface Cable.
<Removing the Motors>

(56) Remove the Sensor Hold Bracket (14508).

(58) Remove the Drive Motor (14514).
637
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322


(63) Remove the Slide Base Bracket (14503).

(65) Remove the Set Motor (14431) Assembly.

638
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
Note:
When re-installing, ensure that the Harnesses are
connected correctly as illustrated.

(69) Remove the Set Motor (14431).
639
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.2.3. Operation and System Description
11.2.3.1. Outline of Operation
DA-DS330 and Host Machine exchange signals through serial communication and carry out the following 3
operation modes.
• Normal Exit
Discharge the paper into the Stack Tray.
• Staple Exit
Jog sheets of paper one at a time at the interstage stack, then staple when they reach the specified
number, and discharge into the Stack Tray.
• Shift Exit
Jog sheets of paper one at a time at the interstage stack, carry out shift operation, and discharge into the
Stack Tray.
11.2.3.2. Stapling Mechanism

Stapling Mechanism 1.
FQ-SS32
Staple Cartridge
Staple Motor
Cam
Staple Sensor
Cartridge
Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
Staple Table
• The stapler's motor rotation drives the stapler by the rotating cam via gear.
• The link is in contact with the cam. When the cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point.
Stapling Mechanism 2.
Cam
Staple Plate
Staple Table
640
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.2.3.3. Electrical Parts (Motor and Solenoid Functions)
11.2.3.3.1. Feed Motor Control
1. Feed Motor, which moves Paper Feed, Paddle Drive, Stack Delivery Unit Elevation, is 1-2 phase
exciting type, 2 phase stepping motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Each signal pulse output from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC2 in Control PCB (PBA-CONT) excites and
rotates the coil in each phase. The Motor drive current is controlled by the duty cycle from P24 of IC2.
3. Motor stops when the output signals from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC2 are changed to H and the power
supply to the motor coils are cut off.
11.2.3.3.2. Alignment Motor Control

1. The Alignment Motor, which jogs papers in the stack and carries out offset operation in Paper Exit Unit,
is a W1-2 phase exciting type, 2-phase stepping pulse motor. Its control is shown below.
2. Each signal pulse output from P10, P11, P12, P13 of IC2 in Control PCB (PBA-CONT) excites and
rotates the coil in each phase. And it combines with this output and is IC2. The electromagnetic
excitation is changed by the output of P14 and P15, and it controls the W1-2 phase exciting drive.
3. Motor stops when the output signals from P10, P11, P12, P13 of IC2 are changed to H and the power
supply to the motor coils are cut off.
641
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.2.3.3.3. Elevation Motor Control
1. Elevation Motor, which moves Stack Tray up and down, is a +24V DC brush motor. The control circuit
is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P52 and P53 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). Stack
Tray is elevated when H is output from P52 and P53 respectively, and Stack Tray is descended when H
and L are output from P52 and P53 respectively.
3. Motor stops and brakes when L and H are output from P52 and P53.
11.2.3.3.4. Staple Motor Control

1. Staple Motor, which carries out stapling, is a +24V DC brush motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from PF1, PF0 and P50 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT).
Stapling is done when L, L and H are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 respectively. Staple is at home
position when H, L and L are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 respectively.
3. Staple Motor stops and brakes when L, H and L are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 for forward and
reverse rotations.
642
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
DP-C262/C322
11.2.3.3.5. Large Gear Solenoid Control
1. An up-and-down motion of the Delivery Unit is performed by changing the drive of feed motor, which is
controlled by the Large Gear Solenoid. If the Large Gear Solenoid is turned on during rotation of the
feed motor, the Delivery Unit will move up and will be opened widely. When the Large Gear Solenoid is
turned off, the Delivery Unit will move down and will be closed.The Solenoid is driven by +24V DC. Its
control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the signal from P27 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). When the P27 is H, the Large
Gear Solenoid is turned on.
11.2.3.3.6. Paddle Solenoid Control

1. Paddle Solenoid switches the drive of the feed motor to the Paddle, which is a Flapper typed Solenoid
and is operated by +24V DC. The control circuit is shown below.
2. Solenoid is turned ON and drives the Paddle when the signal H is transmitted from PG0 of IC2 in
P.C.B. (PBA-CONT).
11.2.3.3.7. Paper Detection Solenoid Control

1. A +24V DC plunger solenoid along with a paper detection lever is used for detecting the height of the
paper delivered to the Stack Tray. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the signal from P26 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). When the P26 is H, the Solenoid is
turned on to pull the paper detection lever inside. When the P25 is H, the Solenoid is turned off to push
the paper detection lever outside.
643
Ver. 1.1 APR 2005
Panasonic
88
Software
Operating Instructions
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD001829-11
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update 6

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6
3.1.2 For other models 6
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7
1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1
3rd Edition : 2002 December 5
4th Edition : 2003 April 10
6th Edition : 2003 December 18
8th Edition : 2004 August 3
10th Edition : 2004 October 22
11th Edition : 2005 March 18
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
Start Microsoft Windows.
1.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

2.
Enter the installation password.
3. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.
Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

4.
The completion message is displayed when install is completed.
5. Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
1. Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.
The Configuration dialog box appears.

2.
General Tab
Please change the settings if necessary.
File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode
When you select this mode, the tool acquires
the type of firmware and version from the
device(s) of the specified address, and
updates the device to the latest version from
the “Local Firmware Folder”.
However, this mode cannot change the type of
firmware, so you must use the manual mode
when changing from the standard firmware to
the option firmware.
Click [OK] to finish the setup.

3.
Page 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
4.
Page 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
1. If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is
not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.1.2 For other models

1. If the device password is changed (Key Operator Password) from the default value (0000 or 000),
it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
As for three-digit Key Operator Password device, only “000” of the default value is judged “0000” in
the value.
2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool
1. Please close the all applications that are currently running.

Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a
Power User is required.
2. From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon
to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.
Click [Next>].
Note:
1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application
are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update isn’t done properly and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20
minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the
Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.
3. Click [Device Address List].
Page 7
4. Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input or Device Address List.
Click [OK].
5. Confirm the destination device(s).
Click [Next>].
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File using the

6 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 6a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 6b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select Independent File Folders
--> Step 6c1
the local \Data folder, you can select
independent file folders here.
Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 isn’t indicated.
6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
Page 9
6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe
6a3 Extracting...
6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10
6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

6b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228
6b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11
6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders" and
click [Browse...] button.
6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder and

click [OK].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
Page 12
6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder

and click [OK].
6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
7. The version check for the specified devices

starts.
Click [Next>].
Page 13
8. Verify that the information you want to update

is correct.
Then click [Next>].
Note: The firmware of PNL, SC and SPC are

transmitted separately and each time
the unit erases, writes and reboots in
the normal mode.
If you check "Send at once", all
firmware will be sent at once and then
erase, write and reboot. This "Send at
once", function cannot be used if the
firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit
SC version is V1.xxxx
(DP-3510/4510/6010).
9. Confirm the destination device(s) again.
Set timer communication if necessary.
Then click [Next>].
10. Data is transferred to the Spooler and the

update is started.
The Spooler screen appears automatically
showing the progress of the data transfer.
The spooler will take time to open depending
on the number of addresses to update.
Page 14
11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in

the spooler disappear and the communication
log is displayed.
Click [Finish] to close the tool.
After each firmware code is successfully

programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in
the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again
automatically.
Page 15
Panasonic ®
Software
Operating Instructions
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD000965-16
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4
2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5
2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update 7

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool 8
1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30
3rd Edition : 2000 September 8
4th Edition : 2000 November 28
5th Edition : 2001 June 20
6th Edition : 2001 September 7
9th Edition : 2003 December 18
10th Edition : 2004 January 19
11th Edition : 2004 February 10
15th Edition : 2004 October 22
16th Edition : 2005 March 18
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
• Windows 2000 / XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.
1 Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.
Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
2 your PC.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

1
For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or
change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.

2
Installation Destination Folder
3
Click [Next] button.
Program Folder
4
Click [Next] button.
Page 4
Copying...
5
The installation is completed.

6
Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to
restart your PC.
2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware
1 Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service
Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed
automatically.
Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service
Manual.
Searching...
2
Installing driver...
When the install screen disappears, the

3 installation of the Firmware Update (USB)
Driver is completed.
Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation
3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1
4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the
Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5
2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
4.
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.
Page 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
1 cable or USB cable.
Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Please close the all applications that are
2 currently running. Status Monitor Port Controller
Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or
Port Controller are closed. If they are
running, right click on the icons in the system
tray and select Exit/End.
Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using
Network Firmware Update Tool, the
authority more than a Power User is
required.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on
3 the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut
icon to start the Panasonic Firmware
Programming Wizard.
Click [Next>].
Note: Please close all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor
and/or Port Controller are closed. If
they are running, right click on the icons
in the system tray and select Exit/End.
Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

4 Parallel.
Click [Next>].
Note: The “Firmware Update Driver (USB)” is

only displayed if you installed it with the
unit Plug and Play.
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File by the

5 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 5a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 5b1
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select an Independent File
--> Step 5c1
the local \Data folder, you can select an
independent file here.
When updating multiple firmware files, you
must repeat the file selection operation.
5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe
5a3 Extracting...
Page 9
5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10
5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327
5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11
5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 12
5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click
[Browse...] button.
5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 13
The selected Firmware Code File(s) are

6 indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need
to transfer a file.
On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.
Click [Next>].
The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

7
When there is more than one file to be
updated, the operation will be the following;
For USB connected unit:

they are transferred in turn automatically if the
unit is ready to receive the next firmware code
file.
Note: If you are updating the
DP-2310/3010, the sending of
sequential multiple files to the unit
isn't done automatically. The
"Waiting..." display on the PC will not
advance to "Executing..." until you set
the unit back to USB Firmware
Update on the machine to start
receiving the next file. See Unit
information of the Firmware
Update Mode on the next page.
For Parallel connected unit:
the confirmation screen is displayed when the
current firmware code file transfer is finished
and there are remaining firmware code files.
Click [OK] when the machine is ready to
receive the next file.
Page 14
Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:

For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to
USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the
firmware update.
When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return
to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the
PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code
file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.
For USB Connected Unit (Other models):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the
firmware update automatically.
When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and
return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The
display returns to “Update in Progress”) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware
code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.
For Parallel Connected Unit:
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite
of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service
Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
When the transfers of all the firmware files are

8 finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.
Note: For USB Connected Unit only.

When the unit returns to standby, Plug
and Play of the printer will popup.
Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug
and Play window.
Page 15
DZZSM00298

DP c262 SM

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DP c262 SM

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Order Number: MGCS050101C0

Digital Imaging Systems

© 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

Distinction of PbF PCB:

Specifications Table .............................. 12 Service Modes ..................................... 241

1.7. Fans........................................................41 6.3. Printer Mechanism ............................... 338

1.8. Motors.....................................................41 6.4. Printing Process ................................... 344

1.9. Sensors...................................................42 6.5. Glossary of Electrical

8.15. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Options .................................. 515

General Network Information ............. 457

Schematic Diagram ............................. 513

Q SD Memory Card Formatting Structure and Partitioning by Function

SD Memory Card Formatting Structure

Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

Paper Transport Main Memory Page Memory Hard Disk Drive

EC PC Board Automatic Duplex Unit

Tray 2 (550 Sheet Paper)

System Console 1 (550 Sheet Paper x 1)

System Console 2 (550 Sheet Paper x 2)

1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Page Memory

(For USA Only)

Manufacturer's Name and Address Factory ID

32.52 in (826 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

For USA, Canada and Europe For Other Destinations

10.51 in (267 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325)

26.38 in (670 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

Main Unit + Exit Tray (Outer)

3.94 in (100 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

59.44 in (1510 mm)

Main Unit + 1 Bin Finisher

(656 mm) (291 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

69.86 in (1776 mm)

Main Unit + 1 Bin Saddle Finisher

11.81 in 29.53 in 25.83 in 11.45 in

3.94 in (100 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

86.48 in (2197 mm)

Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

Paper Transport Unit Fuser Motor

Lift Motor (Tray 2)

Fuser Pressure Release Sensor 2

Thermistor (HR2) Thermistor (PR)

MOTDRV PCB PNL4 PCB

NFL PCB PCL PCB